《梵网经》的义注巴利
1. Brahmajālasuttavaṇṇanā
关于游方者议论的注释巴利
Paribbājakakathāvaṇṇanā
这样展示了第一次大结集之后,现在为了以总结的方式说明它在这里被展示的目的,就说了“imissā”等话。巴利
Evaṃ paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassetvā yadatthaṃ sā idha dassitā, idāni taṃ nigamanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘imissā’’tiādimāha.
1 到这里,已经用共通的方式说明了《梵网经》的外缘起;现在为了注释它的内缘起,所以说了“tattha eva”(就在那里)等话。或者也可以这样说:应当从六个方面来注释,也就是从联系、从词、从词类、从词义、从审察、从避免过失。其中,“联系”指的是教法的联系,也就是世间人所说的“引出主题”。而这种联系应当依据经中的缘起部分来理解,缘起部分的联系又要依据结集来理解。由于在展示第一次大结集时,已经说明了缘起部分的联系,所以现在从词等方面开始注释,因此说了“evaṃ(如此)是一个不变词”等话。在“me等词”这里,像antarā(中间)、ca(和)这些词是否要说明为不变词呢?不必说,因为通过前面的举例方式已经把它们包括进去了,其余像ā、pati等词则由ādi(等)这个词涵盖。“词类”指的是词与词之间的差别,而不是词的分解。或者也可以说,词和词类合在一起称为padavibhāga;又或者,词的分解和词类也通过省略的方式被称为padavibhāga。其中,词的分解应当在“bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho”(比丘众)等各类情形中去理解。巴利
1. Ettāvatā ca brahmajālassa sādhāraṇato bāhiranidānaṃ dassetvā idāni abbhantaranidānaṃ saṃvaṇṇetuṃ ‘‘tattha eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā chahi ākārehi saṃvaṇṇanā kātabbā sambandhato padato padavibhāgato padatthato anuyogato parihārato cāti. Tattha sambandho nāma desanāsambandho. Yaṃ lokiyā ‘‘ummugghāto’’ti vadanti. So pana pāḷiyā nidānapāḷivasena, nidānapāḷiyā pana saṅgītivasena veditabboti paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassentena nidānapāḷiyā sambandhassa dassitattā padādivasena saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karonto ‘‘evanti nipātapada’’ntiādimāha. ‘‘Metiādīnī’’ti ettha antarā-sadda-ca-saddānaṃ nipātapadabhāvo, vattabbo, na vā vattabbo tesaṃ nayaggahaṇena gahitattā, tadavasiṭṭhānaṃ āpaṭi-saddānaṃ ādi-saddena saṅgaṇhanato. ‘‘Padavibhāgo’’ti padānaṃ viseso, na pana padaviggaho. Atha vā padāni ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgo, padaviggaho ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgoti vā ekasesavasena padapadaviggahāpi padavibhāga saddena vuttāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha padaviggaho ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho’’tiādibhedesu padesu daṭṭhabbo.
“Atthato”是从词义上说的。接着,在按词义逐项解释时,先说明“evaṃ”这个词,所以说了“先说 evaṃ 这个词”等话。这里“决定”等词中的“等”字,应当理解为包含了“此问”“量”等含义。比如在“evaṃgatāni、evaṃvidho、evamākāro”这些说法里,“evaṃ”这个词就是用在“idaṃ”(此)的意思上。因为“gata”(去)是“方式”的同义词,“vidha”(种类)和“ākāra”(行相)也是一样。世间人也确实把和“方式”搭配的“gata”用在方式的意义上。而在“Evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho”以及“evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassu, āmuttamālābharaṇā odātavatthavasanā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārenti, seyyathāpi tvaṃ etarahi sācariyako ti? No hidaṃ bho gotamā”这类句子里,则是用在询问上。在“evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, evaṃ āyupariyanto”这类句子里,则是用在度量上。那么,在“evaṃ nu kho, evaṃ su te, evaṃ āyupariyanto”这些地方,既然“evaṃ”这个词表达的是询问的方式和限量的方式,难道“evaṃ”这个词本身就是“方式”的意思吗?不是,因为这里还有特别的含义。这里所说的“方式义”,指的是只表达“方式”本身。就像在“evaṃ byākho”这类说法里,它并不是在表达某种特别的方式,而是这样做了之后,在“evaṃ jātena maccenā”这类譬喻等处的例子才成立。比如“yathāpi…… bahuṃ”这里,从花堆的比喻来看,人的投生有善人、善知识、听闻正法、如理作意、受用圆满等布施等福业之因的集合,又具备光泽、芳香等功德,就像花环一样;众多的福业应当由必死的众生去做,因此这里是以花堆和花环作为比喻。这些比喻的方式,是由“yathā”这个词不确定地说出来的,所以“evaṃ”这个词应当说是用来归结比喻方式的。而那个被确定下来的比喻方式,从意义上说就是比喻本身,因此说“用在比喻中”。巴利
Atthatoti padatthato. Taṃ pana padatthaṃ atthuddhārakkamena paṭhamaṃ evaṃ-saddassa dassento ‘‘evaṃsaddo tāvā’’tiādimāha. Avadhāraṇādīti ettha ādi-saddena idamatthapucchāparimāṇādiatthānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi ‘‘evaṃgatāni, evaṃvidho, evamākāro’’tiādīsu idaṃ-saddassa atthe evaṃ-saddo. Gata-saddo hi pakārapariyāyo, tathā vidhākāra-saddā ca. Tathā hi vidhayuttagata-sadde lokiyā pakāratthe vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kiṃ nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti, ‘‘evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassu, āmuttamālābharaṇā odātavatthavasanā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārenti, seyyathāpi tvaṃ etarahi sācariyakoti? No hidaṃ bho gotamā’’ti ca ādīsu pucchāyaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, evaṃ āyupariyanto’’ti ca ādīsu parimāṇe. Nanu ca ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, evaṃ su te, evaṃ āyupariyanto’’ti ettha evaṃ-saddena pucchanākāraparimāṇākārānaṃ vuttattā ākārattho eva evaṃ-saddo ti? Na, visesasabbhāvato. Ākāramattavācako hettha ākāratthoti adhippeto, yathā ‘‘evaṃ byākhotiādīsu pana na ākāravisesavācako evañca katvā ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccenā’’tiādīni upamādīsu udāharaṇāni upapannāni honti. Tathā hi ‘‘yathāpi…pe… bahu’’nti? Ettha puppharāsiṭṭhāniyato manussupapattisappurisūpanissayasaddhammasavanayonisomanasikārabhogasampattiādidānādipuññakiriyāhetusamudāyato sobhāsugandhatādiguṇayogato mālāguṇasadisiyo pahūtā puññakiriyā maritabbasabhāvatāya maccena sattena kattabbāti joditattā puppharāsimālāguṇāva upamā, tesaṃ upamākāro yathā-saddena aniyamato vuttoti evaṃ-saddo upamākāranigamanatthoti vattuṃ yuttaṃ. So pana upamākāro niyamiyamāno atthato upamāva hotīti āha ‘‘upamāyaṃ āgato’’ti.
同样,在“应当前进”等教导方式所教导的、与沙门身份相称的威仪成就中,那里教导的方式,从意义上说就是教诫,所以说“如此……(中略)……于教诫”。同样,在“世尊正是如此,善逝正是如此”这句里,那些如实了知世尊所说义理而不颠倒的人,以各种方式称扬、赞叹其中存在的功德,使心踊跃,这就是随喜;这里应当理解为随喜的方式。在“这人正是如此”这句里,则应当理解为谴责的方式。而这种谴责的方式,由于紧接着出现“贱种”等辱骂之语,可以知道它正是由这里的“如此”一词所显示的。正如在这里一样,譬喻等方式也应当看作是由于紧接着出现“花堆”等以譬喻形式说出的词句。在“你应当这样说”里,“如我所说,你应当这样对沙门阿难说”这种说话方式,现在由“如此”一词指示出来,所以说它是指示义。在“对我们而言是这样”里也是如此:对于那些前面所说的法会带来不利和苦,为了让人产生断定,便以征询同意的方式问“它们会导致,还是不会?这里对我们而言是怎么回事?”回答“这里对我们而言是这样”时,这种断定方式就是由“如此”一词表明的。而当那些法导致不利、导致苦这种方式被确定下来时,它就成了决定义,因此说“在‘这里对我们而言是这样’等中,是决定义”。至于“是这样,尊者”,则是比丘们好好听闻、如理作意之后,以承认自己安住于那种状态的方式说出的,所以这里的“如此”一词表示接受话语,因此说“是这样,尊者;善哉,尊者;太好了,尊者”。巴利
Tathā evaṃ iminā ākārena ‘‘abhikkamitabba’’ntiādinā upadisiyamānāya samaṇasāruppāya ākappasampattiyā yo tattha upadisanākāro, so atthato upadesoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ te…pe… upadese’’ti. Tathā evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatāti ettha ca bhagavatā yathāvuttamatthaṃ aviparītato jānantehi kataṃ tattha saṃvijjamānaguṇānaṃ pakārehi haṃsanaṃ udaggatākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsanaṃ, yo tattha sampahaṃsanākāroti yojetabbaṃ. Evamevaṃ panāyanti ettha garahaṇākāroti yojetabbaṃ. So ca garahaṇākāro ‘‘vasalī’’tiādi khuṃsanasaddasannidhānato idha evaṃ-saddena pakāsitoti viññāyati. Yathā cettha, evaṃ upamākārādayopi upamādivasena vuttānaṃ puppharāsiādisaddānaṃ sannidhānatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evañca vadehīti ‘‘yathāhaṃ vadāmi, evaṃ samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ vadehī’’ti vadanākāro idāni vattabbo evaṃ-saddena nidassīyatīti nidassanattho vutto. Evaṃ noti etthāpi tesaṃ yathāvuttadhammānaṃ ahitadukkhāvahabhāve sanniṭṭhānajananatthaṃ anumatiggahaṇavasena ‘‘saṃvattanti, no vā, kathaṃ vā ettha hotī’’ti pucchāya katāya ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotī’’ti vuttattā tadākārasanniṭṭhānaṃ evaṃ-saddena vibhāvitanti viññāyati, so pana tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanākāro niyamiyamāno avadhāraṇattho hotīti āha ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotīti ādīsu avadhāraṇe’’ti. Evaṃ bhanteti pana dhammassa sādhukaṃ savanamanasikāre sanniyojitehi bhikkhūhi attano tattha ṭhitabhāvassa paṭijānanavasena vuttattā ettha evaṃ-saddo vacanasampaṭicchanattho vutto, tena evaṃ bhante, sādhu bhante, suṭṭhu bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti.
“于种种理趣精微”的意思是:所谓“理趣”,是指“单一与杂多”“无行”“如是法性”等,或者是指“喜旋”“三莲花”“狮子嬉戏”“钩状”“平视”等种种门径。这些理趣按所依等的差别而各不相同,所以叫“种种理趣”;或者,理趣就是圣典的表述方式,它们按施设与随施设、属于杂染分、属于世间、此二者混合、善等、蕴等、包含、时解脱、安立、善根、三集论等而有多种,所以叫“种种理趣”。依这些种种理趣而精微、细密、深妙,所以说“于种种理趣精微”。“源自种种心志向”的意思是:“āsaya”就是“ajjhāsaya”,即内心的意向。这些意向按常见等差别而有多种,在其中又按尘垢少等而有多类。或者,自己内心的意向等正是此经的生起因、起源之因,所以叫“源自种种心志向”。“义理与文句圆满”的意思是:义理和文句完全圆满,没有需要补充的地方。或者也可以说,是具足了六种义理之句——宣说、阐明、开显、分别、显了、施设;以及六种文句——字母、词、文、行相、语义解说、解释。巴利
Nānānayanipuṇanti ekattanānattaabyāpāraevaṃdhammatāsaṅkhātā, nandiyāvaṭṭa tipukkhalasīhavikkīḷitaaṅkusadisālocanasaṅkhātā vā ādhārādibhedavasena nānāvidhā nayā nānānayā, nayā vā pāḷigatiyo, tā ca paññattianupaññattiādivasena saṃkilebhāgiyādilokiyāditadubhayavomissatādivasena kusalādivasena khandhādivasena saṅgahādivasena samayavimuttādivasena ṭhapanādivasena kusalamūlādivasena tikapaṭṭhānādivasena ca nānappakārāti nānānayā, tehi nipuṇaṃ saṇhasukhumanti nānānayanipuṇaṃ. Āsayova ajjhāsayo, te ca sassatādibhedena, tattha ca apparajakkhatādivasena anekā, attajjhāsayādayo eva vā samuṭṭhānaṃ uppattihetu etassāti anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthabyañjanasampannanti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇaṃ upanetabbābhāvato, saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatanti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
关于“种种神变”这句话,对于“神变”这个词的含义,有人解释说:“因为能去除对立面,能清除贪等烦恼,所以叫神变。”可是,世尊并没有需要清除的贪等对立面。即使是凡夫,在远离了杂染、具足八种功德的定心中,当对立面已被镇伏时,神通神变也能生起。所以,不能按照那种世间惯用的说法,在这里直接称之为“神变”。如果说,大悲世尊所教化的众生有烦恼作为对立面,为了去除这些烦恼而说“神变”,这样才说得通。或者,世尊和教法的对立面是外道,因为驱除了他们,所以叫神变。因为那些外道通过神通、示心、教诫这三种方式,在破除邪见、使他们无法显露自己见解的情况下,被驱除、被清除了。“Paṭi”这个词,就像在“在他进去之后,另一个婆罗门来了”这类句子中一样,表示“之后”的意思。所以,在已得定、已离杂染的心中,由已经完成作用的心之后生起、引发的,就叫神变。或者,自己的杂染被第四禅和圣道去除之后,再去做去除他人杂染的事,就叫神变。神通、示心、教诫这三种,在远离杂染、已完成作用之后,为了众生的利益再次生起,而当自己的杂染已被去除时,它们就成了去除其他众生杂染的手段,所以是神变。神变本身就是“pāṭihāriya”。或者,在神变——也就是神通、示心、教诫这个集合中——存在的每一种,都叫“神变”。或者,神变就是第四禅和圣道,因为它们能去除对立面;从那里生起的,或者以那里为因的,或者从那里来的,就叫神变。而它又按神通等的类别、按对象的类别而多种多样,因为世尊的教说中可以获得这些,所以说“种种神变”。巴利
Vividhapāṭihāriyanti ettha pāṭihāriyapadassa vacanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭipakkhaharaṇato rāgādikilesāpanayanato pāṭihāriya’’nti vadanti. Bhagavato pana paṭipakkhā rāgādayo na santi, ye haritabbā. Puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ pavattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇato ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ca sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena, diṭṭhippakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā hontīti. ‘‘Paṭī’’ti vā ayaṃ saddo ‘‘pacchā’’ti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu viya, tasmā samāhite citte, vigatūpakkilese ca katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti paṭihāriyaṃ, attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ paṭihāriyaṃ. Iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo ca vigatūpakkilesena, katakiccena ca sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upakkilesesu parasattānaṃ upakkilesaharaṇāni hontīti paṭihāriyāni bhavanti. Paṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ. Paṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanīsamudāye bhavaṃ ekekaṃ ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vuccati. Paṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato, tattha jātaṃ, tasmiṃ vā nimittabhūte, tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyaṃ. Tassa pana iddhiādibhedena visayabhedena ca bahuvidhassa bhagavato desanāya labbhamānattā āha ‘‘vividhapāṭihāriya’’nti.
“并非以别的方式”的意思是:并非不同于在世尊面前亲闻的方式,而不是说并非不同于世尊开示的方式。因为世尊的开示确实具有不可思议的威力。这样理解之后,“谁有能力以一切方式了知”这句话就站得住脚。而且,这跟显示忆持力的说法也不矛盾,因为这里指的是不偏离亲闻的方式。这里也不是说两种含义不同就必须舍弃其中一种,因为两种含义所缘的是同一个对象;否则的话,长老对于世尊的开示,就会变成既能完全领受、又不能完全领受了。巴利
Na aññathāti bhagavato sammukhā sutākārato na aññathāti attho, na pana bhagavato desitākārato. Acinteyyānubhāvā hi bhagavato desanā. Evañca katvā ‘‘sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātu’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti. Dhāraṇabaladassanañca na virujjhati sutākārāvirajjhanassa adhippetattā. Na hettha atthantaratāparihāro dvinnampi atthānaṃ ekavisayattā, itarathā thero bhagavato desanāya sabbathā paṭiggahaṇe samattho asamattho cāti āpajjeyyāti.
有人这样说:“凡不是他人的,那就是我。”按照这种说法,它是在被称为自身内在的相续中发生的。因此,虽然“me”这个词在三种情况下看起来只表示一种含义,但根据具格、与格、属格的不同表述方式,确实存在差别。正是针对这一点,论师说:“me这个词出现在三种含义中。”巴利
‘‘Yo paro na hoti, so attā’’ti evaṃ vuttāya niyakajjhattasaṅkhātāya sasantatiyaṃ vattanato tividhopi me-saddo kiñcāpi ekasmiṃyeva atthe dissati, karaṇasampadānasāminiddesavasena pana vijjamānabhedaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissatī’’ti.
即使前缀能区分动作的意义,但由于它有显示的作用,即使前缀存在,闻这个词本身仍然会表达各自的意思。为了说明在解释没有前缀的闻这个词的含义时,引用有前缀的用法并不矛盾,所以说了有前缀的和没有前缀的这句话。其中的assa指的就是闻这个词。在这里,闻这个词可以具有业体成就的含义,所以说意思是已领受的或领受。当意思是“被我”的时候,也就是me这个词以作者义用具格来说明的时候;当意思是“我的”的时候,也就是以所属关系用属格来说明的时候。巴利
Kiñcāpi upasaggo kiriyaṃ viseseti, jotakabhāvato pana satipi tasmiṃ suta-saddo eva taṃ tamatthaṃ anuvadatīti anupasaggassa suta-saddassa atthuddhāre saupasaggassa gahaṇaṃ na virujjhatīti dassento ‘‘saupasaggo ca anupasaggo cā’’ti āha. Assāti suta-saddassa. Kammabhāvasādhanāni idha suta-sadde sambhavantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upadhāritanti vā upadhāraṇanti vā attho’’ti. Mayāti atthe satīti yadā mesaddassa kattuvasena karaṇaniddeso, tadāti attho. Mamāti atthe satīti yadā sambandhavasena sāminiddeso, tadā.
在与“闻”这个词相配合的“如是”一词,应当是用来显示听闻这个动作的,所以说“如是”是表示耳识等识的作用。这里的“等”字,应当理解为包括领受等五种门识,以及由它们所引生的意门识。由于一切语句都含有“唯有”的意思,所以“闻”这个词就可以得出“唯有闻”这个含义,因此说“由于遮止非闻的状态”,这就表明通过这种限定排除了非闻。再者,应当被限定为“唯有闻”的“闻”,才是正确的闻,所以说“显示无减、无增、无颠倒的把握”。或者,按照“词通过排除其他词的含义来表达自身意义”的道理,“闻”的意思就是“并非不闻”,这就是“由于遮止非闻的状态”,以此排除“见”等。这里说的是:这不是我所见,不是以独生智现证的,而是闻,并且是正确地闻。正因如此,才说“显示无减、无增、无颠倒的把握”。又或者,在依据限定义的“如是”一词来作义理连接时,与它相关的“闻”这个词的意义被说为“由于遮止非闻的状态”,因此也说“显示无减、无增、无颠倒的把握”。而这里的“听闻”一词,应理解为动作的对象,即“被听闻”。巴利
Sutasaddasannidhāne payuttena evaṃsaddena savanakiriyājotakena bhavitabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassana’’nti. Ādi-saddena sampaṭicchanādīnaṃ pañcadvārikaviññāṇānaṃ tadabhinihaṭānañca manodvārikaviññāṇānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sabbesampi vākyānaṃ evakāratthasahitattā ‘‘suta’’nti etassa sutaṃ evāti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti, etena avadhāraṇena nirākataṃ dasseti. Yathā ca sutaṃ sutaṃ evāti niyametabbaṃ, taṃ sammā sutaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘anūnādhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Atha vā ‘‘saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadatī’’ti sutanti asutaṃ na hotīti ayametassa atthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti, iminā diṭṭhādivinivattanaṃ karoti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. Na idaṃ mayā diṭṭhaṃ, na sayambhuñāṇena sacchikataṃ, atha kho sutaṃ, tañca kho sammadevāti. Tenevāha ‘‘anūnādhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Avadhāraṇatthe vā evaṃ-sadde ayaṃ atthayojanā karīyatīti tadapekkhassa suta-saddassa ayamattho vutto ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Teneva āha ‘‘anūnādhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Savanasaddo cettha kammattho veditabbo suyyatīti.
像这样,通过听闻的诸种原因、听闻者的听闻差别,按一种方式说明了这三个词的含义连接之后,现在为了用其他方式也说明它,就说了“同样地”等话。其中,“tassā”(那个的)指的是在世尊面前以闻法方式生起的意门识心路过程,就是那个的心路过程。因为它能够以种种方式在所缘上生起。也正因如此,才说“顺着耳门”。“以种种方式”,是指按即将说到的、把握种种音节与意义的多种方式;以此表明,在这个含义连接中,“如是”一词表达的是方式义。“显示生起状态”,是指显示生起的存在性。“闻”是法的显了,是因为在某个所缘上,上述那样的识路以种种方式生起,因此所缘被称为法,而并非“闻”这个词本身有“法”的含义。巴利
Evaṃ savanahetusuṇantapuggalasavanavisesavasena padattayassa ekena pakārena atthayojanaṃ dassetvā idāni pakārantarehipi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā eva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tassāti yā sā bhagavato sammukhā dhammassavanākārena pavattā manodvāraviññāṇavīthi, tassā. Sā hi nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattituṃ samatthā. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘sotadvārānusārenā’’ti. Nānappakārenāti vakkhamānānaṃ anekavihitānaṃ byañjanatthaggahaṇānānākārena, etena imissā yojanāya ākārattho evaṃ-saddo gahitoti dīpeti. Pavattibhāvappakāsananti pavattiyā atthibhāvappakāsanaṃ. ‘‘Sutanti dhammappakāsana’’nti yasmiṃ ārammaṇe vuttappakārā viññāṇavīthi nānappakārena pavattā, tassa dhammattā vuttaṃ, na sutasaddassa dhammatthattā. Vuttassevatthassa pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ ‘‘ayañhetthā’’tiādi. Tattha viññāṇavīthiyāti karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Mayāti katthuatthe.
说“如是”是为了显示应当被指示的内容,这是取了表示指示意义的“如是”一词来说的;因为所应指示的内容有时是应被指示的,有时不是,所以用“如是”这个词,就表示整部经都被回指到了。由于“闻”是表示动作的词,而听闻这个动作又和一般的识相续相关联,并且在这里有“补特伽罗”的说法,所以说“‘闻’是补特伽罗作用的显示”。因为离开了补特伽罗的称谓,在纯粹的法相续中,是找不到听闻这个动作的。巴利
‘‘Evanti niddisitabbappakāsana’’nti nidassanatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ nidassetabbassa niddisitabbattābhāvābhāvato, tena evaṃ-saddena sakalampi suttaṃ paccāmaṭṭhanti dasseti. Suta-saddassa kiriyāsaddattā, savanakiriyāya ca sādhāraṇaviññāṇappabandhapaṭibaddhattā tattha ca puggalavohāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘sutanti puggalakiccappakāsana’’nti. Na hi puggalavohārarahite dhammappabandhe savanakiriyā labbhatīti.
对于“心相续”等说法,也是取了表示方式的“如是”一词,为了说明与前一种义理连接不同的另一种义理连接而说的。其中,“方式施设”就是“依取施设”,这是依据诸法生起的方式而取著,才这样说的。“‘闻’是境的指示”,是说堪为所闻的法,是听闻动作的作者补特伽罗以听闻动作的方式生起时所依之处,因此这样说。虽然从究竟义上说,离开了心相续就没有任何作者,但依语言的惯用,通过智慧所安立的分别,把离于心相续者当作仿佛具有该法一样,而说“具有该法的那个心相续”。所闻的法作为听闻动作的境,从究竟义上说,能闻的心相续在这里就是作者;或者,正因为以闻为特质的心生起,听闻动作才存在,所以听闻动作的境也就是该动作的作者之境,因此说“‘具有该法者’的作者之境”。又因为长老正确确定了所闻的状态,所以说“把握与确定”;或者,应当这样理解:这是取了“如是”一词的决定意义之后,所作出的这一义理连接。巴利
‘‘Yassa cittasantānassā’’tiādipi ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā purimayojanāya aññathā atthayojanaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ākārapaññattīti upādāpaññatti eva, dhammānaṃ pavattiākārupādānavasena tathā vuttā. ‘‘Sutanti visayaniddeso’’ti sotabbabhūto dhammo savanakiriyākattupuggalassa savanakiriyāvasena pavattiṭṭhānanti katvā vuttaṃ. Cittasantānavinimuttassa paramatthato kassaci kattu abhāvepi saddavohārena buddhiparikappitabhedavacanicchāya cittasantānato aññaṃ viya taṃsamaṅgiṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgino’’ti. Savanakiriyāvisayopi sotabbadhammo savanakiriyāvasena pavattacittasantānassa idha paramatthato kattubhāvato, savanavasena cittappavattiyā eva vā savanakiriyābhāvato taṃkiriyākattu ca visayo hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃsamaṅgino kattu visaye’’ti. Sutākārassa ca therassa sammānicchitabhāvato āha ‘‘gahaṇasanniṭṭhāna’’nti, etena vā avadhāraṇatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā ayaṃ atthayojanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
对于先前已听闻的、种种不同的、被称为经的义理与文句,它们具有已被领受的形态。“如是”这个词的本性,正是显示、确定或阐明那种形态。因为对那种形态等的领受,是作为补特伽罗施设之所依的法相续的作用,所以说“‘如是’是补特伽罗作用的指示”。然而,即使是主张有补特伽罗的人,听闻的行为也不可能离开识而存在,因此特别来说,听闻是识的作用,所以说“‘闻’是识作用的指示”。又因为“我”这个词的生起,必定以有情为对象,而识的作用也正应归于此处,所以说“‘我’是兼具两种作用的补特伽罗的指示”。“如是”一词和“闻”一词的含义,分别具有非真实施设和真实施设的性质。为了显示它们以那种形态的施设为依据而执取的作用,而说“‘如是’是补特伽罗作用的指示,‘闻’是识作用的指示”。在这里应当看到,展示了四种义理连接:以作用、动作、作者、业的差别来说明的方式;以补特伽罗作用的境和补特伽罗作用的指示来说明的方式;以把握方式、能把握者、所把握境的差别来说明的方式;以及以作者、作用、作用的所依、作者的指示来说明的方式。巴利
Pubbe sutānaṃ nānāvihitānaṃ suttasaṅkhātānaṃ atthabyañjanānaṃ upadhāritarūpassa ākārassa nidassanassa avadhāraṇassa vā pakāsanasabhāvo evaṃ-saddoti tadākārādiupadhāraṇassa puggalapaññattiyā upādānabhūtadhammappabandhabyāpāratāya vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso’’ti. Savanakiriyā pana puggalavādinopi viññāṇanirapekkhā natthīti visesato viññāṇabyāpāroti āha ‘‘sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Meti saddappavattiyā ekanteneva sattavisayattā, viññāṇakiccassa ca tattheva samodahitabbato ‘‘meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ. Avijjamānapaññattivijjamānapaññattisabhāvā yathākkamaṃ evaṃ-sadda suta-saddānaṃ atthāti te tathārūpapaññattiupādānabyāpārabhāvena dassento āha ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Ettha ca karaṇakiriyākattukammavisesappakāsanavasena puggalabyāpāvisayapuggalabyāpāranidassanavasena gahaṇākāragāhakatabbisayavisesaniddesavasena kattukaraṇa byāpārakattuniddesavasena ca dutiyādayo catasso atthayojanā dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
一切可以靠言语通达的义理,都必须通过施设才能进入;而一切施设又都包含在真实、存在等六种施设的分类里。所以,当要从这些施设中确定“如是”等施设的自性时,就说“如是以及我”等等。其中,被称为“如是”和“我”的义理,由于方式等以及诸法都无法被确切把握,所以属于非真实施设。因此说“从真实义、究竟义的角度来看,它们是非真实施设”。这里说的“从真实义、究竟义的角度”,就是从体性真实、义理最胜的角度。这话的意思是:不像幻象、阳焰那样体性不实,也不像传说等虽被世人信受却并非义理最胜,而是像色、声等词那样具有真实体性,或者像被损害等那样具有可经验到的真实体性,这样的义理才称为“真实义、究竟义”;而“如是”“我”等词的义理并不是这样。为了让这个意思更加清楚,才说了“那么,这里那到底是什么呢”等等。至于“闻”,则是就声处而说为真实施设。正因如此,才说“因为那确实是在这里由耳所得到的”;如果说成“顺着耳门所得到的”,那么义理、文句等一切都能得到。依于这这那那而说,所以对于经由耳门而来的诸法,以忆持其方式等相状而说“如是”;依于自身相续所包含的诸蕴而说“我”。即使在缺乏见等自性的声处中,正在生起的“闻”的言说,也像“第二”“第三”等那样,是依于见、闻、觉知的第一等而说的,因此说“依于见等而可说”。所谓“非不闻”,就是指那被称为“闻”的义理。巴利
Sabbassāpi saddādhigamanīyassa atthassa paññattimukheneva paṭipajjitabbattā, sabbapaññattīnañca vijjamānādivasena chasu paññattibhedesu antogadhattā tesu ‘‘eva’’ntiādīnaṃ paññattīnaṃ sarūpaṃ niddhārento āha ‘‘evanti ca meti cā’’tiādi. Tattha evanti ca meti ca vuccamānassa atthassa ākārādino, dhammānañca asallakkhaṇabhāvato avijjamānapaññattibhāvoti āha ‘‘saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Tattha saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasenāti bhūtatthauttamatthavasena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hotiyo māyāmarīciādayo viya abhūtattho, anussavādīhi gahetabbo viya anuttamattho ca na hoti, so rūpasaddādisabhāvo ruppanānubhavanādisabhāvo vā attho ‘‘saccikaṭṭho, paramattha cā’’ti vuccati, na tathā evaṃ meti padānamatthoti, etamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘kiñhettha ta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sutanti pana saddāyatanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Teneva hi ‘‘yañhi tamettha sotena upaladdha’’nti vuttaṃ , ‘‘sotadvārānusārena upaladdha’’nti pana vutte atthabyañjanādisabbaṃ labbhati. Taṃ taṃ upādāya vattabbatoti sotapathaṃ āgate dhamme upādāya tesaṃ upadhāritākārādino paccāmasanavasena ‘‘eva’’nti, sasantatipariyāpanne khandhe upādāya ‘‘me’’ti vattabbattāti attho. Diṭṭhādisabhāvarahite saddāyatane pavattamānopi sutavohāro ‘‘dutiyaṃ tatiya’’ntiādiko viya paṭhamādīni diṭṭhamutaviññāte apekkhitvā pavattoti āha ‘‘diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato’’ti. Asutaṃ na hotīti hi ‘‘suta’’nti pakāsito yamatthoti.
长老以“evaṃ”一词,指出自己所通达的这部经的类别殊胜之处,因此说“它显示了不迷乱”。说“有能力通达种种不同的类别”,是为了显示接下来要讲的这部经类别多样且难以通达。因为所显示的是所闻之事的如实状态,所以说“它显示了对于所闻之事的不忘失”。“以不迷乱”的意思是:由于没有迷惑,或者说,正是通过听闻时生起的慧,而成就了听闻之后那一时刻的慧;在这里也同样应当这样理解“以不迷乱”。对于文句来说,所要通达的行相并不太深奥,在那里只需依所闻而持守,因此念的作用更为突出,而慧在其中则处于辅助地位,所以说“以慧为先导”等语,是就慧为先导而说的。此处“为先导”即是主导性,如“心为先导”等语中那样;或者,依“为先导”而言,如眼识等中作意等处于非主导地位那样,慧是它的先导,这个意思也成立。同样,在“以念为先导”这一说法中,也应依照所说的方式,按可能的情形理解其义。“义理与文句圆满”是指义理与文句都完备,或者,依开示、阐明、显示、分别、阐明、安立六种义理方面,以及依字母、词、文句、行相、语源、解释六种文句方面而具足,应当这样理解其义。巴利
Attanā paṭividdhā suttassa pakāravisesā ‘‘eva’’nti therena paccāmaṭṭhāti āha ‘‘asammohaṃ dīpetī’’ti. ‘‘Nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hotī’’ti etena vakkhamānassa suttassa nānappakārataṃ duppaṭivijjhatañca dasseti. ‘‘Sutassa asammosaṃ dīpetī’’ti sutākārassa yāthāvato dassiyamānattā vuttaṃ. Asammohenāti sammohābhāvena, paññāya eva vā savanakālasambhūtāya taduttarakālapaññāsiddhi, evaṃ asammosenāti etthāpi vattabbaṃ. Byañjanānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro nātigambhīro, yathāsutadhāraṇameva tattha karaṇīyanti satiyā byāpāro adhiko, paññā tattha guṇībhūtāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpubbaṅgamāyā’’tiādi paññāya pubbaṅgamāti katvā. Pubbaṅgamatā cettha padhānabhāvo ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā’’tiādīsu viya, pubbaṅgamatāya vā cakkhuviññāṇādīsu āvajjanādīnaṃ viya appadhānatte paññā pubbaṅgamā etissāti ayampi attho yujjati, evaṃ ‘‘satipubbaṅgamāyā’’ti etthāpi vuttanayānusārena yathāsambhavamattho veditabbo. Atthabyañjanasampannassāti atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇassa, saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatassāti vā attho daṭṭhabbo.
“它说明了如理作意”,这句话的意思是:用“如此”这个词所表达的方式指示和决定等含义,其对象是无颠倒的正法。说“它说明了不散乱”,是因为像“《梵网经》是在哪里说的”这类由论题本身引出的、即将要讲的经典,如果内心没有达到等持,就根本不可能听闻,所以才这样说。“因为心散乱的人……”等话,是为了证明这个道理而说的。所谓“一切圆满”,是指说法者、义理、文句、目的等方面的圆满。就像以无颠倒的正法为对象的“方式指示”和“决定”等含义能成就如理作意一样,也像通过听闻正法能成就不散乱一样,由作为果的如理作意,能成就正确的自我发愿和过去生所积的福德,因为它们与如理作意不可分离。同样地,由作为果的不散乱,也应当能说明作为其因的听闻正法和亲近善士的成就,因为没有听闻正法的人、不亲近善士的人,不可能有不散乱。巴利
Yonisomanasikāraṃ dīpetīti evaṃ-saddena vuccamānānaṃ ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthānaṃ aviparītasaddhammavisayattāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Avikkhepaṃ dīpetī’’ti ‘‘brahmajālaṃ kattha bhāsita’’ntiādi pucchāvasena pakaraṇappattassa vakkhamānassa suttassa savanaṃ samādhānamantarena na sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Vikkhittacittassā’’tiādi tassevatthassa samatthanavasena vuttaṃ. Sabbasampattiyāti atthabyañjanadesakapayojanādisampattiyā. Aviparītasaddhammavisayehi viya ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthehi yonisomanasikārassa, saddhammassavanena viya ca avikkhepassa yathā yonisomanasikārena phalabhūtena attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatānaṃ siddhi vuttā tadavinābhāvato, evaṃ avikkhepena phalabhūtena kāraṇabhūtānaṃ saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayānaṃ siddhi dassetabbā siyā assutavato, sappurisūpanissayarahitassa ca tadabhāvato.
不过,用“心散乱的人……”这类有说服力的话,是以不散乱作为原因,再加上亲近善士作为外缘,来说明作为结果的听闻正法能够成就。这里合理的意趣应该是:听闻正法和亲近善士并不完全是不散乱的直接原因,因为它们只是外在的辅助条件;而不散乱就像亲近善士一样,是听闻正法的直接原因。即使这样,用不散乱来说明亲近善士的成就,也还是成立的,因为心散乱的人本身就不具备亲近善士这件事。在这里应当看到两种说明方式:前一种是通过结果来说明原因的成立,就像看到河水涨满,就能推断上游下过雨;后一种是通过原因来说明结果的成立,就像看到必定带来降雨的浓云生起,就能推断即将下雨。巴利
‘‘Nahi vikkhittacitto’’tiādinā samatthanavacanena pana avikkhepena kāraṇabhūtena sappurisūpanissayena ca phalabhūtassa saddhammassavanassa siddhi dassitā. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo yutto siyāsaddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayā na ekantena avikkhepassa kāraṇaṃ bāhiraṅgattā, avikkhepo pana sappurisūpanissayo viya saddhammassavanassa ekantakāraṇanti. Evampi avikkhepena sappurisūpanissayasiddhijotanā na samatthitāva, no na samatthitā vikkhittacittānaṃ sappurisapayirupāsanābhāvassa atthasiddhattā. Ettha ca purimaṃ phalena kāraṇassa siddhidassanaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhisabbhāvassa, dutiyaṃ kāraṇena phalassa siddhidassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ekantena vassinā viya meghavuṭṭhānena vuṭṭhippavattiyā.
世尊言教的义理与文句分类差别,能够完整无遗地含摄整个教法的一切成就,这就是圆满成就一切众生利益的原因,所以这样说:“如此吉祥的方式。”因为不存在,所以有前后关联。所谓“后二轮的成就”,是指被称为正确的自我誓愿和往昔已作福德这两种功德。在这里,“轮”的意思是后后辗转地运转,或者说众生依靠这些轮而在各种生命形态中流转。针对这一点而说:“比丘们,有这四种轮,具足这些轮的天与人类,四轮便在其生命中运转。”这里的前后次序,应按照说法的次第来理解。由后二轮的成就,即后二轮的存在:一个拥有正确誓愿且往昔曾作福德的人,内心是清净的,因为能使心不清净的烦恼已被他远远舍离,所以说“内心的清净便得成就”。正如所说:“具足正确誓愿的心,由此变得更加殊胜。”又如说:“阿难!你已累积福德,应策励精进,不久将成为断尽诸漏者。”正因如此,才说“由内心清净,证悟与无碍解便得成就”。所谓由修行清净,是指以如理作意为先导的闻法修行,其心明净。因此也说“圣教与无碍解成就”。或者,由于一切身语修行无过失。身语修行清净的人,因为没有追悔,心不散乱,于圣教中得善巧。巴利
Bhagavato vacanassa atthabyañjanapabhedaparicchedavasena sakalasāsanasampattiogāhanākāro niravasesaparahitapāripūrikāraṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ bhaddako ākāro’’ti. Yasmā na hotīti sambandho. Pacchimacakkadvayasampattinti attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatāsaṅkhātaṃ guṇadvayaṃ. Aparāparaṃ vuttiyā cettha cakkabhāvo, caranti etehi sattā sampattibhavesūti vā. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cattārimāni bhikkhave cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattatī’’tiādi . Purimapacchimabhāvo cettha desanākkamavasena daṭṭhabbo. Pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyāti pacchimacakkadvayassa atthitāya. Sammāpaṇihitatto pubbe ca katapuñño suddhāsayo hoti tadasuddhihetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ dūrībhāvatoti āha ‘‘āsayasuddhi siddhā hotī’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sammāpaṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, seyyaso naṃ tato kare’’ti, ‘‘katapuññosi tvaṃ ānanda, padhānaṃ anuyuñja khippaṃ hohisi anāsavoti ca. Tenevāha ‘‘āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhī’’ti. Payogasuddhiyāti yonisomanasikārapubbaṅgamassa dhammassavanapayogassa visadabhāvena. Tathā cāha ‘‘āgamabyattisiddhī’’ti. Sabbassa vā kāyavacīpayogassa niddosabhāvena. Parisuddhakāyavacīpayogo hi vippaṭisārābhāvato avikkhittacitto pariyattiyaṃ visārado hotīti.
长老用“以种种通达的说明”等语句,在义理和文句两方面,说明“如是”一词和“闻”一词不会令人迷惑、不会令人忘失,并依四种无碍解来显示义理的连接。其中,“以说明所应闻的种种分类之通达”这一句,显示这个“闻”字因为与“如是”一词相邻,或者因为顾及下文,而以通称直接指向所应闻法的具体内容。对于依靠思惟、观见而获得的教法,随观并善巧通达,就特别系属于作意,所以把它们与能说明如理作意的“如是”一词连接起来;对于依靠听闻、受持、口诵而熟悉的教法,则特别系属于倾耳聆听,所以把它们与能说明不散乱的“闻”一词连接起来。这样显示之后,就能激发人们在听闻佛法上努力精进,以成就教法。这里的“法”是指教法。“以心反复观察”,是指用这样的方式用心省察:“这里讲了戒,这里讲了定,这里讲了慧,这里有若干内在脉络。”“以见解善巧通达”,是指以已成为审察认可之慧的见解,或者以称为了知遍知的见解,对处处所说的色法与无色法,以“这是色,色有这么多”等方式善加确定并通达。巴利
‘‘Nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakenā’’tiādinā atthabyañjanesu therassa evaṃ-sadda suta-saddānaṃ asammohāsammosadīpanato catupaṭisambhidāvasena atthayojanaṃ dasseti. Tattha ‘‘sotabbappabhedapaṭivedhadīpakenā’’ti etena ayaṃ suta-saddo evaṃ-saddasannidhānato, vakkhamānāpekkhāya vā sāmaññeneva sotabbadhammavisesaṃ āmasatīti dasseti. Manodiṭṭhikaraṇāpariyattidhammānaṃ anupekkhanasuppaṭivedhā visesato manasikārapaṭibaddhāti te vuttanayena yonisomanasikāradīpakena evaṃ-saddena yojetvā, savanadhāraṇavacīparicayā pariyattidhammānaṃ visesena sotāvadhānapaṭibaddhāti te avikkhepadīpakena suta-saddena yojetvā dassento sāsanasampattiyā dhammassavane ussāhaṃ janeti. Tattha dhammāti pariyattidhammā. Manasānupekkhitāti ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā, ettakā ettha anusandhiyo’’tiādinā nayena manasā anupekkhitā. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti nijjhānakkhantibhūtāya, ñātapariññāsaṅkhātāya vā diṭṭhiyā tattha tattha vuttarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā paṭividdhā.
“以完整的话语”这句话,是因为前面已经用三句分别各自关联而说的。“非善士地”是指不知恩,就像这样说的:“在这里,有一类恶比丘,学习了如来所宣说的法与律之后,却把它当成自己的东西。”这就是非圣者言说所依的基础。这个非圣者言说所依的基础,就是非法。难道阿难长老会有“这是我的教法”这种慢心吗?而大迦叶长老等人当时对他会有这样的怀疑吗?既然没有,那么说“超越了非善士地”等话,岂不是没有意义?并非如此。因为说“如是我闻”的时候,同时也表明了这个意思:我并没有那种慢心,也没有让人怀疑的地方。不过也有人这样说:“这是考虑到一些天神的内心想法而说的,所以这种对阿难长老的指责根本没有成立的余地。”据说,在那个时候,有一些天神心里生起了这样的念头:“如来已经寂灭了,而这位具寿善于说法,现在正在宣说法。他又是释迦族出身,是如来的堂弟。他到底是在宣说自己亲证的教法,还是按照从世尊那里听来的原话来宣说呢?”像这样,由于当时有这种怀疑的方式,所以说“超越非善士地”等话,就表明了已经超越了这些。“不把它当成自己的东西”,是指不把“这是我的”这种想法放在自己身上。“示现”,是指指示出来。“引导众生”,是指在现世利益、来世利益和究竟利益上,按照适当的方式引导众生,所以叫“引导”;这个法本身就是引导,所以叫“法引导”。巴利
‘‘Sakalena vacanenā’’ti pubbe tīhi padehi visuṃ visuṃ yojitattā vuttaṃ. Asappurisabhūminti akataññutaṃ ‘‘idhekacco pāpabhikkhu tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ anariyavohārāvatthaṃ. Sā eva anariyavohārāvatthā asaddhammo. Nanu ca ānandattherassa ‘‘mamedaṃ vacana’’nti adhimānassa, mahākassapattherādīnañca tadāsaṅkāya abhāvato asappurisabhūmisamatikkamādivacanaṃ niratthakaṃ ti? Nayidaṃ evaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vadantena ayampi attho vibhāvitoti dassanato. Keci pana ‘‘devatānaṃ parivitakkāpekkhaṃ tathāvacananti edisī codanā anavakāsā’’ti vadanti. Tasmiṃ kira khaṇe ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi ‘‘tathāgato ca parinibbuto, ayañca āyasmā desanākusalo, idāni dhammaṃ deseti, sakyakulappasuto tathāgatassa bhātā cūḷapituputto, kiṃ nu kho sayaṃ sacchikata dhammaṃ deseti, udāhu bhagavatoyeva vacanaṃ yathāsuta’’nti. Evaṃ tadāsaṅkitappakārato asappurisabhūmisamokkamādito atikkamādi vibhāvitanti. Attano adahantoti ‘‘mameta’’nti attani aṭṭhapento. Appetīti nidasseti. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthesu yathārahaṃ satte netīti netti, dhammoyeva netti dhammanetti.
疑和困惑是顽固扎根的。犹豫不是到处游移,只是心智上的分歧而已。它能摧毁不信,因为这是世尊所教导的,因为是从世尊面前亲自领受的,也因为不存在口误、恶说等过失。在这里要明白:前三层义理的搭配,是就那些还没涉及“方式”等特殊含义的“如此”一词来展示的;接下来的三层,则是纯粹就表达“方式”含义的“如此”一词来阐明的;而最后三层,则是依次就“方式”含义、“举例”含义和“决定”含义的“如此”一词来搭配的。巴利
Daḷhataraniviṭṭhā vicikicchā kaṅkhā. Nātisaṃsappanaṃ matibhedamattaṃ vimati. Assaddhiyaṃ vināseti bhagavato desitattā, sammukhā cassa paṭiggahitattā, khalitaduruttādiggahaṇadosābhāvato ca. Ettha ca paṭhamādayo tisso atthayojanā ākārādiatthesu aggahitavisesameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā dassitā, tato parā tisso ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vibhāvitā. Pacchimā pana tisso yathākkamaṃ ākāratthaṃ nidassanatthaṃ avadhāraṇatthañca evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā yojitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“一”这个词,出现在“其他”“最胜”“无伴”“数目”等意思里。比如在“我常住、世界常住,只有这是真的,其他都是虚妄”这类话里,它出现在“其他”的意思上;在“心一境性”这类话里,是“最胜”的意思;在“独自远离而住”这类话里,是“无伴”的意思;在“比丘们,只有一个刹那、一个时节,适合修梵行”这类话里,是“数目”的意思。这里也是“数目”的意思,所以论主说明这一点时说:“‘一’是计数差别的说明。”
“时”和“时节”,指的是适当的时间和诸缘的聚集。“刹那”指的是机会。像如来出世这类事,就是修道梵行的机会,因为它是获得那种条件的原因。刹那本身就是时节。被称为“刹那”和“时节”的那个东西,就是“一个”,这就是这里的意思。
“大集会”就是大聚集。“时节也是……”是说它也是圆满学处的原因。“论说时节的”指宣扬各种见解的人。因为坐在那里的外道们,各自宣扬自己的见解。
“义现观”指获得利益。“应被现观”就是现观;“现观义”就是……把逼迫等,以“应被现观”的方式归到一起而说。或者,现观就是通达,成为通达的对象状态,就叫“现观义”,那些内容正是这样以同一性来说的。其中,逼迫是苦谛,对具有它的人来说,是伤害、使人无法展开的状态。热恼是苦苦等意义上的灼热、烧恼。巴利
Eka-saddo aññaseṭṭhāsahāyasaṅkhyadīsu dissati. Tathāhesa ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca , idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu aññatthe dissati, ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu seṭṭhatthe, ‘‘eko vūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu asahāye, ‘‘ekova kho bhikkhave khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu saṅkhyayaṃ, idhāpi saṅkhyayanti dassento āha ‘‘ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso’’ti. Kālañca samayañcāti yuttakālañca paccayasāmaggiñca. Khaṇoti okāso. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayapaṭilābhahetuttā. Khaṇo eva ca samayo. Yo ‘‘khaṇo’’ti ca ‘‘samayo’’ti ca vuccati, so eko vāti hi attho. Mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Samayopi khoti sikkhāpadapūraṇassa hetupi. Samayappavādaketi diṭṭhippavādake. Tattha hi nisinnā titthiyā attano attano samayaṃ pavadantīti. Atthābhisamayāti hitapaṭilābhā. Abhisametabboti abhisamayo, abhisamayo atthoti abhisamayaṭṭhoti pīḷana ādīni abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvaṃ upanetvā vuttāni. Abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa visayabhūtabhāvo abhisamayaṭṭhoti tāneva tathā ekattena vuttāni. Tattha pīḷanaṃ dukkhasaccassa taṃ samaṅgīno hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Santāpodukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahaṇaṃ.
在这里,“samaya”指助缘很好地聚合、会合到一起,也就是集合。它指刹那,因为那时道与梵行在作为依止的人身上会合、聚集。它指时间,因为有情或自性法依它而与俱生法等会合,或依它而生起等。从究竟意义上说,时间并不真实存在,只是法的运转的所依;就像工具一样,人们只是以假立的名义来称呼它。它指聚集,因为诸部分平等地或共同运行、转起、安住,就像“集合”这个词。诸部分共同安住,就是聚集。它指因,因为其余诸缘和合时,果就从它生起、转起,就像“集起”这个词。它指见解,因为从结缚的性质来说有联结,有情依它而在自己的范围内转起;或者由于牢固执取,有情随各自的执著而依它转起。因为见结,有情被极度系缚。它指获得,因为是等至、会合、聚集。它指断除,因为是平等的乘、正确的乘,由此远离。“现观”是指以智慧面对而应达到、应现观的,也就是法的无颠倒自性。或者,以面向的方式正确地到来、前去、觉悟,所以“现观”就是对法如实的觉知。应当这样了知“samaya”一词在种种意义中的用法。在分析“samaya”一词的意义时,“abhisamaya”一词的例证,应当按上述方法了知。“assā”是“samaya”一词的。这里取“时间”这个意义,因为集合等意义在此处不可能,也因为像地方、处所、徒众等一样,时间作为经的缘起而应被指出。巴利
Tattha sahakārīkāraṇaṃ sannijjha sameti samavetīti samayo, samavāyo. Sameti samāgacchati maggabrahmacariyamettha tadādhārapuggalehīti samayo, khaṇo. Sameti ettha, etenava saṃgacchati satto, sabhāvadhammo vā sahajātādīhi, uppādādīhi vāti samayo, kālo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ, karaṇaṃ viya ca kappanāmattasiddhena rūpena voharīyatīti. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samayo, samūho, yathā ‘‘samudāyo’’ti. Avayavasahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūhoti. Avasesapaccayānaṃ samāgame eti phalaṃ etasmā uppajjati pavattati cāti samayo, hetu yathā ‘‘samudayo’’ti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggahaṇabhāvato vā saṃyuttā ayanti pavattanti sattā yathābhinivesaṃ etenāti samayo, diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhisaṃyojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhantīti. Samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo, paṭilābho. Samassa yānaṃ, sammā vā yānaṃ apagamoti samayo, pahānaṃ. Abhimukhaṃ ñāṇena etabbo abhisametabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparīto sabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samaya-saddassa pavatti veditabbā. Samaya-saddassa atthuddhāre abhisamaya-saddassa udāharaṇaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Assāti samaya-saddassa. Kālo attho samavāyādīnaṃ atthānaṃ idha asambhavato desadesakaparisānaṃ viya suttassa nidānabhāvena kālassa apadisitabbato ca.
那么,为什么这里只以不确定的方式指出时间,而没有按季节、年份等来限定呢?所以接着说“在这里,虽然……”等等。为了说明即使不按季节、年份等来限定,只说“samaya”这个词也能得到这样的好处,所以又说“或者这些……”等等。因为一个共通的说法本身就能涵盖具体的情况。
其中,“现法安乐时”是指每天以禅那等至度过的时间,特别是七个七天。“明显”是指在十千世界因震动、光明显现等而变得昭然显著。
为了用其他分类方式把上述各种时中的一部分归纳起来说明,所以接着说“还有这个……”等等。因为智的作用时和自利修行时就是正等觉时,圣默然时就是现法安乐时,悲的作用、利他修行、法谈时就是说法时。巴利
Kasmā panettha aniyāmitavaseneva kālo niddiṭṭho, na utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyametvāti āha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyamaṃ akatvā samaya-saddassa vacane ayampi guṇo laddho hotīti dassento ‘‘ye vā ime’’tiādimāha. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhatīti. Tattha diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo devasikaṃ jhānasamāpattīhi vītināmanakālo, visesato sattasattāhāni. Pakāsāti dasasahassilokadhātuyā pakampanaobhāsapātubhāvādīhi pākaṭā. Yathāvuttappabhedesuyeva samayesu ekadesaṃ pakārantarehi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yo cāya’’ntiādimāha. Tathā hi ñāṇakiccasamayo attahitapaṭipattisamayo ca abhisambodhisamayo. Ariyatuṇhibhāvasamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo. Karuṇākiccaparahitapaṭipattidhammikathāsamayo desanāsamayeva.
用“作格”作出的说明已经完成,它和前面“如”的内容是这样关联的:“在那里”是指在阿毗达摩和律藏中。“如此”是指通过地格和作格来表达。所依的含义,就是处格的含义。
所谓“有”,指的是作用;用另一种作用来说明作用的特征,就是“以有来说明有”的特征。
其中,就像时间虽然被自性法所限定,从究竟意义上说并不真实存在,却是以所依的方式被认知的——因为在那刹那生起的事物,在此之前和之后都不存在,比如“上午出生,傍晚离去”这类说法;又像集合虽然离开了各个组成部分并不真实存在,只是靠假立而成立,却以所依的方式被安立在各个组成部分上,比如“树上有枝条”“麦堆里长出来的”这类说法。这里也是如此。为了说明这一点,所以说“因为所依……法”。
在那个时间,或者在那堆法中,当欲界善心生起时,就在那个时间、那堆法中,触等也存在——这就是这里的含义。
又好比在挤牛奶时去了,挤完奶后回来,这是用挤奶的作用来说明去和来的作用;同样,这里说“在那个时节,在那个时节”时,这个含义自然就被理解了。因为词句的含义不可能脱离有情的活动,所以用有情的活动来说明时间的活动,也就是心的生起作用,以及触等的存在作用。“在那个时节”是指在第九刹那,或者在如理作意等因、诸缘和合之时,欲界善心生起;就在那同一刹那、同一因、同一缘和合时,触等也存在。这样,在两种情况下,“时节”一词都用了地格,以显示它作为特征之有的性质。为了说明这一点,所以说“刹那……被说明”。巴利
Karaṇavacanena niddeso kato yathāti sambandho. Tatthāti abhidhammavinayesu. Tathāti bhummakaraṇehi. Adhikaraṇattha ādhārattho. Bhāvo nāma kiriyā, kiriyāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ. Tattha yathā kālo sabhāvadhammaparicchinno sayaṃ paramatthato avijjamānopi ādhārabhāvena paññāto taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe parato ca abhāvato ‘‘pubbaṇhe jāto, sāyanhe gacchatī’’ti, ca ādīsu, samūho ca avayavavinimutto avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddho avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññāpīyati ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavarāsiyaṃ sambhūto’’tiādīsu, evaṃ idhāpīti dassento āha ‘‘adhikaraṇañhi…pe… dhammāna’’nti. Yasmiṃ kāle, dhammapuñje vā kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva kāle, dhammapuñje ca phassādayopi hontīti ayañhi tattha attho. Yathā ca gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgatoti dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evaṃ idhāpi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, tasmiṃ samaye’’ti ca vutte satīti ayamattho viññāyamāno eva hoti padatthassa sattāvirahābhavatoti samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā, phassādīnaṃ bhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyati. Yasmiṃ samayeti yasmiṃ navame khaṇe, yonisomanasikārādihetumhi, paccayasamavāye vā sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe, hetumhi, paccayasamavāye ca sati phassādayopi hontīti ubhayattha samaya-sadde bhummaniddeso kato lakkhaṇabhūtabhāvayuttoti dassento āha ‘‘khaṇa…pe… lakkhīyatī’’ti.
以食物而住、以诵习而住、以斧头砍、以锄头挖,在这些说法里,因义和工具义同样成立。因为世尊听闻有人违犯后,就召集比丘僧团,询问那位涉及此事的比丘,并加以呵责;然后不拖延到事情过去之后,而是在事发当时就制定学处。世尊这样安住,是期望着以制定学处为因,就像在第三波罗夷等处那样。巴利
Hetuatthokaraṇattho ca sambhavati ‘‘annena vasati, ajjhenena vasati, pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya. Vītikkamañhi sutvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthukaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā, vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ otiṇṇakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena sikkhāpadāni paññapento bhagavā viharati sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno tatiyapārājikādīsu viyāti.
从最初一开始直到说法结束,完全是以被称为利他行的悲愍住而安住。“为了显示那个意义”,就是为了显示绝对相续的意义。这里用了宾格来说明,就像“学习一个月”这种说法一样。巴利
Accantameva ārambhato paṭṭhāya yāva desanāniṭṭhānaṃ parahitapaṭipattisaṅkhātena karuṇāvihārena. Tadatthajotanatthanti accantasaṃyogatthajotanatthaṃ. Upayogavacananiddeso kato yathā ‘‘māsaṃ ajjhetī’’ti.
“古师们”是指注释师们。“只是名称上的差别”,是说区别仅仅在于用词。由此表明,在经和律中,已经区分了不同的格和时态。巴利
Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Abhilāpamattabhedoti vacanamattena viseso. Tena suttavinayesu vibhattibyatayo katoti dasseti.
“最胜”这个词,是表达“最胜”的说法,之所以称为“最胜”,是因为它与最胜的功德相伴。同样,“最上”在这里也是这样。“与恭敬相应”是指与尊重的状态相应,因为与可尊重的功德相合,或者因为值得受到恭敬对待,所以称为与恭敬相应。巴利
Seṭṭhanti seṭṭhavācakaṃ vacanaṃ seṭṭhanti vuttaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato. Tathā uttamanti etthāpi. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato, garukaraṇārahatāya vā gāravayutto.
已经说过的内容,在这里就不必再说了,因为这部分本来就是《清净道论》注释的一个组成部分,这就是这里的用意。巴利
Vuttoyeva na pana idha vattabbo visuddhimaggassa imissā aṭṭhakathāya ekadesabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
另外,对于“bhaga”一词,有“vani”的意思,或者说“vami”,所以称为“bhagavā”(世尊)。他在戒等功德中寻求、亲近、奉行,所以称为世尊;或者,他为了让这些功德在应受调伏者的心相续中生起——“怎样才能生起呢?”——而寻求、祈愿、盼望,所以称为世尊。又或者,他舍弃福分,也就是吉祥、自在、名誉,像吐掉痰块一样丢弃,所以称为世尊。确实,世尊对到手的好运、四洲的自在、转轮王的成就及其依止,以及七宝光辉的名声,都无所留恋地舍弃了。或者,“bhā”是指星宿,它们一同运行、转动,所以叫“bhagā”,也就是位于须弥山、持双山等处的器世间的庄严。世尊通过断除对它们的欲贪而舍弃它们,因此也是在福分中舍弃,所以称为世尊。巴利
Apica bhage vani, vamīti vā bhagavā, bhage sīlādiguṇe vani bhaji sevi, te vā vineyyasantānesu ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho uppajjeyyu’’nti vani yāci patthayīti bhagavā, bhagaṃ vā siriṃ, issariyaṃ, yasañca vami khelapiṇḍaṃ viya chaḍḍayīti bhagavā. Tathā hi bhagavā hatthagataṃ siriṃ, catuddīpissariyaṃ, cakkavattisampattisannissayañca sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasaṃ anapekkho pariccajīti. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā, sineruyugandharādigatā bhājanalokasobhā. Te bhagavā vami tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahatīti evampi bhage vamīti bhagavā.
“使法身成为现前可见”这句话,是因为有经文说“阿难,我为你们所宣说、所制定的法与律,在我去世后,就是你们的导师”,由此可见法具有导师的地位,所以才这样说。巴利
‘‘Dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karotī’’ti ‘‘yo vo ānanda mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti vacanato dhammassa satthubhāvapariyāyo vijjatīti katvā vuttaṃ.
他的身体像金刚杵聚合而成,因为别人无法破坏他的色身。确实,没有人能对世尊的色身造成任何障碍。这是为了说明说法的成就,因为用“如是”一词点出了即将宣说的整部经。也是为了说明声闻的成就,因为这句话表明:这是由已证得无碍解、被世尊在五个方面列为第一的我这位大声闻所听闻的;而且是我自己亲自听到的,不是靠传闻,不是辗转听来的。“世尊”一词连用时,其中的“时”字说明了那个时刻因佛陀出世而庄严,这是为了说明时节的成就。因为佛陀出世正是最殊胜的时节成就。因此这样说——巴利
Vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo parehi abhejjasarīrattā. Na hi bhagavato rūpakāye kenaci antarāyo sakkā kātunti. Desanāsampattiṃ niddisati vakkhamānassa sakalasuttassa ‘‘eva’’nti niddisanato. Sāvakasampattiṃ niddisati paṭisambhidāppattena pañcasu ṭhānesu bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitena mayā mahāsāvakena sutaṃ, tañca kho mayāva sutaṃ, na anussavitaṃ, na paramparābhatanti imassatthassa dīpanato. Kālasampattiṃ niddisati ‘‘bhagavā’’ti padassa sannidhāne payuttassa samaya-saddassa kālassa buddhuppādapaṭimaṇḍitabhāvadīpanato. Buddhuppādaparamā hi kālasampadā. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
在劫浊的斗诤时世,佛陀出世,啊,真是极为稀有;
生在祭火中间、从那里长出来的,是聚拢了蜜香的不死莲花。巴利
‘‘Kappakasāye kaliyuge, buddhuppādo aho mahacchariyaṃ; Hutāvahamajjhe jātaṃ, samuditamakarandamaravinda’’nti.
“世尊”这个称呼,是在说明说法者的圆满成就,因为这是对具备殊胜功德、最上之人的一种崇敬尊称。巴利
Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ niddisati guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagāravādhivacanato.
“闪电的间隙”是指在闪电闪现的那个刹那。“在心中”是指心脏那里。“中间”是指诸生成与成就之间的那段。“间隙”是指在空隙中。这里应当引用的,正是那些用在原因与原因之间的 antarā 一词,比如“那中间谁能知道”“这些劫之间”“从数目上无法计算”“怎样在中间投入”等语句中的用法,而不是用在心识刹那的空隙上的 antara 或 antarikā 一词。因为这是对 antarā 一词含义的提取。这里的意思可能是:凡是 antarā 一词所适用的含义,antara 一词也适用;因为两者意义相同,所以引用了用于 antarā 含义的 antara 一词。或者应当理解为,在“yassantarato”这一句中,antarā 只是为了诗句顺口而缩短了。再者,antarā 一词加上 ika 这个词缀,扩展成“antarikā”而说出,因此应当看出,这里所引用的和所举例的之间并不矛盾。如果不这样连接,就得不到业格;因为可能出现属格的情况,而由于与 antarā 一词结合,业格才是所需要的。所以他说:“因为与 antarā 一词结合,所以用了业格。”巴利
Vijjantarikāyāti vijjuniccharaṇakkhaṇe. Antaratoti hadaye. Antarāti ārabbha nipphattīnaṃ vemajjhe. Antarikāyāti antarāḷe. Ettha ca ‘‘tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya, etesaṃ antarā kappā, gaṇanāto asaṅkhiyā, antarantarā kathaṃ opātetī’’ti ca ādīsu viya kāraṇavemajjhesu vattamānā antarā-saddā eva udāharitabbā siyuṃ, na pana cittakhaṇavivaresu vattamānā antarantarikā-saddā. Antarā-saddassa hi ayaṃ atthuddhāroti. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo siyā – yesu atthesu antarā-saddo vattati, tesu antarasaddopi vattatīti samānatthattā antarā-saddatthe vattamāno antara-saddo udāhaṭo, antarā-saddo eva vā ‘‘yassantarato’’ti ettha gāthāsukhatthaṃ rassaṃ katvā vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Antarā-saddo eva pana ika-saddena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ‘‘antarikā’’ti vuttoti evamettha udāharaṇodāharitabbānaṃ virodhābhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanassa pasaṅge antarā-saddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Tenevāha ‘‘antarāsaddena yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kata’’nti.
比丘们,一个必定以正觉为归宿的人,不可能、绝无机会故意夺去众生的生命,因为经文说“这种事不存在”。由于见和戒具有决定性的本质,即使是入流者,也会因为见和戒的共同性而彼此结合,更何况一来者等更高的圣者。经文说“他安住于这样的见,与见相同的人共住;安住于这样的戒,与戒相同的人共住”,由此可见,即使是凡夫,也能因为见和戒的共同性而彼此结合。巴利
‘‘Niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo, aṭṭhānametaṃ bhikkhave anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo sañcicca pāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, ‘‘netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ tiādivacanato diṭṭhisīlānaṃ niyatasabhāvattā sotāpannāpi aññamaññaṃ diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatā, pageva sakadāgāmiādayo. ‘‘Tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti vacanato puthujjanānampi diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvo labbhatiyeva.
这里“须卑也”的“也”字是强调的意思,就像“听闻也”等说法里的用法一样。由此说明:他确实已经走上了长途旅程,途中没有任何障碍。这里的“那时”则是指时间,因为前面已经提到“一时”。也就是说,当世尊在从王舍城到那烂陀的长途路上行走时,就在那个时候,须卑也走上了那条路,说贬损的话,而梵授则说称赞的话。
“pariyāya”这个词:因为它回转、轮转,所以叫“往复”;又因为它使应当教导的义理得以成立,所以叫“教导”;又因为它执取自己的果而转起,所以叫“原因”。应当知道,“pariyāya”这个词在“往复”等义上的用法就是如此。
“以理由”是指以类似理由的东西。因为后面会说“把没有理由说成有理由”。
那么,为什么这里对“说贬损的话”“说称赞的话”用了现在时的表述呢?从结集的时候来看,他们说贬损和称赞的时间不是已经过去了吗?确实如此。应当知道,就像“已经走上长途旅程”中的“是”字一样,“说”字也应被视为具有过去时的意义。或者,是着眼于他们宣说贬损和称赞的那个时候,才这样说。这样理解之后,“这里的‘那时’则是指时间”这句话也就得到了成立。巴利
Suppiyopi khoti ettha kho-saddo avadhāraṇattho ‘‘assosi kho’’tiādīsu viya. Tena addhānamaggapaṭipanno ahosiyeva, nāssa maggapaṭipattiyā koci antarāyo ahosīti ayamattho dīpito hoti. Tatrāti vā kālassa paṭiniddeso. Sopi hi ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti pubbe adhikato. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā antarā rājagahañca nāḷandañca addhānamaggapaṭipanno, tasmiṃyeva samaye suppiyopi taṃ maggaṃ paṭipanno avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, brahmadatto ca vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti. Pariyāyati parivattatīti pariyāyo, vāro. Pariyāyeti desetabbamatthaṃ paṭipādetīti pariyāyo, desanā. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ pariggahetvā pavattatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇanti evaṃ pariyāya-saddassa vārādīsu pavatti veditabbā. Kāraṇenāti kāraṇapatirūpakena. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘akāraṇameva kāraṇanti vatvā’’ti. Kasmā panettha ‘‘avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti, ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti ca vattamānakālaniddeso kato, nanu saṅgītikālato so avaṇṇavaṇṇānaṃ bhāsitakālo atītoti? Saccametaṃ, ‘‘addhānamaggapaṭipanno hotī’’ti ettha hoti-saddo viya atītakālattho bhāsati-saddo ca daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā yasmiṃ kāle tehi avaṇṇo vaṇṇo ca bhāsīyati, taṃ apekkhitvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘tatrāti kālassa paṭiniddeso’’ti idañca vacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti.
“没有理由”就是不合理、站不住脚的意思。因为世尊身上确实不存在没有滋味、没有实质之类的缺点,法和僧也不存在被说成是讲错了、修错了这类问题。或者说,“没有理由”是指缺少正当的理由,只是空口声称而已——这是它的意思。在这个意义上,先说“理由”之后,就是说了“这是理由”之后的意思。在这里,对于“没有滋味”等过失来说,对高种姓和年长者不做问讯等应做的礼节,就是一种“理由”;同样,认识到不存在超越常人的法和殊胜的如实知见,对孙陀利迦的功德等过患的了知,承认轮回找不到起点,对无记事的解释等等,这些也都是“理由”。对于非一切知者等的渐次觉悟等,也应按照相应情况来确定。“以如此这般的方式”,就是指以不对高种姓和年长者问讯等方式。巴利
Akāraṇanti ayuttiṃ, anupapattinti attho. Na hi arasarūpatādayo dosā bhagavati saṃvijjanti, dhammasaṅghānañca durakkhātaduppaṭipannatādayoti. Akāraṇanti vā yuttakāraṇarahitaṃ, paṭiññāmattanti adhippāyo . Imasmiñca atthe kāraṇanti vatvāti kāraṇaṃ vāti vatvāti attho. Arasarūpādīnañcettha jātivuḍḍhesu abhivādanādisāmīcikammākaraṇaṃ kāraṇaṃ, tathā uttarimanussadhammālamariyañāṇadassanābhāvassa sundarikāmaguṇādinavabodho, saṃsārassa ādikoṭiyā apaññāyanapaṭiññā, abyākatavatthubyākaraṇanti evamādayo, tathā asabbaññutādīnaṃ kamāvabodhādayo yathārahaṃ niddhāretabbā. Tathā tathāti jātivuḍḍhānaṃ anabhivādanādiākārena.
说别人坏话,就是出于说坏话这个原因。这里“-māna”这个词尾是原因的意思。因为诽谤三宝是极其严重的罪过,他必将遭遇不幸和灾祸。所以这样说:巴利
Avaṇṇaṃ bhāsamānoti avaṇṇaṃbhāsanahetu. Hetuattho hi ayaṃ māna-saddo. Anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇissati ekantamahāsāvajjattā ratanattayopavādassa. Tenevāha –
谁去称赞一个该被谴责的人,
或者,有人谴责本该受称赞的人;
他用嘴巴挑拣出罪过,
因为那个罪过,他得不到快乐。巴利
‘‘Yo nindiyaṃ pasaṃsati, Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyo; Vicināti mukhena so kaliṃ, Kalinā tena sukhaṃ na vindatī’’ti.
他说“我们的老师”等话,显示出梵授心中生起了警策,也显示出他对自己的老师生起了悲悯。弟子本来应当随顺老师,但这个人因为生来就有智慧,所以在这些事情上并不随顺他。现在为了显示他那“业为自己所有”的智,便说了“然而,对于老师……”等话。他开始称赞,心想:“也许凭这一点对三宝的称赞,就能让他免于责难。”所称扬的就是“称赞”,也就是功德;宣说功德就是“称赞”,也就是赞美。“结缚”的意思是缠结、系缚。不能因为见解浅薄就指责他是说法者,因为佛陀等的功德无量,只有把全部圣典注释出来,才能完整阐明他们的功德。这里的“随闻”等词中,“等”字包含了相、遍寻、见、审察、忍这些意思。他是凭自己的能力在称赞,并不是依照佛陀等功德的实际情况来说的——这就是要点。因为佛陀等的功德不可计数、无量无边、种类繁多。确实这样说过:巴利
‘‘Amhākaṃ ācariyo’’tiādinā brahmadattassa saṃveguppattiṃ, attano ācariye kāruññappavattiñca dassetvā kiñcāpi antevāsinā ācariyassa anukūlena bhavitabbaṃ, ayaṃ pana paṇḍitajātikattā na edisesu taṃ anuvattatīti, idāni tassa kammassakataññāṇappavattiṃ dassento ‘‘ācariye kho panā’’tiādimāha. Vaṇṇaṃ bhāsituṃ āraddho ‘‘apināmāyaṃ ettakenāpi ratanattayāvaṇṇato orameyyā’’ti. Vaṇṇīyatīti vaṇṇo, guṇo. Vaṇṇanaṃ guṇasaṅkittananti vaṇṇo, pasaṃsā. Saṃññūḷhāti ganthitā, nibandhitāti attho. Atitthena pakkhando dhammakathikoti na vattabbo aparimāṇaguṇattā buddhādīnaṃ , niravasesānañca tesaṃ idha pakāsanaṃ pāḷisaṃvaṇṇanāyeva sampajjatīti. Anussavādīti ettha ādi-saddena ākāraparivitakkadiṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyo saṅgaṇhāti. Attano thāmena vaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, na pana buddhādīnaṃ guṇānurūpanti adhippāyo. Asaṅkhyayyāparimitappabhedā hi buddhādīnaṃ guṇā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
即使是佛陀,也会称赞佛陀的功德,
就算用别的方式说上一整劫,
就算经历漫长遥远的一大劫,劫本身也会耗尽。
如来的赞誉也不会穷尽。巴利
‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti.
在这里也会说到“但这确实只是些微之事”等等。巴利
Idhāpi vakkhati ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādi.
在“iti ha te”这个短语里,“iti”是用来回指前面所说的那种内容;“ha”只是一个语气助词,所以注释里说“evaṃ te”(就这样,他们)。巴利
Iti ha teti ettha itīti vuttappakāraparāmasanaṃ. Ha-kāro nipātamattanti āha ‘‘evaṃ te’’ti.
他们之所以成为随行者,是因为跟着世尊的举止行动,而不是因为跟着如法修行——这就是这段话的意思。“在那时”是指世尊踏上那段长途旅程的那一年、那一季、那一月或那半个月。“他”是指这样住在王舍城的世尊。“那一日”是指他踏上长途旅程的那一天。他走那段路,是希望在那烂陀为可度化的人带来种种利益和安乐,同时借着这个因缘,宣说《梵网经》——这部经以三种戒为庄严,摧破种种欺诈巧言等邪命,解开六十二邪见的罗网,震动一万个世界。说到这里,“世尊为什么踏上那段长途”这个疑问就解释清楚了。至于“须卑为什么成为随行者”,则通过“他不知道世尊已经走上那条路”这一点来解释。因为他并不是真想见到世尊。所以注中说:“如果他知道的话,就不会跟随了。”巴利
Iriyāpathānubandhanena anubandhā honti, na pana sammāpaṭipattianubandhanenāti adhippāyo. Tasmiṃ kāleti yasmiṃ saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe vā bhagavā taṃ addhānamaggaṃ paṭipanno, tasmiṃ kāle. Teneva hi kiriyāvicchedadassanavasena ‘‘rājagahe piṇḍāya caratī’’ti vattamānakālaniddeso kato. Soti evaṃ rājagahe vasamāno bhagavā. Taṃ divasanti yaṃ divasaṃ addhānamaggapaṭipanno, taṃ divasaṃ. Taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno nāḷandāyaṃ veneyyānaṃ vividha hitasukhanipphattiṃ ākaṅkhamāno imissā ca aṭṭhuppattiyā tividhasīlālaṅkataṃ nānāvidhakuhanalapanādimicchājīvaviddhaṃsanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhijālaviniveṭhanaṃ dasasahassilokadhātupakampanaṃ brahmajālasuttantaṃ desessāmīti. Ettāvatā ‘‘kasmā pana bhagavā taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno’’ti codanā visodhitā hoti. ‘‘Kasmā ca suppiyo anubandho’’ti ayaṃ pana codanā ‘‘bhagavato taṃ maggaṃ paṭipannabhāvaṃ ajānanto’’ti etena visodhitā hoti. Na hi so bhagavantaṃ daṭṭhumeva icchatīti. Tenevāha ‘‘sace pana jāneyya, nānubandheyyā’’ti.
按青、黄、红、白、深红和光辉这六种颜色来说,就是“六色光芒”。“周围各八十肘”这句话,是按这些光芒自然照射的范围来说的。“据说在那时”这句话,是为了显示世尊在长途行路时并没有隐藏自己的威光。因为那时并不像有人前来问讯等情形那样,没有任何需要隐藏佛光的理由。宝环,就是珠宝制成的头饰。中国粉,就是朱砂粉。巴利
Nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassaravasena ‘‘chabbaṇṇarasmiyo. ‘‘Samantā asītihatthappamāṇe’’ti tāsaṃ rasmīnaṃ pakatiyā pavattiṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kira samaye’’ti ca tasmiṃ addhānagamanasamaye buddhasiriyā anigūhitabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Na hi tadā tassā nigūhane pakkusātiabhigamanādīsu viya kiñcipi kāraṇaṃ atthīti. Ratanāveḷaṃ ratanavaṭaṃsakaṃ. Cīnapiṭṭhacuṇṇaṃ sindhanacuṇṇaṃ.
世尊身上有一丈光芒环绕,光彩夺目,这是他的相好之鬘;因为大人相彼此相连,所以这样说。有人设想:如果把三十二个月亮的光轮串起来摆成花鬘,那会怎样呢?于是就说“如同串好摆出的三十二个月亮花鬘”。意思是那光辉仿佛能压倒月的光彩。同样的道理也适用于“太阳花鬘”等说法。“大长老们”是指大弟子们。比丘们看见世尊这样行走,便回头看自己的随众,前后文是这样连接的。从“然而,由于这个女人……”开始,是在澄清“他为什么说三宝的坏话”这个责难。“iti”就是“如此”,指前面所说的那种方式。通过这两者,是以总结的方式显示利养和随从的减少。另一些人说:他们说坏话也说好话,是为了试探世尊有没有对立或偏袒。还有人说:“他们是被魔罗附体才这样做的。”巴利
Byāmappabhāparikkhepavilāsinī ca assa bhagavato lakkhaṇamālāti mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni aññamaññapaṭibaddhattā evamāha. Dvattiṃsāya candamaṇḍalānaṃ mālā kenaci ganthetvā ṭhapitā yadi siyāti parikappanavasenāha ‘‘ganthetvā ṭhapitadvattiṃsacandamālāyā’’ti. Siriṃ abhibhavantī ivāti sambandho. Esa nayo sūriyamālāyātiādīsupi. Mahātherāti mahāsāvake sandhāyāha. Evaṃ gacchantaṃ bhagavantaṃ bhikkhū ca disvā atha attano parisaṃ avalokesīti sambandho. ‘‘Yasmā panesā’’tiādinā ‘‘kasmā ca so ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti codanaṃ visodheti. Itīti evaṃ, vuttappakārenāti attho. Imehi dvīhīti lābhaparivārahāniṃ nigamanavasena dasseti. Bhagavato virodhānunayābhāvavīmaṃsanatthaṃ ete avaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇañca bhāsantīti apare. ‘‘Mārena anvāviṭṭhā evaṃ karontī’’ti ca vadanti.
2 这座园林因为离芒果苗圃不远,所以就叫“芒果苗圃”,就像把某个地方叫作“瓦鲁那城”或“高达村”一样。不过有些人说:“所谓芒果苗圃,按前面说的那样,本身就是一个村子。”按他们的理解,“在芒果苗圃”这个说法是表示“在附近”的处所格。那座王室建筑,有人说是多闻天王的天神殿。“有很多危难”意思是很多灾祸。锡兰的注疏里说:“和弟子婆罗门青年梵授一起。”但这只是随顺圣典的记载,因为当时须卑并不是没有自己的徒众。巴利
2. Ambalaṭṭhikāya avidūre bhavattā uyyānaṃ ambalaṭṭhikā yathā ‘‘varuṇānagaraṃ, godāgāmo’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikāti yathāvuttanayeneva ekagāmo’’ti vadanti . Tesaṃ mate ambalaṭṭhikāyanti samīpatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Rājāgārakaṃ vessavaṇamahārājadevāyatananti eke. Bahuparissayoti bahupaddavo. ‘‘Saddhiṃ antevāsinā brahmadattena māṇavenā’’ti vuttaṃ sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Tañca kho pāḷi āruḷhavaseneva, na pana tadā suppiyassa parisāya abhāvato. Kasmā panettha brahmadattoyeva pāḷi āruḷho, na suppiyassa parisāti? Payojanābhāvato. Yathā cetaṃ, evaṃ aññampi edisaṃ payojanābhāvato saṅgītikārehi na saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘vuttanti pāḷiyaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na yujjati pāḷiāruḷhavasena pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti āpajjanato. Tasmā yathāvuttanayenevettha attho gahetabbo. Parivāretvā nisinno hotīti sambandho.
3 关于“论法”:论法的本质就是谈论,有些人说论法是一种审察的方式。“理趣”(nayo)就是被引导出来的意义。随顺语言学的理趣,就叫“语言理趣”。因为在那种场合,需要一个不常用而令人惊奇的词。所以他说“犹如盲人登山”。意指奇特、值得赞叹的,就是“词源理趣”。然而,由于它来自古代注疏,所以他说“即注疏的理趣”。“这确实被很好地通达”这句是关联语。意思是:对于那件事,他能善加通达并宣说的程度有多少,就只有那么多,我们无法彻底通达或宣说它。因此他说:“以此显示,它虽被很好地通达,却是不可测量的。”巴利
3.Kathādhammoti kathāsabhāvo, kathādhammo upaparikkhāvidhīti keci. Nīyatīti nayo, attho. Saddasatthaṃ anugato nayo saddanayo. Tattha hi anabhiṇhavuttike acchariya-saddo icchito. Tenevāha ‘‘andhassa pabbatārohaṇaṃ viyā’’ti. Accharāyoggantiacchariyanti niruttinayo , so pana yasmā porāṇaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgato, tasmā āha ‘‘aṭṭhakathānayoti. Yāvañcidaṃ suppaṭividitāti sambandho, tassa yattakaṃ suṭṭhu paṭividitā, taṃ ettakanti na sakkā amhehi paṭivijjhituṃ, akkhātuṃ vāti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘tena suppaṭividitatāya appameyyataṃ dassetī’’ti.
在解释“明显状态”时说的“那个词”,是指与“世尊”等词以同位关系说到的那个已正觉状态——世尊正是凭这个已正觉的状态而成为明显的、众所周知的。为了连同达到它的修行道路一起显示这个含义,他说了“那位……已正觉”等话。虽然“智”和“见”这些词在这里都是“智慧”的同义词,但为了显示它们依各自不同的特点而在各自不同的境界上生起,他从不共智的不同、三明、明与神通智的障碍、一切知智与肉眼,以及通达智与教说智等角度,把这些词组合起来显示其含义,因此说了“那些、那些”等话。其中,以意向与随眠智了知众生的意向与随眠;以一切知无碍智彻见一切应知之法。巴利
Pakatatthapaṭiniddeso taṃ-saddoti tassa ‘‘bhagavatā’’tiādīhi padehi samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttassa yena abhisambuddhabhāvena bhagavā pakato supākaṭo ca hoti, taṃ abhisambuddhabhāvaṃ saddhiṃ āgamanapaṭipadāya atthabhāvena dassento ‘‘yo so…pe… abhisambuddho’’ti āha. Satipi ñāṇadassana-saddānaṃ idha paññāvevacanabhāve tena tena visesena nesaṃ savisayavisesappavattidassanatthaṃ asādhāraṇañāṇavisesavasena vijjattayavasena vijjābhiññānāvaraṇavasena sabbaññutaññāṇamaṃsacakkhuvasena paṭivedhadesanāñāṇavasena ca tadatthaṃ yojetvā dassento ‘‘tesaṃ tesa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha āsayānusayaṃ jānatāāsayānusayañāṇena. Sabbañeyyadhammaṃ passatā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇehi.
“宿住等”是指宿住随念智和漏尽智。“以通达慧”是指以圣道慧。“诸敌”是指烦恼之敌、五种魔,或者敌视教法的外道。所谓杀敌,就是用神通变化降伏他们,让他们无言以对,或者对他们置之不理。这里可以举《克制调伏经》作为例子。巴利
Pubbenivāsādīhīti pubbenivāsāsavakkhayañāṇehi. Paṭivedhapaññāyāti ariyamaggapaññāya. Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ, pañcavidhamārānaṃ vā, sāsanapaccatthikānaṃ vā aññatitthiyānaṃ, tesaṃ hananaṃ pāṭihāriyehi abhibhavanaṃ, appaṭibhānatākaraṇaṃ, ajjhupekkhanañca. Kesivinayasuttañcettha nidassanaṃ.
同样,因为了知处非处等,所以是“知者”;因为如实看见众生随业投生,所以是“见者”;因为连同习气在内的一切漏都已断尽,所以是“阿拉汉”;因为对应知等种种法,从应知等角度无颠倒地觉悟,所以是“正自觉者”。或者也可以这样理解:因为于三时中智慧无碍而了知,所以是“知者”;因为三种业都随智慧而转、审慎而行,所以是“见者”;因为断除了嬉笑等行为、具足断德成就,所以是“阿拉汉”;因为具足一切知智——它是欲等不退失之因,能成就无竭尽的辩才——所以是“正自觉者”。应当知道,这样也可以结合十力与十八不共佛法来配合理解。巴利
Tathā ṭhānāṭhānādīni jānatā, yathākammūpage satte passatā, savāsanānaṃ āsavānaṃ khīṇattā arahatā, abhiññeyyādibhede dhamme abhiññeyyādito aviparītāvabodhato sammāsambuddhena. Atha vā tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇatāya jānatā, tiṇṇampi kammānaṃ ñāṇānuparivattito nisammakāritāya passatā, davādīnampi abhāvasādhikāya pahānasampadāya arahatā, chandādīnaṃ ahānihetubhūtāya aparikkhayapaṭibhānasādhikāya sabbaññutāya sammāsambuddhenāti evaṃ dasabalaṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhammehipi yojanā veditabbā.
虽然在圣典里,意乐只按低劣和贤善分成两类,但按它生起的方式来看,其实可以分成很多种,所以说“种种意乐性”。而这种意乐就是意乐界,也就是以各种方式显现、接受和喜欢,所以说“种种意乐性……中略……种种好乐性”。这里说的“以知种种意乐性的智慧”,指的是全知智,不是十力智,所以说“以全知智”。在“iti ha me”这个说法里,“iti”是“如此”的意思,“ha”只是个虚词,而且发生了省略音;为了说明这一点,就说了“evaṃ ime”(如此,这些)。巴利
Yadipi hīnakalyāṇabhedena duvidhāva adhimutti pāḷiyaṃ vuttā, pavattiākāravasena pana anekabhedabhinnāti āha ‘‘nānādhimuttikatā’’ti. Sā pana adhimutti ajjhāsayadhātu, tadapi tathā tathā dassanaṃ khamanaṃ rocanañcāti āha ‘‘nānājjhāsayatā…pe… rucitā’’ti. Nānādhimuttikatañāṇenāti cettha sabbaññutañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, na dasabalañāṇanti āha ‘‘sabbaññutañāṇenā’’ti. Iti ha meti ettha evaṃ-saddattho iti-saddo, ha-kāro nipātamattaṃ saralopo ca katoti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ ime’’ti.
4 通过阿罗汉道彻底断除之后,在佛陀的教法中就被称为“没有挂虑的人”。他以果定度过时日,按照轮换住处的方式安住。“有时独自一人”等话,是显示世尊为了随顺各类应当调伏者的根机而前往亲近他们。佛陀落脚的时候,大地变得平坦,这是脚步平稳落地的等流果报,并不是神通变化所造。“右脚刚一放下”这句话,是因为诸佛一切时中都尊崇右方而说的。应当把前面所说的内容都归结到“安立于阿罗汉果”上来理解。巴利
4.Arahattamaggena samugghātaṃ kataṃ, yato ‘‘natthi abyāvaṭamano’’ti buddhadhammesu vuccati. Vītināmetvā phalasamāpattīhi. Nivāsetvā vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasena. ‘‘Kadāci ekako’’tiādi tesaṃ tesaṃ vineyyānaṃ vinayanānukūlaṃ bhagavato upasaṅkamadassanaṃ. Pādanikkhepasamaye bhūmiyā samabhāvāpatti suppatiṭṭhitapādatāya nissandaphalaṃ, na iddhinimmānaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhapitamatte dakkhiṇapāde’’ti buddhānaṃ sabbadakkhiṇatāya vuttaṃ. Arahatte patiṭṭhahantīti sambandho.
“难得的成就是”:即使已经得到人身,想要住在合适的地方、诸根不缺、获得信心等功德,也还是很难得——这就是它的意思。“四大王天的天宫”:意思是前往四大王天界中那些空着没人住的天宫。这个道理同样适用于三十三天等天界。“与时节相应”:意思是这个时候就该这样说,也就是与各个时节相合。“与时机相应”:这是同一个意思的另一种说法,或者指与具体发生的因缘相合。另一种解释是,“与时机相应”指带着理由和譬喻来说。世尊总是按时说法,而且说法有根有据。他的意思是:他只是把握时节而说法,并不是为了洗掉身上的尘垢,因为世尊的身体根本不会沾上任何尘垢。巴利
Dullabhā sampattīti satipi manussattapaṭilābhe patirūpadesavāsaindriyāvekallasaddhāpaṭilābhādayo guṇā dullabhāti attho. Cātumahārājikabhavananti cātumahārājikadevaloke suññavimānāni gacchantīti attho. Esa nayo tāvatiṃsabhavanādīsupi. Kālayuttanti imissā velāya imassa evaṃ vattabbanti taṃtaṃkālānurūpaṃ. Samayayuttanti tasseva vevacanaṃ, aṭṭhuppattianurūpaṃ vā. Atha vā samayayuttanti hetūdāharaṇasahitaṃ. Kālena sāpadesañhi bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti. Utuṃ gaṇhapeti, na pana malaṃ pakkhāletīti adhippāyo. Na hi bhagavato kāye rajojallaṃ upalimpatīti.
疲劳的状态就是劳倦。应当这样连接文义:作狮子卧,是为了解除身体的疲劳状态。“以佛眼观察世间”这句话,是依据世尊在后夜时分经常这样做而说的。有时,世尊也以剩余的智力以及一切知智来完成这件事。“这些是见处”等教说,就是狮子吼。把那些教说与“以受为缘而有渴爱”等缘起之理结合起来。“犹如举起须弥山,犹如撞击天空”,这是为了显示《梵网经》的教说是他人所不共的、极为难行。“etam”是指“yena”“tena”这两个词。“yena”是表示原因的具格,意思是:以这个原因,那座圆堂应当被走近;也以这个原因,他走近了。这里的因缘,正是注释书中提到的“这些比丘……”等。“kaṭṭhaṃ”是指适合用来坐的木块。巴利
Kilāsubhāvo kilamatho. Sīhaseyyaṃ kappeti sarīrassa kilāsubhāvamocanatthanti yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ voloketī’’ti idaṃ pacchimayāme bhagavato bahulaāciṇṇavasena vuttaṃ. Appekadā avasiṭṭhabalañāṇehi sabbaññutañāṇena ca bhagavā tamatthaṃ sādhetīti. ‘‘Ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā’’tiādidesanā sīhanādo. Tesaṃ ‘‘vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ tiādinā paccayākāraṃ samodhānetvā. ‘‘Sineruṃ ukkhipanto viya nabhaṃ paharanto viya cā’’ti idaṃ brahmajāladesanāya anaññasādhāraṇattā sudukkaratādassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Etanti ‘‘yena, tenā’’ti etaṃ padadvayaṃ. Yenāti vā hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ, yena kāraṇena so maṇḍalamāḷo upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti attho, kāraṇaṃ pana ‘‘ime bhikkhū’’tiādinā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃeva. Kaṭṭhanti nisīdanayogyaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ.
“前面的”指的是像“你们在谈论什么?”这样被问到的内容。那么“那你们又……”这里的“ca”表示区别,借此点出:相对于已经被问到的话题,接下来要说的是一个被打断、还没说完的状态。“pana”则是话语上的修饰。因为比丘们聚在一起时所谈的那个话题,正是变成了插话、还没讲完的,所以才被特别地再次问起。“别的”是在解释“中间”这个词的意思。因为“antarā”这个词也可以用在别的意义上,比如“地的中间”“时间的中间”等等。或者,“antarā”就是“在中间”的意思。那些比丘不是已经按照自己的想法,用“我们是这样听说的”等等方式把那个话题结束了吗?并没有结束,因为它被世尊的到来打断了。如果世尊当时没有来,他们还会继续谈更多与那话题相关的内容;但因为世尊来了,他们就不再谈下去了。所以他才说“这个话题……还没有结束”。那么,在结集法与律的时候,为什么要说出序分呢?难道不是只应该结集世尊的话吗?这是为了让开示具有持久性、不混乱、可信。因为开示依赖于时间、地点、导师、所依、法和受众,才能长久住立,才能不混乱、可信。就像世俗的判断要依赖时间、地点、时机、河流、因缘等才能成立一样。因此,当大迦叶尊者问阿难尊者“阿难贤友,《梵网经》是在哪里说的?”等等,在问了地点等问题之后,作为法藏者的阿难尊者在回答这些问题时,说出了序分。所以这里说“时间……乃至……说了序分”。巴利
Purimoti ‘‘katamāya nu bhavathā’’ti evaṃ vutto attho. Kā ca pana voti ettha ca-saddo byatireke. Tena yathāpucchitāya kathāya vakkhamānaṃ vippakatabhāvaṃ joteti. Pana-saddo vacanālaṅkāro. Yāya hi kathāya te bhikkhū sannisinnā, sā eva antarākathābhūtā vippakatā visesena puna pucchīyatīti. Aññāti antarāsaddassa atthamāha. Aññatthe hi ayaṃ antarā-saddo ‘‘bhūmantaraṃ samayantara’’ntiādīsu viya. Antarāti vā vemajjheti attho. Nanu ca tehi bhikkhūhi sā kathā yathādhippāyaṃ ‘‘iti ha me’’tiādinā niṭṭhapitā yevāti? Na niṭṭhāpitā bhagavato upasaṅkamanena upacchinnattā. Yadi hi bhagavā tasmiṃ khaṇe na upasaṅkameyya bhiyyopi tappaṭibaddhāyeva kathā pavatteyyuṃ, bhagavato upasaṅkamanena pana na pavattesuṃ. Tenevāha ayaṃ kho…pe… anuppatto’’ti. Kasmā panettha dhammavinayasaṅgahe kariyamāne nidānavacanaṃ, nanu bhagavato vacanameva saṅgahetabbanti? Vuccatedesanāya ṭhitiasammosasaddheyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakavatthudhammapaṭiggāhakapaṭibaddhā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti, asammosadhammā saddheyyā ca. Desakālakattusotunimittehi upanibandho viya vohāravinicchayo, teneva cāyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘brahmajālaṃ āvuso ānanda kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā desādipucchāsu katāsu tāsaṃ vissajjanaṃ karontena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena nidānaṃ bhāsitanti tayidamāha ‘‘kāla…pe… nidānaṃ bhāsita’’nti.
另外,序分也是为了成立导师的资格。因为如来世尊并不是靠事先的构思、推测和思量才成为正自觉者的。他之所以是正自觉者,是因为他的智慧在一切处都畅通无阻,对一切应知之法也没有局限,所以不需要事先的构思等。同样,由于他没有把师法当作秘密藏起来、不偏袒自己的师长、不迎合声闻弟子,所以成就了漏尽者的身份。正因为诸漏已尽,他才没有秘藏师法等过失,利益他人的行为也是清净的。这样一来,以无明和渴爱——这两种破坏正见与正行的烦恼——的不存在为标志,以智慧和断除的圆满为表征,正觉与清净这两种品质成立,前两种自信也就成立;由此,在障碍法和出离法上没有任何迷惑,后两种自信也就成立。于是,世尊具足四种自信,自利利他的实践也随之彰显。因为序分是随在场会众的意乐,以应机而发的辩才开示教法,并通过“知者、见者”等语句加以说明。因此说:“序分是为了成立导师的资格。”巴利
Apica satthusiddhiyā nidānavacanaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi bhagavato pubbaracanānumānāgamatakkābhāvato sammāsambuddhattasiddhi. Sammāsambuddhabhāvena hissa pubbaracanādīnaṃ abhāvo sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya, ekappamāṇattā ca ñeyyadhammesu. Tathā ācariyamuṭṭhidhammamacchariyasatthusāvakānurodhābhāvato khīṇāsavattasiddhi. Khīṇā savatāya hissa ācariyamuṭṭhiādīnaṃ abhāvo, visuddhā ca parānuggahappavatti. Iti desakadosabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhicārittasampattidūsakānaṃ avijjātaṇhānaṃ abhāvasūcakehi, ñāṇappahānasampadābhi byañjanakehi ca sambuddhavisuddhabhāvehi purimavesārajjadvayasiddhi, tato eva ca antarāyikaniyyānikadhammesu sammohābhāvasiddhito pacchimavesārajjadvayasiddhīti bhagavato catuvesārajjasamannāgamo , attahitaparahitappaṭipatti ca pakāsitā hoti nidānavacanena sampattaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ṭhānuppattikappaṭibhānena dhammadesanādīpanato, ‘‘jānatā passatā’’tiādi vacanato ca. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthusiddhiyā nidānavacana’’nti.
同样,序分的说法也是为了成就导师。因为,对于以智慧和悲悯摄持一切行为的世尊来说,绝没有无意义的活动,也没有为了自身利益的行为。因此,这位一切行为都只是为了他人利益而展开的正自觉者,他的全部身业、语业、意业都属于导师的作为,而不是诗词创作之类的教说。因此说“序分的说法,是为了成就导师”。此外,序分的说法也是通过阐明导师是标准,来成立教法是标准这一事实。因为,用“由世尊”这一说法,显示了如来功德超胜、是众生中最上等含义;用“知者”等说法,则显示了意向随眠智等的运用,这样就成立上述道理。这里只是对序分作用的概略展示。毕竟,谁能毫无遗漏地完全阐明由那位随佛觉悟、身为法藏者的阿难尊者所说的序分的全部作用呢?巴利
Tathā satthusiddhiyā nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthikā pavatti, attahitatthā vā, tasmā paresaṃyeva atthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ satthubhūtaṃ, na kabyaracanādisāsanabhūtaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthusiddhiyā nidānavacana’’nti. Apica satthuno pamāṇabhūtatāvibhāvanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvasiddhiyā nidānavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavatā’’ti hi iminā tathāgatassa guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamādibhāvadīpanena, ‘‘jānatā’’tiādinā āsayānusayañāṇādipayogadīpanena ca ayamattho sādhito hoti. Idamettha nidānavacanapayojanassa mukhamattadassanaṃ. Ko hi samattho buddhānubuddhena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena bhāsitassa nidānassa payojanāni niravasesato vibhāvetunti.
5 “已安置的”就是指“已宣说的”。因为宣说本身,就是把应当宣说的戒等义理安置在应受调伏者的心相续中,所以称为“安置”。在这里,正如许多经虽然有成百上千种分类,但都不超出以杂染分等教法分类方式所形成的十六种;同样地,依照自身意乐等经的安置方式而有四种,所以说“四种经的安置”。虽然在这里,自身意乐和事缘,因为与意乐和请问相连,可能和带有请问的他人意乐混杂在一起,但自身意乐和事缘彼此之间并没有混杂,因此这里不可能做到毫无遗漏的详尽分类,所以才说“四种经的安置”。或者,虽然事缘可能和意乐有混合,但由于其余的安置方式都包含在根本的安置方式中,所以应当理解为,依根本的安置方式只显示了这四种。然而,这种经的安置,因为是共通的性质,所以应先加以审察。审察之后,为了便于显示各个连结,对那些依事缘而展开的经文和经句——例如“诸比丘,若有人诽谤我……”(《长部》1.5-6)、“然而,诸比丘,这是微小的……”(《长部》1.7)、“诸比丘,有……”(《长部》1.28)等——所作的注释,因为能方便地显示各个连结,所以很容易理解,因此说“审察经的安置之后,所说就变得明显”。巴利
5.Nikkhittassāti desitassa. Desanāpi hi desetabbassa sīlādiatthassa vineyyasantānesu nikkhipanato ‘‘nikkhepo’’ti vuccati. Tattha yathā anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttantāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādisāsanappaṭṭhānanayena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhabhāvanti āha ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’ti. Kāmañcettha attajjhāsayassa, aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāhi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati ajjhāsayapucchānusandhisabbhāvato, attajjhāsayaaṭṭhuppattīnaṃ pana aññamaññaṃ saṃsaggo natthīti nayidha niravaseso vitthāranayo sambhavati, tasmā ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā yadipi aṭṭhuppattiyā ajjhāsayena siyā saṃsaggabhedo, tadantogadhattā pana sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattārova dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. So panāyaṃ suttanikkhepo sāmaññabhāvato paṭhamaṃ vicāretabbo, tasmiṃ vicārite yassā aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ nikkhittaṃ, tassā vibhāgavasena ‘‘mamaṃ vā bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.5, 6), ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 1.7), ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.28) ca pavattānaṃ suttānaṃ suttapadesānaṃ vaṇṇanā vuccamānā taṃtaṃanusandhidassanasukhatāya suviññeyyā hotīti āha ‘‘suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hotī’’ti.
在“经的安置”等说法里,“安置”就是放下的动作;经的安置,就是经的宣说,也就是经的教导,意思是“经的宣说”。或者,被安置的就是安置,经本身就是安置,所以叫“经的安置”。自己的意乐就是“自身意乐”,他有这个意乐,而这个意乐是宣说这部经的原因,所以叫“自身意乐者”。或者,这部经的宣说以自身意乐为原因,所以叫“自身意乐者”。在“他人意乐”这里,也是同样的道理。以请问为依据,叫“请问力”,他有这个请问力,所以叫“请问力者”。应当被依取的是义理,它是宣说这部经的根据。义理的生起就是“事缘”,事缘本身就是事缘,这部经有这个事缘,所以叫“具有事缘者”。或者,通过这些来安置这部经,所以叫“经的安置”,指的就是自身意乐等这些内容。不过在这种义理分别中,自己的意乐是“自身意乐”,他人的意乐是“他人意乐”,被请问的就是“请问”,也就是应当请问的义理。依应当听闻的力量而生起、领受法者所说的话,就是“请问力者”,这是为了呼应“安置”这个词的语法性别而说成“请问力者”。同样地,事缘本身就是“具有事缘者”,这里的意思应当这样理解。巴利
‘‘Suttanikkhepā’’tiādīsu nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttassa kathanaṃ suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Nikkhipīyatīti vā nikkhepo, suttaṃyeva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi suttadesanākāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo. Attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vaso pucchāvaso, so etassa atthīti pucchavasiko. Araṇīyato attho, suttadesanāya vatthu. Atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, atthuppattiyeva aṭṭhuppatti, sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti suttanikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo, pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitabbo attho. Sotabbavasappavattaṃ dhammappaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasikā, tadeva nikkhepasaddāpekkhāya pulliṅgavasena vuttaṃ ‘‘pucchāvasiko’’ti. Tathā aṭṭhuppattiyeva ‘‘aṭṭhuppattiko’’ti evampettha attho veditabbo.
在这里,自身意乐不依赖他人根器成熟等条件,所以把它单独列为一种情况是合理的。正因如此,他说“仅仅凭自己的意乐而说法”。但是,对于以他人意乐和请问为依据的说法,当作为说法之因的他人意乐和请问生起时,由此产生的说法为什么不归入事缘呢?或者,以请问为依据并具有事缘的说法,因为是随顺他人意乐而说的,为什么不归入他人意乐呢?不应这样质疑。因为,他人意乐和请问力者之所以被单独列出,是因为事缘被定义为:完全脱离了他人之愿求、遍问等,纯粹作为经典被宣说的因由而生起。比如《法嗣经》等,以生起利养等作为说法的因由,这就称为“事缘”。不依赖他人的请问、只以意乐为因而宣说的,是“他人意乐”;以请问为依据而宣说的,是“请问力者”,这个道理很清楚。应当知道,“仅仅凭自己的意乐而说法”是为了确立法性。《正勤经》之摄,是指在《相应部》中按顺序依次解说的、与正勤相应的诸经汇编;同样也有神足之摄等。令解脱得以圆熟的诸法,指的是信根等。愿求,就是希冀。巴利
Ettha ca paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhatā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ nikkhepabhāvo yutto. Tenevāha ‘‘kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva kathetī’’ti. Parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanānimittabhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ anavarodho, pucchāvasikaaṭṭhuppattikānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattitadesanattā kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinimuttasseva suttadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi dhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ (ma. ni. 1.29) āmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhuppattī’’ti vuccati. Paresaṃ pucchaṃ vinā ajjhāsayameva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭo yamatthoti. Attano ajjhāsayeneva kathesi dhammatantiṭhapanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sammappadhānasuttantahārakoti anupubbena niddiṭṭhānaṃ saṃyuttake sammappadhānapaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ suttānaṃ āvaḷi, tathā iddhipādahārakādi.Vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā saddhindriyādayo. Abhinīhāranti paṇidhānaṃ.
在“赞美与毁谤”这里,比丘僧团所说的“贤友,真是稀有啊”这类赞美也算在内。不过,那是把它当作事缘,之后才在后面开始宣说“诸比丘,还有其他法……”等教导。在“诸比丘,若有人赞美我……”这段教导中,梵授王所说的赞美被当作事缘,所以说“弟子的赞美。如此,以这赞美与毁谤作为事缘之后……”。“vā”这个词,出现在比喻、聚合、疑惑、决定、补足语句、抉择等多种含义中。比如在“纵使是智者,也以此而……”等语句中,它出现在比喻义上,意思是“相似的状态”;在“诸贤者、牟尼了知此或彼”等语句中,是聚合义;在“这些是谁?属于谁?”等语句中,是疑惑义;在“这个人或许是这些沙门婆罗门中最愚笨、最糊涂的”等语句中,是决定义;在“这童子并不知量”等语句中,是补足语句义;在“诸比丘,凡任何沙门或婆罗门”等语句中,是抉择义。在这里,为了表明它正是抉择义,他说“‘vā’这个词是抉择义”。“para”这个词,在“如果我宣说法,而他人却不能理解我”等语句中,有“其他的”含义;在“根器优劣智”等语句中,有“增上”的含义;在“之后会从别处来”等语句中,有“后面”的含义;在“以法善加折伏所生起的对方主张后”等语句中,有“对立”的含义。在这里,为了表明它也是对立的含义,他说“他人,即对立者”。巴利
Vaṇṇāvaṇṇeti ettha ‘‘acchariyaṃ āvuso’’tiādinā bhikkhusaṅghena vutto vaṇṇopi saṅgahito, taṃ pana aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave aññe ca dhammā’’tiādinā upari desanaṃ ārabhissatīti. ‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave pare vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’nti imissā desanāya brahmadattena vuttavaṇṇo aṭṭhuppattīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘antevāsī vaṇṇaṃ. Iti imaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā’’ti. Vā-saddo upamānasamuccayasaṃsayavavassaggapadapūraṇavikappādīsu bahūsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘paṇḍito vāpi tena so’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 63) upamāne dissati, sadisabhāveti attho. ‘‘Taṃ vāpi dhīrā muni vedayantī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 203) samuccaye, ‘‘ke vā ime, kassa vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 296) saṃsaye, ‘‘ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu vavassagge, ‘‘na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.154) padapūraṇe, ‘‘ye hi keci bhikkhave samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.170) vikappe, idhāyaṃ vikappeyevāti dassento āha ‘‘vā-saddo vikappanattho’’ti. Para-saddo attheva aññatthe ‘‘ahañceva kho pana dhammaṃ deseyyaṃ, pare ca me na ājāneyyu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.64, 65; ma. ni. 1.281; ma. ni. 2.223; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 4, 8) atthi adhike ‘‘indriyaparopariyattañāṇa’’ntiādīsu (paṭi. ma. mātikā 68, 1.111) atthi pacchābhāge ‘‘parato āgamissatī’’tiādīsu. Atthi paccanīkabhāve ‘‘uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ saha dhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.168). Idhāpi paccanīkabhāveti dassento āha ‘‘pareti paṭiviruddhā’’ti.
在“在这样的情况下也”这句里,“也”这个词表示推想。由此说明:即使是以三宝为对象,也不该生起不善心,更何况是以轮回的利养、世间的利养为对象。从自性法来看,为了表明作者不同于其他,他引出“āghāta”一词的主动含义,即来自“āhanati”。这里,“āhanati”的意思是伤害、损恼和折磨。或者,“以此而伤害”,或者仅仅是伤害的行为本身,就是“āghāta”,所以工具格的含义也能成立。这样以分解词素的方式说明了“āghāta”一词的含义之后,现在又以同义词来说明其含义,说道“这是忿的代名词”。这一方法在“无因、不悦”等之处也应根据情况而说。他们因它而不明了,所以从显明的同义词来说明“无因”一词的含义;但透过这一点,应理解为:不因它而信解,故为“无因”。“令满足”即成就。由二者,即由“āghāta”和“不悦”二词。由一者,即由“无因”一词。其余的,即想蕴和识蕴,或者说是想、识及剩余行蕴所摄的。作,即生起。因为这里说“āghāta”等的生起的诸缘聚合为“作”,而那在意义上就是生起。因为世尊针对不生起而说“不应作”。由于同一生起、同一依处、同一所缘、同一灭的缘故,所以已被否定。巴利
Īdisesupīti ettha pi-saddo sambhāvane, tena ratanattayanimittampi akusalacittappavatti na kātabbā, pageva vaṭṭāmisalokāmisanimittanti dasseti. Sabhāvadhammato aññassa kattuabhāvajotanatthaṃ āhanatīti kattuatthe āghātasaddaṃ dasseti, tattha āhanatīti hiṃsati vibādhati, upatāpeti cāti attho. Āhanati etena, āhananamattaṃ vā āghātoti karaṇabhāvatthāpi sambhavantiyeva. Evaṃ avayavabhedanena āghāta-saddassa atthaṃ vatvā idāni tattha pariyāyenapi atthaṃ dassento ‘‘kopassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti āha. Ayañca nayo ‘‘appaccayo anabhiraddhī’’tiādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vattabbo. Appatītā honti tenāti pākaṭapariyāyena appaccaya-saddassa atthadassanaṃ, taṃmukhena pana na pacceti tenāti appaccayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Abhirādhayatīti sādhayati. Dvīhīti āghātaanabhiraddhipadehi. Ekenāti appaccayapadena. Sesānanti saññāviññāṇakkhandhānaṃ, saññāviññāṇaavasiṭṭhasaṅkhārakkhandhasaṅkhātānaṃ vā. Karaṇanti uppādanaṃ. Āghātādīnañhi pavattiyā paccayasamavāyanaṃ idha ‘‘karaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ pana atthato uppādanameva. Anuppādanañhi sandhāya bhagavatā ‘‘na karaṇīyā’’ti vuttanti. Paṭikkhittameva ekuppādekavatthukekārammaṇekanirodhabhāvato.
这里说的“在那里”,是指在那种心的嗔恨里。“你们”这个词,和“你们的”意思相同;就像“amha”这个词和“我们的”意思相同一样。正如经文说:“所以我们的年轻人不会死去。”“障碍”这个词,是在说明为什么不该生起心的嗔恨。因为那种愤怒等烦恼,会成为你们自己证得初禅等的障碍,所以不应该生起那些被称为愤怒等同类词的嗔恨等。这就是它的意思。通过这一点,他表明:我不是以“我是全知者”这种权威身份来阻止你们远离它,而是因为这样的原因。而那说明原因的话,由于是在阐明过患,所以他说“是在显示过患”。通过“你们难道……”等语句,他指出:心的嗔恨不只是将来才会障碍利益和安乐,即使就在它当下生起的时候,也会障碍利益和安乐,这样就更有力地显示了心的嗔恨的过患。“对于任何人……”这里的意思,不像“他人……”等句子那样只指敌对的人,而是泛指所有人。因此他说“愤怒者……”等等。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ manopadose. Tumhanti ‘‘tumhāka’’nti iminā samānattho eko saddo ‘‘yathā amhāka’’nti iminā samānattho ‘‘amha’’nti ayaṃ saddo. Yathāha, ‘‘tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na miyyare’’ti (jā. 1.9.93, 99). ‘‘Antarāyo’’ti idaṃ manopadosassa akaraṇīyatāya kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā tumhākaṃyeva ca bhaveyya tena kopādinā paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ antarāyo, tasmā te kopādipariyāyena vuttā āghātādayo na karaṇīyāti attho. Tena nāhaṃ ‘‘sabbaññū’’ti issarabhāvena tumhe tato nivāremi, atha kho iminā nāma kāraṇenāti dasseti. Taṃ pana kāraṇavacanaṃ yasmā ādīnavavibhāvanaṃ hoti, tasmā āha ‘‘ādīnavaṃ dassento’’ti. ‘‘Api nu tumhe’’tiādinā manopadoso na kālantarabhāvinoyeva hitasukhassa antarāyakaro, atha kho taṅkhaṇappavattirahassapi hitasukhassa antarāyakaroti manopadose ādīnavaṃ daḷhataraṃ katvā dasseti. Yesaṃ kesañci ‘‘pare’’tiādīsu viya na paṭiviruddhānaṃyevāti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘kupito’’tiādi.
“盲暗”是指造成盲目状态的极度黑暗。“那个”是指“在哪里”。这里这个词是处格意义上使用的主格形式。当愤怒压制一个人时,那时就成了盲暗,这是它们的关联。或者,“那个”是表示原因的说法:因为愤怒生起时压制此人,所以那时就成了盲暗;意思是,由于“yaṃ”和“taṃ”这两个词有必然关联,当有愤怒时,就有盲暗。再者,“那个”是指向动作本身。“愤怒压制”——这个愤怒的压制、征服,其含义就是成为黑暗。或者:愤怒所压制、征服的那个人,那时他就成了盲暗。由此,愤怒的人不知利益,愤怒的人不见法。“从内部”,就是从内在,或者从心上。巴利
Andhatamanti andhabhāvakaratamaṃ. Yanti yattha. Bhummatthe hi etaṃ paccattavacanaṃ. Yasmiṃ kāle kodho sahate naraṃ, andhatamaṃ tadā hotīti sambandho. Yanti vā kāraṇavacanaṃ, yasmā kodho uppajjamāno naraṃ abhibhavati, tasmā andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, yadā kodhoti attho yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ ekantasambandhibhāvato. Atha vā yanti kiriyāya parāmasanaṃ. Kodho sahateti yadetaṃ kodhassa sahanaṃ abhibhavanaṃ, etaṃ andhakāratamabhavananti attho. Atha vā yaṃ naraṃ kodho sahate abhibhavati, tassa andhatamaṃ tadā hoti, tato ca kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti, kuddho dhammaṃ na passatīti. Antaratoti abbhantarato, cittato vā.
“因为这样的原因和那样的原因”这句话,是在显示这样的意思:我们的导师确实是全知者,因为他宣说的法没有颠倒;法是善说的,因为它能彻底引导人出离;僧伽是善行道的,因为他们远离了杂染。通过“因为这样的原因和那样的原因”这句话,那些“不是全知者”之类不真实、不符合事实的说法就被驳倒了。“第二个词”指的是“非真”这个词;“第一个”指的是“不实”这个词;“第四个”指的是“而这在我们身上并不存在”这句话;“第三个”指的是“这在我们之中是没有的”这句话。“正是在毁谤上”的意思是:说出一个看似合理的理由来安立过失,这就是在毁谤。“并非在所有情况下”的意思是:并非只有在谩骂、讥讽、轻蔑等情况下才不需要驳斥。他用“如果……”等话把已经说过的义理讲清楚,使它更加明白。巴利
‘‘Idañcidañca kāraṇa’’nti iminā sabbaññū eva amhākaṃ satthā aviparītadhammadesanattā, svākkhāto dhammo ekantaniyyānikattā, suppaṭipanno saṅgho saṃkilesarahitattāti imamatthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Idañcidañca kāraṇa’’nti etena ca ‘‘na sabbaññū’’tiādivacanaṃ abhūtaṃ atacchanti nibbeṭhitaṃ hoti. Dutiyaṃ padanti ‘‘ataccha’’nti padaṃ. Paṭhamassāti ‘‘abhūta’’nti padassa. Catutthañcāti ‘‘na ca panetaṃ amhesu saṃvijjatī’’ti padaṃ. Tatiyassāti ‘‘natthi cetaṃ amhesū’’ti padassa. Avaṇṇeyevāti kāraṇapatirūpakaṃ vatvā dosapatiṭṭhāpanavasena nindane eva. Na sabbatthāti kevalaṃ akkosanakhuṃsanavambhanādīsu na ekantena nibbeṭhanaṃ kātabbanti attho. Vuttamevatthaṃ ‘‘yadi hī’’tiādinā pākaṭaṃ katvā dasseti.
6 “喜悦”是指:众生因为具备这种法而欢喜、愉悦,这显示了“ānanda”这个词是表示“工具/手段”的意思。“有善妙的心”所以叫“善心者”;或者,善妙的心本身就是“善心”,它的状态就是“喜悦”。那么,其他与它相应的心所是不是也变成了喜悦的状态呢?不会,因为这是约定俗成的说法,就像“莲花”一样。为了说明这一点,他说:“这是心所乐的别名。”“浮动”就是“使浮动”,意思是打破先前的状态而达到不同的状况。“浮动”是“浮动的状态”,该状态即是“浮动性”。由于它生起,身心就像被风吹胀的皮囊一样,达到膨胀的状态;对于这种依止于家的、炽热的喜,这是它的别名。因此他说:“导致掉举的”等等。在这里也应依照上下文,按照“即使那些比丘没有浮动,然而为了防止未来善男子在如此情形中生起不善,而安立法之引导”以及“以两词说行蕴,以一词说受蕴”,在此“以他们为缘,其余相应法的造作也被禁止”这样的义注,以及“pi一词表示推测”等,在此处所说的方式,依可能的情况而理解其义。在“正是你们的寿命是障碍”这里,也应依照“障碍就是此”等前面在贬斥方面所说的方式理解其义。巴利
6.Ānandanti pamodanti etena dhammena taṃsamaṅgino sattāti ānanda-saddassa karaṇatthataṃ dasseti . Sobhanaṃ mano assāti sumano, sobhanaṃ vā mano sumano, tassa bhāvo somanassanti tadaññadhammānampi sampayuttānaṃ somanassabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati ruḷhīsaddattā yathā ‘‘paṅkaja’’nti dassento ‘‘cetasikasukhassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti āha. Ubbilayatīti ubbilaṃ, bhindati purimāvatthāya visesaṃ āpajjatīti attho. Ubbilameva ubbilāvitaṃ, tassa bhāvo ubbilāvitattaṃ. Yāya uppannāya kāyacittaṃ vātapūritabhastā viya uddhumāyanākārappattaṃ hoti, tassā gehassitāya odaggiyapītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘uddhaccāvahāyā’’tiādi. Idhāpi ‘‘kiñcāpi tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ubbilāvitameva natthi, atha kho āyatiṃ kulaputtānaṃ edisesupi ṭhānesu akusaluppattiṃ paṭisedhento dhammanettiṃ ṭhapetī’’ti, ‘‘dvīhi padehi saṅkhārakkhandho, ekena vedanākkhandho vutto’’ti ettha ‘‘tesaṃ vasena sesānampi sampayuttadhammānaṃ karaṇaṃ paṭikkhittamevā’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ, ‘‘pi-saddo sambhāvane’’tiādinā idha ca vuttanayena attho yathāsambhavaṃ veditabbo. ‘‘Tumhaṃyevassatena antarāyo’’ti etthāpi ‘‘antarāyoti ida’’ntiādinā heṭṭhā avaṇṇapakkhe vuttanayena attho veditabbo.
“为什么这样说呢?”这是提问者心里先想着接下来要解释的内容,才提出质问。导师承认“确实称赞过”这个意思,然后用“不过那是依于出离的……”等话作答。这里“此”指的是对阿难等人说“不应做”的那番话。“难道不是世尊称赞过吗”是连接语。“以整个”是指以完整、全部的方式。不过有些人说:“‘赡部洲的’这个词,是以具格形式表达属格的意义。”按他们的看法,应当把“整个”和“赡部洲”理解为同格关系。“因此”是说:因为依于在家生活的喜和喜悦会成为禅那等的障碍,所以这样说。世尊确实这样说过:“天帝,我说喜悦有两种:有应当亲近的,也有不应当亲近的。”接下来“因为这种……”等话,是为了说明与什么相应的喜会成为障碍。这里本来应该说“这种与贪俱行的喜和喜悦”,但举出“喜”就已经包含了“喜悦”,因为不存在脱离喜悦的喜,所以应理解为这里只举了“喜”。或者也可以说,由于世尊对应当亲近和不应当亲近的区分开示中,喜悦的障碍性很明显,喜则不是那样,所以只把喜以与贪俱行这一特征特别指出。“贪者得利”等偈颂的含义,应当像“怒者得利”等偈颂那样理解。巴利
Kasmā panetanti ca vakkhamānaṃyeva atthaṃ manasi katvā codeti. Ācariyo ‘‘saccaṃ vaṇṇita’’nti tamatthaṃ paṭijānitvā ‘‘taṃ pana nekkhammanissita’’ntiādinā pariharati. Tattha etanti ānandādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatāvacanaṃ. Nanu bhagavatā vaṇṇitanti sambandho. Kasiṇenāti kasiṇatāya sakalabhāvena. Keci pana ‘‘jambudīpassāti karaṇe sāmivacana’’nti vadanti, tesaṃ matena kasiṇajambudīpa-saddānaṃ samānādhikaraṇabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Tasmāti yasmā gehassitapītisomanassaṃ jhānādīnaṃ antarāyakaraṃ, tasmā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘somanassaṃ pāhaṃ devānaṃ inda duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi asevitabbampī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.359). ‘‘Ayañhī’’tiādi yena sampayuttā pīti antarāyakarī, taṃ dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘idañhi lobhasahagataṃ pītisomanassa’’nti vattabbaṃ siyā, pītiggahaṇena pana somanassampi gahitameva hoti somanassarahitāya pītiyā abhāvatoti pītiyeva gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā sevitabbāsevitabbavibhāgavacanato somanassassa pākaṭo antarāyakarabhāvo, na tathā pītiyāti pītiyeva lobhasahagatattena visesetvā vuttā. ‘‘Luddho attha’’ntiādigāthānaṃ ‘‘kuddho attha’’ntiādi gāthāsu viya attho daṭṭhabbo.
“诸比丘,如果其他人称赞我,或称赞法,或称赞僧团,而你们对此感到欢喜、满意、兴奋不已,那你们还能分辨别人说的是好话还是坏话吗?”“不能,尊者。”这是第三轮问答。应当这样理解:在说法的时候,因为当时没有适合听受这一教法的人,所以没有把它拿出来讲;但从义理上说,它其实已经包含在内了,就像《论事》那样以广说的方式展开一样,这就是其中的意趣。通过“从义理上说已经包含在内”这句话,表明在作注释的时候,可以为了那些能这样领悟的众生,把这一轮问答引出来加以说明。接下来的“正如……”等文句,就是在阐明这种义理上的包含关系。“按照所说的方式”指的是像“在那里,你们……也就是在那种称赞当中,你们……”这样的方式,以及“第二句是第一句的同义词,第四句是第三句的同义词”这样的方式。巴利
‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave pare vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ, dhammassa vā vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ, saṅghassa vā vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ, tatra ce tumhe assatha ānandino sumanā ubbilāvitā, api nu tumhe paresaṃ subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ ājāneyyāthāti. No hetaṃ bhante’’ti ayaṃ tatiyavāro, so desanākāle nīharitvā desetabbapuggalābhāvato desanāya anāgatopi tadatthasambhavato atthato āgatoyevāti daṭṭhabbo yathā taṃ kathāvatthupakaraṇaṃ vitthāravasenāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Atthato āgato yevā’’ti etena saṃvaṇṇanākāle tathā bujjhanakasattānaṃ vasena so vāro ānetvā vattabboti dasseti. ‘‘Yatheva hī’’tiādinā tamevatthasambhavaṃ vibhāveti. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘tatra tumhehīti tasmiṃ vaṇṇe tumhehī’’tiādinā, ‘‘dutiyaṃ padaṃ paṭhamassa padassa, catutthañca tatiyassa vevacana’’ntiādinā ca vuttanayena.
7 已退回,因为它是无根的,没有可舍弃性。它仍然随转,因为更有可舍弃性。他将以“诸比丘,有……”等来说明前后连接。“低的”一词,或者指后面的部分,就像“从低处取财富,低处与彼岸”等用法中的“低处”。或者,“低”这个词是表示下面的意思,就像“那些为了再来的缘,就是下分结”等用法中那样。因为戒相对于定和慧来说,属于后面的部分,也处在下面的层次。在“仅戒”这个词里,“仅”字或者是“少”的意思,就像“仅少量药”等用法中那样。或者是排除殊胜的意思,就像“无寻唯伺法”“唯意界、意识界”等用法中那样。通过“微小的、低下的”这两个词从总体上说的意思,在“仅戒”这里是以特别的方式说的。或者,在“仅戒”中,这个“仅”字是为了把戒中的某一部分也包含进来,所以是表示“少”的意思;或者它就只是表示排除殊胜。因为依于根律仪防护的戒,在这里的教导中并没有纳入,它们不像波罗提木叉戒和活命清净戒那样在一切凡夫中都显而易见。通过“发勤已”这句话,在“正说”中显示“慢”字是能力的意思。巴利
7.Nivatto amūlakattā vissajjetabbatābhāvato. Anuvattatiyeva vissajjetabbatāya adhikatabhāvato. Anusandhiṃ dassessati ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā. Oranti vā aparabhāgo ‘‘orato bhogaṃ, oraṃ pāra’’ntiādīsu viya. Atha vā heṭṭhāattho ora-saddo ‘‘oraṃ āgamanāya ye paccayā, te orambhāgiyāni saṃyojanānī’’tiādīsu viya. Sīlañhi samādhipaññāyo apekkhitvā aparabhāgo, heṭṭhābhūtañca hotīti. Sīlamattakanti ettha matta-saddo appakattho vā ‘‘bhesajjamattā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) viya. Visesanivattiattho vā ‘‘avitakkavicāramattā dhammā (dha. sa. tikamātikā 6), manomattā dhātu manodhātū’’ti ca ādīsu viya. ‘‘Appamattakaṃ, oramattaka’’nti padadvayena sāmaññato vuttoyeva hi attho sīlamattakanti visesavasena vutto. Atha vā sīlenapi tadekadesasseva saṅgahaṇatthaṃ appakatthavācako, visesanivattiattho eva vā ‘‘sīlamattaka’’nti ettha matta-saddo vutto. Tathā hi indriyasaṃvarapaccayasannissitasīlāni idha desanaṃ anāruḷhāni. Na hi tāni pātimokkhaājīvapārisuddhisīlāni viya sabbaputhujjanesu pākaṭānīti. ‘‘Ussāhaṃ katvā’’ti etena ‘‘vadamāno’’ti ettha sattiatthaṃ māna-saddaṃ dasseti.
装饰就是庄严、美化,也就是耳环之类的饰物。补足欠缺之处,叫做妆饰。所谓“为了妆饰”,就是以妆饰为目的。或者也可以说,喜欢打扮的人就叫“妆饰者”,意思是天性就爱装饰的人。这里用单数形式表达复数含义,指的是那些有装饰习性的人。在“圆满作者”这个词里,“iti”这个字表示“等等”或“如此”的意思,用它来引出整部《戒赞叹经》。所谓“栴檀”,是因为香气与栴檀木相伴而生,所以指栴檀香;多伽罗等香也是这样。在“如同种种香”中,指的是各种不同香料所散发出的香气。在“善人的香”这里,所谓“香”,是比喻由戒所系属的赞叹之声。因为戒是名声的因相。正如经中所说:“持戒者、具戒者,善名美誉远播。”所谓“远播”,就是显扬。香以及香之类。巴利
Alaṅkaraṇaṃ vibhūsanaṃ alaṅkāro, kuṇḍalādipasādhanaṃ vā. Ūnaṭṭhānapūraṇaṃ maṇḍanaṃ. Maṇḍaneti maṇḍanahetu. Atha vā maṇḍatīti maṇḍano, maṇḍanajātiko puriso. Bahuvacanatthe ca idaṃ ekavacanaṃ, maṇḍanasīlesūti attho. Paripūrakārīti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena sakalampi sīlathomana suttaṃ dasseti. Candananti candanasahacaraṇato candanagandho, tathā tagarādīsupi. Satañca gandhoti ettha gandho viyāti gandhoti vutto sīlanibandhano thutighoso. Sīlañhi kittiyā nimittaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sīlavato sīlasampannassa kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.150; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 285). Pavāyatīti pakāsati. Gandhāva gandhajātā.
“少”和“多”这种说法,是像此岸与彼岸那样互相比较而说的,所以注释里说“与更高的功德相比”。这里“确实”这个词表示原因,用来说明:戒虽然作为定的基础,对定有很大的帮助,但如果和定的神通威力等殊胜功德相比,连十六分之一都不到;定和慧的关系也是这样。因此接下来就说“所以……”等等。现在,通过“怎样”的提问,详细阐明定的神通威力。提到“在……双……树根下”,是为了表明双神变非常显而易见,同时也是为了与其他在菩提树下、亲近族人等场合所行的神变相区别。因为为了行双神变,世尊心中生起(此念)时,需要与它相应的场所,所以有人说宝阁等是帝释天王命令毗首羯磨所化现的,另一些人则说是世尊自己化现的。由于“若有任何人能作这样的神变,就让他来吧”这种话类似质问,所以说“自担”:这是质问,由于外道们不能如是作,而他们先前又曾起立宣称“我们当能作”,故而此语亦成为对外道的摧破巴利
‘‘Appakaṃ bahuka’’nti idaṃ pārāpāraṃ viya aññamaññaṃ upanidhāya vuccatīti āha ‘‘upariguṇe upanidhāyā’’ti. Sīlañhīti ettha hi-saddo hetuattho, tena idaṃ dasseti ‘‘yasmā sīlaṃ kiñcāpi patiṭṭhābhāvena samādhissa bahukāraṃ, pabhāvādiguṇavisese panassa upanidhāya kalampi na upeti, tathā samādhi ca paññāyā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Idāni ‘‘katha’’nti pucchitvā samādhissa ānubhāvaṃ vitthārato vibhāveti. ‘‘Abhi…pe…mūle’’ti idaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyassa supākaṭabhāvadassanatthaṃ, aññehi bodhimūlañātisamāgamādīsu katapāṭihāriyehi visesanatthañca vuttaṃ. Yamakapāṭihāriyakaraṇatthāya hi bhagavato citte uppanne tadanucchavikaṃ ṭhānaṃ icchitabbanti ratanamaṇḍapādi sakkassa devarañño āṇāya vissakammunā nimmitanti vadanti, bhagavatāva nimmitanti apare. ‘‘Yo koci evarūpaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ kātuṃ samattho atthi ce, āgacchatū’’ti codanāsadisattā vuttaṃ ‘‘attādānaparidīpana’’nti. Tattha attādānaṃ anuyogo, titthiyānaṃ tathā kātuṃ asamatthattā, ‘‘karissāmā’’ti pubbe uṭṭhitattā titthiyaparimaddanaṃ.
关于“从上半身”等详细内容,可参见《无碍解道》(Paṭisambhidāmagga 1.116)。巴利
Uparimakāyatotiādi paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.116).
在这里,经文剩下的部分是这样的——巴利
Tatthāyaṃ pāḷiseso –
从下半身涌出大火聚,从上半身涌出水流。从身体前部出火,从身体后部出水;从身体后部出火,从身体前部出水。从右眼出火,从左眼出水;从左眼出火,从右眼出水。从右耳孔出火,从左耳孔出水;从左耳孔出火,从右耳孔出水。从右鼻孔出火,从左鼻孔出水;从左鼻孔出火,从右鼻孔出水。从右肩顶出火,从左肩顶出水;从左肩顶出火,从右肩顶出水。从右手出火,从左手出水;从左手出火,从右手出水。从右侧出火,从左侧出水;从左侧出火,从右侧出水。从右脚出火,从左脚出水;从左脚出火,从右脚出水。从每一根手指出火,从每一道指缝出水;从每一道指缝出火,从每一根手指出水。从每一根汗毛出火,从每一根汗毛出水。从每一个毛孔涌出大火聚,从每一个毛孔涌出水流。巴利
‘‘Heṭṭhimakāyato aggikkhandho pavattati, uparimakāyato udakadhārā pavattati. Puratthimakāyato aggi, pacchimakāyato udakaṃ. Pacchimakāyato aggi, puratthimakāyato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇaakkhito aggi, vāmaakkhito udakaṃ. Vāmaakkhito aggi, dakkhiṇaakkhito udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotato aggi, vāmakaṇṇasotato udakaṃ. Vāmakaṇṇasotato aggi, dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato aggi, vāmanāsikāsotato udakaṃ. Vāmanāsikāsotato aggi, dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato aggi, vāmaaṃsakūṭato udakaṃ. Vāmaaṃsakūṭato aggi, dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇahatthato aggi, vāmahatthato udakaṃ. Vāmahatthato aggi, dakkhiṇahatthato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇapassato aggi, vāmapassato udakaṃ. Vāmapassato aggi, dakkhiṇapassato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇapādato aggi , vāmapādato udakaṃ. Vāmapādato aggi, dakkhiṇapādato udakaṃ. Aṅgulaṅgulehi aggi, aṅgulantarikāhi udakaṃ . Aṅgulantarikāhi aggi, aṅgulaṅgulehi udakaṃ. Ekekalomato aggi, ekekalomato udakaṃ. Lomakūpato lomakūpato aggikkhandho pavattati, lomakūpato lomakūpato udakadhārā pavattatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.116).
不过,在注释书里则提到“从每一根毛孔”。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ekekalomakūpato’’ti āgataṃ.
关于“六种颜色”等以“起源”方式展开的经文,这里也有经文省略的部分:青色、黄色、红色、白色、深红色、光辉色。“金色光芒”这句话,是就其中大多数而言。在“应当详细展开”这里,也应当依照“导师站立,化身经行、或坐、或卧……”等方式,在四种威仪中,以导师为基本情形有四种,以化身为基本情形有四种,总共八种,都应详细展开。巴利
‘‘Channaṃ vaṇṇānanti ādinayappavatta’’nti etthāpi nīlānaṃ pītakānaṃ lohitakānaṃ odātānaṃ mañjiṭṭhānaṃ pabhassarānanti ayaṃ pāḷiseso. ‘‘Suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmiyo’’ti idaṃ tāsaṃ yebhuyyatāya vuttaṃ. Vitthāretabbanti etthāpi ‘‘satthā tiṭṭhati, nimmito caṅkamati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappetī’’tiādinā catūsu iriyāpathesu ekekamūlakā satthuvasena cattāro, nimmitavasena cattāroti sabbeva aṭṭha vāre vitthāretabbaṃ.
蜜粥,就是加了蜜的乳粥。我、朋友、中立者、怨敌,这是依照四种界限的划分而具备四支的慈心修习法门。而“具备四支”这一说法,也应当与“精进决意”等结合起来理解。其中,应当依据“纵然皮与筋……”等经文,来理解四支具足。再以“这个世间确实陷入了苦难……”等,从老死的角度把智慧引入缘起。在“入出息第四禅”这里,也应当把“一切诸佛所习行”这一句通过变格的方式结合进去,因为据说那也确实是一切诸佛所习行的。以三十六万亿种方式,令执取大金刚智之藏,增长观。容量为三十二多那的锅,叫kolambo。洞穴部分就是山涧。在铁围山脚下的大海,就是铁围山大海。巴利
Madhupāyāsanti madhusittaṃ pāyāsaṃ. Attā mitto majjhatto verīti catūsu sīmasambhedavasena caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Caturaṅgasamannāgata’’nti idaṃ pana ‘‘vīriyādhiṭṭhāna’’nti etenāpi yojetabbaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru cā’’tiādipāḷi (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22; a. ni. 2.5; a. ni. 8.13; mahāni. 196) vasena caturaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. ‘‘Kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4) jarāmaraṇamukhena paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ otāretvā. Ānāpānacatutthajjhānanti etthāpi ‘‘sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇa’’nti padaṃ vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā yojetabbaṃ. Tampi hi sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇamevāti vadanti. Chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena mahāvajirañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpento vipassanaṃvaḍḍhetvā. Dvattiṃsadoṇagaṇhanappamāṇaṃ kuṇḍaṃ kolambo. Daribhāgo kandaro. Cakkavāḷapādesu mahāsamuddo cakkavāḷamahāsamuddo.
“两种凡夫”这类说法,是为了显示凡夫当中可以分出的类别,而不是像《根本法门》注疏等那样,为了确定凡夫的特殊种类。因为一切凡夫都无法阐明世尊以上的功德;凡夫暂且不说,就连声闻弟子和独觉佛,也无法了知佛陀的功德。正如后面将会说到的“入流者……”等。让文句熟练上口,叫做诵习;对义理反复询问,叫做遍问;依照注疏来听法义,叫做听闻;把音节和义理妥善安立、清晰显示,从而受持法,叫做持;对这样听闻、受持而熟悉的法义,以意观察,叫做省察。由于众多种种烦恼和萨迦耶见未被断除,他们产生那些烦恼,或者被那些烦恼所产生,所以叫凡夫。或者,“人”这个词只是表示无碍。在“Puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikā”这句中,众多人对导师有面瞻仰,因此他们是凡夫,这是词义。在“Puthu…pe… avuṭṭhitā”这句中,应被产生,或者在其中产生的,是人,即趣。众多人是他们的,所以是凡夫。从此之后,他们由这些产生,所以是行等,是人。这些人的众多存在,所以是凡夫。或者,“人”这个词应当看作“造作”等意思。欲贪、有贪、见、无明是暴流。贪火等是灼热。那些本身就是,或者一切烦恼都是燃烧。在“Puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattā”这句中,产生的,是人,贪、染着等。众多人是他们的,所以是凡夫;或者众多人中产生的、染着的,所以是凡夫;或者“人”这个词应当看作贪等意思。被阻碍的,是迷惑的,或者被扰害的。“Puthūnaṃ gaṇanapathamatītānaṃ”等语,显示众多人是凡夫。巴利
‘‘Duve puthujjanā’’tiādi puthujjane labbhamānavibhāgadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na mūlapariyāyavaṇṇanādīsu viya puthujjanavisesaniddhāraṇatthaṃ. Sabbopi hi puthujjano bhagavato upari guṇe vibhāvetuṃ na sakkoti, tiṭṭhatu puthujjano, sāvakapaccekabuddhānampi avisayā buddhaguṇā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sotāpannā’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.8). Vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho. Atthaparipucchanaṃ paripucchā. Aṭṭhakathāvasena atthassa savanaṃ savanaṃ. Byañjanatthānaṃ sunikkhepasudassanena dhammassa pariharaṇaṃ dhāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sutadhātaparicitānaṃ manasānupekkhanaṃ paccavekkhaṇaṃ. Bahūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā ca avihatattā tā janenti, tāhi vā janitāti puthujjanā. Avighātameva vā jana-saddo vadati. Puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikāti ettha puthū janā satthupaṭiññā etesanti puthujjanāti vacanattho. Puthu…pe… avuṭṭhitāti ettha janetabbā, jāyanti vā etthāti janā, gatiyo. Puthū janā etesanti puthujjanā. Ito pare jāyanti etehīti janā, abhisaṅkhārādayo. Te etesaṃ puthū vijjantīti puthujjanā. Abhisaṅkharaṇādi attho eva vā jana-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Kāmarāgabhavarāgadiṭṭhiavijjā oghā. Rāgaggiādayo santāpā. Teyeva, sabbepi vā kilesā pariḷāhā. Puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattāti ettha jāyatīti jano, rāgo gedhoti evaṃ ādiko. Puthu jano etesanti puthujjanā, puthūsu vā janā jātā rattāti evaṃ rāgādiattho eva vā jana-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Palibuddhāti sambuddhā, upaddutā vā. ‘‘Puthūnaṃ gaṇanapathamatītāna’’ntiādinā puthū janā puthujjanāti dasseti.
世尊之所以被称为“如来”,是因为某些殊胜功德作为根据。为了说明这一点,论中说“以八种原因,世尊是如来”等等。其实世尊的一切名号,都是以功德为根据的。正如所说:巴利
Yehi guṇavisesehi nimittabhūtehi bhagavati tathāgata-saddo pavatto, taṃdassanatthaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato’’tiādimāha. Guṇanemittakāneva hi bhagavato sabbāni nāmāni. Yathāha –
大牟尼具足功德,他的名号多得数不清。
以功德来命名,即使从成千的名字来看也是如此。巴利
‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāmasahassato’’ti. (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1313; udā. aṭṭha. 53; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.76);
在“Tathā āgato”(如此而来)这一句里,这里的“tathā”一词,是通过确定方式来说明譬喻,表示譬喻的成立。“āgata”一词则是通过显示共通性、从殊胜中确立,表示“行道的到来”;它不像“tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgato”(以如实相而来)等句里那样表示“智慧的到来”,也不像“āgato kho mahāsamaṇo, māgadhānaṃ giribbaja”(大沙门已来到摩揭陀的山堡)等句里那样表示“身体的到来”。在这里,当“tathā”一词通过确定方式来说明譬喻时,由于它以悲心为最胜,所以从大悲门入手,把过去诸佛所行的行道作为例子,从共通性上加以显示;因为“yaṃ taṃ”这类词具有必然的关联,所以说“如同一切世间……而来”。接着,为了用《大本经》等中通过大量解说而广为人知、且距离我们最近的毗婆尸等六位正自觉者为例,来说明那条行道,所以说“如同毗婆尸世尊……”。这里的“以彼伟大誓愿”(yena abhinīhārena),是指具足人身、种姓圆满、得见导师、出家、证得神通等功德圆满,以及发愿欲求,具备这八种条件,而以身体发愿、立下大誓愿。因为一切诸佛的身体发愿,都是靠这个誓愿才得以成就。这样,从伟大誓愿的角度显示了“如来”一词的含义之后,现在为了从圆满波罗蜜的角度来说明,就说“如同毗婆尸世尊……乃至咖沙巴世尊圆满布施波罗蜜……”等等。巴利
Tathā āgatoti ettha ākāraniyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo. Sāmaññajotanāya visesāvaṭṭhānato paṭipadāgamanattho āgata-saddo, na ñāṇagamanattho ‘‘tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.12; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.78; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.170; udā. aṭṭha. 18; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.37; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.3; itivu. aṭṭha. 38; mahāni. aṭṭha. 14) viya, nāpi kāyagamanādiattho ‘‘āgato kho mahāsamaṇo, māgadhānaṃ giribbaja’’ntiādīsu (mahāva. 62) viya. Tattha yadākāraniyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo, taṃ karuṇāpadhānattā mahākaruṇāmukhena purimabuddhānaṃ āgamanapaṭipadaṃ udāharaṇavasena sāmaññato dassento yaṃtaṃsaddānaṃ ekantasambandhabhāvato ‘‘yathā sabbaloka…pe… āgatā’’ti āha. Taṃ pana paṭipadaṃ mahāpadānasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 2.4) sambahulaniddesena supākaṭānaṃ āsannānañca vipassīādīnaṃ channaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ vasena nidassento ‘‘yathā vipassī bhagavā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yenaabhinīhārenāti manussattaliṅgasampattihetusatthāradassanapabbajjāabhiññādiguṇasampattiadhikārachandānaṃ vasena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena kāyappaṇidhānamahāpaṇidhānena . Sabbesañhi buddhānaṃ kāyappaṇidhānaṃ imināva abhinīhārena samijjhatīti. Evaṃ mahābhinīhāravasena ‘‘tathāgato’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassetvā idāni pāramīpūraṇavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… kassapo bhagavā dānapāramiṃ pūretvā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,为了让学习经教的人对通往大菩提的修行道路生起善巧,关于诸波罗蜜有这样的详细解说:那么,这些波罗蜜到底是什么?以什么意义称为波罗蜜?它们有多少种?它们的次序是怎样的?它们的相、作用、现起、近因是什么?它们的因是什么?它们的杂染是什么?它们的清净是什么?它们的对立面是什么?它们的修行方法是什么?它们的分类是什么?它们的摄要是什么?成就它们的方法是什么?需要多长时间才能成就?它们的功德利益是什么?它们这些的果报是什么?巴利
Ettha ca suttantikānaṃ mahābodhiyānapaṭipadāya kosallajananatthaṃ pāramīsu ayaṃ vitthārakathā – kā panetā pāramiyo? Kenaṭṭhena pāramiyo? Katividhā cetā? Ko tāsaṃ kamo? Kāni lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānāni? Ko paccayo? Ko saṃkileso? Kiṃ vodānaṃ? Ko paṭipakkho? Kā paṭipatti? Ko vibhāgo? Ko saṅgaho? Ko sampādanūpāyo? Kittakena kālena sampādanaṃ? Ko ānisaṃso? Kiṃ cetāsaṃ phalanti?
对此的解答如下:什么是波罗蜜?不被贪爱、我慢等所损害,又被悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的布施等功德,就是波罗蜜。巴利
Tatridaṃ vissajjanaṃ – kā panetā pāramiyoti. Taṇhāmānādīhi anupahatā karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā dānādayo guṇā pāramiyo.
问:以什么含义称为“波罗蜜”?因为与布施、持戒等殊胜功德相结合,成为众生中最上等的,所以这些最上的大士、菩萨称为“胜者”;属于他们的状态,或者他们所造的业,就是波罗蜜,也就是布施等行为。或者,“胜者”的意思是:圆满并守护布施等功德的人,就是菩萨。属于这位胜者的,或者这位胜者的状态、业,就是波罗蜜,也就是布施等行为本身。或者,他以殊胜功德相结合,把其他众生吸引、系缚在自己身上;或者,他比他人更殊胜地净化、清净了烦恼污垢;或者,他以殊胜方式趋向最殊胜的涅槃;或者,他像以衡量此世那样的殊胜智慧,去衡量、界定他方世界;或者,他把极其殊胜的戒等功德群纳入自己的心相续中;或者,他从自身法身中衡量、摧毁另一类与法身对立、会带来损害的烦恼贼众:因此称为“胜者”,即大士。“属于胜者的”等等,应按照前面所说的方式套用。或者,他在彼岸,即涅槃中净化、清净,也净化众生;或者,他把众生吸引、系缚、连接在那里;或者,他趋向那里,也引导众生前往;或者,他如实了知那里;或者,他把众生投入那里;或者,他在那里衡量、摧毁众生的烦恼之敌:因此称为“波罗蜜”,即大士。属于他的状态,或者他的业,就是“波罗蜜多”,也就是布施等行为本身。按照这个方法,应当理解诸波罗蜜一词的含义。巴利
Kenaṭṭhena pāramiyoti dānasīlādiguṇavisesayogena sattuttamatāya paramā mahāsattā bodhisattā, tesaṃ bhāvo, kammaṃ vā pāramī, dānādikiriyā. Atha vā paratīti paramo, dānādiguṇānaṃ pūrako pālako ca bodhisatto. Paramassa ayaṃ, paramassa vā bhāvo, kammaṃ vā pāramī, dānādikiriyāva. Atha vā paraṃ sattaṃ attani mavati bandhati guṇavisesayogena, paraṃ vā adhikataraṃ majjati sujjhati saṃkilesamalato, paraṃ vā seṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ visesena mayati gacchati, paraṃ vā lokaṃ pamāṇabhūtena ñāṇavisesena idhalokaṃ viya munāti paricchindati, paraṃ vā ativiya sīlādiguṇagaṇaṃ attano santāne minoti pakkhipati, paraṃ vā attabhūtato dhammakāyato aññaṃ, paṭipakkhaṃ vā tadanatthakaraṃ kilesacoragaṇaṃ mināti hiṃsatīti paramo, mahāsatto. ‘‘Paramassa aya’’ntiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Pāre vā nibbāne majjati sujjhati satte ca sodheti, tattha vā satte mavati bandhati yojeti, taṃ vā mayati gacchati gameti ca, munāti vā taṃ yāthāvato, tattha vā satte minoti pakkhipati, kilesāriṃ vā sattānaṃ tattha mināti hiṃsatīti pāramī, mahāpuriso. Tassa bhāvo, kammaṃ vā pāramitā, dānādikiriyāva. Iminā nayena pāramīnaṃ saddattho veditabbo.
有多少种呢?简要地说,有十种,而这些在经文中已经按它们各自的自性出现了。正如经中所说:巴利
Katividhāti saṅkhepato dasavidhā, tā pana pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato āgatāyeva. Yathāha –
正在观察抉择时,最初见到布施波罗蜜……巴利
‘‘Vicinanto tadā dakkhiṃ, paṭhamaṃ dānapārami’’ntiādi (bu. vaṃ. 116).
“尊者,到底有几种法能造就佛陀?” “舍利弗,有十种法能造就佛陀。” “是哪十种呢?” “舍利弗,布施是能造就佛陀的法;持戒、出离、慧、精进、忍耐、真实、决意、慈、舍,都是能造就佛陀的法。舍利弗,这就是十种能造就佛陀的法。” 世尊这样说。善逝这样说之后,导师又接着这样说:巴利
‘‘Kati nu kho bhante buddhakārakā dhammā? Dasa kho sāriputta buddhakārakā dhammā. Katame dasa? Dānaṃ kho sāriputta buddhakārako dhammo, sīlaṃ nekkhammaṃ paññā vīriyaṃ khanti saccamadhiṭṭhānaṃ mettā upekkhā buddhakārako dhammo, ime kho sāriputta dasa buddhakārakā dhammāti. Idamavoca bhagavā, idaṃ vatvāna sugato athāparaṃ etadavoca satthā –
布施、持戒与出离,慧与精进为第五;
忍辱、真实、决意、慈、舍——这些就是那十种。巴利
‘Dānaṃ sīlañca nekkhammaṃ, paññā vīriyena pañcamaṃ; Khanti saccaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, mettupekkhāti te dasā’ti’’.
有些人则说是“六种”,那是就它们(这些波罗蜜)的统摄关系而说的。那种统摄关系,后面会清楚说明。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘chabbidhā’’ti vadanti, taṃ etāsaṃ saṅgahavasena vuttaṃ. So pana saṅgaho parato āvibhavissati.
这些次第是什么呢?这里说的“次第”,是指说法的次第。而这个说法的次第,是以最初的受持为因;受持又是以审察为因。所以,最初是怎样审察、怎样受持的,就按照那样来宣说。其中,布施对持戒有很多帮助,又容易做到,所以最先说布施。布施被持戒所摄持时,就会有大果报、大利益,所以在布施之后紧接着说持戒。持戒被出离所摄持,出离被慧所摄持,慧被精进所摄持,精进被忍耐所摄持,忍耐被谛所摄持,谛被决意所摄持,决意被慈所摄持,慈被舍所摄持时,就会有大果报、大利益,所以在慈之后说舍。不过要知道,舍又被悲所摄持,悲也被舍所摄持。那么,具足大悲的菩萨们,怎么会对众生有舍呢?有些人说:在对适合修舍的对象上,他们有时有舍,但并不是一切地方、一切时候都这样。另一些人则说:他们并不是对众生本身有舍,而是对众生所作的种种伤害有舍。巴利
Ko tāsaṃ kamoti ettha kamo nāma desanākkamo, so ca paṭhamasamādānahetuko, samādānaṃ pavicayahetukaṃ, iti yathā ādimhi pavicitā samādinnā ca, tathā desitā. Tattha ca dānaṃ sīlassa bahūpakāraṃ sukarañcāti taṃ ādimhi vuttaṃ. Dānaṃ sīlapariggahitaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsanti dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Sīlaṃ nekkhammapariggahitaṃ, nekkhammaṃ paññāpariggahitaṃ, paññā vīriyapariggahitā, vīriyaṃ khantipariggahitaṃ, khanti saccapariggahitā, saccaṃ adhiṭṭhānapariggahitaṃ, adhiṭṭhānaṃ mettāpariggahitaṃ, mettā upekkhāpariggahitā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsāti mettānantaraṃ upekkhā vuttā. Upekkhā pana karuṇāpariggahitā, karuṇā ca upekkhāpariggahitāti veditabbā. Kathaṃ pana mahākāruṇikā bodhisattā sattesu upekkhakā hontīti? Upekkhitabbayuttesu kañci kālaṃ upekkhakā honti, na pana sabbattha, sabbadā cāti keci. Apare pana na sattesu upekkhakā, sattakatesu pana vippakāresu upekkhakā hontīti.
还有一种理解方式:布施之所以最先说,是因为它在普通人中也普遍存在,是一切众生共通的修行,果报小,又容易做到。持戒紧接在布施之后说,是因为依戒而使施者与受者清净;先说帮助他人,接着就说停止伤害他人;先说应当做的善行,接着就说不应当做的恶行;先说完财富成就的因,接着就说来世成就的因。出离紧接在持戒之后说,是因为靠出离才能成就和净化持戒;先说完身和语的善行,接着就说意的善行;因为戒清净的人能轻松成就禅那;先说完通过断除行为上的过失来净化加行,接着就说通过断除烦恼上的过失来净化心念;先说完断除违犯,接着就说断除心的缠缚。智慧紧接在出离之后说,是因为出离的成就和清净要靠智慧;也是因为说过没有禅那就没有智慧。定是智慧的直接基础,智慧是定的显现。先说完止的相,接着就说舍的相;先说完利益他人的禅那,接着就说善巧利益他人的方法。精进紧接在智慧之后说,是因为靠精进的努力才能完成智慧的作用;先说完对“众生空”等法的审察堪忍,接着就说为利益众生而精进的殊胜;先说完舍的相,接着就说策励的相;先说完审慎行事,接着就说奋起行动。因为审慎行事的人,奋起行动会带来特殊的果报,所以精进紧接在智慧之后说。巴利
Aparo nayo – pacurajanesupi pavattiyā sabbasattasādhāraṇattā, appaphalattā, sukarattā ca ādimhi dānaṃ vuttaṃ. Sīlenadāyakapaṭiggāhakasuddhito, parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato, kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato, bhogasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānassa anantaraṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Nekkhammena sīlasampattisiddhito, kāyavacīsucaritaṃ vatvā manosucaritavacanato, visuddhasīlassa sukheneva jhānasamijjhanato, kammāparādhappahānena payogasuddhiṃ vatvā kilesāparādhappahānena āsayasuddhivacanato, vītikkamappahānena cittassa pariyuṭṭhānappahānavacanato ca sīlassa anantaraṃ nekkhammaṃ vuttaṃ. Paññāya nekkhammassa siddhiparisuddhito, jhānābhāve paññābhāvavacanato. Samādhipadaṭṭhānā hi paññā, paññāpaccupaṭṭhāno ca samādhi. Samathanimittaṃ vatvā upekkhānimittavacanato, parahitajjhānena parahitakaraṇūpāyakosallavacanato ca nekkhammassa anantaraṃ paññā vuttā. Vīriyārambhena paññākiccasiddhito, sattasuññatādhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ vatvā sattahitāya ārambhassa acchariyatāvacanato, upekkhānimittaṃ vatvā paggahanimittavacanato, nisammakāritaṃ vatvā uṭṭhānavacanato ca. Nisammakārino hi uṭṭhānaṃ phalavisesamāvahatīti paññāya anantaraṃ vīriyaṃ vuttaṃ.
以精进成就忍耐。因为精进者由于已经发起精进,能够战胜由众生种种造作所带来的苦而安住,这是因为精进具有忍耐这一庄严。精进者的忍耐才显得庄严。说了策励之相之后,接着从止的相来说,是为了说明由于过度策励而断除掉举的过失。因为以法审察的忍耐能断除掉举的过失。说了精进者应当持续不断地用功之后,再说忍耐深厚的人不掉举、能持续不断地用功。说了不放逸者在开始做利益他人的事业时没有求回报的渴爱之后,再说如实审察法时渴爱便不存在。在开始利益他人的事业时,即使面对他人施加的极重之苦也能忍受,基于这个意义,在精进之后紧接着说忍耐。以真实,忍耐才能长久坚持;说了对加害者也能忍耐之后,再说以不欺诳来作利益他人的事;说了忍耐不因诽谤之言而动摇、说真实语、不舍弃之后;说了对有情的空性等法的审察忍耐之后,再说由此增长智的真实,基于这个意义,在忍耐之后紧接着说真实。以决意成就真实。因为决意不动摇的人,远离才能成就。说了不欺诳之后,再说在这一点上不动摇。因为与真实相连的人,在布施等善行中,完全按照自己的承诺,就这样不动摇地去做。说了智的真实之后,再说在种种资粮上确立并坚持。因为具有如实智的人,在成佛的资粮上坚定安住,并且能将这些资粮圆满完成,不被对立面所动摇,因此在真实之后紧接着说决意。以慈成就利益他人的承担与决意,说了决意之后,再说带来利益。因为安住于成佛资粮的决意者,就是安住于慈的人。因为不动摇的决意不会被承担所动摇,也因为决意由承担而生起,所以在决意之后紧接着说慈。以舍使慈清净,说了给众生带来利益之后,再说对众生的过失保持中立;说了修慈之后,再说以慈为等流而修;又因为“即使对想要利益自己的众生也保持舍”这一稀有功德,所以在慈之后紧接着说舍。应当这样理解这些法门的次第。巴利
Vīriyena titikkhāsiddhito. Vīriyavā hi āraddhavīriyattā sattasaṅkhārehi upanītaṃ dukkhaṃ abhibhuyya viharati vīriyassa titikkhālaṅkārabhāvato. Vīriyavato hi titikkhā sobhati. Paggahanimittaṃ vatvā samathanimittavacanato, accārambhena uddhaccadosappahānavacanato. Dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā hi uddhaccadoso pahīyati. Vīriyavato sātaccakaraṇavacanato. Khantibahulo hi anuddhato sātaccakārī hoti. Appamādavato parahitakiriyārambhe paccupakārataṇhābhāvavacanato. Yāthāvato dhammanijjhāne hi sati taṇhā na hoti. Parahitārambhe paramepi parakatadukkhasahanabhāvavacanato ca vīriyassa anantaraṃ khanti vuttā . Saccena khantiyā cirādhiṭṭhānato, apakārino apakārakhantiṃ vatvā tadupakārakaraṇe avisaṃvādavacanato, khantiyā apavādavācāvikampanena bhūtavāditāya avijahanavacanato, sattasuññatādhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ vatvā tadupabrūhitañāṇasaccavacanato ca khantiyā anantaraṃ saccaṃ vuttaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānena saccasiddhito. Acalādhiṭṭhānassa hi virati sijjhati. Avisaṃvāditaṃ vatvā tattha acalabhāvavacanato. Saccasandho hi dānādīsu paṭiññānurūpaṃ niccalova pavattati. Ñāṇasaccaṃ vatvā sambhāresu pavattiniṭṭhāpanavacanato. Yathābhūtañāṇavā hi bodhisambhāresu adhitiṭṭhati, te ca niṭṭhāpeti paṭipakkhehi akampiyabhāvatoti saccassa anantaraṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Mettāya parahitakaraṇasamādānādhiṭṭhānasiddhito, adhiṭṭhānaṃ vatvā hitūpasaṃhāravacanato. Bodhisambhāre hi adhitiṭṭhamāno mettāvihārī hoti. Acalādhiṭṭhānassa samādānāvikopanato, samādānasambhavato ca adhiṭṭhānassa anantaraṃ mettā vuttā. Upekkhāya mettāvisuddhito, sattesu hitūpasaṃhāraṃ vatvā tadaparādhesu udāsīnatāvacanato, mettābhāvanaṃ vatvā tannissandabhāvanāvacanato, ‘‘hitakāmasattepi upekkhako’’ti acchariyaguṇabhāvavacanato ca mettāya anantaraṃ upekkhā vuttāti evametāsaṃ kamo veditabbo.
这些波罗蜜的相、味、现起和足处分别是什么?在这里,先总体地说:一切波罗蜜都以利益他人为相,以饶益他人为味,或者以毫不动摇为味,以希求他人利益为现起,或者以成就佛果为现起,以大悲心为足处,或者以悲悯与善巧方便为足处。巴利
Kāni lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānānīti? Ettha avisesena tāva sabbāpi pāramiyo parānuggahalakkhaṇā, paresaṃ upakārakaraṇarasā, avikampanarasā vā, hitesitāpaccupaṭṭhānā, buddhattapaccupaṭṭhānā vā, mahākaruṇāpadaṭṭhānā, karuṇūpāyakosallapadaṭṭhānā vā.
特别地,因为以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的、舍己利而施予他人的思心所,就是布施波罗蜜。以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的身善行和语善行,从含义上说就是远离不应做的、做应做的思心所等,这是持戒波罗蜜。以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的、以见过失为先导、从欲有中出离的心生起,是出离波罗蜜。以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的、对诸法的共相与别相的觉知通达,是智慧波罗蜜。以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的、以身与心发起利益他人的行动,是精进波罗蜜。以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的、能忍受众生与诸行的过失、以无嗔为主导而如此现行的心生起,是忍耐波罗蜜。以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的、具有远离之思等类别的不欺诳,是真实波罗蜜。以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的、对所承担之事坚定不移而如此现行的心生起,是决意波罗蜜。以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的、为世间带来利益,从含义上说就是无嗔,这是慈爱波罗蜜。以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持的、能摧破贪著与嗔恨、对可意和不可意的众生与诸行平等而转起的,是舍波罗蜜。巴利
Visesena pana yasmā karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā attupakaraṇapariccāgacetanā dānapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ kāyavacīsucaritaṃ atthato akattabbavirati, kattabbakaraṇacetanādayo ca sīlapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamo kāmabhavehi nikkhamanacittuppādo nekkhammapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito dhammānaṃ sāmaññavisesalakkhaṇāvabodho paññāpāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito kāyacittehi parahitārambho vīriyapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ sattasaṅkhārāparādhasahanaṃ adosappadhāno tadākārappavatto cittuppādo khantipāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ viraticetanādibhedaṃ avisaṃvādanaṃ saccapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ acalasamādānādhiṭṭhānaṃ tadākārappavatto cittuppādo adhiṭṭhānapāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito lokassa hitūpasaṃhāro atthato abyāpādo mettāpāramitā. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā anunayapaṭighaviddhaṃsinī iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu sattasaṅkhāresu samappavatti upekkhāpāramitā.
因此,布施以舍弃为特相,以摧毁对所施之物的贪著为作用,以不执著为现起,或以成就有的圆满与非有的圆满为现起,以应当舍弃的事物为近因。戒以戒除为特相,以等持为特相,以安立为特相,这样说。以摧毁破戒为作用,或以无过失为作用,以清净为现起,以惭与愧为近因。出离以从欲乐和从有中出离为特相,以阐明它们的过患为作用,以由此背离它们为现起,以悚惧为近因。慧以如实通达为特相,或以无失误的通达为特相,就像善射者射箭那样迅速无误地通达;以照亮所缘为作用,就像灯一样;以不迷惑为现起,就像在荒野中善于指路的人;以定为近因,或以四圣谛为近因。精进以勇猛为特相,以支持为作用,以不消沉为现起,以激发精进之事为近因,或以悚惧为近因。忍耐以堪忍为特相,以承受可意与不可意为作用,以容忍为现起,或以不违逆为现起,以如实见为近因。真实以不欺诳为特相,以如实阐明为作用,以良善为现起,以正直为近因。决意以对菩提资粮的坚定为特相,以克服它们的对立面为作用,以在那些资粮上不动摇为现起,以菩提资粮为近因。慈以利益的行相为特相,以带来利益为作用,或以消除嗔恨为作用,以柔和为现起,以看见众生的可爱之处为近因。舍以中舍的行相为特相,以平等看待为作用,以平息嗔恨与贪著为现起,以审察业为自己的所有为近因。在这里,布施等法被悲悯与善巧方便所摄持这一点,应当以它们对舍弃等特相具有特殊作用来说明,因为正是由此它们才获得波罗蜜的称号。巴利
Tasmā pariccāgalakkhaṇaṃ dānaṃ, deyyadhamme lobhaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, anāsattipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, bhavavibhavasampattipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ vā, pariccajitabbavatthupadaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlanalakkhaṇaṃ sīlaṃ, samādhānalakkhaṇaṃ, patiṭṭhānalakkhaṇañcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dussīlyaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, anavajjarasaṃ vā, soceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, hirottappapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāmato bhavato ca nikkhamanalakkhaṇaṃ nekkhammaṃ, tadādīnavavibhāvanarasaṃ , tato eva vimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, saṃvegapadaṭṭhānaṃ . Yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā paññā, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā vā kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya, visayobhāsanarasā padīpo viya, asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā araññagatasudesako viya, samādhipadaṭṭhānā, catusaccapadaṭṭhānā vā. Ussāhalakkhaṇaṃ vīriyaṃ, upatthambhanarasaṃ, asaṃsīdanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, vīriyārambhavatthu (a. ni. 8.80) padaṭṭhānaṃ, saṃvegapadaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Khamanalakkhaṇā khanti, iṭṭhāniṭṭhasahanarasā, adhivāsanapaccupaṭṭhānā, avirodhapaccupaṭṭhānā vā, yathābhūtadassanapadaṭṭhānā. Avisaṃvādanalakkhaṇaṃ saccaṃ, yāthāvavibhāvanarasaṃ [yathāsabhāvavibhāvanarasaṃ (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāya)], sādhutāpaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, soraccapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Bodhisambhāresu adhiṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ paṭipakkhābhibhavanarasaṃ, tattha acalatāpaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, bodhisambhārapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Hitākārappavattilakkhaṇā mettā, hitūpasaṃhārarasā, āghātavinayanarasā vā, sommabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā, sattānaṃ manāpabhāvadassanapadaṭṭhānā. Majjhattākārappavattilakkhaṇā upekkhā, samabhāvadassanarasā, paṭighānunayavūpasamapaccupaṭṭhānā, kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇapadaṭṭhānā. Ettha ca karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitatā dānādīnaṃ pariccāgādilakkhaṇassa visesanabhāvena vattabbā, yato tāni pāramīsaṅkhyaṃ labhantīti.
以发愿为缘,也就是以“发愿”作为缘。这个发愿,是由“人身、性别具足”等八法聚合所成就的,也就是以“已渡者当令他人渡,已解脱者当令他人解脱,已觉悟者当令他人觉悟,已清净者当令他人清净,已调御者当令他人调御,已寂静者当令他人寂静,已安稳者当令他人安稳,已般涅槃者当令他人般涅槃”等心念所生起的发愿。总体而言,这个发愿是一切波罗蜜的缘。因为由它生起之后,诸大人才能对波罗蜜进行审择、现起、受持、决定和完成。巴利
Kopaccayoti abhinīhāro paccayo. Yo hi ayaṃ ‘‘manussattaṃ liṅgasampattī’’tiādi (bu. vaṃ. 2.59) aṭṭhadhammasamodhānasampādito ‘‘tiṇṇo tāreyyaṃ, mutto moceyyaṃ, buddho bodheyyaṃ, suddho sodheyyaṃ, danto dameyyaṃ, santo sameyyaṃ, assattho assāseyyaṃ, parinibbuto parinibbāpeyya’’ntiādinā (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāya) pavatto abhinīhāro, so avisesena sabbapāramīnaṃ paccayo. Tappavattiyā hi uddhaṃ pāramīnaṃ pavicayupaṭṭhānasamādānādhiṭṭhānanipphattiyo mahāpurisānaṃ sambhavanti.
正如发愿是缘,大悲和方便善巧也是缘。其中,方便善巧指的是能把布施等转成觉悟资粮的慧。正是靠着悲悯和方便善巧,这些大士才不顾自己的安乐,不间断地投入利他之行,即使行持极难行的伟大菩萨行也不退缩,并且在见佛、闻法、忆念佛陀等事上,成为众生获得利益与安乐的因。确实,靠慧成就佛的证悟,靠悲悯成就佛的事业。靠慧自己渡越,靠悲悯渡越他人。靠慧遍知他人的苦,靠悲悯着手解除他人的苦。靠慧对苦生起厌离,靠悲悯接受苦。同样,靠慧面向般涅槃,靠悲悯却不证入其中。同样,靠悲悯面向轮回,靠慧却不耽著其中。靠慧对一切事物离染,但因为随顺悲悯,所以并非不投入摄受一切众生;靠悲悯悯念一切众生,但因为随顺慧,所以并非不在一切处离染其心。靠慧没有我执和我所执,靠悲悯没有懈怠和怯弱。同样,依慧与悲悯的次第,便有自利利他、坚忍与英迈、不自苦不苦他、自利利他圆满、无畏与可畏、以法为主与以世间为主、知恩报恩、断除痴与贪、成就明与行、成就力与自信。由于慧与悲悯是成就一切波罗蜜果的殊胜方便,所以是波罗蜜的缘。这两者不仅像波罗蜜那样,也是发愿的缘。巴利
Yathā ca abhinīhāro, evaṃ mahākaruṇā, upāyakosallañca. Tattha upāyakosallaṃ nāma dānādīnaṃ bodhisambhārabhāvassa nimittabhūtā paññā, yāhi karuṇūpāyakosallatāhi mahāpurisānaṃ attasukhanirapekkhatā, nirantaraṃ parahitakaraṇapasutatā, sudukkarehipi mahābodhisattacaritehi visādābhāvo, pasādasambuddhidassanasavanānussaraṇāvatthāsupi sattānaṃ hitasukhapaṭilābhahetubhāvo ca sampajjati. Tathā hi paññāya buddhabhāvasiddhi, karuṇāya buddhakammasiddhi. Paññāya sayaṃ tarati, karuṇāya pare tāreti. Paññāya paradukkhaṃ parijānāti, karuṇāya paradukkhapaṭikāraṃ ārabhati. Paññāya ca dukkhe nibbindati, karuṇāya dukkhaṃ sampaṭicchati. Tathā paññāya parinibbānābhimukho hoti, karuṇāya taṃ na pāpuṇāti. Tathā karuṇāya saṃsārābhimukho hoti , paññāya tatra nābhiramati. Paññāya ca sabbattha virajjati, karuṇānugatattā na ca na sabbesaṃ anuggahāya pavatto, karuṇāya sabbepi anukampati, paññānugatattā na ca na sabbattha virattacitto. Paññāya ca ahaṃkāramamaṃkārābhāvo, karuṇāya ālasiyadīnatābhāvo. Tathā paññākaruṇāhi yathākkamaṃ attaparanāthatā, dhīravīrabhāvo, anattantapaaparantapatā, attahitaparahitanipphatti, nibbhayābhiṃsanakabhāvo, dhammādhipatilokādhipatitā, kataññupubbakāribhāvo, mohataṇhāvigamo, vijjācaraṇasiddhi, balavesārajjanipphattīti sabbassāpi pāramitāphalassa visesena upāyabhāvato paññākaruṇā pāramīnaṃ paccayo. Idañca dvayaṃ pāramīnaṃ viya paṇidhānassāpi paccayo.
同样地,应当知道,精进、聪慧、安住、利益行也是波罗蜜的缘;因为它们作为成佛的生起之处,所以被称为“佛地”。正如所说的:巴利
Tathā ussāhaummaṅgaavatthānahitacariyā ca pāramīnaṃ paccayoti veditabbā, yā buddhabhāvassa uppattiṭṭhānatāya ‘‘buddhabhūmiyo’’ti pavuccanti. Yathāha –
尊者,佛地有几种?舍利弗,佛地有四种。是哪四种?有精进与努力,有慧的修习与抉择,有安住与决意,有慈的修习与利益行。舍利弗,这就是四种佛地。巴利
‘‘Kati pana bhante buddhabhūmiyo? Catasso kho sāriputta buddhabhūmiyo. Katamā catasso? Ussāho ca hoti vīriyaṃ, umaṅgo ca hoti paññābhāvanā, avatthānañca hoti adhiṭṭhānaṃ, mettābhāvanā ca hoti hitacariyā. Imā kho sāriputta catasso buddhabhūmiyo’’ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.khaggavisāṇasuttavaṇṇanāyampi).
同样地,出离、远离、无贪、无嗔、无痴、出离解脱这六种分类就是六种意乐。经中确实这样说:巴利
Tathā nekkhammapavivekaalobhādosāmohanissaraṇappabhedā cha ajjhāsayā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
菩萨以出离为意乐,所以对诸欲见到过患;以远离为意乐,所以对聚会交往见到过患;以无贪为意乐,所以对贪见到过患;以无瞋为意乐,所以对瞋见到过患;以无痴为意乐,所以对痴见到过患;以出离解脱为意乐,所以对一切存在见到过患。巴利
‘‘Nekkhammajjhāsayā ca bodhisattā kāme dosadassāvino, paviveka…pe… saṅgaṇikāya, alobha…pe… lobhe, adosa…pe… dose, amoha…pe… mohe, nissaraṇajjhāsayā ca bodhisattā sabbabhavesu dosadassāvino’’ti (visuddhi. aṭṭha. 1.49 vākyakhandhepi).
因此要知道,这六种意乐就是菩萨布施等善行的条件。因为如果不在贪等烦恼中看到过患,又没有无贪等善法力量的增强,布施等波罗蜜就不可能生起。正是由于无贪等善法力量的增强,心才倾向于施舍等,这才叫作无贪意乐等。就像这六种意乐一样,布施意乐等也是如此。正如所说的:巴利
Tasmā ete bodhisattānaṃ cha ajjhāsayā dānādīnaṃ paccayāti veditabbā. Na hi lobhādīsu ādīnavadassanena, alobhādiadhikabhāvena ca vinā dānādipāramiyo sambhavanti. Alobhādīnañhi adhikabhāvena pariccāgādininnacittatā alobhajjhāsayāditāti. Yathā cete, evaṃ dānajjhāsayatādayopi. Yathāha –
尊者,行于觉悟之路的菩萨们有几种意乐?舍利弗,行于觉悟之路的菩萨们有十种意乐。哪十种呢?舍利弗,菩萨因为看到悭吝的过患,所以有布施的意乐;……因为看到苦乐中的过患,所以有舍的意乐。巴利
‘‘Kati pana bhante bodhāya carantānaṃ bodhisattānaṃ ajjhāsayā? Dasa kho sāriputta bodhāya carantānaṃ bodhisattānaṃ ajjhāsayā. Katame dasa? Dānajjhāsayā sāriputta bodhisattā macchere dosadassāvino, sīla…pe… upekkhajjhāsayā sāriputta bodhisattā sukhadukkhesu dosadassāvino’’ti.
在这些情况里,先看到悭吝、不守戒、贪欲、疑惑、懈怠、不能忍耐、说假话、没有决意、嗔恨、苦乐等过患,心就会倾向于布施等善行;这种心态叫做布施意乐等,它们是布施等波罗蜜生起的原因。同样地,在不能舍弃与能舍弃等情况下,依次观察过患和功德,就是布施等波罗蜜的助缘。巴利
Etesu hi maccheraasaṃvarakāmavicikicchākosajjaakkhantivisaṃvādaanadhiṭṭhānabyāpāda- sukhadukkhasaṅkhātesu ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamā dānādininnacittatāsaṅkhātā dānajjhāsayatādayo dānādipāramīnaṃ nibbattiyā kāraṇanti . Tathā apariccāgapariccāgādīsu yathākkamaṃ ādīnavānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇā dānādipāramīnaṃ paccayo.
在这里,应当这样观察:众生把心缠缚在田地、宅地、金银、牛、水牛、奴仆、婢女、子女、妻子等财物上,而这些田地等事物作为感官欲乐的对象,被许多人极力追求;它们是国王、盗贼等人共同能夺走的;是争吵的根源;会招来仇敌;没有坚实可靠之处;在获取和守护它们的过程中,会成为伤害他人的原因;它们的本质就是毁灭,会带来忧愁等种种灾祸;而且,对这些东西的贪著,还会让内心被悭吝的污垢所缠缚,从而可能投生到恶趣。像这样,这些事物确实会带来种种广大的祸患。只有舍弃它们,才是唯一的安全之道。因此,在舍弃这件事上,应当不放逸。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ paccavekkhaṇāvidhi – khettavatthuhiraññasuvaṇṇagomahiṃsadāsidāsaputtadārādipariggahabyāsattacittānaṃ sattānaṃ khettādīnaṃ vatthukāmabhāvena bahupatthanīyabhāvato, rājacorādisādhāraṇabhāvato, vivādādhiṭṭhānato, sapattakaraṇato, nissārato, paṭilābhaparipālanesu paraviheṭhanahetuto, vināsanimittañca sokādianekavihitabyasanāvahato, tadāsattinidānañca maccheramalapariyuṭṭhitacittānaṃ apāyūpapattisambhavatoti evaṃ vividhavipulānatthāvahā ete atthā nāma, tesaṃ pariccāgoyeveko sotthibhāvoti pariccāge appamādo karaṇīyo.
再者,应当这样观察:乞求者向我乞求时,因为向我透露了他自己的秘密,所以是我的可信之人;他拿走本应舍弃的、属于自己的财物而前往他世,所以是我前往他世的教导者;就像房屋被死亡之火燃烧时,在这被死亡之火燃烧的世间,他是帮我搬出自己财物的同伴;对于所搬出的财物,他是审察和保管之处;在名为布施的善业中,他既是同伴,又因为最上、极难证得的佛地成就以他为因,所以是最殊胜的善知识。巴利
Apica ‘‘yācako yācamāno attano guyhassa ācikkhanato mayhaṃ vissāsiko’’ti ca ‘‘pahāya gamanīyaṃ attano santakaṃ gahetvā paralokaṃ yāhīti mayhaṃ upadesako’’ti ca ‘‘āditte viya agāre maraṇagginā āditte loke tato mayhaṃ santakassa apavāhakasahāyo’’ti ca ‘‘apavāhitassa cassa nijjhāyanikkhepaṭṭhānabhūto’’ti ca ‘‘dānasaṅkhāte kalyāṇakammasmiṃ sahāyabhāvato, sabbasampattīnaṃ aggabhūtāya paramadullabhāya buddhabhūmiyā sampattihetubhāvato ca paramo kalyāṇamitto’’ti ca paccavekkhitabbaṃ.
同样,应当这样反复观察:他以高尚的行为对我表示恭敬,所以我要让这份恭敬不落空。生命必定会坏灭,就算没人来求,我也应该布施,更何况有人来求呢。即使是有崇高意愿的人,也要经过寻找才值得布施,而他却自己找上门来,这是我的福报。借着乞求者来求布施这件事,其实是他对我的摄受。就像对我一样,整个世间的一切众生都应该由我来摄受。如果没有乞求者,我的布施波罗蜜怎么能圆满呢。正是为了乞求者,我才应该把一切所有都收摄好。乞求者们什么时候才能不用我开口,就自己来拿我的东西呢。我怎样才能成为乞求者喜爱、称心的人。或者他们怎样才能成为我喜爱、称心的人。我怎样才能在布施的时候,以及布施之后,内心满足、欢喜、生起喜悦和愉悦。怎样才能既有乞求者,又能让我的布施意愿变得崇高。我怎样才能在没被乞求的时候,就明白乞求者的心意而布施给他。有财物又有乞求者的时候,如果不肯舍弃,那是对我极大的欺骗。我又怎样才能为了乞求者舍弃自己的肢体乃至生命。巴利
Tathā ‘‘uḷāre kammani anenāhaṃ sambhāvito, tasmā sā sambhāvanā avitathā kātabbā’’ti ca ‘‘ekantabheditāya jīvitassa ayācitenapi mayā dātabbaṃ, pageva yācitenā’’ti ca ‘‘uḷārajjhāsayehi gavesitvāpi dātabbo, sayamevāgato mama puññenā’’ti ca ‘‘yācakassa dānāpadesena mayhamevāyamanuggaho’’ti ca ‘‘ahaṃ viya ayaṃ sabbopi loko mayā anuggahetabbo’’ti ca ‘‘asati yācake kathaṃ mayhaṃ dānapāramī pūreyyā’’ti ca ‘‘yācakānamevatthāya mayā sabbo pariggahetabbo’’ti ca ‘‘ayācitvā mama santakaṃ yācakā sayameva kadā gaṇheyyu’’nti ca ‘‘kathamahaṃ yācakānaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vā te mayhaṃ piyā cassu manāpā’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vāhaṃ dadamāno, datvāpi ca attamano assaṃ pamudito pītisomanassajāto’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vā me yācakā bhaveyyuṃ, uḷāro ca dānajjhāsayo’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vāhamayācitoyeva yācakānaṃ hadayamaññāya dadeyya’’nti ca ‘‘sati dhane yācake ca apariccāgo mahatī mayhaṃ vañcanā’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vāhaṃ attano aṅgāni jīvitaṃ vāpi yācakānaṃ pariccajeyya’’nti ca paccavekkhitabbaṃ.
另外,应该这样想:“所谓利益,会跟着一个无所期待的布施者,就像谷壳跟着一个无所期待的扬谷人一样。”对于利益,应当生起无所期待的心。如果来乞求的是自己喜爱的人,就该生起欢喜:“我爱的人来向我乞求了。”如果来乞求的是无关的中等人,就该生起欢喜:“这个人来向我乞求,凭这次舍弃,他一定会成为我的朋友。”因为布施的人本来就会讨乞求者的喜欢。如果来乞求的是仇人,那就更该生起欢喜:“我的对头来向我乞求了,他这样向我乞求,凭这次舍弃,仇人也会变得可亲,成为朋友。”这样一来,无论对喜爱的人、无关的中等人还是仇人,都要先以慈心为主导,再安住在悲心中,然后才去布施。巴利
Apica ‘‘attho nāmāyaṃ nirapekkhaṃ dāyakaṃ anugacchati yathā taṃ nirapekkhaṃ khepakaṃ kiṭako’’ti atthe nirapekkhatāya cittaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Yācamāno pana yadi piyapuggalo hoti, ‘‘piyo maṃ yācatī’’ti somanassaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Atha udāsīnapuggalo hoti, ‘‘ayaṃ maṃ yācamāno addhā iminā pariccāgena mitto hotī’’ti somanassaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Dadantopi hi yācakānaṃ piyo hotīti. Atha pana verīpuggalo yācati, ‘‘paccatthiko maṃ yācati, ayaṃ maṃ yācamāno addhā iminā pariccāgena verīpi piyo mitto hotī’’ti visesato somanassaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Evaṃ piyapuggale viya majjhattaverīpuggalesupi mettāpubbaṅgamaṃ karuṇaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāva dātabbaṃ.
如果因为长时间反复熏习贪欲,面对可布施的东西时生起了贪法,那么这位已经发下菩萨誓愿的人就应该这样反思:善士,你在为证得正觉而发愿修行时,不是已经把身体舍弃了,用来利益一切众生吗?而这样的舍弃本身就是福德。可你现在竟然对外在的事物产生强烈执著,这就像大象洗澡一样,洗了又脏,毫无意义。所以你不应该对任何东西生起执著。就像一棵大药树,需要树根的人来取根,需要树皮、树干、树枝、心材、枝条、叶子、花、果的人各自来取,那棵树不会想:他们拿走的是我的东西。同样,我为了利益一切世间而努力,当这具充满大苦、不知感恩、永远不净的身体被用来利益他人时,我不应该生起哪怕一丝一毫的错误念头。内在和外在的四大种,本质上都是必定会坏灭、消散、毁灭的,这里又有什么差别呢?所谓这是我的、这是我、这是我的我,这种执著纯粹是愚痴在作祟。所以,就像对待外在的东西一样,对自己内在的手、脚、眼睛等,以及血肉等,也应该无所顾恋,怀着若有需要的人就让他们拿去吧这样的舍弃之心。当他这样反思时,这位为了菩提已经发心、对身体和生命都无所顾恋的人,他的身业、语业、意业就会轻而易举地变得非常清净。身语意业清净的人,活命也清净,安住在正法修行中,具备求取和运用资具的善巧,能通过更多地布施可施之物,以及给予无畏施和正法施,来利益一切众生。以上就是对布施波罗蜜的观察方式。巴利
Sace panassa cirakālaparibhāvitattā lobhassa deyyadhammavisayā lobhadhammā uppajjeyyuṃ, tena bodhisattapaṭiññena iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘nanu tayā sappurisa sambodhāya abhinīhāraṃ karontena sabbasattānaṃ upakāratthāya ayaṃ kāyo nissaṭṭho, tappariccāgamayañca puññaṃ, tattha nāma te bāhirepi vatthusmiṃ atisaṅgappavatti hatthisinānasadisī hoti, tasmā tayā na katthaci saṅgo uppādetabbo. Seyyathāpi nāma mahato bhesajjarukkhassa tiṭṭhato mūlaṃ mūlatthikā haranti, papaṭikaṃ, tacaṃ, khandhaṃ, viṭapaṃ, sāraṃ, sākhaṃ, palāsaṃ, pupphaṃ, phalaṃ phalatthikā haranti, na tassa rukkhassa ‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ ete harantī’’ti vitakkasamudācāro hoti, evameva sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpajjantena mayā mahādukkhe akataññuke niccāsucimhi kāye paresaṃ upakārāya viniyujjamāne aṇumattopi micchāvitakko na uppādetabbo, ko vā ettha viseso ajjhattikabāhiresu mahābhūtesu ekantabhedanavikiraṇaviddhaṃsanadhammesu, kevalaṃ pana sammohavijambhitametaṃ, yadidaṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti abhiniveso. Tasmā bāhiresu viya ajjhattikesupi karacaraṇanayanādīsu , maṃsādīsu ca anapekkhena hutvā ‘taṃtadatthikā harantū’ti nissaṭṭhacittena bhavitabba’’nti. Evaṃ paṭisañcikkhato cassa bodhāya pahitattassa kāyajīvitesu nirapekkhassa appakasireneva kāyavacīmanokammāni suvisuddhāni honti. So visuddhakāyavacīmanokammanto visuddhājīvo ñāyapaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhito, āyāpāyupāyakosallasamannāgamena bhiyyoso mattāya deyyadhammapariccāgena, abhayadānasaddhammadānehi ca sabbasatte anuggaṇhituṃ samattho hotīti. Ayaṃ tāva dānapāramiyaṃ paccavekkhaṇānayo.
对于戒波罗蜜,应当这样观察:这个戒,是能洗净烦恼污垢的净水,而恒河的水等是洗不掉这些污垢的;是能消除贪欲等热恼的对治法,而栴檀香等是除不掉这些热恼的;是善士们独有的殊胜庄严,与项链、宝冠、耳环等大众装饰品截然不同;是遍满一切方向的天然妙香;是随顺一切时节的芬芳香气;是能带来被刹帝利大富长者乃至诸天恭敬礼遇等果报的无上调伏咒语;是登上四天王天等天界的阶梯;是成就禅那与神通的方法;是通往涅槃大城的道路;是声闻菩提、辟支菩提、正等正觉的立足之处。无论想要什么、希求什么,它都能使这一切得以实现,因此它甚至胜过如意宝珠和如意树等。世尊确实这样说过:“比丘们,具戒者的心确立,因为清净而得以成就。”还有另外的说法:“比丘们,如果比丘希望被同梵行者喜爱、称心、尊重、恭敬,就应当圆满持戒。”同样,“阿难,善戒能带来不追悔的利益”,“在家众,具戒者、戒成就者获得这五种利益”。应当依据这些经文来观察戒的功德,并依据《火堆喻经》等经典来观察破戒的过患。巴利
Sīlapāramiyaṃ pana evaṃ paccavekkhitabbaṃ – idañhi sīlaṃ nāma gaṅgodakādīhi visodhetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa dosamalassa vikkhālanajalaṃ, haricandanādīhi vinetuṃ asakkuṇeyyarāgādipariḷāhavinayanaṃ, hāramakuṭakuṇḍalādīhi pacurajanālaṅkārehi asādhāraṇo sādhūnaṃ alaṅkāraviseso, sabbadisāvāyanato akittimo, sabbakālānurūpo ca surabhigandho, khattiyamahāsālādīhi devatāhi ca vandanīyādibhāvāvahanato paramo vasīkaraṇamanto, cātumahārājikādi devalokārohanasopānapanti, jhānābhiññānaṃ adhigamupāyo, nibbānamahānagarassa sampāpakamaggo, sāvakabodhipaccekabodhisammāsambodhīnaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūmi, yaṃ yaṃ vā panicchitaṃ patthitaṃ, tassa tassa samijjhanūpāyabhāvato cintāmaṇikapparukkhādike ca atiseti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ijjhati bhikkhave sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’’ti (a. ni. 8.35). Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce bhikkhave bhikkhu sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo ca assaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cāti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.61), tathā ‘‘avippaṭisāratthāni kho ānanda kusalāni sīlānī’’ti (a. ni. 10.1; 11.1), ‘‘pañcime gahapatayo ānisaṃsā sīlavato sīlasampadāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.150; udā. 76; mahāva. 185) suttānañca vasena sīlassa guṇā paccavekkhitabbā, tathā aggikkhandhopamasuttādīnaṃ (a. ni. 7.72) vasena sīlavirahe ādīnavā.
应当从这些方面来观察戒德:它能生起喜与悦;它能让人免于自责、他人责备、刑罚和恶趣的恐惧;它受到智者的称赞;它是无悔的根源;它是最安稳的依靠;它在出身、学识、权势、寿命、地位、亲族和朋友等世间成就方面都更为殊胜。
因为具戒的人,由于自己戒德圆满,会生起极大的喜与悦,心想:“我确实做了善事,做了好事,做了保护自己的事。”同样,具戒的人不会自己责备自己,智者也不会责备他,刑罚和恶趣的恐惧根本不会出现。智者会称赞说:“具戒的人是有善法的人。”与此相反,破戒的人心中生起的追悔——“我确实造了恶,做了残忍的事,犯了罪”——在具戒的人那里根本不存在。
戒以不放逸为依处,通过避免财富损失等途径成就广大利益,是吉祥的,所以是最上的安稳处。即使出身低微,具戒的人也会受到刹帝利大富长者等人的礼敬,因此戒德的成就是家世成就所比不上的。经中“大王,你怎么想?假如这里有一个你的奴仆、为你做工的人……”等话,就是证明。
戒不像盗贼等所能夺走,能跟随人到下一世,能产生大果报,又是止、观等功德的依处,所以胜过外在的财富。因为戒是最上心自在的依处,所以也胜过刹帝利等的权势。戒在各类众生中,比起权势,更胜过寿命——因为具戒者即使只活一天,也胜过活百岁;而且,如果活着却舍弃了修行,那就如同死了,所以戒比寿命更殊胜。戒能带来连敌人也感到可亲的相貌,又不被衰老、疾病等所压倒,所以胜过容貌的成就。戒能在宫殿、高楼等不同场所,在国王、太子、将军等不同地位中带来殊胜的安乐,所以胜过这些地位。戒能对天性清净、亲近身边的人、亲族和朋友都带来究竟的利益,又能跟随到下一世,所以胜过亲族和朋友。法句经“母亲父亲不能做到的事”等话,就是证明。
同样,象、马、车等种种事物,以及咒语、药方、护身符等,都难以守护自身;而戒以守护自身的方式,比这些更殊胜,因为戒依赖于自己,不依赖于他人,且所缘广大。因此说“法确实保护行法的人”等话。
这样,当人观察戒具有如此种种功德时,戒德尚未圆满的便能圆满,尚未清净的便能清净。巴利
Pītisomanassanimittato, attānuvādaparānuvādadaṇḍaduggatibhayābhāvato, viññūhi pāsaṃsabhāvato, avippaṭisārahetuto, sotthiṭṭhānato , abhijanasāpateyyādhipateyyāyurūpaṭṭhānabandhumittasampattīnaṃ atisayanato ca sīlaṃ paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Sīlavato hi attano sīlasampadāhetu mahantaṃ pītisomanassaṃ uppajjati ‘‘kataṃ vata mayā kusalaṃ, kataṃ kalyāṇaṃ, kataṃ bhīruttāṇa’’nti. Tathā sīlavato attā na upavadati, na pare viññū, daṇḍaduggatibhayānaṃ sambhavoyeva natthi, ‘‘sīlavā purisapuggalo kalyāṇadhammo’’ti viññūnaṃ pāsaṃso hoti. Tathā sīlavato yvāyaṃ ‘‘kataṃ vata mayā pāpaṃ, kataṃ luddaṃ, kataṃ kibbisa’’nti dussīlassa vippaṭisāro uppajjati, so na hoti. Sīlañca nāmetaṃ appamādādhiṭṭhānato, bhogabyasanādiparihāramukhena mahato atthassa sādhanato, maṅgalabhāvato ca paramaṃ sotthiṭṭhānaṃ, nihīnajaccopi sīlavā khattiyamahāsālādīnaṃ pūjanīyo hotīti kulasampattiṃ atiseti sīlasampadā, ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasi mahārāja, idha te assa puriso dāso kammakaro’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.183) vacanañcettha sādhakaṃ. Corādīhi asādhāraṇato, paralokānugamanato, mahapphalabhāvato, samathādiguṇādhiṭṭhānato ca bāhiradhanaṃ atiseti sīlaṃ, paramassa cittissariyassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato khattiyādīnaṃ issariyaṃ atiseti sīlaṃ. Sīlanimittañhi taṃtaṃsattanikāyesu sattānaṃ issariyaṃ vassasatadīghappamāṇato jīvitato ekāhampi sīlavato jīvitassa visiṭṭhatāvacanato, sati ca jīvite sikkhānikkhepassa maraṇatāvacanato sīlaṃ jīvitato visiṭṭhataraṃ. Verīnampi manuññabhāvāvahanato, jarārogavipattīhi anabhibhavanīyato ca rūpasampattiṃ atiseti sīlaṃ. Pāsādahammiyādiṭṭhānavisese, rājayuvarājasenāpatiādiṭṭhānavisese ca atiseti sīlaṃ sukhavisesādhiṭṭhānabhāvato . Sabhāvasiniddhe santikāvacarepi bandhujane mittajane ca atiseti ekantahitasampādanato, paralokānugamanato ca. ‘‘Na taṃ mātā pitā kayirā’’tiādi (dha. pa. 43) vacanañcettha sādhakaṃ. Tathā hatthiassarathādibhedehi, mantāgadasotthānappayogehi ca durārakkhaṃ attānaṃ ārakkhabhāvena sīlameva visiṭṭhataraṃ attādhīnato, aparādhīnato, mahāvisayato ca. Tenevāha ‘‘dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’ntiādi (jā. 1.9.102). Evamanekaguṇasamannāgataṃ sīlanti paccavekkhantassa aparipuṇṇā ceva sīlasampadā pāripūriṃ gacchati aparisuddhā ca pārisuddhiṃ.
如果因为长期串习,与戒相违的法——比如嗔恨等烦恼——偶尔还是会冒出来,那么这位发了菩萨誓愿的人就应该这样提醒自己:“你不是已经发愿要成就正觉了吗?可是戒行有缺失的人,连世间的成就都得不到,更不用说出世间的成就了。而正等正觉是一切成就中最顶尖的,戒又是正等正觉的根基,所以戒必须修到极其圆满的地步。因此,要像‘母鸡护蛋’等比喻所说的那样,好好守护戒,让自己真正成为令人信赖、令人欢喜的人。另外,你还必须通过说法,把众生引入三乘并使他们成熟。戒行有缺失的人说的话,别人不会相信,就像靠不正当手段谋生的医生,他的治疗没人信得过。所以,我要怎样才能让人相信我,从而引导众生、使他们成熟呢?”他应当具备本性清净的戒。还有,“我只有依靠禅那等殊胜功德,才有能力利益众生,才能圆满慧波罗蜜等;而禅那等功德,离开戒的清净根本不可能生起。”应当这样如理地让戒清净。巴利
Sace panassa dīgharattaṃ paricayena sīlapaṭipakkhā dhammā dosādayo antarantarā uppajjeyyuṃ, tena bodhisattapaṭiññena evaṃ paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘nanu tayā sambodhāya paṇidhānaṃ kataṃ, sīlavikalena ca na sakkā lokiyāpi sampattiyo pāpuṇituṃ, pageva lokuttarā, sabbasampattīnaṃ pana aggabhūtāya sammāsambodhiyā adhiṭṭhānabhūtena sīlena paramukkaṃsagatena bhavitabbaṃ. Tasmā ‘kikīva aṇḍa’ntiādinā (visuddhi. 1.19; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7) vuttanayena sammā sīlaṃ parirakkhantena suṭṭhu tayā pesalena bhavitabbaṃ. Api ca tayā dhammadesanāya yānattaye sattānaṃ avatāraṇaparipācanāni kātabbāni, sīlavikalassa ca vacanaṃ na paccetabbaṃ hoti asappāyāhāravicārassa viya vejjassa tikicchanaṃ, tasmā kathāhaṃ saddheyyo hutvā sattānaṃ avatāraṇaparipācanāni kareyya’’nti sabhāvaparisuddhasīlena bhavitabbaṃ. Kiñca ‘‘jhānādiguṇavisesayogena me sattānaṃ upakārakaraṇasamatthatā , paññāpāramīādiparipūraṇañca, jhānādayo ca guṇā sīlapārisuddhiṃ vinā na sambhavantī’’ti sammadeva sīlaṃ parisodhetabbaṃ.
同样地,对于居家生活,要以“居家生活是拥挤狭窄的,是尘垢之路”等说法,以“诸欲如同骸骨”等说法,以“母亲也会和孩子争吵”等说法,先看到它的过患;对于诸欲,要以“就像有人借了债去经营事业”等说法,先看到它的过患。然后反过来,对于出家等,要以“出家是开阔空旷的”等说法,通过审察它们的功德,来理解对出离波罗蜜的观察。这是这里的简要含义,详细内容则应当依据《苦蕴经》《审察经》等,以及依据《苦蕴经》《蛇喻经》等来了知。巴利
Tathā ‘‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.191; ma. ni. 1.291; saṃ. ni. 2.154; ma. ni. 2.10) gharāvāse ‘‘aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.234; pāci. 417; mahāni. 3, 6;), ‘‘mātāpi puttena vivadatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.168, 178) ca kāmesu ‘‘seyyathāpi puriso iṇaṃ ādāya kammante payojeyyā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.218) kāmacchandādīsu ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamā vuttavipariyāyena ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.1.91; saṃ. ni. 1.154) pabbajjādīsu ānisaṃsapaṭisaṅkhāvasena nekkhammapāramiyaṃ paccavekkhaṇā veditabbā. Ayamettha saṅkhepattho, vitthāro pana dukkhakkhandha (ma. ni. 1.163) vīmaṃsasuttādi (ma. ni. 1.487) vasena dukkhakkhandhaāsivisopamasuttādivasena (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāyaṃ) veditabbo.
同样地,应当作意慧的功德:“没有慧,布施等法就不能清净,也不能各自胜任自己的作用。”就像没有命根,身体的运作就不美好,也不能在自己的行为中具备实践能力;又像眼等诸根,没有识就不能在各自的领域中完成各自的作用;同样,信等诸根,没有慧就不能在各自的作用和实践上胜任。因此,在遍舍等实践中,慧是最主要的原因。因为睁开慧眼的大士们,即使把自己的肢节和身体部分都施舍出去,也不会自我抬高,也不会贬低他人,就像药树一样没有分别,在过去、现在、未来三时中都充满喜悦。由于慧的力量,与善巧方便相应,遍舍在利益他人的运作中就成为布施波罗蜜。因为为了自己利益的布施,就像存款生息一样。巴利
Tathā ‘‘paññāya vinā dānādayo dhammā na visujjhanti, yathāsakaṃ byāpārasamatthā ca na hontī’’ti paññāguṇā manasi kātabbā. Yatheva hi jīvitena vinā sarīrayantaṃ na sobhati, na ca attano kiriyāsu paṭipattisamatthaṃ hoti, yathā ca cakkhādīni indriyāni viññāṇena vinā yathāsakaṃ visayesu kiccaṃ kātuṃ nappahonti, evaṃ saddhādīni indriyāni paññāya vinā sakiccapaṭipattiyaṃ asamatthānīti pariccāgādipaṭipattiyaṃ paññā padhānakāraṇaṃ. Ummīlitapaññācakkhukā hi mahāsattā attano aṅgapaccaṅgānipi datvā anattukkaṃsakā, aparavambhakā ca honti, bhesajjarukkhā viya vikapparahitā kālattayepi somanassajātā. Paññāvasena upāyakosallayogato pariccāgo parahitappavattiyā dānapāramibhāvaṃ upeti. Attatthañhi dānaṃ vuḍḍhisadisaṃ hoti.
同样地,如果没有慧,就无法脱离渴爱等烦恼,戒的清净本身也就不能成立,更何况成为一切知者功德的所依呢?只有具慧的人,才能好好观察到在家生活、欲乐和轮回中的过患,以及出家、禅那等至和涅槃中的利益,于是出家,修成禅那等至,倾向涅槃,也让别人在这上面站稳。巴利
Tathā paññāya abhāvena taṇhādisaṃkilesāviyogato sīlassa visuddhiyeva na sambhavati, kuto sabbaññuguṇādhiṭṭhānabhāvo. Paññavā eva ca gharāvāse kāmaguṇesu saṃsāre ca ādīnavaṃ, pabbajjāya jhānasamāpattiyaṃ nibbāne ca ānisaṃsaṃ suṭṭhu sallakkhento pabbajitvā jhānasamāpattiyo nibbattetvā nibbānaninno, pare ca tattha patiṭṭhapetīti.
没有智慧的精进,因为难以发起,所以无法达成想要的目标。其实,与其难以发起,不如根本不发起。相反,带着智慧的精进,因为方法善巧,没有什么难以达到的目标。同样,只有有智慧的人才能承受他人的伤害等,没有智慧的人做不到。没有智慧的人面对他人施加的伤害,只会增长忍耐的障碍;有智慧的人却能借这些伤害使忍耐圆满,变得坚固。只有有智慧的人才能如实了知三谛、它们的因以及对立面,不会欺骗他人。同样,有智慧的人以智慧之力支撑自己,凭借坚定的成就,在一切波罗蜜中保持不动摇的誓愿和决意。而且,只有有智慧的人才能不分亲疏敌友,善于在一切处带来利益。同样,有智慧的人凭借智慧,面对利得等世间法的聚散时,心不改变,保持中立。如此,对于一切波罗蜜,只有智慧才是清净的因。应当这样观察智慧的功德。巴利
Vīriyañca paññārahitaṃ yadicchitamatthaṃ na sādheti durārambhabhāvato. Varameva hi anārambho durārambhato, paññāsahitena pana vīriyena na kiñci duradhigamaṃ upāyapaṭipattito. Tathā paññavā eva parāpakārādiadhivāsakajātiyo hoti, na duppañño. Paññāvirahitassa ca parehi upanītā apakārā khantiyā paṭipakkhameva anubrūhenti, paññavato pana te khantisampattiyā paribrūhanavasena assā thirabhāvāya saṃvattanti. Paññavā eva tīṇi saccāni tesaṃ kāraṇāni paṭipakkhe ca yathābhūtaṃ jānitvā paresaṃ avisaṃvādako hoti. Tathā paññābalena attānaṃ upatthambhetvā dhitisampadāya sabbapāramīsu acalasamādānādhiṭṭhāno hoti, paññavā eva ca piyamajjhattaverīvibhāgaṃ akatvā sabbattha hitūpasaṃhārakusalo hoti. Tathā paññāvasena lābhādilokadhammasannipāte nibbikāratāya majjhatto hoti. Evaṃ sabbāsaṃ pāramīnaṃ paññāva pārisuddhihetūti paññāguṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
而且,如果没有智慧,就不会有见地上的成就;没有见地上的成就,就不会有戒行上的成就;缺少戒行成就和见地成就的人,就不会有定力上的成就;而没有定力的人,连自己的利益都无法成办,更不用说殊胜的利他事业了。因此,为了利他而修行的菩萨,应当这样告诫自己:“你难道不应该认真致力于智慧的清净圆满吗?”因为,大士正是依靠智慧的力量,安住于四种决意,以四种摄受之法利益世间,引导众生进入解脱之道,并使他们的根器成熟。同样,凭借智慧之力,他对蕴、处等法广泛地加以简择,如实了知生死流转与还灭,引导布施等功德走向殊胜与抉择的层面,从而成为圆满修习菩萨学处的人。应当像这样,以种种方式和行相,确立智慧的功德之后,再增长智慧波罗蜜。巴利
Apica paññāya vinā na dassanasampatti, antarena ca diṭṭhisampadaṃ na sīlasampadā, sīladiṭṭhisampadārahitassa na samādhisampadā, asamāhitena ca na sakkā attahitamattampi sādhetuṃ, pageva ukkaṃsagataṃ parahitanti parahitāya paṭipannena ‘‘nanu tayā sakkaccaṃ paññāpārisuddhiyaṃ āyogo karaṇīyo’’ti bodhisattena attā ovaditabbo. Paññānubhāvena hi mahāsatto caturadhiṭṭhānādhiṭṭhito catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi (dī. ni. 3.210, 313; a. ni. 10.32) lokaṃ anuggaṇhanto satte niyyānikamagge avatāreti, indriyāni ca nesaṃ paripāceti. Tathā paññābalena khandhāyatanādīsu pavicayabahulo pavattinivattiyo yāthāvato parijānanto dānādayo guṇe visesanibbedhabhāgiyabhāvaṃ nayanto bodhisattasikkhāya paripūrakārī hotīti evamādinā anekākāravokāre paññāguṇe vavatthapetvā paññāpāramī anubrūhetabbā.
同样地,即使是眼前就能看到的世间事业,缺少精进的人也无法完成;而对不计辛劳、已经发起精进的人来说,根本没有什么难以达到的。因为缺少精进的人,连“我要把一切众生从轮回的大洪流中救渡过去”这样的心愿都发不起来。中等精进的人虽然能发起,却会中途放弃。只有最上等精进的人,不顾自己的安乐,才能到达所发心愿的彼岸。应当这样来观察精进的圆满成就。此外,还应当这样思惟:“如果一个人只是为了把自己从轮回的泥沼中拔救出来而发起努力,在精进松懈的情况下,尚且不能指望心愿达成,更何况是发下大誓愿、要为包括天神在内的整个世间拔除苦难呢?”又应当思惟:“贪等烦恼就像醉象一样难以阻挡,以它们为因所造的种种业行,就像拔刀杀人的刽子手;以它们为相的种种恶趣,永远张着大口等着吞噬;而那些把众生推入其中的恶友,始终围绕在身边。一个愚痴凡夫既然听从他们的教诫,那么他本身就应当能从轮回的痛苦中挣脱出来。”又应当思惟:“错误的思惟会因精进的力量而远离。”又应当思惟:“如果正觉可以靠自身精进的力量证得,那这里面还有什么困难呢?”应当以这样的方式,反复观察精进的种种功德。巴利
Tathā dissamānapārānipi lokiyāni kammāni nihīnavīriyena pāpuṇituṃ asakkuṇeyyāni, agaṇitakhedena pana āraddhavīriyena duradhigamaṃ nāma natthi. Nihīnavīriyo hi ‘‘saṃsāramahoghato sabbasatte santāressāmī’’ti ārabhitumeva na sakkuṇoti. Majjhimo ārabhitvā antarāvosānamāpajjati. Ukkaṭṭhavīriyo pana attasukhanirapekkho ārambhapāraṃ adhigacchatīti vīriyasampatti paccavekkhitabbā. Apica ‘‘yassa attanoyeva saṃsārapaṅkato samuddharaṇatthamārambho, tassāpi vīriyassa sithilabhāvena manorathānaṃ matthakappatti na sakkā sambhāvetuṃ, pageva sadevakassa lokassa samuddharaṇatthaṃ katābhinīhārenā’’ti ca ‘‘rāgādīnaṃ dosagaṇānaṃ mattamahāgajānaṃ viya dunnivārayabhāvato, tannidānānañca kammasamādānānaṃ ukkhittāsikavadhakasadisabhāvato, tannimittānañca duggatīnaṃ sabbadā vivaṭamukhabhāvato, tattha niyojakānañca pāpamittānaṃ sadā sannihitabhāvato, tadovādakāritāya ca bālassa puthujjanabhāvassa sati sambhave yuttaṃ sayameva saṃsāradukkhato nissaritu’’nti ca ‘‘micchāvitakkā vīriyānubhāvena dūrī bhavantī’’ti ca ‘‘yadi pana sambodhi attādhīnena vīriyena sakkā samadhigantuṃ , kimettha dukkara’’nti ca evamādinā nayena vīriyassa guṇāpaccavekkhitabbā.
同样地,应当这样作意:所谓“忍”,因为它能摧毁与一切功德完全对立的忿怒,所以对善士们成就功德而言,是不可被击破的武器;对有能力战胜他人的人来说,是庄严饰物;对沙门和婆罗门来说,是力量的成就;是扑灭忿怒之火的流水;是善好名声生起之处;是平息恶人舌上毒液的解毒咒;对安住于防护中的人,是至高的智者本性;因志向深沉,如同大海;是烦恼大海的岸边;是关闭恶趣之门的门闩;是登上天界和梵天世界的阶梯;是一切功德的安忍基础;是殊胜的身、语、意清净。再者,也应当这样观察:“这些众生因为没有忍的成就,所以不但在这里受苦,在来世也会因为从事令人受苦的法而受苦。”也应当观察:“即使因为他人加害的因缘而生起了苦,但作为这苦的田地——这个身体,以及作为种子的业,都是我自己造作的。”也应当观察:“这是我偿还那苦债的原因。”也应当观察:“如果没有加害的人,我的忍的成就又怎么能产生呢?”也应当观察:“即使这个人现在在加害我,但过去他曾这样帮助过我。”也应当观察:“加害本身,正因为成了我修忍的因缘,所以反而是帮助。”也应当观察:“所有这些众生都像我的儿子一样,儿子对父亲犯了错,谁会对他生气呢?”也应当观察:“这个人是被忿怒的势力所控制才对我犯错,那忿怒的势力应该由我来消除。”也应当观察:“以这个加害为因,我的苦才生起,所以我也是那加害的因缘之一。”也应当观察:“那些造作加害的法、加害发生的地方,一切都在那一刹那灭去了,现在还能对谁生气、由谁来生气呢?”也应当观察:“一切法都是无我的,那又是谁对谁犯错呢?”应当这样反复观察来增长忍的成就。巴利
Tathā ‘‘khanti nāmāyaṃ niravasesaguṇapaṭipakkhassa kodhassa vidhamanato guṇasampādane sādhūnamappaṭihatamāyudhaṃ, parābhibhavane samatthānaṃ alaṅkāro, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ balasampadā, kodhaggivinayanī udakadhārā, kalyāṇassa kittisaddassa sañjātideso, pāpapuggalānaṃ vacīvisavūpasamakaro mantāgado, saṃvare ṭhitānaṃ paramā dhīrapakati, gambhīrāsayatāya sāgaro, dosamahāsāgarassa velā, apāyadvārassa pidhānakavāṭaṃ, devabrahmalokānaṃ ārohaṇasopānaṃ, sabbaguṇānaṃ adhivāsanabhūmi, uttamā kāyavacīmanovisuddhī’’ti manasi kātabbaṃ. Api ca ‘‘ete sattā khantisampattiyā abhāvato idha ceva tapanti, paraloke ca tapanīyadhammānuyogato’’ti ca ‘‘yadipi parāpakāranimittaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa pana dukkhassa khettabhūto attabhāvo, bījabhūtañca kammaṃ mayāva abhisaṅkhata’’nti ca ‘‘tassa dukkhassa āṇaṇyakāraṇameta’’nti ca ‘‘apakārake asati kathaṃ mayhaṃ khantisampadā sambhavatī’’ti ca ‘‘yadipāyaṃ etarahi apakārako, ayaṃ nāma pubbe anena mayhaṃ upakāro kato’’ti ca ‘‘apakāro eva vā khantinimittatāya upakāro’’ti ca ‘‘sabbepime sattā mayhaṃ puttasadisā, puttakatāparādhesu ca ko kujjhissatī’’ti ca ‘‘yena kodhabhūtāvesena ayaṃ mayhaṃ aparajjhati, so kodhabhūtāveso mayā vinetabbo’’ti ca ‘‘yena apakārena idaṃ mayhaṃ dukkhaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa ahampi nimitta’’nti ca ‘‘yehi dhammehi aparādho kato, yattha ca kato, sabbepi te tasmiṃyeva khaṇe niruddhā, kassidāni kena kodho kātabbo’’ti ca ‘‘anattatāya sabbadhammānaṃ ko kassa aparajjhatī’’ti ca paccavekkhantena khantisampadā brūhetabbā.
如果他的愤怒因为长期反复串习,已经由他人加害的因缘而生起,并占据内心、持续不退,那就应当这样审察:
这个忍耐,对于与加害相对立的行为来说,正是能带来利益的因。
加害通过让我产生苦,成为我生起信心以及对整个世间生起不乐想的条件,而这一切都以苦为依托。
这本来就是感官之法的本性,也就是合意与不合意对象的相遇。那么,不合意对象的相遇对我来说怎么可能不存在呢?这怎么可能避免呢?
被愤怒控制的众生,因愤怒而疯狂,内心散乱。面对这样的人,我为什么还要以牙还牙呢?
所有这些众生,都被正自觉者像亲生儿子一样守护着。因此,在这件事上,我连一丝心的愤怒都不该生起。
如果犯过者本身有功德,我不该对有功德的人生气。
如果他没有功德,那就更应该对他生起怜悯。
因为愤怒,我的功德和名誉都会减损。
因为生气,丑陋、睡不安稳等仇敌所喜欢的事,就会来到我身上。
这个叫愤怒的东西,是一切不利的制造者,是一切利益的摧毁者,是强有力的冤家。
如果有忍耐,就没有任何冤家。
由于犯过者的过失因缘,他未来本该遭受的苦,如果我有了忍耐,那种苦对我来说就不存在。
通过反复思虑和生气,我反而正好跟着冤家走了。
如果愤怒被我以忍耐降伏,那个冤家就真正被彻底制伏,成了我的奴仆。
以愤怒为因,舍弃忍耐的功德,这对我不合适。
如果有愤怒这种违逆功德的东西,我的戒等诸法怎么能圆满呢?如果没有这些违逆,我又怎么能成为广泛利益众生、符合自己誓愿的殊胜成就者呢?
如果有忍耐,因为没有外在的散乱,得定者就能如实观察:一切诸行是无常、是苦,一切法是无我,涅槃是无为、不死、寂静、微妙。这样的审察能够安住忍受。而且,佛陀的诸法威力不可思议、不可计量。
从此更进一步,安住在随顺的忍耐中,这样的审察能够安住忍受:这些纯粹只是法而已,没有自我、没有属于自我的东西,它们各随自己的条件生起、坏灭,不从任何地方来,也不去往任何地方,也不停住在任何地方,在这里没有任何人对任何人有所作用。以这样的方式,对不执著我、我所的审察能够安住忍受。由此,菩萨成为必定趣向菩提、不再退转者。
应当通过这样的方式来了知对忍波罗蜜的观察。巴利
Yadi panassa dīgharattaṃ paricayena parāpakāranimittako kodho cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭheyya, iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘khanti nāmesā parāpakārassa paṭipakkhapaṭipattīnaṃ paccupakārakāraṇa’’nti ca ‘‘apakāro ca mayhaṃ dukkhuppādanena dukkhupanisāya saddhāya, sabbaloke anabhiratisaññāya ca paccayo’’ti ca ‘‘indriyapakatiresā, yadidaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhavisayasamāyogo, tattha aniṭṭhavisayasamāyogo mayhaṃ na siyāti taṃ kutettha labbhā’’ti ca ‘‘kodhavasiko satto kodhena ummatto vikkhittacitto, tattha kiṃ paccapakārenā’’ti ca ‘‘sabbe pime sattā sammāsambuddhena orasaputtā viya paripālitā, tasmā na tattha mayā cittakopopi kātabbo’’ti ca ‘‘aparādhake ca sati guṇe guṇavati mayā na kopo kātabbo’’ti ca ‘‘asati guṇe visesena karuṇāyitabbo’’ti ca ‘‘kopena ca mayhaṃ guṇayasā nihīyantī’’ti ca ‘‘kujjhanena mayhaṃ dubbaṇṇadukkhaseyyādayo sapattakantā āgacchantī’’ti ca ‘‘kodho ca nāmāyaṃ sabbāhitakārako sabbahitavināsako balavā paccatthiko’’ti ca ‘‘sati ca khantiyā na koci paccatthiko’’ti ca ‘‘aparādhakena aparādhanimittaṃ yaṃ āyatiṃ laddhabbaṃ dukkhaṃ, sati ca khantiyā mayhaṃ tadabhāvo’’ti ca ‘‘cintanena kujjhantena ca mayā paccatthikoyeva anuvattito hotī’’ti ca ‘‘kodhe ca mayā khantiyā abhibhūte tassa dāsabhūto paccatthiko sammadeva abhibhūto hotī’’ti ca ‘‘kodhanimittaṃ khantiguṇapariccāgo mayhaṃ na yutto’’ti ca ‘‘sati ca kodhe guṇavirodhini (guṇavirodhapaccanīdhamme cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāyaṃ) kiṃ me sīlādidhammā pāripūriṃ gaccheyyuṃ, asati ca tesu kathāhaṃ sattānaṃ upakārabahulo paṭiññānurūpaṃ uttamaṃ sampattiṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti ca ‘‘khantiyā ca sati bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato samāhitassa sabbe saṅkhārā aniccato dukkhato sabbe dhammā anattato nibbānañca asaṅkhatāmatasantapaṇītādibhāvato nijjhānaṃ khamanti ‘buddhadhammā ca acinteyyāparimeyyapabhāvā’ti’’, tato ca ‘‘anulomiyaṃ khantiyaṃ ṭhito ‘kevalā ime ca attattaniyabhāvarahitā dhammamattā yathāsakaṃ paccayehi uppajjanti vayanti, na kutoci āgacchanti, na kuhiñci gacchanti, na ca katthaci patiṭṭhitā, na cettha koci kassaci byāpāro’ti ahaṃkāramamaṃkārānadhiṭṭhānatā nijjhānaṃ khamati, yena bodhisatto bodhiyā niyato anāvattidhammo hotī’’ti evamādinā khantipāramiyaṃ paccavekkhaṇā veditabbā.
同样,应当这样观察真实波罗蜜的种种成就:如果没有真实,戒等一切善法就不可能存在;如果行持不符合自己的誓愿,就会有所欠缺;一旦违背了真实法,一切恶法就会聚集而来;不真实、不守信的人不可依靠,将来他说的话也不会被人接受;而具足真实的人,真实则是一切功德的依止处。依靠对真实的坚定,一切菩提资粮才能清净、圆满、具足;由于不违背真实自性之法,才能完成一切菩提资粮的作用;这也是菩萨行持的最终成就。应当以这类方式观察真实波罗蜜的成就。巴利
Tathā ‘‘saccena vinā sīlādīnaṃ asambhavato, paṭiññānurūpaṃ paṭipattiyā abhāvato ca saccadhammātikkame ca sabbapāpadhammānaṃ samosaraṇato, asaccasandhassa appaccayikabhāvato, āyatiñca anādeyyavacanatāvahanato, sampannasaccassa ca sabbaguṇādhiṭṭhānabhāvato, saccādhiṭṭhānena sabbabodhisambhārānaṃ pārisuddhipāripūrisamanvāyato, sabhāvadhammāvisaṃvādanena sabbabodhisambhārakiccakaraṇato, bodhisattapaṭipattiyā ca parinipphattito’’tiādinā saccapāramiyā sampattiyo paccavekkhitabbā.
同样,对于决意,应当从这样的角度来观察它的功德:在布施等善行中要有坚定的受持;当这些善行的对立面聚集出现时,它们才能不动摇地安住;而如果没有在那里的稳固性,布施等资粮就不可能成为正觉的因。如此等等。巴利
Tathā ‘‘dānādīsu daḷhasamādānaṃ, tampaṭipakkhasannipāte ca nesaṃ acalāvatthānaṃ, tattha ca thirabhāvaṃ vinā na dānādisambhārā sambodhinimittā sambhavantī’’tiādinā adhiṭṭhāne guṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
同样,应当这样审察慈的功德:如果一个人只安住在自利上,没有利益众生的心,那么连此世和来世的成就都无法得到,更不用说想要把一切众生安立在涅槃成就之中了。再者,既然后来希望一切众生得到出世间成就,那么现在希望世间成就也是合理的。再者,现在仅仅以意愿还不能真正给他人带来利益和安乐,我什么时候才能以实际的努力去成办这件事呢?再者,现在被我以利益和安乐所滋养的这些众生,将来会成为我分享佛法的助伴。再者,没有这些众生,我的菩提资粮就不会生起,因此,他们是一切佛功德得以显现圆满的因,对我来说,他们是最上的福田、无上的善处、最崇高的恭敬对象。再者,应当对一切众生建立起特别的利益意愿,而且也要从悲的决意出发,对一切众生修习慈心。因为,以没有界限的心专注于给众生带来利益和安乐的人,想要去除众生不利和痛苦的愿望会变得强而有力、根深蒂固;而悲,则是一切成佛之法的开端、行道、立足处、根本、前导、最前列。应当以这样的方式审察慈的功德。巴利
Tathā ‘‘attahitamatte avatiṭṭhantenāpi sattesu hitacittataṃ vinā na sakkā idhalokaparalokasampattiyo pāpuṇituṃ, pageva sabbasatte nibbānasampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetukāmenā’’ti ca ‘‘pacchā sabbasattānaṃ lokuttarasampattiṃ ākaṅkhantena idāni lokiyasampattiṃ ākaṅkhā yuttarūpā’’ti ca ‘‘idāni āsayamattena paresaṃ hitasukhūpasaṃhāraṃ kātuṃ asakkonto kadā payogena taṃ sādhessāmī’’ti ca ‘‘idāni mayā hitasukhūpasaṃhārena saṃvaddhitā pacchā dhammasaṃvibhāgasahāyā mayhaṃ bhavissantī’’ti ca ‘‘etehi vinā na mayhaṃ bodhisambhārā sambhavanti, tasmā sabbabuddhaguṇavibhūtinipphattikāraṇattā mayhaṃ ete paramaṃ puññakkhettaṃ anuttaraṃ kusalāyatanaṃ uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhāna’’nti ca ‘‘savisesaṃ sattesu sabbesu hitajjhāsayatā paccupaṭṭhapetabbā, kiñca karuṇādhiṭṭhānatopi sabbasattesu mettā anubrūhetabbā. Vimariyādīkatena hi cetasā sattesu hitasukhūpasaṃhāraniratassa tesaṃ ahitadukkhāpanayanakāmatā balavatī uppajjati daḷhamūlā, karuṇā ca sabbesaṃ buddhakārakadhammānamādi caraṇaṃ patiṭṭhā mūlaṃ mukhaṃ pamukha’’nti evamādinā mettāya guṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
同样,应当以这样的方式审察舍波罗蜜:如果没有舍,众生造成的种种伤害就会让心产生变异;而一旦心发生变异,布施等资粮就根本不可能生起。又说:当心被慈爱的温情所滋润时,若没有舍,资粮就无法清净。又说:若不以舍去观照资粮,就不能把福德资粮及其果报回向给众生的利益。又说:若没有舍,就不能不分施物与受者而一概施舍。又说:没有舍的人,无法不顾生命与生活资具的障碍,去修习守护与清净。又说:依靠舍的力量,才能超越喜与不喜而成就出离之力;依靠对再生的观照,才能完成一切资粮的事业;对过度紧绷的精进不加舍置,就做不成精勤之事;唯有依靠舍,才能生起忍耐与审虑;依靠舍,才能不欺骗众生;以平等心看待世间法,才能对所受持的诸法成就不动摇的决意;对别人的伤害等不加作意,才能成就慈心住。因此,一切菩提资粮的受持、决意、圆满与成就,都是靠舍的力量才得以实现的。应当以这样的方式审察舍波罗蜜。如此,对不舍与舍等,依次审察其过患与功德,应当知道这就是布施等波罗蜜的助缘。巴利
Tathā ‘‘upekkhāya abhāve sattehi katā vippakārā cittassa vikāraṃ uppādeyyuṃ, sati ca cittavikāre dānādisambhārānaṃ sambhavoyeva natthī’’ti ca ‘‘mettāsinehena sinehite citte upekkhāya vinā sambhārānaṃ pārisuddhi na hotī’’ti ca ‘‘anupekkhako sambhāresu puññasambhāraṃ tabbipākañca sattahitatthaṃ pariṇāmetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti ca ‘‘upekkhāya abhāve deyyapaṭiggāhakesu vibhāgaṃ akatvā pariccajituṃ na sakkotī’’ti ca ‘‘upekkhārahitena jīvitaparikkhārānaṃ jīvitassa ca antarāyaṃ amanasikaritvā saṃvaravisodhanaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā’’ti ca ‘‘upekkhāvasena aratiratisahasseva nekkhammabalasiddhito, upapattito ikkhanavaseneva sabbasambhārakiccanipphattito, accāraddhassa vīriyassa anupekkhane padhānakiccākaraṇato, upekkhatoyeva titikkhānijjhānasambhavato, upekkhāvasena sattasaṅkhārānaṃ avisaṃvādanato, lokadhammānaṃ ajjhupekkhanena samādinnadhammesu acalādhiṭṭhānasiddhito, parāpakārādīsu anābhogavaseneva mettāvihāranipphattitoti sabbabodhisambhārānaṃ samādānādhiṭṭhānapāripūrinipphattiyo upekkhānubhāvena sampajjantī’’ti evaṃ ādinā nayena upekkhāpāramī paccavekkhitabbā. Evaṃ apariccāgapariccāgādīsu yathākkamaṃ ādīnavānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇā dānādipāramīnaṃ paccayoti veditabbā.
同样地,具备辅助条件的十五种行法和五种神通。其中,行法是指:戒防护、守护根门、饮食知量、警寤勤修、七种正法、四种禅那。在这些当中,戒等四种法的辅助条件是十三头陀支,以及少欲等。在正法方面,信的辅助条件是:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、施随念、天随念、寂止随念;远离粗劣的人;亲近柔和的人;对能生净信的法加以审察并倾向于它。惭与愧的辅助条件是:审察不善的过患;审察恶趣的过患;审察善法的支撑作用;远离无惭无愧的人;亲近具足惭愧的人并倾向于它。多闻的辅助条件是:先前的努力;善于请教;对正法的专注;对无过失的学问领域的熟悉;根器成熟;远离烦恼;远离寡闻的人;亲近多闻的人并倾向于它。精进的辅助条件是:审察恶趣的怖畏;审察行道的历程;审察法的伟大;去除昏沉睡眠;远离懈怠的人;亲近已发起精进的人;审察正勤并倾向于它。念的辅助条件是:念与正知;远离失念的人;亲近念现前的人并倾向于它。智慧的辅助条件是:善于请教;使事相清净;使诸根平衡;远离劣慧的人;亲近有智慧的人;审察甚深智的行境并倾向于它。四种禅那的辅助条件是:以戒等四法为基础,在三十八种所缘上作前分修习,以及修习转向等自在力。其中,通过戒等带来的行为清净,能给予众生无畏;通过意乐清净,能给予物质布施;通过两者都清净,能给予法布施——应当依照这样的方式,如实地确定行法等与布施等资粮之间的条件关系,但因为过于广博,我们没有展开。应当知道,圆满轮等也是如此,都是布施等的条件。巴利
Tathā saparikkhārā pañcadasa caraṇadhammā pañca ca abhiññāyo. Tattha caraṇadhammā nāma sīlasaṃvaro, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariyānuyogo, satta saddhammā, cattāri jhānāni ca. Tesu sīlādīnaṃ catunnaṃ terasapi dhutadhammā, appicchatādayo ca parikkhāro. Saddhammesu saddhāya buddhadhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatūpasamānussati- lūkhapuggalaparivajjanasiniddhapuggalasevanapasādanīya- dhammapaccavekkhaṇatadadhimuttatā parikkhāro, hirottappānaṃ akusalādīnavapaccavekkhaṇaapāyādīnavapaccavekkhaṇakusaladhammupatthambhana- bhāvapaccavekkhaṇahirottappa rahitapuggalaparivajjanahirottappasampannapuggalasevanatadadhimuttatā, bāhusaccassa pubbayogaparipucchakabhāvasaddhammābhiyogaanavajjavijjāṭṭhānādi- paricayaparipakkindriyatākilesadūrībhāvaappassutaparivajjanabahussutasevanatadadhimuttatā, vīriyassa apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇagamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇadhammamahattapaccavekkhaṇa- thinamiddhavinodanakusītapuggalaparivajjanaāraddhavīriyapuggala- sevanasammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇatadadhimuttatā, satiyā satisampajaññamuṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanaupaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanatadadhimuttatā, paññāya paripucchakabhāvavatthuvisadakiriyāindriyasamattapaṭipādanaduppañña- puggalaparivajjanapaññavantapuggalasevanagambhīrañāṇacariyapacca- vekkhaṇatadadhimuttatā, catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sīlādicatukkaṃ aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu pubbabhāgabhāvanā, āvajjanādivasībhāvakaraṇañca parikkhāro. Tattha sīlādīhi payogasuddhiyā sattānaṃ abhayadāne, āsayasuddhiyā āmisadāne, ubhayasuddhiyā ca dhammadāne samattho hotītiādinā caraṇādīnaṃ dānādisambhārānaṃ paccayabhāvo yathārahaṃ niddhāretabbo, ativitthārabhayena na niddhārayimha. Evaṃ sampatticakkādayopi dānādīnaṃ paccayoti veditabbā.
什么是杂染?总体上说,波罗蜜的杂染就是被渴爱等所执取的状态。具体来说:对布施物和接受者起分别,是布施波罗蜜的杂染;对众生和时间起分别,是持戒波罗蜜的杂染;对欲有和它的止息生起喜欢或不喜欢的分别,是出离波罗蜜的杂染;执取“我”和“我的”这样的分别,是智慧波罗蜜的杂染;昏沉和掉举的分别,是精进波罗蜜的杂染;自他的分别,是忍耐波罗蜜的杂染;在未见等的上面执为见等的分别,是真实波罗蜜的杂染;在菩提资粮和它的对立面上,对过失和功德的分别,是决意波罗蜜的杂染;对利益和损害的分别,是慈爱波罗蜜的杂染;对可爱和不可爱的分别,是舍波罗蜜的杂染。应当这样了知。巴利
Ko saṃkilesoti avisesena taṇhādīhi parāmaṭṭhabhāvo pāramīnaṃ saṃkileso, visesena deyyapaṭiggāhakavikappā dānapāramiyā saṃkileso, sattakālavikappā sīlapāramiyā, kāmabhavatadupasamesu abhiratianabhirativikappā nekkhammapāramiyā, ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti vikappā paññāpāramiyā, līnuddhaccavikappā vīriyapāramiyā, attaparavikappā khantipāramiyā, adiṭṭhādīsu diṭṭhādivikappā saccapāramiyā, bodhisambhāratabbipakkhesu dosaguṇavikappā adhiṭṭhānapāramiyā, hitāhitavikappā mettāpāramiyā, iṭṭhāniṭṭhavikappā upekkhāpāramiyā saṃkilesoti veditabbo.
什么是清净?应当知道,不被渴爱等烦恼所损害,并且远离前面所说的那些分别,这就是这些波罗蜜的清净。因为确实不被渴爱、慢、见、嗔、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、诳、谄、刚强、忿、骄、放逸等种种烦恼所损害,又远离了对施物、受者等的分别,所以布施等波罗蜜才是清净、光耀的。巴利
Kiṃ vodānanti taṇhādīhi anupaghāto, yathāvuttavikappaviraho ca etāsaṃ vodānanti veditabbaṃ. Anupahatā hi taṇhāmānadiṭṭhikodhūpanāhamakkhapalāsaissāmacchariyamāyāsāṭheyyathambhasārambha- madapamādādīhi kilesehi deyyapaṭiggāhakavikappādirahitā ca dānādipāramiyo parisuddhā pabhassarā bhavantīti.
什么是它们的对立面?总的来说,一切烦恼、一切不善法都是这些波罗蜜的对立面;但具体来说,应当知道就是前面所说的悭吝等。此外,布施因为具足无贪、无嗔、无痴的功德,所以是贪嗔痴的对立面;戒因为能去除身体等方面的恶行和歪曲,所以是贪等的对立面;出离因为避免了沉溺欲乐、伤害他人和自我折磨这三种过患,所以是三种过失的对立面;慧因为能使贪等变得盲目,又使智慧不变得盲目,所以是贪等的对立面;精进因为以不懈怠、不掉举的正确方式努力,所以是贪等的对立面;忍耐因为能忍受可爱、不可爱和空无所有的事物,所以是贪等的对立面;真实因为面对他人的利益或损害都能如实而行,所以是贪等的对立面;决意因为能克服世间法,在所受持的修行资粮中毫不动摇,所以是贪等的对立面;慈因为远离了那些障盖,所以是贪等的对立面;舍因为摧毁了对可爱与不可爱的随顺与违逆,并且平等而行,所以是贪等的对立面。应当这样理解。巴利
Kopaṭipakkhoti avisesena sabbepi kilesā sabbepi akusalā dhammā etāsaṃ paṭipakkho, visesena pana pubbe vuttā maccherādayoti veditabbā. Apica deyyapaṭiggāhakadānaphalesu alobhādosāmohaguṇayogato lobhadosamohapaṭipakkhaṃ dānaṃ, kāyādidosavaṅkāpagamanato lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ sīlaṃ , kāmasukhaparūpaghātaattakilamathaparivajjanato dosattayapaṭipakkhaṃ nekkhammaṃ, lobhādīnaṃ andhīkaraṇato, ñāṇassa ca anandhīkaraṇato lobhādipaṭipakkhā paññā, alīnānuddhatañāyārambhavasena lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ vīriyaṃ, iṭṭhāniṭṭhasuññatānaṃ khamanato lobhādipaṭipakkhā khanti, satipi paresaṃ upakāre apakāre ca yathābhūtappavattiyā lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ saccaṃ, lokadhamme abhibhuyya yathāsamādinnesu sambhāresu acalanato lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, nīvaraṇavivekato lobhādipaṭipakkhā mettā, iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu anunayapaṭighaviddhaṃsanato, samappavattito ca lobhādipaṭipakkhā upekkhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
什么是行道?在布施方面,以舍弃安乐所需的身体与生命、以消除恐惧、以开示法义,用种种方式护念众生,这就是布施中的行道。其中的详细方式是这样的:我以此布施,愿众生成就寿命、容貌、安乐、力量、辩才等种种圆满,成就那令人喜悦的最殊胜果报。怀着这样的心,他施予食物;同样地,为了息灭众生的业与烦恼之渴,他施予饮品;为了成就金色身与惭愧的庄严,他施予衣服;为了成就神通与涅槃之乐,他施予车乘;为了成就戒香,他施予香;为了成就佛功德的光辉,他施予花鬘与涂香;为了成就菩提座,他施予座位;为了成就如来的卧处,他施予床座;为了成就皈依处的体性,他施予房舍;为了获得五眼,他施予灯明。为了成就一寻身光,他施予色施;为了成就梵音,他施予声施;为了成为一切世间所喜爱者,他施予味施;为了成就佛陀的柔软细妙,他施予触施;为了成就无老无死的体性,他施予医药;为了解脱烦恼奴仆的束缚,他施予仆人自由;为了对正法的喜乐,他施予无过失的游戏喜乐之因;为了将一切众生以圣洁的出生摄为自己的儿子,他施予儿子;为了能担负起整个世间,他施予妻子;为了成就殊胜相好,他施予金、摩尼、珍珠、珊瑚等物;为了成就随好,他施予种种装饰品;为了获得正法之藏,他施予财富之藏;为了成为法王,他施予王位;为了成就禅定等圆满,他施予园林、花园等林地;为了以留下车轮印迹的双足走向菩提座,他施予行步之施;为了众生渡过四种暴流,为了将正法之手给予众生,他施予手施;为了获得信根等,他施予耳、鼻等;为了获得一切眼,他施予眼施;想到“在见、闻、随念、侍奉等一切时候,我都要为一切众生带来利益与安乐,我的身体应当成为一切世间所依止的”,他施予血肉等;想到“我应当成为一切世间最上者”,他施予自己的头。巴利
Kā paṭipattīti sukhūpakaraṇasarīrajīvitapariccāgena bhayāpanūdanena dhammopadesena ca bahudhā sattānaṃ anuggahakaraṇaṃ dāne paṭipatti. Tatthāyaṃ vitthāranayo – ‘‘imināhaṃ dānena sattānaṃ āyuvaṇṇasukhabalapaṭibhānādisampattiṃ ramaṇīyaṃ aggaphalasampattiṃ nipphādeyya’’nti annadānaṃ deti, tathā sattānaṃ kammakilesapipāsavūpasamāya pānaṃ deti, tathā suvaṇṇavaṇṇatāya, hirottappālaṅkārassa ca nipphattiyā vatthāni deti, tathā iddhividhassa ceva nibbānasukhassa ca nipphattiyā yānaṃ deti, tathā sīlagandhanipphattiyā gandhaṃ, buddhaguṇasobhānipphattiyā mālāvilepanaṃ, bodhimaṇḍāsananipphattiyā āsanaṃ , tathāgataseyyānipphattiyā seyyaṃ, saraṇabhāvanipphattiyā āvasathaṃ, pañcacakkhupaṭilābhāya padīpeyyaṃ deti. Byāmappabhānipphattiyā rūpadānaṃ, brahmassaranipphattiyā saddadānaṃ, sabbalokassa piyabhāvāya rasadānaṃ, buddhasukhumālabhāvāya phoṭṭhabbadānaṃ, ajarāmaraṇabhāvāya bhesajjadānaṃ, kilesadāsabyavimocanatthaṃ dāsānaṃ bhujissatādānaṃ, saddhammābhiratiyā anavajjakhiḍḍāratihetudānaṃ, sabbepi satte ariyāya jātiyā attano puttabhāvūpanayanāya puttadānaṃ, sakalassa lokassa patibhāvūpagamanāya dāradānaṃ, subhalakkhaṇasampattiyā suvaṇṇamaṇimuttāpavāḷādidānaṃ, anubyañjanasampattiyā nānāvidhavibhūsanadānaṃ, saddhammakosādhigamāya vittakosadānaṃ, dhammarājabhāvāya rajjadānaṃ, jhānādisampattiyā ārāmuyyānādivanadānaṃ, cakkaṅkitehi pādehi bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamanāya caraṇadānaṃ, caturoghanittharaṇāya sattānaṃ saddhammahatthadānatthaṃ hatthadānaṃ, saddhindriyādipaṭilābhāya kaṇṇanāsādidānaṃ, samantacakkhupaṭilābhāya cakkhudānaṃ, ‘‘dassanasavanānussaraṇapāricariyādīsu sabbakālaṃ sabbasattānaṃ hitasukhāvaho, sabbalokena ca upajīvitabbo me kāyo bhaveyyā’’ti maṃsalohitādidānaṃ, ‘‘sabbalokuttamo bhaveyya’’nti uttamaṅgadānaṃ deti.
他这样布施时,不是出于不正当的谋生方式而施,不是通过伤害他人而施,不是因为害怕而施,不是因为羞愧而施,不是因为对受施者生气而施,不是在有好东西时却施以粗劣之物,不是为了抬高自己而施,不是为了贬低别人而施,不是贪求果报而施,不是因为厌恶乞讨者而施,不是漫不经心地施。而是恭敬地施,亲手施,按时施,怀着敬意施,不加分别地施,在布施前、布施时、布施后这三个阶段都满怀欢喜地施。布施之后也不后悔,不因为受施者的缘故而生起傲慢或轻蔑,对受施者说话亲切,善于应酬,乐于与乞讨者打交道,连同家人一起布施。他还把那布施的功德回向给一切世间的利益与安乐,回向给自己不动摇的解脱,回向给不尽的意愿、不尽的精进、不尽的定力、不尽的智慧、不尽的正等正觉。修习这布施波罗蜜的大士,应当对自己的生命和财物建立起无常想,对众生则生起大悲。只有这样,他在取用财物中值得取用的精华时,才会像从着火的房子里把全部财产和自己都搬出来一样,什么都不留下,彻底地全部舍掉。以上就是布施波罗蜜的修行次第。巴利
Evaṃ dadanto ca na anesanāya deti, na paropaghātena, na bhayena, na lajjāya, na dakkhiṇeyyarosanena, na paṇīte sati lūkhaṃ, na attukkaṃsanena, na paravambhanena, na phalābhikaṅkhāya, na yācakajigucchāya, na acittīkārena deti, atha kho sakkaccaṃ deti, sahatthena deti, kālena deti, cittiṃ katvā deti, avibhāgena deti, tīsu kālesu somanassito deti. Tatoyeva datvā na pacchānutāpī hoti, na paṭiggāhakavasena mānāvamānaṃ karoti, paṭiggāhakānaṃ piyasamudācāro hoti vadaññū yācayogo saparivāradāyī. Tañca dānasampattiṃ sakalalokahitasukhāya pariṇāmeti, attano ca akuppāya vimuttiyā, aparikkhayassa chandassa, aparikkhayassa vīriyassa, aparikkhayassa samādhānassa, aparikkhayassa ñāṇassa, aparikkhayāya sammāsambodhiyā pariṇāmeti. Imañca dānapāramiṃ paṭipajjantena mahāsattena jīvite, bhogesu ca aniccasaññā paccupaṭṭhapetabbā, sattesu ca mahākaruṇā. Evañhi bhoge gahetabbasāraṃ gaṇhanto ādittasmā viya agārasmā sabbaṃ sāpateyyaṃ, attānañca bahi nīharanto na kiñci seseti, niravasesato nissajjatiyeva. Ayaṃ tāva dānapāramiyā paṭipattikkamo.
关于戒波罗蜜,因为菩萨想要用一切智的戒的庄严来庄严众生,首先必须让自己的戒清净,所以他对众生应当怀有充满悲悯的心,即使在梦中也不会生起嗔恨。由于他乐于利益他人,就不应像抓毒蛇那样去执取他人的财物。他远离非梵行,远离七种淫欲的结合,更不用说与他人之妻发生关系了。他说真实、有益、可爱、有节制的话,并且适时说与法相应的话。他没有贪求,没有恶意,没有颠倒的见解,对正自觉者怀着坚定的信心和深厚的爱敬。这样,他已经远离了四恶趣轮回的苦道、不善业道和不善法,安住在通向天界和解脱的善业道中。由于他的意乐和修行都清净,他希望利益安乐众生的心愿就能迅速实现。巴利
Sīlapāramiyā pana yasmā sabbaññusīlālaṅkārehi satte alaṅkaritukāmena attanoyeva tāva sīlaṃ visodhetabbaṃ, tasmā sattesu tathā dayāpannacittena bhavitabbaṃ, yathā supinantenapi na āghāto uppajjeyya. Parūpakāraniratatāya parasantako alagaddo viya na parāmasitabbo. Abrahmacariyatopi ārācārī, sattavidhamethuna saṃyogavirato, pageva paradāragamanato. Saccaṃ hitaṃ piyaṃ parimitameva ca kālena dhammiṃ kathaṃ bhāsitā hoti, anabhijjhālu abyāpanno aviparītadassano sammāsambuddhe niviṭṭhasaddho niviṭṭhapemo. Iti caturāpāyavaṭṭadukkhapathehi akusalakammapathehi, akusaladhammehi ca oramitvā saggamokkhapathesu kusalakammapathesu patiṭṭhitassa suddhāsayapayogatāya yathābhipatthitā sattānaṃ hitasukhūpasañhitā manorathā sīghaṃ abhinipphajjanti.
在这里,由于远离杀生,他给一切众生布施无畏,毫不费力就能圆满修成慈心,获得十一种慈心的功德利益:少病、健康、长寿、多安乐,获得殊胜的身相特征,还能彻底断除嗔恨的习气。同样,由于远离偷盗,他获得盗贼等无法夺走的广大财富,成为不被人猜疑、令人喜爱、令人满意、值得信赖的人,对财富受用心无贪著,具有布施舍离的品性,并彻底断除贪欲的习气。由于远离非梵行,他成为无贪之人,身心轻安,为众生所喜爱、所满意、不令人猜疑,善好的名声广为传扬,对女人心无贪著,没有贪欲的意乐,多乐于出离,获得殊胜的身相特征,并彻底断除贪欲的习气。巴利
Tattha hiṃsānivattiyā sabbasattānaṃ abhayadānaṃ deti, appakasireneva mettābhāvanaṃ sampādeti, ekādasa mettānisaṃse adhigacchati, appābādho hoti appātaṅko dīghāyuko sukhabahulo, lakkhaṇavisese pāpuṇāti, dosavāsanañca samucchindati. Tathā adinnādānanivattiyā corādiasādhāraṇe uḷāre bhoge adhigacchati, anāsaṅkanīyo piyo manāpo vissasanīyo, vibhavasampattīsu alaggacitto pariccāgasīlo , lobhavāsanañca samucchindati. Abrahmacariyanivattiyā alobho hoti santakāyacitto, sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo aparisaṅkanīyo, kalyāṇo cassa kittisaddo abbhuggacchati, alaggacitto hoti mātugāmesu aluddhāsayo, nekkhammabahulo, lakkhaṇavisese adhigacchati, lobhavāsanañca samucchindati.
远离妄语之后,他成为众生衡量可信度的标准,说话可靠、坚定,言语值得采纳,天神也喜爱他、对他有好感,口中散发芬芳香气,守护自己的身业和语业。他还获得种种殊胜的身相特征,并断除烦恼习气。远离离间语之后,他的身体不被外敌所伤,眷属也不会被离间拆散;他对正法生起不可动摇的信心;对多生多世相识的众生保持坚固的友谊;成为一切众生绝对喜爱的人,染污很少。远离粗恶语之后,他成为众生喜爱、令人心生欢喜、性情温和、言语甜美、受人敬重的人,声音具足八种功德。远离杂秽语之后,他成为众生喜爱、令人欢喜、受人尊敬、言语值得采纳、说话有分寸的人;他拥有大威德、大势力,凭自然现前的辩才善于解答问题;在佛的境界中,他能用一句话就为无量众生解答无量问题。巴利
Musāvādanivattiyā sattānaṃ pamāṇabhūto hoti paccayiko theto ādeyyavacano devatānaṃ piyo manāpo surabhigandhamukho ārakkhiyakāyavacīsamācāro , lakkhaṇavisese ca adhigacchati, kilesavāsanañca samucchindati. Pesuññanivattiyā parūpakkamehi abhejjakāyo hoti abhejjaparivāro, saddhamme ca abhijjanakasaddho, daḷhamitto bhavantaraparicitānampi sattānaṃ ekantapiyo, asaṃkilesabahulo. Pharusavācānivattiyā sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo sukhasīlo madhuravacano sambhāvanīyo, aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato cassa saro (ma. ni. 2.387) nibbattati. Samphappalāpanivattiyā ca sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo garubhāvanīyo ca ādeyyavacano ca parimitālāpo, mahesakkho ca hoti mahānubhāvo, ṭhānuppattikena paṭibhānena pañhānaṃ byākaraṇakusalo, buddhabhūmiyañca ekāya eva vācāya anekabhāsānaṃ sattānaṃ anekesaṃ pañhānaṃ byākaraṇasamattho hoti.
由于不贪求,他想要的东西都能得到,对殊胜的财富也能生起欢喜心,被刹帝利大富长者等所认可,不会被敌人打败,不会遭遇诸根残缺,也没有能与他匹敌的人。由于无瞋恚,他成为众生见了就喜欢、值得敬重的人;因为乐于利他,不用费什么力气就能让众生生起净信;他本性不粗恶,安住在慈心中,具有大威势、大威力。由于没有邪见,他能遇到善友,即使被人砍头也不造恶业;因为看清了业是自己的主人这一道理,他不迷信吉凶预兆;他对正法的信心已经确立、扎根,深信如来的菩提,不会在其他教法里感到乐趣,就像白天鹅不会待在粪堆里一样;他善于辨明三相,最终获得无碍智;在证得菩提之前,他在各类众生中总是最殊胜的,能获得种种崇高的成就。巴利
Anabhijjhālutāya icchitalābhī hoti, uḷāresu ca bhogesu ruciṃ paṭilabhati, khattiyamahāsālādīnaṃ sammato hoti, paccatthikehi anabhibhavanīyo, indriyavekallaṃ na pāpuṇāti, appaṭipuggalo ca hoti. Abyāpādena piyadassano hoti sattānaṃ sambhāvanīyo, parahitābhinanditāya ca satte appakasireneva pasādeti, alūkhasabhāvo ca hoti mettāvihārī, mahesakkho ca hoti mahānubhāvo. Micchādassanābhāvena kalyāṇe sahāye paṭilabhati, sīsacchedampi pāpuṇanto pāpakammaṃ na karoti, kammassakatādassanato akotūhalamaṅgaliko ca hoti, saddhamme cassa saddhā patiṭṭhitā hoti mūlajātā, saddahati ca tathāgatānaṃ bodhiṃ , samayantaresu nābhiramati ukkāraṭṭhāne viya rājahaṃso, lakkhaṇattayaparijānanakusalo hoti, ante ca anāvaraṇañāṇalābhī, yāva bodhiṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāva tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sattanikāye ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭho ca hoti, uḷāruḷārasampattiyo pāpuṇāti.
应当这样生起深深的敬重:这个戒,是一切成就的根基,是一切佛陀功德的来源,是一切成佛之法的前行、入口和首要。然后,依靠念与正知的力量,不放逸地守护身语节制、守护诸根、圆满活命、受用资具,并且像对待伪装成朋友的敌人那样,警惕利养、恭敬和名声。应当依照“如母鸡护卵”等经论所说的方法,认真圆满戒行。这里只是简略说明,详细内容应按照《清净论》所说来了解。而且,不应为了自己从恶趣和烦恼中解脱而回向此戒,不是为了投生善趣,不是为了王位,不是为了转轮王、天王、帝释、魔罗、梵天的成就,也不是为了自己获得三明等,不是为了辟支菩提,而应当仅仅为了以一切知智,为一切众生成就无上的戒庄严而回向。巴利
‘‘Iti hidaṃ sīlaṃ nāma sabbasampattīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, sabbabuddhaguṇānaṃ pabhavabhūmi, sabbabuddhakaradhammānamādi caraṇaṃ mukhaṃ pamukha’’nti bahumānaṃ uppādetvā kāyavacīsaṃyame, indriyadamane, ājīvasampadāya, paccayaparibhoge ca satisampajaññabalena appamattena lābhasakkārasilokaṃ mittamukhapaccatthikaṃ viya sallakkhetvā ‘‘kikīva aṇḍa’’ntiādinā (visuddhi. 1.19; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7) vuttanayena sakkaccaṃ sīlaṃ sampādetabbaṃ . Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.6) vuttanayena veditabbo. Tañca panetaṃ sīlaṃ na attano duggatiparikilesavimuttiyā, sugatiyampi, na rajjasampattiyā, nacakkavatti-nadeva-nasakka-namāra-nabrahmasampattiyā, nāpi attano tevijjatādihetu, na paccekabodhiyā, atha kho sabbaññubhāvena sabbasattānaṃ anuttarasīlālaṅkārasampādanatthamevāti pariṇāmetabbaṃ.
同样地,居家生活是一切烦恼杂染的藏身之处,因为儿女妻室等而极度拥挤,又因为农耕、经商等各种事业场所而忙乱不堪,所以出离之乐等根本没有容身之地。对于种种欲乐,要这样观察它们的过患:就像沾在刀刃上的蜜滴,舔的时候只有一点点甜,却会带来大祸;就像闪电的光亮,只能短暂看到;就像疯子的装饰,是在颠倒认知中才觉得受用;就像盖在粪便上的东西,本质上只是对治手段;就像用手指蘸水来舔露珠,根本解不了渴;就像饥饿的人吃自己身上的肉,只会带来痛苦;就像钩上的鱼饵,是灾祸聚集的起因;就像烈火,在过去、现在、未来三时中都是产生苦的原因;就像猿胶,会成为束缚的因;就像杀手藏起来的蛆虫,掩盖了祸害;就像住在敌对的村庄,是充满恐惧的地方;就像养育敌人,会成为烦恼魔等的食物;就像节日的盛况,最终会变成坏灭之苦;就像空心树里的火,从内部燃烧;就像古井边垂下的芦苇上那团蜜,有重重过患;就像喝盐水,反而更渴;就像酒和麻醉品,只有下等人才亲近;因为快乐极少,所以被比喻为骸骨。以这样的方式观察过患之后,再从反面看出离的功德,心里倾向、投向、倾斜于出离、远离、寂止之乐等,这样来圆满出离波罗蜜。巴利
Tathā sakalasaṃkilesanivāsaṭṭhānatāya, puttadārādīhi mahāsambādhatāya, kasivaṇijjādinānāvidhakammantādhiṭṭhānabyākulatāya ca gharāvāsassa nekkhammasukhādīnaṃ anokāsataṃ, kāmānañca ‘‘satthadhārālaggamadhubindu viya ca avaleyhamānā parittassādā vipulānatthānubandhā’’ti ca ‘‘vijjulatobhāsena gahetabbaṃ naccaṃ viya parittakālopalabbhā, ummattakālaṅkāro viya viparītasaññāya anubhavitabbā , karīsāvacchādanasukhaṃ viya paṭikārabhūtā, udakatemitaṅguliyā ussāvakodakapānaṃ viya atittikarā, chātajjhattabhojanaṃ viya sābādhā, balisāmisaṃ viya byasanasannipātakāraṇā, aggisantāpo viya kālattayepi dukkhuppattihetubhūtā, makkaṭālepo viya bandhanimittā ghātakāvacchādanakimilayo viya anatthacchādanā, sapattagāmavāso viya bhayaṭṭhānabhūtā, paccatthikaposako viya kilesamārādīnaṃ āmisabhūtā, chaṇasampattiyo viya vipariṇāmadukkhā, koṭaraggi viya antodāhakā, purāṇakūpāvalambabīraṇamadhupiṇḍaṃ viya anekādīnavā, loṇūdakapānaṃ viya pipāsahetubhūtā, surāmerayaṃ viya nīcajanasevitā, appassādatāya aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā’’tiādinā ca nayena ādīnavaṃ sallakkhetvā tabbipariyāyena nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ passantena nekkhammapavivekaupasamasukhādīsu ninnapoṇapabbhāracittena nekkhammapāramī pūretabbā.
同样地,因为慧就像光明一样,不会和黑暗一起存在,不会和愚痴共存,所以菩萨首先应当避开那些造成愚痴的原因。造成愚痴的原因有这些:不乐、懈怠、伸懒腰、懒惰、喜欢群聚、贪睡、没有决断、对智慧不好奇、邪慢、不请教、不善养护身体、心不专注、亲近劣慧的人、不亲近有智慧的人、轻视自己、邪思维、颠倒执取、过度执著身体、不易受警策、五盖。简而言之,凡是反复造作这些法,就会让未生起的慧不生起、已生起的慧退失,因此想要避开这些造成愚痴的原因的人,应当致力于多闻以及禅那等的修习。巴利
Tathā yasmā paññā āloko viya andhakārena, mohena saha na vattati, tasmā mohakāraṇāni tāva bodhisattena parivajjitabbāni. Tatthimāni mohakāraṇāni – arati tandī vijambhitā ālasiyaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikārāmatā niddāsīlatā anicchayasīlatā ñāṇasmiṃ akutūhalatā micchādhimāno aparipucchakatā kāyassa na sammāparihāro asamāhitacittatā duppaññānaṃ puggalānaṃ sevanā paññavantānaṃ apayirupāsanā attaparibhavo micchāvikappo viparītābhiniveso kāyadaḷhībahulatā asaṃvegasīlatā pañca nīvaraṇāni. Saṅkhepato ye vā pana dhamme āsevato anuppannā paññā na uppajjati, uppannā parihāyati, iti imāni sammohakāraṇāni parivajjantena bāhusacce jhānādīsu ca yogo karaṇīyo.
在这里,多闻的领域划分是这样的:五蕴、十二处、十八界、四圣谛、二十二根、十二支的缘起,以及以四念处为首的各种善法、不善法等法的类别划分。还有世间中那些无可指责的知识领域,以及那些能够为众生带来利益和安乐的各种殊胜说法。
像这样,对于整个闻法的领域,以善巧方法为先导的慧,以念和精进作为支撑,通过认真学习、听闻、记持、温习、反复询问,深入其中,并在那里安立他人,由此应当生起闻所成慧。同样地,通过以理思择蕴等自性法的种种行相,让心对这些法审察认可,由此生起思所成慧。再通过把握蕴等本身的自相与共相,生起世间的遍知,由此完成前行修习的慧。
这样,他就能无差别地遍知内外诸法:“这仅仅是名色,依适当的因缘而生起、也依因缘而灭去,在这里没有谁是作者或令作者。以‘有了之后又消失’这个含义,是无常;以‘被生灭逼迫压迫’这个含义,是苦;以‘不能自主掌控’这个含义,是无我。”如此遍知之后,他舍弃对它们的执著,也让别人舍弃对它们的执著,纯粹出于悲悯,直到佛陀的功德像放在手掌上一样亲自呈现之前,一直以令众生进入、成熟、安立于三乘之道的方式来做,同时使自己在禅那、解脱、定、等至方面达到自在,于是在慧方面达到了最顶峰。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ bāhusaccassa visayavibhāgo – pañca khandhā dvādasāyatanāni, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo cattāri saccāni bāvīsatindriyāni dvādasapadiko paṭiccasamuppādo, tathā satipaṭṭhānādayo kusalādidhammappakārabhedā ca. Yāni ca loke anavajjāni vijjaṭṭhānāni, ye ca sattānaṃ hitasukhavidhānayogyā byākaraṇavisesā. Iti evaṃ pakāraṃ sakalameva sutavisayaṃ upāyakosallapubbaṅgamāya paññāya sativīriyupatthambhakāraṇāya sādhukaṃ uggahaṇasavanadhāraṇaparicayaparipucchāhi ogāhetvā tattha ca paresaṃ patiṭṭhapanena sutamayā paññā nibbattetabbā, tathā khandhādīnaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ ākāraparivitakkanamukhena te nijjhānaṃ khamāpentena cintāmayā, khandhādīnaṃyeva pana salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇapariggahavasena lokiyaṃ pariññaṃ nibbattentena pubbabhāgabhāvanāpaññā sampādetabbā. Evañhi ‘‘nāmarūpamattamidaṃ yathārahaṃ paccayehi uppajjati ceva nirujjhati ca, na ettha koci kattā vā kāretā vā, hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccaṃ, udayabbayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhaṃ, avasavattanaṭṭhena anattā’’ti ajjhattikabāhire dhamme nibbisesaṃ parijānanto tattha āsaṅgaṃ pajahitvā, pare ca tattha taṃ jahāpetvā kevalaṃ karuṇāvaseneva yāva na buddhaguṇā hatthatalaṃ āgacchanti, tāva yānattaye satte avatāraṇaparipācanehi patiṭṭhāpento, jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattiyo ca vasībhāvaṃ pāpento paññāya ativiya matthakaṃ pāpuṇātīti.
同样,大士为了证得正等觉而发下誓愿,应当每天这样省察:今天我又积累了什么福德和智慧的资粮?我做了什么利益众生的事?他应当为了众生的利益而发起精进努力;为了饶益一切众生,应当舍弃自己的身体和生命;应当以没有界限的慈和悲遍满一切众生;众生所生起的任何痛苦,都应当甘愿由自己来承受;应当随喜一切众生的功德;应当反复不断地省察佛陀的伟大;无论以身或是以语做什么行为,这一切都应当以趣向菩提的心作为先导来做。因为用这种方法,菩萨就能积集无量的福德。此外,为了众生的受用和保护,他应当舍弃自己的身体和生命,去寻求对治饥饿、口渴、寒冷、炎热、风吹、日晒等痛苦的办法。而通过上述对治痛苦所生起的快乐,以及他自己所获得的快乐——在可爱的园林、苑囿、殿堂、楼台等处,以及在森林寂静处,由于身心没有热恼而获得清凉寂静的快乐——还有他所听闻的诸佛、随佛修行者、独觉佛、菩萨们现法安乐而住于禅那等至的快乐,这一切他都毫无界限地回向给众生。这就是尚未得定阶段的修行方式。巴利
Tathā sammāsambodhiyā katābhinīhārena mahāsattena ‘‘ko nu ajja puññañāṇasambhāro upacito, kiñca mayā kataṃ parahita’’nti divase divase paccavekkhantena sattahitatthaṃ ussāho karaṇīyo, sabbesampi sattānaṃ upakārāya attano kāyaṃ jīvitañca ossajjitabbaṃ, sabbepi sattā anodhiso mettāya karuṇāya ca pharitabbā, yā kāci sattānaṃ dukkhuppatti, sabbā sā attani pāṭikaṅkhitabbā, sabbesañca sattānaṃ puññaṃ abbhanumoditabbaṃ, buddhamahantatā abhiṇhaṃ paccavekkhitabbā, yañca kiñci kammaṃ karoti kāyena vācāya vā, taṃ sabbaṃ bodhininnacittapubbaṅgamaṃ kātabbaṃ. Iminā hi upāyena bodhisattānaṃ aparimeyyo puññabhāgo upacīyati. Apica sattānaṃ paribhogatthaṃ paripālanatthañca attano sarīraṃ jīvitañca pariccajitvā khuppipāsāsītuṇhavātātapādidukkhapaṭikāro pariyesitabbo. Yañca yathāvuttadukkhapaṭikārajaṃ sukhaṃ attanā paṭilabhati, tathā ramaṇīyesu ārāmuyyānapāsādatalādīsu, araññāyatanesu ca kāyacittasantāpābhāvena abhinibbutattā sukhaṃ vindati, yañca suṇāti buddhānubuddhapaccekabuddhabodhisattānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārabhūtaṃ jhānasamāpattisukhaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ sattesu anodhiso upasaṃharati. Ayaṃ tāva asamāhitabhūmiyaṃ nayo.
入定之后,他把自己亲身体验到的、由殊胜证悟所产生的喜与轻安之乐,毫无分别地投向一切众生。同样地,他看到众生沉没在巨大的轮回之苦中,也沉没在作为其根源的烦恼与造作之苦中,便对他们生起这样的心:
在地狱里,众生持续不断地、长久地感受着由切割、破裂、劈开、碾磨、灼烧等所产生的苦受——剧烈、粗恶、刺痛。在畜生道,众生因互相瞋恨、烧恼、伤害、残杀、依附他人等而受苦。在饿鬼道,众生身体被火焰环绕,高举双臂哀嚎,在如火口的饥渴中被焚烧,以呕吐物、痰唾等为食,感受着巨大的痛苦。他看到人类为了谋生而遭遇种种巨大的灾祸与不幸:因被砍手等刑罚而变得丑陋、难看、贫穷;因饥渴等而受强者欺压;为他人负重;依附他人而活——他们感受着与恶趣几乎无差别的苦。他看到欲界天人,心散乱在像毒物一样的感官享受上,被贪等烦恼缠缚焚烧,就像被大风吹聚的干柴烈火,热恼从未止息,内心躁动不安,受着未调伏的烦恼之苦。他看到色界和无色界的天人,虽然付出了巨大的努力,却像飞入高空深处的鸟,又像被大力士射出的箭——即使寿命长久,也终归要堕落,终究没有超越生、老、死。就这样,他以慈与悲,无界限地遍满一切众生。
如此,以身、语、意不断地积累菩提资粮的人,应当持续发起精进。巴利
Samāhito pana attanā yathānubhūtaṃ visesādhigamanibbattaṃ pītipassaddhisukhaṃ sabbasattesu adhimuccati, tathā mahati saṃsāradukkhe, tannimittabhūte ca kilesābhisaṅkhāradukkhe nimuggaṃ sattanikāyaṃ disvā tatthapi chedanabhedanaphālanapisanaggisantāpādijanitā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā nirantaraṃ cirakālaṃ vediyante nārake, aññamaññaṃ kujjhanasantāpanaviheṭhanahiṃsanaparādhīnatādīhi dukkhaṃ anubhavante tiracchāne, jotimālā’kulasarīre uddhabāhuviravante ukkāmukhe khuppipāsādīhi ḍayhamāne ca vantakheḷādiāhāre ca mahādukkhaṃ vedayamāne pete ca pariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ mahantaṃ anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇante hatthacchedādikāraṇayogena dubbaṇṇaduddasikadaliddatādibhāvena khuppipāsādiyogena balavantehi abhibhavanīyato, paresaṃ vahanato, parādhīnato ca nārake pete tiracchāne ca atisayante apāyadukkhanibbisesaṃ dukkhaṃ anubhavante manusse ca tathā visayavisaparibhogavikkhittacittatāya rāgādipariyuṭṭhānena ḍayhamāne vāyuvegasamuṭṭhitajālāsamiddhasukkhakaṭṭhasannipāte aggikkhandhe viya anupasantapariḷāhavuttike anihataparādhīne kāmāvacaradeve ca mahatā vāyāmena vidūramākāsaṃ vigāhitasakuntā viya, balavantehi khittasarā viya ca ‘‘satipi cirappavattiyaṃ anaccantikatāya pātapariyosānā anatikkantajātijarāmaraṇā evā’’ti rūpāvacarārūpāvacaradeve ca passantena mettāya karuṇāya ca anodhiso sattā pharitabbā. Evaṃ kāyena vācāya manasā ca bodhisambhāre nirantaraṃ upacinantena ussāho pavattetabbo.
再者,应该这样想:佛的境界不可思议、不可限量、广大、清净、无垢、无可比拟、远离一切烦恼,是一切功德聚的根源;为了成就这样的佛果而需要的精进,其威力同样不可思议。这种精进,普通人连听都听不进去,更不用说去实践了。为什么呢?因为三类大誓愿心的生起、四种佛地、四种摄众之法、大悲的所缘、对佛法的审察忍可、于一切法无所执著、视一切众生如己子、于轮回之苦心不疲厌、舍施一切可施之物而无悔无骄、安立于增上戒学等决意不动摇、于善行心生欢喜踊跃、心倾向于远离、修习禅那、听闻无过失的教法而不知满足、以利益他人的意愿来宣说所听闻的法、令众生安立于正道、所发起的精进坚固、具足大智大勇之德、面对他人的毁骂伤害而心不变异、安立于真实、于等至得自在、于神通获得力量、通达三相、以致力于念处等来积集出世间道的资粮、趋向九种出世间法。像这样,从发愿直到成就大菩提,这期间所有菩提资粮的修行,全都是依靠精进的威力才得以成就。因此,不应舍弃,而应以恭敬、不间断之心修习精进。当精进成就时,忍辱等以及布施等一切菩提资粮,都因为依止精进才能圆满。对于忍辱等,也应当按这个方法来了知修行。巴利
Apica ‘‘acinteyyāparimitavipuloḷāravimalanirupamanirupakkilesaguṇanicayanidānabhūtassa buddhabhāvassa ussakkitvā sampahaṃsanayogyaṃ vīriyaṃ nāma acinteyyānubhāvameva. Yaṃ na pacurajanā sotumpi sakkuṇanti, pageva paṭipajjituṃ. Tathā hi tividhā abhinīhāracittuppatti, catasso buddhabhūmiyo, cattāri saṅgahavatthūni (dī. ni. 3.210, 313; a. ni. 4.32), karuṇokāsatā, buddhadhammesu nijjhānakkhanti, sabbadhammesu nirupalepo, sabbasattesu puttasaññā, saṃsāradukkhehi aparikhedo, sabbadeyyadhammapariccāgo, tena ca niratimānatā, adhisīlasikkhādiadhiṭṭhānaṃ, tattha ca acalatā, kusalakiriyāsu pītipāmojjaṃ, vivekaninnacittatā, jhānānuyogo, anavajjasutena atitti, yathāsutassa dhammassa paresaṃ hitajjhāsayena desanā, sattānaṃ ñāye nivesanaṃ, ārambhadaḷhatā, dhīravīrabhāvo, parāpavādaparāpakāresu vikārābhāvo, saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, samāpattīsu vasībhāvo, abhiññāsu balappatti, lakkhaṇattayāvabodho, satipaṭṭhānādīsu abhiyogena lokuttaramaggasambhārasambharaṇaṃ, navalokuttarāvakkantī’’ti evamādikā sabbā bodhisambhārapaṭipatti vīriyānubhāveneva samijjhatīti abhinīhārato yāva mahābodhi anossajjantena sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ vīriyaṃ sampādetabbaṃ. Sampajjamāne ca vīriye khantiādayo dānādayo ca sabbepi bodhisambhārā tadadhīnavuttitāya sampannā eva hontīti. Khantiādīsupi iminā nayena paṭipatti veditabbā.
就这样,菩萨以布施把自己的安乐资具让给众生,从多方面去利益他们,这就是布施的修行;以持戒,不去破坏众生的生命、财产、妻子,不使他们分离,说亲切有益的话,不伤害他们等等,这就是持戒的修行;以出离,不接受众生的利养,而以法布施等方式从多方面做利益他们的事,这就是出离的修行;以智慧,善巧地掌握利益众生的方法,这就是智慧的修行;以精进,在这些利益众生的事上发起勤奋和推动,这就是精进的修行;以忍辱,忍受众生对自己的冒犯,这就是忍辱的修行;以真实,不欺骗众生,承诺做利益他们的事就绝不食言等等,这就是真实的修行;以决意,在做利益众生的事时,即使遭遇损失也不动摇,这就是决意的修行;以慈心,心中常想着众生的利益和安乐,这就是慈的修行;以舍心,无论众生对自己有恩还是有怨,内心都不受影响而改变,这就是舍的修行。应当知道,以上就是这位怜悯一切众生的菩萨,为无量众生而积累的、凡夫所不具备的无量福德与智慧资粮的修行。对于前面所说的这些资粮的因缘条件,都应当认真地去圆满实行。巴利
Iti sattānaṃ sukhūpakaraṇapariccāgena bahudhā anuggahakaraṇaṃ dānena paṭipatti, sīlena tesaṃ jīvitasāpateyyadārarakkhaabhedapiyahitavacanāvihiṃsādikaraṇāni, nekkhammena nesaṃ āmisapaṭiggahaṇadhammadānādinā anekadhā hitacariyā, paññāya tesaṃ hitakaraṇūpāyakosallaṃ, vīriyena tattha ussāhārambhaasaṃhīrāni, khantiyā tadaparādhasahanaṃ, saccena tesaṃ avañcanatadupakārakiriyāsamādānāvisaṃvādanādi, adhiṭṭhānena tadupakārakaraṇe anatthasampātepi acalanaṃ, mettāya tesaṃ hitasukhānucintanaṃ, upekkhāya tesaṃ upakārāpakāresu vikārānāpattīti evaṃ aparimāṇe satte ārabbha anukampitasabbasattassa bodhisattassa puthujjanehi asādhāraṇo aparimāṇo puññañāṇasambhārūpacayo ettha paṭipattīti veditabbaṃ. Yo cetāsaṃ paccayo vutto, tassa ca sakkaccaṃ sampādanaṃ.
什么是区分?就是十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最上波罗蜜,合起来共三十波罗蜜。其中,有些人说:已经发愿的菩萨,内心倾向于利益他人、修行也以利益他人为目标,他们那些夹杂着黑法的白法,就是波罗蜜;不被这些黑法夹杂的白法,就是近波罗蜜;既非黑也非白的,就是最上波罗蜜。还有人说:在积累资粮的阶段所修的,是波罗蜜;在菩萨阶段修到圆满的,是近波罗蜜;在佛陀阶段于一切方面都圆满的,是最上波罗蜜。或者说,在菩萨阶段因为做利益他人的事而称为波罗蜜,因为做利益自己的事而称为近波罗蜜;在佛陀阶段,由于证得力与无畏,自利利他两方面都圆满,所以称为最上波罗蜜。这样,在初、中、后三个阶段——也就是发愿、开始修行、最终完成时——就有了这些区分。另有人说:对于以止息嗔害、以悲为本性,已经证得生存乐、解脱乐、最上乐的人,根据福德积集的差别而有这种区分。巴利
Ko vibhāgoti dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samattiṃsa pāramiyo. Tattha katābhinīhārassa bodhisattassa parahitakaraṇābhininnaāsayappayogassa kaṇhadhammavokiṇṇā sukkadhammā pāramiyo, tehi avokiṇṇā sukkā dhammā upapāramiyo, akaṇhā asukkā paramatthapāramiyoti keci. Samudāgamanakālesu pūriyamānā pāramiyo, bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ puṇṇā upapāramiyo, buddhabhūmiyaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇā paramatthapāramiyo. Bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ vā parahitakaraṇato pāramiyo, attahitakaraṇato upapāramiyo, buddhabhūmiyaṃ balavesārajjasamadhigamena ubhayahitaparipūraṇato paramatthapāramiyoti evaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānesu paṇidhānārambhapariniṭṭhānesu tesaṃ vibhāgoti apare. Dosupasamakaruṇāpakatikānaṃ bhavasukhavimuttisukhaparamasukhappattānaṃ puññūpacayabhedato tabbibhāgoti aññe.
有些人说:那些以惭、愧、念为依靠,以出世间法为尊,重视戒、定、慧,已经度过、正在度过、将要度过的随觉者、独觉佛、正自觉者,他们的波罗蜜、近波罗蜜、最上波罗蜜,是按照证得三种菩提而像上面所说的那样区分的。另一些人说:从内心发愿开始,直到以言语发愿之间所修的资粮,是波罗蜜;从言语发愿开始,直到以身发愿之间所修的,是近波罗蜜;从以身发愿开始,是最上波罗蜜。还有一些人说:以随喜他人福德而修的资粮,是波罗蜜;以劝令他人去做而修的,是近波罗蜜;以自己亲自去做而修的,是最上波罗蜜。同样,另有一些人说:能带来生存之乐以及福德与智慧资粮的,是波罗蜜;能带来自己涅槃之乐的,是近波罗蜜;能带来他人这两种乐的,是最上波罗蜜。巴利
Lajjāsatimānāpassayānaṃ lokuttaradhammādhipatīnaṃ sīlasamādhipaññāgarukānaṃ tāritataritatārayitūnaṃ anubuddhapaccekabuddhasammāsambuddhānaṃ pāramī, upapāramī, paramatthapāramīti bodhittayappattito yathāvuttavibhāgoti keci. Cittapaṇidhito yāva vacīpaṇidhi, tāva pavattā sambhārā pāramiyo, vacīpaṇidhito yāva kāyapaṇidhi, tāva pavattā upapāramiyo, kāyapaṇidhito pabhuti paramatthapāramiyoti apare. Aññe pana ‘‘parapuññānumodanavasena pavattā sambhārā pāramiyo, paresaṃ kārāpanavasena pavattā upapāramiyo, sayaṃ karaṇavasena pavattā paramatthapāramiyo’’ti vadanti. Tathā bhavasukhāvaho puññañāṇasambhāro pāramī, attano nibbānasukhāvaho upapāramī, paresaṃ tadubhayasukhāvaho paramatthapāramīti eke.
把儿女、妻子、财产等生活资具施舍出去,就是布施波罗蜜;把自己的肢体施舍出去,就是布施近波罗蜜;把自己的生命施舍出去,就是布施最上波罗蜜。同样,对于儿女、妻子等这三种对象,以不违犯的方式,就是三种戒波罗蜜;对这三种对象断除贪着、舍离而去,就是三种出离波罗蜜;断除对资具、肢体和生命的渴爱,并为众生判断利害,就是三种智慧波罗蜜;为成就上述布施等而精勤努力,就是三种精进波罗蜜;忍受那些障碍资具、肢体和生命的人与事,就是三种忍辱波罗蜜;为了资具、肢体和生命也不舍弃真实,就是三种真实波罗蜜;布施等波罗蜜只有靠不动摇的决意才能成就,所以即使资具等遭到毁坏,内心仍然坚定不动摇,就是三种决意波罗蜜;对伤害资具等的众生也不舍弃慈爱,就是三种慈爱波罗蜜;对上述三种事,无论遇到帮助者还是伤害者,都保持平等中立,就是三种舍波罗蜜。应当这样了知这些波罗蜜的分类。巴利
Puttadāradhanādiupakaraṇapariccāgo pana dānapāramī, attano aṅgapariccāgo dānaupapāramī, attano jīvitapariccāgo dānaparamatthapāramī. Tathā puttadārādikassa tividhassapi hetu avītikkamanavasena tisso sīlapāramiyo, tesu eva tividhesu vatthūsu ālayaṃ upacchinditvā nikkhamanavasena tisso nekkhammapāramiyo, upakaraṇaṅgajīvitataṇhaṃ samūhanitvā sattānaṃ hitāhitavinicchayakaraṇavasena tisso paññāpāramiyo, yathāvuttabhedānaṃ pariccāgādīnaṃ vāyamanavasena tisso vīriyapāramiyo, upakaraṇaṅgajīvitantarāyakarānaṃ khamanavasena tisso khantipāramiyo, upakaraṇaṅgajīvitahetu saccāpariccāgavasena tisso saccapāramiyo, dānādipāramiyo akuppādhiṭṭhānavaseneva samijjhantīti upakaraṇādivināsepi acalādhiṭṭhānavasena tisso adhiṭṭhānapāramiyo, upakaraṇādiupaghātakesupi sattesu mettāya avijahanavasena tisso mettāpāramiyo, yathāvuttavatthuttayassa upakārāpakāresu sattasaṅkhāresu majjhattatāpaṭilābhavasena tisso upekkhāpāramiyoti evamādinā etāsaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo.
这里“摄集”是什么意思呢?这些波罗蜜如果按类别区分,虽然有三十种,但按布施波罗蜜等的性质来说只有十种;同样地,按布施、持戒、忍辱、精进、禅那、智慧这六种性质来分,又可以归为六种。其中,出离波罗蜜在表现为出家时,归入戒波罗蜜;在表现为远离五盖时,归入禅那波罗蜜;而就它是善法这一点来说,则被六种波罗蜜全都包含。真实波罗蜜只是戒波罗蜜的一部分,也就是言语真实、远离不真实这方面属于戒;但就智慧真实这方面来说,则归入慧波罗蜜。慈波罗蜜只归入禅那波罗蜜,舍波罗蜜归入禅那和慧波罗蜜,决意波罗蜜则被全部六种波罗蜜所包含。巴利
Ko saṅgahoti ettha pana yathā etā vibhāgato tiṃsavidhāpi dānapāramīādibhāvato dasavidhā, evaṃ dānasīlakhantivīriyajhānapaññāsabhāvena chabbidhā. Etāsu hi nekkhammapāramī sīlapāramiyā saṅgahitā tassā pabbajjābhāve, nīvaraṇavivekabhāve pana jhānapāramiyā, kusaladhammabhāve chahipi saṅgahitā. Saccapāramī sīlapāramiyā ekadesoyeva vacīsaccaviratisaccapakkhe, ñāṇasaccapakkhe pana paññāpāramiyā saṅgahitā. Mettāpāramī jhānapāramiyā eva, upekkhāpāramī jhānapaññāpāramīhi, adhiṭṭhānapāramī sabbāhipi saṅgahitāti.
这六种功德——布施等——彼此之间相互关联,能成就十五对等一系列的配对。具体是怎样的呢?
以布施与戒这一对,成就“做利益他人的事”与“不做损害他人的事”这一对;
以布施与忍辱这一对,成就无贪与无嗔这一对;
以布施与精进这一对,成就舍与善巧这一对;
以布施与禅那这一对,成就断除贪欲与断除嗔害这一对;
以布施与慧这一对,成就圣道与职责这一对;
以戒与忍辱这两种,成就修行清净与动机清净这两种;
以戒与精进这两种,成就两种修习;
以戒与禅那这两种,成就断除恶戒与断除烦恼缠缚这两种;
以戒与慧这两种,成就两种布施;
以忍辱与精进这一对,成就堪忍与勇猛这一对;
以忍辱与禅那这一对,成就断除敌对与随顺这一对;
以忍辱与慧这一对,成就通达空性与忍辱这两种;
以精进与禅那这两种,成就策励与心不散乱这两种;
以精进与慧这两种,成就两种依处;
以禅那与慧这两种,成就两种乘。
以布施、戒、忍辱这三支,成就断除贪、嗔、痴这三支;
以布施、戒、精进这三支,成就获取财物、生命、身体坚实这三支;
以布施、戒、禅那这三支,成就三种福德事;
以布施、戒、慧这三支,成就财施、无畏施、法施这三种。
如此,其余的三支组、四支组等,也应按照相应的情况,把三支组、四支组等组合起来。巴利
Etesañca dānādīnaṃ channaṃ guṇānaṃ aññamaññaṃ sambandhānaṃ pañcadasayugaḷādīni pañcadasayugaḷādisādhakāni honti – seyyathidaṃ? Dānasīlayugaḷena parahitāhitānaṃ karaṇākaraṇayugaḷasiddhi, dānakhantiyugaḷena alobhādosayugaḷasiddhi, dānavīriyayugaḷena cāgasutayugaḷasiddhi, dānajhānayugaḷena kāmadosappahānayugaḷasiddhi, dānapaññāyugaḷena ariyayānadhurayugaḷasiddhi, sīlakhantidvayena payogāsayasuddhidvayasiddhi, sīlavīriyadvayena bhāvanādvayasiddhi, sīlajhānadvayena dussīlyapariyuṭṭhānappahānadvayasiddhi, sīlapaññādvayena dānadvayasiddhi, khantivīriyayugaḷena khamātejadvayasiddhi, khantijhānayugaḷena virodhānurodhappahānayugaḷasiddhi , khantipaññāyugaḷena suññatākhantipaṭivedhadukasiddhi, vīriyajhānadukena paggāhāvikkhepadukasiddhi, vīriyapaññādukena saraṇadukasiddhi, jhānapaññādukena yānadukasiddhi. Dānasīlakhantittikena lobhadosamohappahānattikasiddhi, dānasīlavīriyattikena bhogajīvitakāyasārādānattikasiddhi, dānasīlajhānattikena puññakiriyavatthuttikasiddhi, dānasīlapaññātikena āmisābhayadhammadānattikasiddhīti evaṃ itarehipi tikehi catukkādīhi ca yathāsambhavaṃ tikāni catukkādīni ca yojetabbāni.
这六种波罗蜜,也要知道它们被四种决意所统摄。从统摄一切波罗蜜的整体来说,有四种决意,就是:真实决意、舍弃决意、寂静决意、慧决意。其中,“决意”的意思是:依它而安住,或者安住在这上面,或者就只是决意本身。真实决意,就是真实本身也是决意;或者是真实的决意;或者是以真实为决意,所以叫真实决意。其余几个也是同样的道理。总的来说,一位大士已经发愿要成就出世间功德,又悲悯一切众生,从他遍知一切的角度,以统摄一切波罗蜜来说,就是真实决意;从舍弃与这些功德相反的东西来说,就是舍弃决意;从依靠一切波罗蜜的功德而达到寂静来说,就是寂静决意;从善巧运用这些功德来利益他人来说,就是慧决意。具体来说,当大士承诺“我绝不欺骗有需要的人,我一定会布施”时,因为不违背承诺而布施,因为不违背布施而随喜,因为舍弃了悭吝等对立面,因为在布施物、接受者、布施行为和应施之法耗尽时止息了贪、嗔、痴和恐惧,因为能适时、如法、如理地布施,并且以智慧为主导,所以布施就成为这四种决意的基础。同样,因为守护和受持戒律而不违犯,因为舍弃恶戒,因为止息恶行,并且以智慧为主导,所以戒就成为这四种决意的基础。因为如所承诺而忍耐,因为舍弃对他人过失的分别,因为止息嗔怒的缠缚,并且以智慧为主导,所以忍辱就成为这四种决意的基础。因为如所承诺而做利益他人的事,因为舍弃怯弱,因为止息不善法,并且以智慧为主导,所以精进就成为这四种决意的基础。因为如所承诺而思惟利益世间,因为舍弃五盖,因为止息心的散乱,并且以智慧为主导,所以禅那就成为这四种决意的基础。因为如所承诺而善巧于利益他人的方法,因为舍弃不善巧的行为,因为止息愚痴的热恼,并且因为获得一切知智,所以慧就成为这四种决意的基础。巴利
Evaṃ chabbidhānampi pana imāsaṃ pāramīnaṃ catūhi adhiṭṭhānehi saṅgaho veditabbo. Sabbapāramīnaṃ samūhasaṅgahato hi cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni. Seyyathidaṃ – saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ, paññādhiṭṭhānanti. Tattha adhitiṭṭhati etena, ettha vā adhitiṭṭhati, adhiṭṭhānamattameva vā tanti adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Saccañca taṃ adhiṭṭhānañca, saccassa vā adhiṭṭhānaṃ, saccaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ etassāti vā saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Tattha avisesato tāva lokuttaraguṇe katābhinīhārassa anukampitasabbasattassa mahāsattassa pariññānurūpaṃ sabbapāramipariggahato saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ paṭipakkhapariccāgato cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, sabbapāramitāguṇehi upasamato upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ , tehiyeva parahitopāyakosallato paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Visesato pana ‘‘atthikajanaṃ avisaṃvādetvā dassāmī’’ti paṭijānato, paṭiññaṃ avisaṃvādetvā dānato, dānaṃ avisaṃvādetvā anumodanato, macchariyādipaṭipakkhapariccāgato, deyyapaṭiggāhakadānadeyyadhammakkhayesu lobhadosamohabhayavūpasamato, yathārahaṃ yathākālaṃ yathāvidhānañca dānato, paññuttarato ca kusaladhammānaṃ caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ dānaṃ. Tathā saṃvarasamādānassa avītikkamato, dussīlyapariccāgato, duccaritavūpasamato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ sīlaṃ. Yathāpaṭiññaṃ khamanato, parāparādhavikappapariccāgato, kodhapariyuṭṭhānavūpasamato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānā khanti. Paṭiññānurūpaṃ parahitakaraṇato, visādapariccāgato, akusaladhammānaṃ vūpasamato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vīriyaṃ. Paṭiññānurūpaṃ lokahitānucintanato, nīvaraṇapariccāgato, cittavūpasamato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ jhānaṃ. Yathāpaṭiññaṃ parahitūpāyakosallato, anupāyakiriyāpariccāgato , mohajapariḷāhavūpasamato, sabbaññutāpaṭilābhato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānā paññā.
在这里,依照所应知与所承诺而随顺的,是真实决意;舍弃对事物之欲和烦恼之欲的执取,是舍弃决意;止息嗔害与痛苦,是寂静决意;随觉与通达,是慧决意。含摄三种真实、与三种嗔心相对立的,是真实决意;含摄三种舍弃、与三种嗔心相对立的,是舍弃决意;含摄三种止息、与三种嗔心相对立的,是寂静决意;含摄三种智慧、与三种嗔心相对立的,是慧决意。被真实决意所含摄的舍弃、寂静、慧决意,因为它们不欺诳、随顺承诺;被舍弃决意所含摄的真实、寂静、慧决意,因为它们舍弃对立面,并且是全部舍弃的结果;被寂静决意所含摄的真实、舍弃、慧决意,因为它们止息了烦恼的热恼、止息了欲、止息了欲的热恼;被慧决意所含摄的真实、舍弃、寂静决意,因为以智慧为先导、智慧随后运转。如此,一切波罗蜜都是由真实所引发,由舍弃所彰显,由寂静所增长,由智慧而清净。因为真实是它们生起的因,舍弃是它们摄持的因,寂静是它们增长的因,智慧是它们清净的因。同样,在开始时是真实决意,因为真实是承诺;在中间是舍弃决意,因为已发愿的人为了他人利益而舍弃自身;在最后是寂静决意,因为以一切寂静为终结;在开始、中间、最后各阶段都是慧决意,因为它存在时这些才能生起,它不存在时这些就不存在,并且它们依照所承诺而得以修习。巴利
Tattha ñeyyapaṭiññānuvidhānehi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, vatthukāmakilesakāmapariccāgehi cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, dosadukkhavūpasamehi upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ, anubodhapaṭivedhehi paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tividhasaccapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tividhacāgapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tividhavūpasamapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tividhañāṇapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Saccādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni cāgūpasamapaññādhiṭṭhānāni avisaṃvādanato , paṭiññānuvidhānato ca. Cāgādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni saccūpasamapaññādhiṭṭhānāni paṭipakkhapariccāgato, sabbapariccāgaphalattā ca. Upasamādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni saccacāgapaññādhiṭṭhānāni kilesapariḷāhūpasamato, kāmūpasamato, kāmapariḷāhūpasamato ca. Paññādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni saccacāgūpasamādhiṭṭhānāni ñāṇapubbaṅgamato, ñāṇānuparivattanato cāti evaṃ sabbāpi pāramiyo saccappabhāvitā cāgaparibyañjitā upasamopabrūhitā paññāparisuddhā. Saccañhi etāsaṃ janakahetu, cāgo pariggāhakahetu, upasamo parivuḍḍhihetu, paññā pārisuddhihetu. Tathā ādimhi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccapaṭiññattā, majjhe cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ katapaṇidhānassa parahitāya attapariccāgato, ante upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ sabbūpasamapariyosānattā, ādimajjhapariyosānesu paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ tasmiṃ sati sambhavato, asati abhāvato, yathāpaṭiññañca bhāvato.
在这里,大人因为具备能成办自他利益、能让人尊重敬爱的真实决意和舍弃决意,所以在家人身份时,用财物布施来摄受他人。同样,因为具备能成办自他利益、能让人尊重敬爱的寂静决意和慧决意,所以出家身份时,用法布施来摄受他人。巴利
Tattha mahāpurisā attahitaparahitakarehi garupiyabhāvakarehi saccacāgādhiṭṭhānehi gihibhūtā āmisadānena pare anuggaṇhanti. Tathā attahitaparahitakarehi garupiyabhāvakarehi upasamapaññādhiṭṭhānehi ca pabbajitabhūtā dhammadānena pare anuggaṇhanti.
在这里,菩萨在最后一生圆满了四种决意。有些人说,只有圆满了四种决意的人,才会投生到最后一世。因为在那一世,入胎、住胎、出胎时,由于慧决意的生起,他具念正知;由于真实决意的圆满,他一出生就面朝北方迈出七步,环视一切方向,以与真实相应的语言三遍发出狮子吼:“我是世间最上者、最胜者……我是世间最尊者”;由于寂静决意的生起,他见到老人、病人、死人、出家人,作为通达四种法要的人,对青春、健康、寿命、成就的骄慢就止息了;由于舍弃决意的生起,他对庞大的亲属眷属和已到手的转轮王权,毫无留恋地全部舍弃。巴利
Tattha antimabhave bodhisattassa caturadhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ. Paripuṇṇacaturadhiṭṭhānassa hi carimakabhavūpapattīti eke. Tatra hi gabbhokkantiṭhitiabhinikkhamanesu paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena sato sampajāno saccādhiṭṭhānapāripūriyā sampatijāto uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gantvā sabbā disā oloketvā saccānuparivattinā vacasā ‘‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭho…pe… seṭṭhohamasmi lokassā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ nadi, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena jiṇṇāturamatapabbajitadassāvino catudhammapadesakovidassa yobbanārogyajīvitasampattimadānaṃ upasamo, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena mahato ñātiparivaṭṭassa hatthagatassa ca cakkavattirajjassa anapekkhapariccāgoti.
有人说:在第二处,也就是正等觉时,四种决意才圆满。因为在那里,依照所立之愿,由于真实决意的生起,现观了四圣谛,因此真实决意圆满;由于舍弃决意的生起,舍断了一切烦恼和随烦恼,因此舍弃决意圆满;由于寂静决意的生起,证得最上寂静的成就,因此寂静决意圆满;由于慧决意的生起,获得无碍智,因此慧决意圆满。这种说法不成立,因为即使在正等觉时,这些决意也仍然是究竟意义上的。巴利
Dutiye ṭhāne abhisambodhiyaṃ caturadhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti keci. Tattha hi yathāpaṭiññaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ abhisamayo, tato hi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena sabbakilesopakkilesapariccāgo, tato hi cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena paramūpasamasampatti, tato hi upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābho, tato hi paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti, taṃ asiddhaṃ abhisambodhiyāpi paramatthabhāvato.
在第三处,也就是转法轮时,有人说四种决意才圆满。因为在那里,以真实决意现起,用十二种方式开示圣谛,所以真实决意圆满;以舍弃决意现起,做大布施正法,所以舍弃决意圆满;以寂静决意现起,自己寂静,也让别人寂静,所以寂静决意圆满;以慧决意现起,了知所应调伏众生的意乐等,所以慧决意圆满。但这种说法也不成立,因为佛陀的事业还没有完成。巴利
Tatiye ṭhāne dhammacakkappavattane (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) caturadhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti aññe. Tattha hi saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa dvādasahi ākārehi ariyasaccadesanāya saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saddhammamahāyāgakaraṇena cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa sayaṃ upasantassa paresaṃ upasamanena upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa vineyyānaṃ āsayādiparijānanena paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti, tadapi asiddhaṃ apariyositattā buddhakiccassa.
另有一种说法:在第四处,也就是般涅槃时,四种决意才圆满。因为在般涅槃中,由于已经彻底涅槃,究竟真实的成就使真实决意圆满;由于舍离一切依着,使舍弃决意圆满;由于一切行止息,使寂静决意圆满;由于智慧的作用达到究竟,使慧决意圆满。巴利
Catutthe ṭhāne parinibbāne caturadhiṭṭhānaparipuṇṇanti apare. Tatra hi parinibbutattā paramatthasaccasampattiyā saccādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggena cāgādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, sabbasaṅkhārūpasamena upasamādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, paññāpayojanapariniṭṭhānena paññādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇanti.
在这里应当这样理解:对于这位大人,在特别属于慈的领域——也就是出生时,由真实决意所生起的真实决意圆满得以显现;在特别属于悲的领域——也就是正等觉时,由慧决意所生起的慧决意圆满得以显现;在特别属于喜的领域——也就是转法轮时,由舍弃决意所生起的舍弃决意圆满得以显现;在特别属于舍的领域——也就是般涅槃时,由寂静决意所生起的寂静决意圆满得以显现。巴利
Tatra mahāpurisassa visesena mettākhette abhijātiyaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saccādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattaṃ, visesena karuṇākhette abhisambodhiyaṃ paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa paññādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattaṃ, visesena muditākhette dhammacakkappavattane (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa cāgādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattaṃ, visesena upekkhākhette parinibbāne upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa upasamādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在这里也应当通过共住来了解由真实决意所生起的戒,通过交往来了解由舍弃决意所生起的清净,通过危难来了解由寂静决意所生起的坚定,通过讨论来了解由慧决意所生起的慧。如此,应当了知戒清净、活命清净、心清净和见清净。巴利
Tatrapi saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saṃvāsena sīlaṃ veditabbaṃ, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saṃvohārena soceyyaṃ veditabbaṃ, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa āpadāsu thāmo veditabbo, paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa sākacchāya paññā veditabbā. Evaṃ sīlājīvacittadiṭṭhivisuddhiyo veditabbā.
同样地,由于真实决意生起,他不因嗔而走上邪道,因为他不欺诳;由于舍弃决意生起,他不因贪而走上邪道,因为他不执著;由于寂静决意生起,他不因怖畏而走上邪道,因为他不犯错;由于慧决意生起,他不因痴而走上邪道,因为他如实了悟。巴利
Tathā saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena dosā agatiṃ na gacchati avisaṃvādanato, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena lobhā agatiṃ na gacchati anabhisaṅgato, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena bhayā agatiṃ na gacchati anaparādhato, paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena mohā agatiṃ na gacchati yathābhūtāvabodhato.
同样地,通过第一种决意,他不被嗔怒所动而能忍受;通过第二种决意,他不被贪欲所动而能受用;通过第三种决意,他不被恐惧所动而能避开;通过第四种决意,他不被愚痴所动而能去除。应当知道:通过第一种决意,获得出离之乐;通过其余几种决意,获得远离之乐、寂静之乐和正觉之乐。同样地,通过这四种决意,依次获得远离所生的喜与乐、由定所生的喜与乐、没有喜的身体之乐、以及念清净和舍之乐。如此应当知道,这四种决意伴随着种种功德,统摄了一切波罗蜜的集合。又,正如四种决意统摄了一切波罗蜜,同样也应当知道,悲与慧也能统摄。因为一切菩提资粮都被悲与慧所统摄。被悲与慧所护持的布施等功德,就成为大菩提资粮,最终以成就佛果为归宿。应当这样理解它们的统摄关系。巴利
Tathā paṭhamena aduṭṭho adhivāseti, dutiyena aluddho paṭisevati, tatiyena abhīto parivajjeti, catutthena asammūḷho vinodeti. Paṭhamena nekkhammasukhappatti, itarehi pavivekaupasamasambodhisukhappattiyo hontīti daṭṭhabbā. Tathā vivekajapītisukhasamādhijapītisukhaappītijakāyasukhasatipārisuddhijaupekkhāsukhappattiyo etehi catūhi yathākkamaṃ hontīti. Evamanekaguṇānubandhehi catūhi adhiṭṭhānehi sabbapāramisamūhasaṅgaho veditabbo. Yathā ca catūhi adhiṭṭhānehi sabbapāramisaṅgaho, evaṃ karuṇāpaññāhipīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbopi hi bodhisambhāro karuṇāpaññāhi saṅgahito. Karuṇāpaññāpariggahitā hi dānādiguṇā mahābodhisambhārā bhavanti buddhattasiddhipariyosānāti evametāsaṃ saṅgaho veditabbo.
成就这些的方法是什么呢?为了正自觉,要把所有福德等资粮毫无遗漏地积集起来,做到不缺不漏;在这当中,还要恭敬、尊重地去做,持续不断地去做,中间不半途而废,长期坚持。这四方面的结合,就是成就这些资粮的方法。再者,简单来说,已经发过愿的人,把自己对自己的贪爱彻底耗尽,同时把对他人的爱不断增长,这就是成就这些资粮的方法。因为,为了证得正自觉而发下大愿的菩萨,由于如实了知一切法,对一切法不再染着,所以对自己的贪爱就彻底灭尽;又因为与大悲相应,把一切众生看作亲爱的孩子,所以对众生的慈爱就不断增长。从此,这位大士随着各种情况,在自他相续中去除贪、嗔、痴,使悭吝等与菩提资粮相违的法远离,再以布施、爱语、利行、同事这四种摄事,配合四种依止,彻底地摄受众生,引导他们进入三乘,并使他们的善根成熟。因为大士的大智慧和大悲心,以布施为庄严;布施以爱语为庄严;爱语以利行为庄严;利行以同事为庄严,也被同事所摄受。因为菩萨在一切生命中、一切处所,都与一切众生同甘共苦,所以成就了同事。成佛之后,他仍然以这四种摄事——由四种依止所圆满、所增上——对众生作最彻底的摄受。因为正自觉者的布施由舍弃决意所圆满增上;爱语由真实决意所圆满增上;利行由慧决意所圆满增上;同事由寂静决意所圆满增上。如来与一切声闻、独觉在般涅槃中平等无别,因为在那里他们无差别地成为一体。因此说:“解脱无有差别。”巴利
Ko sampādanūpāyoti sakalassāpi puññādisambhārassa sammāsambodhiṃ, uddissa anavasesasambharaṇaṃ avekallakāritāyogena, tattha ca sakkaccakāritā ādarabahumānayogena, sātaccakāritā nirantarapayogena, cirakālādiyogo ca antarā avosānāpajjanenāti caturaṅgayogo etāsaṃ sampādanūpāyo. Apica samāsato katābhinīhārassa attani sinehassa pariyādānaṃ, paresu ca sinehassa parivaḍḍhanaṃ etāsaṃ sampādanūpāyo. Sammāsambodhisamadhigamāya hi katamahāpaṇidhānassa mahāsattassa yāthāvato parijānanena sabbesu dhammesu anupalittassa attani sineho parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati, mahākaruṇāsamāyogavasena pana piye putte viya sabbasatte sampassamānassa tesu mettāsineho parivaḍḍhati. Tato ca taṃtadāvatthānurūpamattaparasantānesu lobhadosamohavigamena vidūrīkatamacchariyādibodhisambhārapaṭipakkho mahāpuriso dānapiyavacanaatthacariyāsamānattatāsaṅkhātehi catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi (dī. ni. 3.210; a. ni. 4.32) caturadhiṭṭhānānugatehi accantaṃ janassa saṅgahakaraṇavasena upari yānattaye avatāraṇaṃ paripācanañca karoti. Mahāsattānañhi mahāpaññā mahākaruṇā ca dānena alaṅkatā; dānaṃ piyavacanena; piyavacanaṃ atthacariyāya; atthacariyā samānattatāya alaṅkatā saṅgahitā ca. Sabbabhūtattabhūtassa hi bodhisattassa sabbattha samānasukhadukkhatāya samānattatāsiddhi. Buddhabhūto pana teheva saṅgahavatthūhi caturadhiṭṭhānaparipūritābhibuddhehi janassa accantikasaṅgahakaraṇena abhivinayanaṃ karoti. Dānañhi sammāsambuddhānaṃ cāgādhiṭṭhānena paripūritābhibuddhaṃ ; piyavacanaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānena; atthacariyā paññādhiṭṭhānena; samānattatā upasamādhiṭṭhānena paripūritābhibuddhā. Tathāgatānañhi sabbasāvakapaccekabuddhehi samānattatā parinibbāne. Tatra hi tesaṃ avisesato ekībhāvo. Tenevāha ‘‘natthi vimuttiyā nānatta’’nti.
在这里,它们是这样的——巴利
Honti cettha –
他是真实的人,乐于施舍,内心寂静,有智慧,又常怀悲悯。
已经具足了一切资粮,还有什么事情办不成呢?
具足大悲的导师,寻求利他,并且保持中舍。
他对一切都不执着,啊,胜者真是稀有难得。
对一切法已经离染,对众生也保持舍心,
他总是为了众生的利益而努力,啊,这位战胜五魔的胜者真是稀有难得!
任何时候,都是为了利益一切众生、为了安乐一切众生,
他精勤不懈,也不懈怠。啊,这位胜者真是稀有难得!巴利
‘‘Sacco cāgī upasanto, paññavā anukampako, Sambhatasabbasambhāro, kaṃ nāmatthaṃ na sādhaye. Mahākāruṇiko satthā, hitesī ca upekkhako, Nirapekkho ca sabbattha, aho acchariyo jino. Viratto sabbadhammesu, sattesu ca upekkhako, Sadā sattahite yutto, aho acchariyo jino. Sabbadā sabbasattānaṃ, hitāya ca sukhāya ca, Uyyutto akilāsū ca, aho acchariyo jino’’ti. (cariyā. aṭṭha. 320 pakiṇṇakakathā);
要多久才能成就呢?按最低的时限来说,是四不可数劫加十万劫;按中等的时限来说,是八不可数劫加十万劫;按最高的时限来说,是十六不可数劫加十万劫。这些差别应当依次理解为慧增上、信增上、精进增上所造成的。因为慧增上的人,信比较弱,慧很锐利;信增上的人,慧是中等的;精进增上的人,慧比较弱。注疏里说,应当靠慧的力量证得正自觉。不过也有人主张,总的来说,使解脱成熟的诸法有锐利、中等、柔弱的差别,所以这三种分类也是合理的。因为菩萨在发愿的那一刻就有三种类型:略说即知、广说方知、可引导。其中,略说即知的人在正自觉者面前听一首四句偈,第三句还没结束时,就已经具备了能证得与六神通、无碍解俱的阿拉汉果的亲依止缘;第二类人在导师面前听一首四句偈,第四句还没结束时,就已经具备了能证得与六神通俱的阿拉汉果的亲依止缘;第三类人在世尊面前听完一首四句偈,直到整首偈颂结束,才具备了能证得与六神通俱的阿拉汉果的亲依止缘。这三类菩萨在发愿并得到授记之后,圆满诸波罗蜜,按前面所说的时限差别,依次证得正自觉。可是,在那些时限差别还没有圆满的时候,那些大士即使每天行像须大拏王那样的布施,或者修习与那相应的戒等一切波罗蜜法,说他们中途就会成佛,这是不可能的。为什么呢?因为智慧还没有成熟。就像谷物要在限定的时间内才成熟一样,正自觉也是在限定的时间内才成就。在这中间,即使以一切精进努力,也无法证得。因此应当知道,波罗蜜的圆满,如果不具备前面所说的特定时间,是不可能成就的。巴利
Kittakena kālena sampādananti heṭṭhimena tāva paricchedena cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca, majjhimena aṭṭhāsaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca, uparimena soḷasāsaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca, ete ca bhedā yathākkamaṃ paññādhikasaddhādhikavīriyādhikavasena ñātabbā. Paññādhikānañhi saddhā mandā hoti, paññā tikkhā. Saddhādhikānaṃ paññā majjhimā hoti, vīriyādhikānaṃ paññā mandā. Paññānubhāvena ca sammāsambodhi abhigantabbāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Avisesena pana vimuttiparipācanīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ tikkhamajjhimamudubhāvena tayopete bhedā yuttāti vadanti. Tividhā hi bodhisattā abhinīhārakkhaṇe bhavanti ugghaṭitaññūvipañcitaññūneyyabhedena. Tesu ugghaṭitaññū sammāsambuddhassa sammukhā catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ suṇanto tatiyapade apariyositeyeva chaabhiññāhi saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthupanissayo hoti, dutiyo satthu sammukhā catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ suṇanto apariyositeyeva catutthapade chahi abhiññāhi arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthupanissayo hoti, itaro bhagavato sammukhā catuppadikaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā pariyositāya gāthāya chahi abhiññāhi arahattaṃ pattuṃ samatthupanissayo bhavati. Tayopete vinā kālabhedena katābhinīhāraladdhabyākaraṇā pāramiyo pūrentā yathākkamaṃ yathāvuttabhedena kālena sammāsambodhiṃ pāpuṇanti. Tesu tesu pana kālabhedesu aparipuṇṇesu te te mahāsattā divase divase vessantaradānasadisaṃ dānaṃ dentāpi tadanurūpe sīlādisabbapāramidhamme ācinantāpi antarā buddhā bhavissantīti akāraṇametaṃ. Kasmā? Ñāṇassa aparipaccanato. Paricchinnakālanipphāditaṃ viya hi sassaṃ paricchinnakāle parinipphāditā sammāsambodhi. Tadantarā pana sabbussāhena vāyamantenāpi na sakkā pāpuṇitunti pāramipāripūrī yathāvuttakālavisesaṃ vinā na sampajjatīti veditabbaṃ.
有什么好处呢?就是那些已经发愿的菩萨们——巴利
Ko ānisaṃsoti ye te katābhinīhārānaṃ bodhisattānaṃ –
这样的人,具足一切肢节,是已决定趣向菩提的人。
在轮回中流转了漫长的时间,哪怕经历百千亿劫;
他们不投生到无间地狱,也不投生到世界之间的地狱——如此等等。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ sabbaṅgasampannā, bodhiyā niyatā narā; Saṃsaraṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ, kappakoṭisatehipi; Avīcimhi nuppajjanti, tathā lokantaresu cā’’ti. ādinā (abhi. aṭṭha. 1.nidānakathā; apa. aṭṭha. 1.dūrenidānakathā; jā. aṭṭha. 1.dūrenidānakathā; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 27.dūrenidānakathā; cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā) –
十八种不落入无暇之处的利益类型已经讲完了。还有像“阿难,菩萨具念具智,从兜率天身殁后进入母胎”等经文(《中部》3.199)所说的十六种稀有未曾有法;以及“寒冷消退,酷热止息”等(《佛种姓》83)所说的,和“舍利弗,菩萨诞生时,这十千世界震动、大震动、遍震动”等所说的三十二种前兆;还有“菩萨的意愿得以成就,在业等处获得自在”等,在《本生》《佛种姓》等各处所展示的各种利益类型——所有这些都应了知为这些(波罗蜜)的利益。同样,按照所展示的分类,无贪、无嗔等功德成对等,也应如此了知。巴利
Aṭṭhārasa abhabbaṭṭhānānupagamanappakārā ānisaṃsā saṃvaṇṇitā. Ye ca ‘‘sato sampajāno ānanda bodhisatto tusitākāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṃ okkamī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.199) soḷasa acchariyabbhutadhammappakārā, ye ca ‘‘sītaṃ byapagataṃ hoti, uṇhañca upasammatī’’tiādinā (bu. vaṃ. 83), ‘‘jāyamāne kho sāriputta bodhisatte ayaṃ dasasahassilokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhatī’’tiādinā ca dvattiṃsa pubbanimittappakārā, ye vā panaññepi ‘‘bodhisattānaṃ adhippāyasamijjhanaṃ kammādīsu vasībhāvo’’ti evamādayo tattha tattha jātakabuddhavaṃsādīsu dassitappakārā ānisaṃsā, te sabbepi etāsaṃ ānisaṃsā, tathā yathānidassitabhedā alobhādosādiguṇayugaḷādayo cāti veditabbā.
“什么是果?”简略地说,这些波罗蜜的果就是正自觉的状态。详细地说,则是以三十二大人相、八十随形好、身光一寻等无数功德聚所庄严的色身成就为依托,以十力、四无畏、六不共智、十八不共佛法等为首、由成百上千种功德聚所辉耀的法身荣光。而佛陀的功德,即使正自觉者用多劫的时间以言语宣说,也无法说尽——这就是它们的果。以上是简略的说明。详细的解释,应当依据《佛种姓》《行藏》《本生》《大譬喻经》等来了知。巴利
Kiṃphalanti samāsato tāva sammāsambuddhabhāvo etāsaṃ phalaṃ, vitthārato pana dvattiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇa- (dī. ni. 2.24 ādayo; 3.168 ādayo; ma. ni. 2.385) asītianubyañjanabyāmappabhādianekaguṇagaṇasamujjalarūpakāyasampattiadhiṭṭhānā dasabalacatuvesārajjachaasādhāraṇañāṇaaṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhamma- (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305; mūlaṭī. 2.suttantabhājanīyavaṇṇanā) -pabhutianekasatasahassaguṇasamudayopasobhinī dhammakāyasirī, yāvatā pana buddhaguṇā ye anekehipi kappehi sammāsambuddhenāpi vācāya pariyosāpetuṃ na sakkā, idaṃ etāsaṃ phalanti ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana buddhavaṃsacariyāpiṭakajātakamahāpadānasuttādīnaṃ vasena veditabbo.
按照前面所说的行道,以及前面所说的各类波罗蜜的圆满状态,所以说“圆满三十波罗蜜”。虽然种种大舍离本来就属于布施波罗蜜,但为了显示这些舍离各有特殊差别,也为了显示它们极其难行,所以另外列出“五种大舍离”;也正是从这一点出发,又把舍离肢节和舍离眼目分开来说;虽然同属舍弃自己所拥有之物的舍离,但在舍弃财富、王位之外,还特别列出舍弃妻儿。与称为“去还业处”的前分行道一起,成就神通与等至,这叫前行。在布施等当中成就特别殊胜的修行,这叫前业行,收在《行藏》里。也有人认为:发愿是前行,布施等修行是前业行;或者以身体远离而独住为前业行。为了说明布施等,少欲知足等,以及轮回和涅槃中的过患与功德,为了让众生建立并成熟于三种菩提而说的法,就是说法。为亲属做利益之事,是亲族利行,这也是出于悲悯。“等”字还包括世间利行等。依业自性智,依对无过失的业处、明处等的熟悉,依对蕴、处等的熟悉,依对三相的审察,这种智的活动就是慧行,它本质上就是般若波罗蜜,但为了显示智资粮,所以另外列出。“边际”就是尽头、最上的意思。修习、广修四念处等,是连接语。其中,“修习”是指令其生起,“广修”是指令其增长。举出四念处等,是显示把来的行道推到顶点;也可以说,应当把与观相应的四念处等看作就是这些。在这里应当知道:以“由那发愿”等语,显示来处行道的开端;以“布施波罗蜜”等语,显示中间;以“四念处”等语,显示结尾。巴利
Yathāvuttāya paṭipadāya yathāvuttavibhāgānaṃ pāramīnaṃ pūritabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā’’ti. Satipi mahāpariccāgānaṃ dānapāramibhāve pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthañceva sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca ‘‘pañca mahāpariccāge’’ti visuṃ gahaṇaṃ, tatoyeva ca aṅgapariccāgato visuṃ nayanapariccāgaggahaṇaṃ, pariggahapariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi dhanarajjapariccāgato puttadārapariccāgaggahaṇañca kataṃ. Gatapaccāgatikavattasaṅkhātāya pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya saddhiṃ abhiññāsamāpattinipphādanaṃ pubbayogo. Dānādīsuyeva sātisayapaṭipattinipphādanaṃ pubbacariyā, yā cariyāpiṭakasaṅgahitā. Abhinīhāro pubbayogo, dānādipaṭipatti, kāyavivekavasena ekacariyā vā pubbacariyāti keci. Dānādīnañceva appicchatādīnañca saṃsāranibbānesu ādīnavānisaṃsādīnañca vibhāvanavasena sattānaṃ bodhittaye patiṭṭhāpanaparipācanavasena pavattā kathā dhammakkhānaṃ. Ñātīnaṃ atthacariyā ñātatthacariyā, sāpi karuṇāyanavaseneva. Ādi-saddena lokatthacariyādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Kammassakatāñāṇavasena, anavajjakammāyatanavijjāṭṭhānaparicayavasena, khandhāyatanādiparicayavasena, lakkhaṇattayatīraṇavasena ca ñāṇacāro buddhicariyā, sā pana atthato paññāpāramīyeva, ñāṇasambhāradassanatthaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Koṭinti pariyanto, ukkaṃsoti attho. Cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāvetvā brūhetvāti sambandho. Tattha bhāvetvāti uppādetvā. Brūhetvāti vaḍḍhetvā. Satipaṭṭhānādiggahaṇena āgamanapaṭipadaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dasseti, vipassanāsahagatā eva vā satipaṭṭhānādayo daṭṭhabbā. Ettha ca ‘‘yena abhinīhārenā’’tiādinā āgamanapaṭipadāya ādiṃ dasseti, ‘‘dānapāramī’’tiādinā majjhaṃ, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhāne’’tiādinā pariyosānanti veditabbaṃ.
“刚出生”是指从手中脱出、才出生片刻,并不是说刚从母胎出来。因为刚出母胎的大士,最初是由梵天们用金网接住的;从他们手中,四大天王用羚羊皮垫接住;从他们手中,人们用细布垫接住;脱离人的手之后,才站在地上——正如世尊在《大本经》的开示中所说。“白伞”是指天界的白伞盖。“被擎举”是指被举着。这里应当知道,提到伞盖,也就等于提到了宝剑等五种王权器具。因为那时候,宝剑、牦牛尾扇、孔雀尾拂、白伞盖、头巾都连同伞盖一起出现了。当时只显现出伞盖等物品,却看不到拿伞盖等物的人。“一切方”是指十个方向。这遍观一切方,不应理解为踏行七步之后才发生。因为大士从人们手中脱出后,先看东方,那里的天与人以香、花等供养,说:“大人,这里没有谁能与您相比,何况更超胜的呢?”这样遍观了四方、四维、下方、上方这一切方,到处都没看到与自己相等的人,于是说“这是北方”,便朝那个方向踏行七步。“āsabha”意为最上。“agga”意为最第一。“jeṭṭho seṭṭho”也是同一个意思的异名。他宣告:“这是最后一生,从此不再有后有。”也就是说,他在这一生中应当证得的阿拉汉果,他作了授记。巴利
Sampatijātoti hatthato muccitvā muhuttajāto, na mātukucchito nikkhantamatto. Nikkhantamattañhi mahāsattaṃ paṭhamaṃ brahmāno suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tesaṃ hatthato cattāro mahārājāno ajinappaveṇiyā, tesaṃ hatthato manussā dukūlacumbaṭakena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, manussānaṃ hatthato muñcitvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhitoti yathāha bhagavā mahāpadānadesanāyaṃ. Setamhi chatteti dibbasetacchatte. Anuhīramāneti dhāriyamāne. Ettha ca chattaggahaṇeneva khaggādīni pañca kakudhabhaṇḍānipi (jā. 2.19.72) vuttānevāti veditabbaṃ. Khaggatālavaṇṭamorahatthakavāḷabījanīuṇhīsapaṭṭāpi hi chattena saha tadā upaṭṭhitā ahesuṃ. Chattādīniyeva ca tadā paññāyiṃsu, na chattādigāhakā. Sabbā ca disāti dasapi disā. Nayidaṃ sabbadisāvilokanaṃ sattapadavītihāruttarakālaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahāsatto hi manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā puratthimadisaṃ olokesi, tattha devamanussā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā ‘‘mahāpurisa idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Evaṃ catasso disā, catasso anudisā, heṭṭhā, uparīti sabbā disā anuviloketvā sabbattha attanā sadisaṃ adisvā ‘‘ayaṃ uttarā disā’’ti tattha sattapadavītihārena agamāsi. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ. Aggoti sabbapaṭhamo. Jeṭṭho seṭṭhoti ca tasseva vevacanaṃ. Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavoti imasmiṃ attabhāve pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ byākāsi.
“作为许多殊胜证得的先行征兆”,这是用简略方式说的意思;现在通过“因为那种……”等文句,把它详细地显示出来。在这里,“此”是指——巴利
‘‘Anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvenā’’ti saṅkhittena vuttamatthaṃ ‘‘yañhī’’tiādinā vitthārato dasseti. Tattha etthāti –
有着无数枝条和上千个圆轮。
众天神在虚空中举着伞盖;
金柄拂尘来回飘拂。
看不见拿拂尘和伞盖的人了。巴利
‘‘Anekasākhañca sahassamaṇḍalaṃ, Chattaṃ marū dhārayumantalikkhe; Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā, Na dissare cāmarachattagāhakā’’ti. (su. ni. 693);
对于这首偈颂,一切知智本身因为在一切处都能无碍而行,所以被称为无障智,因此说“证得一切知无障智”。“同样地,这位世尊也走上了……以作为前兆”——通过这句话,说明在殊胜降生中,由法性自然而生的种种殊胜,是一切菩萨所共有的。因为那些确实是波罗蜜的果报。巴利
Imissā gāthāya. Sabbaññutaññāṇameva sabbattha appaṭihatacāratāya anāvaraṇañāṇanti āha ‘‘sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassā’’ti. ‘‘Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato…pe… pubbanimittabhāvenā’’ti etena abhijātiyaṃ dhammatāvasena uppajjanavisesā sabbabodhisattānaṃ sādhāraṇāti dasseti. Pāramitānissandā hi teti.
“Vikkamī”的意思是行进。“Marū”指天人们。“Samā”是因为遍观时的平等性,所以是等同、相似的。因为大丈夫看一个方向时,其余方向也一样看,他在观看上任何地方都没有障碍。或者,“Samā”的意思是适合观看。因为那时,菩萨在各方所见的,并不是丑陋、恐怖、不平等的、不适合观看的景象。巴利
Vikkamīti agamāsi. Marūti devā. Samāti vilokanasamatāya samā sadisiyo. Mahāpuriso hi yathā ekaṃ disaṃ vilokesi, evaṃ sesā disāpi, na katthaci vilokane vibandho tassa ahosīti. Samāti vā viloketuṃ yuttāti attho. Na hi tadā bodhisattassa virūpabībhacchavisamarūpāni viloketuṃ ayuttāni disāsu upaṭṭhahantīti.
“如此,如来”——这是先按身体行走的意义,用“gata”这个词来解释“如来”;现在为了按智慧行走的意义来说明它,所以说了“或者”等话。其中,“以出离”是指以无贪为主的善心生起。这里,善法就是出离,不是指出家等,也有人说是“以初禅”。“舍断”就是断除。“已达”是指已经证得、已经修行达到更殊胜的境界。或者,“舍断”是以断除为原因,或者以断除为特征,因为“pahāya”这个词有原因和特征两层意思。这里所说的“行”,就是通达,或者就是修行之道,意思是“以舍断欲贪等为原因而到达”,同时也以舍断欲贪等为标志。对“破”等词,也应同样理解。“以无嗔”就是通过慈爱。“以光明想”是指通过让所缘清晰呈现的作意,生起光明想。“以无散乱”就是通过定。“以法决定”是指对善等诸法如实确定,也有人说是“通过对有因缘的名色的确定”。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ tathāgato’’ti kāyagamanaṭṭhena gata-saddena tathāgata-saddaṃ niddisitvā idāni ñāṇagamanaṭṭhena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha nekkhammenāti alobhappadhānena kusalacittuppādena. Kusalā hi dhammā idha nekkhammaṃ, na pabbajjādayo, ‘‘paṭhamajjhānenā’’ti ca vadanti. Pahāyāti pajahitvā. Gato adhigato, paṭipanno uttarivisesanti attho. Pahāyāti vā pahānahetu, pahānalakkhaṇaṃ vā. Hetulakkhaṇattho hi ayaṃ pahāya-saddo. ‘‘Kāmacchandādippahānahetukaṃ gato’’ti hettha vuttaṃ gamanaṃ avabodho, paṭipatti eva vā. Kāmacchandādippahānena ca taṃ lakkhīyati. Esa nayo ‘‘padāletvā’’tiādīsupi. Abyāpādenāti mettāya. Ālokasaññāyāti vibhūtaṃ katvā manasikaraṇena upaṭṭhitaālokasañjānanena . Avikkhepenāti samādhinā. Dhammavavatthānenāti kusalādidhammānaṃ yāthāvavinicchayena, ‘‘sappaccayanāmarūpavavatthānenā’’tipi vadanti.
像这样,通过断除欲贪等五盖,也就是依照《分别论》第508段所说的“在世间断除贪求”等语,显示了世尊在初禅前行道上的如来境界之后,现在为了连同方法一起,通过八等至和十八种大观来显示它,所以说了“以智”等话。因为对于已经正确把握名色、超越疑惑的人来说,由于去除了作为障碍的愚痴,安住在已知遍知中时,无常想等就能成就;同样,在禅那等至中,以欢喜为特征的喜悦,当对禅那的不喜被消除时,就能证得禅那等。因此,消除不喜、破除无明等,就是等至与观的方法。不过,关于解说次序,应当理解为:这是为了显示与盖同性质的无明也被包含在下分诸盖之中。由于盖是进入等至安住的障碍,就像门闩一样,所以说“打开盖的门闩”。就像“夜里寻思伺察后,白天从事各种工作”这句话所说的那样,寻与伺好比冒烟,所以说“寻与伺之烟”。虽然在初禅近行处才断苦,在第四禅近行处才断乐,但为了说明殊胜的断除,所以说“以第四禅断除了苦和乐”。巴利
Evaṃ kāmacchandādinīvaraṇappahānena ‘‘abhijjhaṃ loke pahāyā’’tiādinā (vibha. 508) vuttāya paṭhamajjhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhagavato tathāgatabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni saha upāyena aṭṭhahi samāpattīhi, aṭṭhārasahi ca mahāvipassanāhi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ñāṇenā’’tiādimāha. Nāmarūpapariggahakaṅkhāvitaraṇānañhi vibandhabhūtassa mohassa dūrīkaraṇena ñātapariññāyaṃ ṭhitassa aniccasaññādayo sijjhanti, tathā jhānasamāpattīsu abhiratinimittena pāmojjena, tattha anabhiratiyā vinoditāya jhānādi samadhigamoti samāpattivipassanānaṃ arativinodanaavijjāpadālanādi upāyo, uppaṭipāṭiniddeso pana nīvaraṇasabhāvāya avijjāya heṭṭhā nīvaraṇesupi saṅgahadassanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Samāpattivihārappavesavibandhanena nīvaraṇāni kavāṭasadisānīti āha ‘‘nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā’’ti. ‘‘Rattiṃ vitakketvā vicāretvā divā kammante payojetī’’ti vuttaṭṭhāne viya vitakkavicārā dhūmāyanāti adhippetāti āha ‘‘vitakkavicāradhūma’’nti. Kiñcāpi paṭhamajjhānūpacāreyeva ca dukkhaṃ, catutthajjhānūpacāreyeva sukhaṃ pahīyati, atisayappahānaṃ pana sandhāyāha ‘‘catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ pahāyā’’ti.
对无常的观察就叫无常随观,这是执取三界诸法的无常性而生起的观,这个名字就是这么来的。所谓常想,就是对有为法生起“这些是常、是永恒的”这种错误想法,这里以想为代表,也应该知道它同时包含了邪见和心。这个道理对后面几项也同样适用。厌离随观,是以厌离诸行的方式生起的观。喜,就是带着喜的渴爱。离贪随观也一样,是以离染的方式生起的观。灭随观,是对诸行灭尽的观;或者这样观:“那些诸行确实会灭尽,未来不会再因集起而再生”,这就是灭随观。所以经中说“以灭随观而灭,不集起”,因为这时想解脱的意愿已经非常强了。舍遣随观,是以舍遣的方式生起的观,因为这是经过审察而安住的。执取,是以常等想法来执取。密集想,是依据相续、聚集、作用和所缘,把它们执取为单一整体的想。积集,就是造作。变易,是不同阶段的差别变化。恒常想,是执取为坚实牢固的想。相,是依据聚集等密集以及作用的界限,把诸行执取为有形有相。依止,是贪等的依止,它的本质是依着渴爱而倾向于诸行。巴利
Aniccassa, aniccanti anupassanā aniccānupassanā, tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññanti saṅkhatadhamme ‘‘niccā, sassatā’’ti evaṃ pavattamicchāsaññaṃ , saññāsīsena diṭṭhicittānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbijjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nandinti sappītikataṇhaṃ. Tathā virāgānupassanāyāti virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya. ‘‘Te saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva, āyatiṃ samudayavasena na uppajjantī’’ti evaṃ vā anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Tenevāha ‘‘nirodhānupassanāya nirodheti, no samudetī’’ti. Muñcitukamyatā hi ayaṃ balappattāti. Paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Paṭisaṅkhā santiṭṭhanā hi ayaṃ. Ādānanti niccādivasena gahaṇaṃ. Santatisamūhakiccārammaṇānaṃ vasena ekattaggahaṇaṃ ghanasaññā. Āyūhanaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ. Avatthāvisesāpatti vipariṇāmo. Dhuvasaññanti thirabhāvaggahaṇaṃ. Nimittanti samūhādighanavasena, sakiccaparicchedatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ saviggahaggahaṇaṃ. Paṇidhinti rāgādipaṇidhiṃ, sā panatthato taṇhānaṃ vasena saṅkhāresu ninnatā.
“执取”是指执着我见。以无常、苦等角度遍察一切法,就是增上慧法观。“执取坚实”是指在并无坚实之中执取为坚实的颠倒。“世界是由自在天所造等而生成”这种执取,是痴迷执取。不过有些人说:“像‘我过去世是否存在’这样生起的疑惑,就是痴迷执取。”在诸行中执取它们为庇护所、安全处,是阿赖耶执取。根据“乐阿赖耶、欣阿赖耶”这句话,阿赖耶就是渴爱;有些人说,正是这渴爱以对眼等、色等执取的方式活动,所以叫阿赖耶执取。“审察随观”是指像“这样的诸行被舍遣”这样生起的智慧。“还灭随观”是指:因为远离了轮回,所以还灭就是涅槃;以涅槃为所缘而生起的随观,就是种姓智的还灭随观。“系缚执取”是指以结缚的方式在诸行中执取。“与见俱”是指与见同生、同住、同断。“粗”是相对于上分道所断的烦恼说的;否则,相对于第二道所断来说,那些见道所断的也可说是粗。“与细俱行”是指微细,这是相对于下分道所断说的。“一切烦恼”是指剩余的一切烦恼,因为初道等已经断除的烦恼不会再被断除。巴利
Abhinivesanti attānudiṭṭhiṃ. Aniccadukkhādivasena sabbadhammatīraṇaṃ adhipaññādhammavipassanā. Sārādānābhinivesanti asāre sāraggahaṇavipallāsaṃ. ‘‘Issarakuttādivasena loko samuppanno’’ti abhiniveso sammohābhiniveso. Keci pana ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhānantiādinā pavattasaṃsayāpatti sammohābhiniveso’’ti vadanti. Saṅkhāresu leṇatāṇabhāvaggahaṇaṃ ālayābhiniveso. ‘‘Ālayaratā ālayasamuditā’’ti vacanato ālayo taṇhā, sāyeva cakkhādīsu rūpādīsu ca abhinivisanavasena pavattiyā ālayābhinivesoti keci. ‘‘Evaṃvidhā saṅkhārā paṭinissajjīyantī’’ti pavattaṃ ñāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanā. Vaṭṭato vigatattā vivaṭṭaṃ nibbānaṃ, tattha ārammaṇakaraṇasaṅkhātena anupassanena pavattiyā vivaṭṭānupassanā gotrabhu. Saṃyogābhinivesanti saṃyujjanavasena saṅkhāresu abhinivisanaṃ. Diṭṭhekaṭṭheti diṭṭhiyā sahajātekaṭṭhe, pahānekaṭṭhe ca. ‘‘Oḷārike’’ti uparimaggavajjhe kilese apekkhitvā vuttaṃ, aññathā dassanapahātabbāpi dutiyamaggavajjhehi oḷārikāti. Aṇusahagateti aṇubhūte, idaṃ heṭṭhimamaggavajjhe apekkhitvā vuttaṃ. Sabbakileseti avasiṭṭhasabbakilese. Na hi paṭhamādimaggehi pahīnā kilesā puna pahīyantīti.
坚硬性就是坚硬的状态。流溢就是流动的状态。支持,就像用世间的风让皮囊鼓胀那样,使某个聚团膨胀,或者让它保持挺立,这就是支持。虽然存在的不同聚团之间彼此并不接触,但各个聚团彼此隔离,色的边界就是虚空。对于成为它们界限的那个虚空来说,它确实不与它们接触。如果不是这样,不同聚团的界限自性就无法成立,因为会变成周遍一切。不周遍,就是不相触。在一个聚团中,诸大种的界限与它们不相触,这就是不相触的特征。因此,世尊在解说虚空界时说:不为四大种所触。巴利
Kakkhaḷattaṃ kaṭhinabhāvo. Paggharaṇaṃ dravabhāvo. Lokiyavāyunā bhastassa viya yena taṃtaṃkalāpassa uddhumāyanaṃ, thambhabhāvo vā, taṃ vitthambhanaṃ. Vijjamānepi kalāpantarabhūtānaṃ kalāpantarabhūtehi asamphuṭṭhabhāve, taṃtaṃbhūtavivittatā rūpapariyanto ākāsoti yesaṃ yo paricchedo, tehi so asamphuṭṭhova, aññathā bhūtānaṃ paricchedasabhāvo na siyā byāpībhāvāpattito . Abyāpitā hi asamphuṭṭhatāti. Yasmiṃ kalāpe bhūtānaṃ paricchedo, tehi asamphuṭṭhabhāvo asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ākāsadhātuniddese ‘‘asamphuṭṭhaṃ catūhi mahābhūtehī’’ti (dha. sa. 637).
当违逆的因缘聚合时,生起不同类的结果,这就是“变坏”。因为思是主导,所以对行蕴的诸法,是依思而说“诸行有造作的特相”。事实上,在经教分别的行蕴分别中,从“眼触所生思”等开始,只分别了思,而具有造作特相的正是思。正如说:“其中,什么是福行?就是欲界的善思”等等。“遍满”就是具有扩展性。“于不信”是指以不信为因,这里的处格表示原因。“于懈怠”等处的道理也是这样。“寂止的特相”是身与心的热恼止息的特相。当安住在远离昏沉和掉举的增上心时,在策励、抑制和令心欢喜这些方面不偏执,因此能平等舍置,这是因为切断了偏袒。巴利
Virodhipaccayasannipāte visadisuppatti ruppanaṃ. Cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhadhammānaṃ cetanāvasenetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇa’’nti. Tathā hi suttantabhājanīye saṅkhārakkhandhavibhaṅge ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā cetanā’’tiādinā (vibha. 92) cetanāva vibhattā, abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇā ca cetanā. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamo puññābhisaṅkhāro? Kusalā cetanā kāmāvacarā’’tiādi (vibha. 226). Pharaṇaṃ savipphārikatā. Assaddhiyeti assaddhiyahetu, nimittatthe bhummaṃ. Esa nayo ‘‘kosajje’’tiādīsu. Vūpasamalakkhaṇanti kāyacittapariḷāhūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Līnuddhaccarahite adhicitte pavattamāne paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāvaṭatāya ajjhupekkhanaṃ paṭisaṅkhānaṃ pakkhapātupacchedato.
妄语等的行为是欺骗等,它们粗涩,不摄受。正语与它们相反,因为正语润泽,所以能摄受相应之法,也能摄受那些听闻由正语为缘而说出的善语的人。因此,正语具有摄受的特相。身业能发起某些应当做的事;而它自身的发起和推动就是策励。所以,名为正业的离应当被看作具有策励的特相;或者说,就像提起重担一样,在相应之法中提起身行,就是策励。对于活着的众生,或者对于相应之法的命根延续,或者就活命本身而言,清净就是纯净。对于与自己相应的心,不让它落入杂染那一方,而是正确地策励它,这就是策励。巴利
Musāvādādīnaṃ visaṃvādanādikiccatāya lūkhānaṃ apariggāhakānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato pariggāhikā sammāvācā siniddhabhāvato sampayuttadhamme, sammāvācāpaccayasubhāsitānaṃ sotārañca puggalaṃ pariggaṇhātīti sā pariggahalakkhaṇā sammāvācā. Kāyikakiriyā kiñci kattabbaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Sayañca samuṭṭhahanaṃ ghaṭanaṃ hotīti sammākammantasaṅkhātā virati samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇā daṭṭhabbā, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā ukkhipanaṃ samuṭṭhāpanaṃ kāyikakiriyāya bhārukkhipanaṃ viya. Jīvamānassa sattassa, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā jīvitindriyavuttiyā, ājīvasseva vā suddhi vodānaṃ. Sasampayuttadhammassa cittassa saṃkilesapakkhe patituṃ adatvā sammadeva paggaṇhanaṃ paggaho.
这里说的“行”,指的是思,所以说“行的特征是思”。朝向所缘,就是面向所缘的状态。“处转起”,是说依诸处而转起。因为被称为“增长”的心与心所,确实是依诸处而转起的。所谓“以渴爱为因相”,是说它成为轮回的能生之因;而道则是能使人到达涅槃的,这就是它们之间的差别。巴利
‘‘Saṅkhārā’’ti idha cetanā adhippetāti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇa’’nti. Namanaṃ ārammaṇābhimukhabhāvo. Āyatanaṃpavattanaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ vasena hi āyasaṅkhātānaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ pavatti. Taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇanti vaṭṭassa janakahetubhāvo, maggassa pana nibbānasampāpakattanti ayameva tesaṃ viseso.
如实相的特相,就是不颠倒的自性。一味,就是彼此不超越、不增不减的状态。双运,就是止和观同时生起,也有人说是“信与慧、策励与安住”。巴利
Tathalakkhaṇaṃ aviparītasabhāvo. Ekaraso aññamaññānativattanaṃ anūnādhikabhāvo. Yuganaddhā samathavipassanāva, ‘‘saddhāpaññā paggahāvikkhepā’’tipi vadanti.
烦恼灭尽,所以叫“尽”,也就是道。因为以不再生起为最终归宿,所以叫“不生”,也就是果。轻安,就是烦恼的止息。巴利
Khiṇoti kileseti khayo, maggo. Anuppādapariyosānatāya anuppādo, phalaṃ. Passaddhi kilesavūpasamo.
“欲”是指想要去做的欲。“根本特征”是它作为根基的状态。“生起特征”是因为它让所缘呈现出来,所以成为相应法生起的原因。“和合”是通过境等聚集而应当被把握的方式,也就是被称为“集会”的那个;或者说,相应法以平等的方式与它一起放置于此处,所以叫“和合”,这就是触。“集起”是因为它们一起流入、聚集在这里。也就是说,离开受就不能生起的相应法,好像是以体验受为原因而聚集在这里一样,所以这样说。“从此更上”:从彼之后,或是那些相应法中更为殊胜者,因为善法以慧为最上。“首领特征”是像屋脊之于椽子那样,是相应法中最胜的状态。从彼之后,或是那些相应法中更为殊胜者,因为善法以慧为最上。“解脱”:是指果。因为那是以戒等功德之精髓的最上状态而为精髓。应当知道,这特征分别是以六界、五禅支等,随顺各自经文语句,并依照古注的传承方式而说的。正如这样,即使已说的某一法,为了说明其他方式,也会再次显示;正是因此,依经文语句“以欲为根的善法,从作意生起,以触为和合,以受为集起”,“以慧为最上的善法”,“此梵行以解脱为精髓”,“诸贤,梵行确实归于涅槃,以涅槃为究竟”等,而说了“欲的根本特征”等。巴利
Chandassāti kattukamyatāchandassa. Mūlalakkhaṇaṃ patiṭṭhābhāvo. Samuṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇaṃ ārammaṇapaṭipādakatāya sampayuttadhammānaṃ uppattihetutā. Samodhānaṃ visayādisannipātena gahetabbākāro, yā ‘‘saṅgatī’’ti vuccati. Samaṃ saha odahanti anena sampayuttadhammāti vā samodhānaṃ, phasso. Samosaranti sannipatanti etthāti samosaraṇaṃ. Vedanāya vinā appavattamānā sampayuttadhammā vedanānubhavananimittaṃ samosaṭā viya hontīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Gopānasīnaṃ kūṭaṃ viya sampayuttānaṃ pāmokkhabhāvo pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ. Tato, tesaṃ vā sampayuttadhammānaṃ uttari padhānanti taduttari. Paññuttarā hi kusalā dhammā. Vimuttiyāti phalassa. Tañhi sīlādiguṇasārassa paramukkaṃsabhāvena sāraṃ. Ayañca lakkhaṇavibhāgo chadhātupañcajhānaṅgādivasena taṃtaṃsuttapadānusārena, porāṇaṭṭhakathāya āgatanayena ca katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttopi koci dhammo pariyāyantarappakāsanatthaṃ puna dassito, tato eva ca ‘‘chandamūlakā kusalā dhammā manasikārasamuṭṭhānā, phassasamodhānā, vedanāsamosaraṇā’’ti, ‘‘paññuttarā kusalā dhammā’’ti, ‘‘vimuttisāramidaṃ brahmacariya’’nti, ‘‘nibbānogadhañhi āvuso brahmacariyaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti ca suttapadānaṃ vasena ‘‘chandassa mūlalakkhaṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
四圣谛被称为“如法”,是因为它们的自性不颠倒。它们被称为“如”,是因为它们具有这样的自性。它们被称为“不虚妄”,是因为它们没有虚诳的自性。它们被称为“不异”,是因为它们没有其他状态。巴利
Tathadhammānāma cattāri ariyasaccāni aviparītasabhāvattā. Tathāni taṃsabhāvattā. Avitathāni amusāsabhāvattā. Anaññathāni aññākārarahitattā.
“由生为缘而生起、集起”的意思是:以生为缘而生成之后,与自己的缘相应,一层一层向上生起的状态,也就是持续随转的意思。或者,“所生”之义和“集起”之义合起来,就是“所生集起”之义。老死不是没有生就能存在,也不是离开生而从别的地方产生,这就是“由生为缘所生”之义。在这里,因为是依生而集起,所以就是“由生为缘而集起”之义。意思是:有什么样的生、以什么样的方式作为缘,就会相应地显现出来。“无明是诸行的缘”这一说法中,也不是说无明不是诸行的缘,也不是说离开无明诸行还能生起。什么样的无明、对什么样的诸行、以什么样的方式成为缘,这就是“无明是诸行之缘”之义,也就是作为缘的状态。巴利
Jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭhoti jātipaccayā sambhūtaṃ hutvā sahitassa attano paccayānurūpassa uddhaṃ uddhaṃ āgatabhāvo, anupavattatthoti attho. Atha vā sambhūtaṭṭho ca samudāgataṭṭho ca sambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho, na jātito jarāmaraṇaṃ na hoti, na ca jātiṃ vinā aññato hotīti jātipaccayasambhūtaṭṭho. Itthañca jātito samudāgacchatīti jātipaccayasamudāgataṭṭho. Yā yā jāti yathā yathā paccayo hoti, tadanurūpaṃ pātubhāvoti attho. Avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭhoti etthāpi na avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo na hoti, na ca avijjaṃ vinā saṅkhārā uppajjanti. Yā yā avijjā yesaṃ yesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ yathā yathā paccayo hoti, ayaṃ avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho, paccayabhāvoti attho.
世尊知道、看见那个,这是两者的关联。“由彼”指的是由世尊。“那个正在被分别解说的”应当接上去理解。“那个”就是色处。“可爱、不可爱等”里的“等”字,把中等的也收进来了,同样也收进过去、未来、现在、小、内、外、彼二等各种分类。从可用的词句来说:因为经中说“色处是所见,声处是所闻,香处、味处、触处是所觉,一切色是意所识”,所以在色所缘上,“所见”和“所识”这两个词都用得上。也就是说,可以用“色所缘、可爱、不可爱、中等、小、过去、未来、现在、内、外、所见、所识、色、色处、色界、颜色、有见、有对、青、黄”等许多名称来指它。“以十三种方式”是指《色品》中出现的十三种解说方式。在每一种方式里,又按四种安立方式区分,所以说“以五十二种方式”。同样地,因为如实不颠倒地显示,也因为说法不可逆转。“我知道、我证知”:通过显示现在和过去时智的生起,应当看出未来时智的生起也已经说到了。“了知”这个词,应当理解为不限定时间的特殊用法,就像“所见、所闻、所觉”等说法里那样。“不现起”:不依我、我所而执取。“如来”这个词的构成应当这样理解:色所缘等诸法有怎样的自性、怎样的形态,他就那样看见、知道、到达,因此称为如来。不过有些人解释说:按语词演变的方式,或者把“看见者”这个词缩略,把“到达”这个词加以替换,就成了“如来”。巴利
Bhagavā taṃ jānāti passatīti sambandho. Tenāti bhagavatā. Taṃ vibhajjamānanti yojetabbaṃ. Tanti rūpāyatanaṃ. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīti ādi-saddena majjhattaṃ saṅgaṇhāti, tathā atītānāgatapaccuppannaparittaajjhattabahiddhātadubhayādibhedaṃ. Labbhamānakapadavasenāti ‘‘rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ saddāyatanaṃ sutaṃ gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ mutaṃ, sabbaṃ rūpaṃ manasā viññāta’’nti (dha. sa. 966) vacanato diṭṭhapadañca viññātapadañca rūpārammaṇe labbhati. ‘‘Rūpārammaṇaṃ iṭṭhaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ majjhattaṃ parittaṃ atītaṃ anāgataṃ paccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā diṭṭhaṃ viññātaṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ rūpadhātu vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’nti evamādīhi anekehi nāmehi. ‘‘Terasahi vārehī’’ti rūpakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 614 ādayo) āgate terasa niddesavāre sandhāyāha. Ekekasmiñca vāre catunnaṃ catunnaṃ vavatthāpananayānaṃ vasena ‘‘dvipaññāsāyanayehī’’ti āha. Tathameva aviparītadassitāya, appaṭivattiyadesanatāya ca. Jānāmi abbhaññāsinti vattamānātītakālesu ñāṇappavattidassanena anāgatepi ñāṇappavatti vuttāyevāti daṭṭhabbā. Vidita-saddo anāmaṭṭhakālaviseso veditabbo, ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (dha. sa. 966) viya. Na upaṭṭhāsīti attattaniyavasena na upagacchi. Yathā rūpārammaṇādayo dhammā yaṃsabhāvā yaṃpakārā ca, tathā ne passati jānāti gacchatīti tathāgatoti evaṃ padasambhavo veditabbo. Keci pana ‘‘niruttinayena pisodarādipakkhepena vā dassī-saddassa lopaṃ, āgata-saddassa cāgamaṃ katvā tathāgato’’ti vaṇṇenti.
因为没有过失,所以无可指责。因为没有什么需要添加,所以无不足。因为没有什么需要去除,所以无多余。因为义理和文句等都圆满具备,所以一切方面都完整圆满。不是别的样子,就是用遮遣的方式来说明前面所说的“正是如此”这个意思。由此表明:世尊为了某个目的而说的话,必定能实现那个目的;世尊完全按照所说的那样去做,正是如此,这就显示世尊的说法是不颠倒的。通过“说义”这个词,显示“如实而说,所以是如来”,这里按照语言学的规则,把 da 变成了 ta。巴利
Niddosatāya anupavajjaṃ. Pakkhipitabbābhāvena anūnaṃ. Apanetabbābhāvena anadhikaṃ. Atthabyañjanādisampattiyā sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ. No aññathāti ‘‘tathevā’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ byatirekena sampādeti. Tena yadatthaṃ bhāsitaṃ, ekantena tadatthanipphādanato yathā bhāsitaṃ bhagavatā, tathevāti aviparītadesanataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Gadattho’’ti etena tathaṃ gadatīti tathāgatoti da-kārassa ta-kāro kato niruttinayenāti dasseti.
“如此而去”所以叫如来,“去”指的是身体或语言的活动。当说“如此”的时候,由于“那”“此”这些词之间有不可分离的关联,“如同”这个意思自然就显现出来了。身体和语言的行为互相随顺,当有说话的意愿时,身体和语言就以相互关联的方式出现。为了说明这个意思,所以说了“因为世尊……”等话。不过在这个含义里,“因为如实而说所以叫如来”这个意思也成立。但这个意思前面已经用另一种方式展示过了,所以说“如此,因为这样去做所以叫如来”。巴利
Tathā gatamassāti tathāgato, gatanti ca kāyassa vācāya vā pavattīti attho. Tathāti ca vutte yaṃtaṃ-saddānaṃ abyabhicārisambandhitāya ‘‘yathā’’ti ayamattho upaṭṭhitoyeva hoti. Kāyavacīkiriyānañca aññamaññānulomena vacanicchāyaṃ, kāyassa vācā, vācāya ca kāyo sambandhībhāvena upatiṭṭhatīti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘bhagavato hī’’tiādi. Imasmiṃ pana atthe tathāvāditāya tathāgatoti ayampi attho siddho hoti. So pana pubbe pakārantarena dassitoti āha ‘‘evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato’’ti.
“在横向上无量的世界界域中”这一说法,是为了否定某些人的主张:他们认为“就像横向一样,上方和下方也存在世界界域”。说法之巧妙本身就是说法巧妙所成,比如“福德所成、布施所成”等说法。巴利
‘‘Tiriyaṃaparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsū’’ti etena yadeke ‘‘tiriyaṃ viya upari adho ca santi lokadhātuyo’’ti vadanti, taṃ paṭisedheti. Desanāvilāsoyeva desanāvilāsamayo yathā ‘‘puññamayaṃ, dānamaya’’ntiādīsu.
前缀词和不变词在与表示对应含义的词放在一起时,会以阐明该词含义的方式生起,所以“去”这个词本身就同时表达了“已了知”和“已过去”的意思,因此说“‘去’就是已了知、已过去”。或者,从发愿开始一直到正觉,在这中间,因为修习大菩提乘行的过程中不存在退失、停滞和杂染,所以就像他所发愿的那样而行——随顺发愿而行,因此叫如来。或者,因为具足大神力,以无碍解达到最殊胜的证得,又因无障碍,在任何地方都没有抵触阻碍,所以他的身、语、意的一切去、行、活动都随其所欲而行,因此叫如来。又因为在世间,“种类”“相应”“去”“行相”这些词看起来意思相同,所以像毗婆尸等诸佛世尊是那样的种类,这位世尊也是那样的种类,因此叫如来;像那些世尊是那样相应,这位世尊也是那样相应,因此叫如来。或者,因为“谛”“真实”“如”都是智的同义词,所以以如智而来,就是如来。也应这样理解“如来”一词的含义——巴利
Upasagganipātānaṃ vācakasaddasannidhāne tadatthajotanabhāvena pavattanato gata-saddoyeva avagatatthaṃ atītatthañca vadatīti āha ‘‘gatoti avagato atīto’’ti. Atha vā abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya yāva sambodhi, etthantare mahābodhiyānapaṭipattiyā hānaṭhānasaṃkilesanivattīnaṃ abhāvato yathā paṇidhānaṃ, tathā gato abhinīhārānurūpaṃ paṭipannoti tathāgato. Atha vā mahiddhikatāya, paṭisambhidānaṃ ukkaṃsādhigamena anāvaraṇatāya ca katthaci paṭighātābhāvato yathā ruci, tathā kāyavacīcittānaṃ gatāni gamanāni pavattiyo etassāti tathāgato. Yasmā ca loke vidhayuttagatapakāra-saddā samānatthā dissanti, tasmā yathā vidhā vipassīādayo bhagavanto, ayampi bhagavā tathā vidhoti tathāgato. Yathā yuttā ca te bhagavanto ayampi bhagavā tathā yuttoti tathāgato. Atha vā yasmā saccaṃ tacchaṃ tathanti ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā tathena ñāṇena āgatoti tathāgatoti. Evampi tathāgata-saddassa attho veditabbo –
舍弃了欲贪等污垢,像那样而去。
以定与智而成为毗婆尸等(诸佛);
伟大的修行者释迦牟尼,光辉的持有者,
如来因此就是被称为如来的。
同样地,对于界、处等的特相,
从自性、共性、区分和差别的角度来划分。
战胜者以自生智而具足,
释迦族的雄牛被称为如来。
他以遍一切的眼,如实照见了这些真理。
同样地,此缘性也以一切方式(被照见);
因为已经用不靠他人引导的智慧清楚地证知了。
那位胜者、如来,就是这样如实地(存在)。
即使在各种不同类别的世间界中,
胜者在色处等行境中;
种种不同样式的同样见。
具普眼者因此被称为如来。
当他确实按法的本来面目来说法,
(依行持)使自身随顺于自己的言说,
以种种功德胜过世间,他如此行持。
世间导师凭这一点也是如来。
按照他的发愿和意愿,
随着言语活动和心的状态而转起。
就像过去那些大仙人的种类和方式,
这样的胜者、如来,就是这种性质。巴利
‘‘Pahāya kāmādimale yathā gatā, Samādhiñāṇehi vipassiādayo; Mahesino sakyamunī jutindharo, Tathāgato tena tathāgato mato. Tathañca dhātāyatanādilakkhaṇaṃ, Sabhāvasāmaññavibhāgabhedato; Sayambhuñāṇena jino samāgato, Tathāgato vuccati sakyapuṅgavo. Tathāni saccāni samantacakkhunā, Tathā idappaccayatā ca sabbaso; Anaññaneyyena yato vibhāvitā, Yāthāvato tena jino tathāgato. Anekabhedāsupi lokadhātusu, Jinassa rūpāyatanādigocare; Vicittabhedaṃ tathameva dassanaṃ, Tathāgato tena samantalocano. Yato ca dhammaṃ tathameva bhāsati, Karoti vācāyanuloma mattano; Guṇehi lokaṃ abhibhuyya iriyati, Tathāgato tenapi lokanāyako. Yathābhinīhāramato yathāruci, Pavattavācātanucittabhāvato; Yathāvidhā yena purā mahesino, Tathāvidho tena jino tathāgato’’ti. (itivu. aṭṭha. 38);
摄颂只是提纲而已。为什么呢?因为它像“不放逸”这个词一样,能够统摄一切法的修行和一切佛的功德。所以他说“以一切行相”等等。巴利
Saṅgahagāthā mukhamattameva. Kasmā? Appamādapadaṃ viya sakaladhammapaṭipattiyā sabbabuddhaguṇānaṃ saṅgāhakattā. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbākārenā’’tiādi.
他问“那是什么”,用这句话说明“比丘们,那是什么”等语是一般性的提问。为了让人知道这个提问有特别之处,就按照提取含义的方式,把《大义释》里出现的所有提问都举出来,比如“其中,什么是提问”等。那里的“其中”,指的就是“他问‘那是什么’”这句话里那个一般性的提问说法。巴利
‘‘Taṃkatamanti pucchatī’’ti etena ‘‘katamañca taṃ bhikkhave’’tiādivacanassa sāmaññato pucchābhāvo dassito avisesato hi tassa pucchāvisesabhāvañāpanatthaṃ mahāniddese āgatā sabbāva pucchā atthuddhāranayena dasseti ‘‘tattha pucchā nāmā’’tiādinā. Tattha tatthāti ‘‘taṃ katamanti pucchatī’’ti ettha yadetaṃ sāmaññato pucchāvacanaṃ, tasmiṃ.
所谓“相”,就是想要了解的任何一种自性。说“未知”,是指以任何一种智都还没有了知它;说“未见”,是指以能见的智还没有像现前亲眼看到那样见到它;说“未衡量”,是指以衡量的智还没有把它衡量为“它有这么多”;说“未审察”,是指以审察的智还没有完成智的作用;说“未显现”,是指它在智中不清楚;说“未令显现”,是指它没有被智弄得清楚。能借它照亮未见之物,所以叫“未见之照明”。能借它把已见之物汇合起来,所以叫“已见之汇合”,即依谈论而作决定。能借它断除疑惑,所以叫“疑惑之断除”。以随许而问,叫“随许问”。因为“诸比丘,你们认为如何”等是问,所以“你们随许什么”就是问随许。欲说,就是欲说。巴利
Lakkhaṇanti ñātuṃ icchito yo koci sabhāvo. ‘‘Aññāta’’nti yena kenaci ñāṇena aññātabhāvamāha, ‘‘adiṭṭha’’nti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena paccakkhaṃ viya adiṭṭhataṃ. ‘‘Atulita’’nti ‘‘ettakameta’’nti tulanabhūtena atūlitataṃ, ‘‘atīrita’’nti tīraṇabhūtena akatañāṇakiriyāsamāpanataṃ, ‘‘avibhūta’’nti ñāṇassa apākaṭabhāvaṃ, ‘‘avibhāvita’’nti ñāṇena apākaṭīkatabhāvaṃ. Adiṭṭhaṃ jotīyati etāyāti adiṭṭhajotanā. Diṭṭhaṃ saṃsandīyati etāyāti diṭṭhasaṃsandanā, sākacchāvasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ. Vimati chijjati etāyāti vimaticchedanā. Anumatiyā pucchā anumatipucchā. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha bhikkhave’’tiādi pucchāya hi ‘‘kā tumhākaṃ anumatī’’ti anumati pucchitā hoti. Kathetukamyatāti kathetukamyatāya.
8 就像铁块本身就有下坠的性质,在它还没落地之前就硬让它极速坠落,不让它慢慢掉,而是让它飞快地掉下去,这就是“过坠”的意思。或者,用刀杖等先把它制服、压伏之后再让它坠落,也叫过坠。“有情”,指的是五蕴的相续,因为在这相续中安立了“有情”这个名称。“命根”,指色命根和非色命根。色命根一旦被破坏,另一个命根也因为与它相关联而随之坏灭。那为什么这里用单数来说“杀生”——说“对命根的过坠,这里依世俗说为有情”?难道这里要表达的不是远离对一切无一遗漏的有情的杀害吗?因为后面确实用复数来说:“悲悯一切众生、有情”等等。确实如此。不过,这里是就有情的共通性而用单数来说的,而且由于“一切”这个词就在旁边,其中的复数含义其实已经可以明白了。所以,这里没有作共通性的表述,而是按照想要表达差别的意图,用了复数来说。而且要知道:多数情况下,受持禁戒是就共通性来说的,而在这共通性之中,特殊的禁戒又各有差别,为了让人了解这个差别,才作了这样的言辞上的区分。当命根还在持续时,对作为命根所依的大种施加某种行为为因,使得由这些大种为条件而将生起的其他大种不再生起——那种能引发如此行为的思,就是杀生。因为已经受到行为作用的大种,就不再像其他大种那样能产生清净的结果,所以不能成为同类大种生起的原因。这里说“身门和语门”,是为了排除在意识门中生起的杀意思成为杀生的可能。巴利
8. Saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atīva pātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto. Sattoti khandhasantāno. Tattha hi sattapaññatti. Jīvitindriyanti rūpārūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Rūpajīvitindriye hi vikopite itarampi taṃsambandhatāya vinassati. Kasmā panettha ‘‘pāṇassa atipāto, pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto’’ti ca ekavacananiddeso kato, nanu niravasesānaṃ pāṇānaṃ atipātato virati idha adhippetā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti sabbe pāṇabhūte’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā) bahuvacananiddesanti? Saccametaṃ, pāṇabhāvasāmaññavasena panettha ekavacananiddeso kato, sabbasaddasannidhānena tattha puthuttaṃ viññāyamānamevāti sāmaññaniddesaṃ akatvā bhedavacanicchāvasena bahuvacananiddeso katoti . Kiñca bhiyyosāmaññato saṃvarasamādānaṃ, tabbisesato saṃvarabhedoti imassa visesassa ñāpanatthaṃ ayaṃ vacanabhedo katoti veditabbo. Yāya cetanāya vattamānassa jīvitindriyassa nissayabhūtesu mahābhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetu taṃ mahābhūtappaccayā uppajjanakamahābhūtā nuppajjissanti, sā tādisappayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pāṇātipāto. Laddhupakkamāni hi bhūtāni itarabhūtāni viya na visadānīti samānajātiyānaṃ kāraṇaṃ na hontīti. ‘‘Kāyavacīdvārāna’’nti etena manodvāre pavattāya vadhakacetanāya pāṇātipātabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati.
由加行、对象等的重大性等原因,应当知道:从这些条件生起的思之所以力量强大,是因为这样几个方面。所谓加行重大,是指对于想要达成的加行,以突然完成的方式使事业得以成办,思多次生起速行,由此获得反复练习,再依决意思的力量,这样的加行就是重大。所谓对象重大,是指即使有时对小的和大的有情,加行的程度相同,但在杀害大的有情时,所生起的思会更加猛烈,这就是对象的重大。因此,这两者都是因为思的力量强大才成立的。同样,由于所杀害的对象具有大功德,针对它生起的加害之思,就像种在优良田地里一样,会变得强盛,也会更加猛烈地生起,所以应当看出它的重罪性。因此,即使加行、对象等条件并不重大,只要因为功德大等原因使思的力量增强,也应当同样理解其重罪性。巴利
Payogavatthumahantatādīhi mahāsāvajjatā tehi paccayehi uppajjamānāya cetanāya balavabhāvato veditabbā. Yathādhippetassa hi payogassa sahasā nipphādanavasena kiccasādhikāya bahukkhattuṃ pavattajavanehi laddhāsevanāya ca sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya vasena payogassa mahantabhāvo. Satipi kadāci khuddake ceva mahante ca pāṇe payogassa samabhāve mahantaṃ hanantassa cetanā tibbatarā uppajjatīti vatthussa mahantabhāvo. Iti ubhayaṃ petaṃ cetanāya balavabhāveneva hoti. Tathā hi hantabbassa mahāguṇabhāvena tattha pavattaupakāracetanā viya khettavisesanibbattiyā apakāracetanāpi balavatī, tibbatarā ca uppajjatīti tassā mahāsāvajjatā daṭṭhabbā. Tasmā payogavatthuādipaccayānaṃ amahattepi mahāguṇatādipaccayehi cetanāya balavabhāvādivaseneva mahāsāvajjabhāvo veditabbo.
这些被称为“资粮”,是因为依靠它们而积聚起来,也就是诸支分。在这些支分当中,认定有情的杀害心,有些也属于前分阶段。加行则是由杀害思所发起的。具足五支的杀生思,应当看作脱离这五支。依靠明咒的念诵加行,就像阿达婆吠陀师等人那样。依靠神通的加行,则是由业异熟所生的神通,就像毒牙等那样。极其广衍,就是极为庞大繁杂。巴利
Sambharīyanti etehīti sambhārā, aṅgāni. Tesu pāṇasaññitāvadhakacittāni pubbabhāgiyānipi honti. Upakkamo vadhakacetanāsamuṭṭhāpito. Pañcasambhāravatī pāṇātipātacetanāti sā pañcasambhāravinimuttā daṭṭhabbā. Vijjāmayo mantaparijappanapayogo āthabbaṇikādīnaṃ viya. Iddhimayo kammavipākajiddhimayo dāṭhākoṭakādīnaṃ viya. Ativiya papañcoti atimahāvitthāro.
这里有人问:在每一个刹那都在坏灭、本性就是坏灭的诸行当中,到底谁是杀者?谁又是被杀者?如果说是心和心所的相续,那它是无色的,没办法用砍断、剖裂等方式去伤害它,它也不是能被伤害的。如果说是色法的相续,那它是没有心识的,就像木头和柴棒一样,对它用砍断等方式并不能构成杀生,不像对一具死尸那样。再说,杀生的加行,比如打击等行为,是针对过去的诸行、未来的诸行,还是现在的诸行?过去和未来的诸行根本不存在,所以不可能。如果是针对现在的诸行,诸行是刹那性的,本性就是坏灭,对于本来就正走向坏灭的东西,加行就成了白费力气。而且坏灭不需要任何原因,所以死亡并不是由打击等加行造成的。再加上诸行本身没有主动造作,那这个加行又是谁做的呢?由于是刹那性的,杀心一生起就灭了,在作用结束的那一刻它已经不存在了,那又是谁被杀生业所系缚呢?巴利
Etthāha – khaṇe khaṇe nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu ko hanti, ko vā haññati, yadi cittacetasikasantāno, so arūpatāya na chedanabhedanādivasena vikopanasamattho, nāpi vikopanīyo, atha rūpasantāno, so acetanatāya kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipāto labbhati yathā matasarīre, payogopi pāṇātipātassa paharaṇappakārādi atītesu vā saṅkhāresu bhaveyya anāgatesu vā paccuppannesu vā, tattha na tāva atītānāgatesu sambhavati tesaṃ abhāvato, paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano payogo siyā, vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappakārādipayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo, khaṇikattā vadhādhippāyasamakālabhijjanakassa kiriyāpariyosānakālānavaṭṭhānato kassa vā pāṇātipātakammabaddhoti.
有人这样说:与前面所说的杀生思一起生起的诸行聚集,被称为“有情”,它就是杀害者。由它所发动的杀生加行之相,在识和命根已经离开之后,成为“死亡”这一称呼的依托——前面所说的那个杀生加行没有做时本来会生起的色法与无色法聚集被杀死了,或者纯粹的心与心所相续被杀死了。即使在杀生加行达不到的情况下,因为在五蕴有中,它要依靠色相续才能运转,当别人对色相续施加断除命根的加行时,由于生起了与命根生起相障碍的类似色法,色相续被破坏,于是就有中断,所以杀生并非不可能。杀生也不是无因的,加行也不是没有结果的,因为对现前的诸行做了加行之后,紧接着本应生起的诸行聚便因此不再生起。又因为这里不把刹那诸行的刹那灭当作“死”,而相续的死按前面所说是有因的,所以死不是无因。杀生的加行也不是没有作者,因为即使在无造作者的诸行中,仅仅作为助缘而存在、能决定产生与自己相符之果的诸因,就可以成立“作者”这个说法,就像说“灯能照亮”“月天子是月亮”一样。再者,并不是纯粹与杀意共存的心与心所聚就被称为杀生,因为杀生是依相续而安立的,而依相续运转的灯等也能成就其作用,所以杀生确实能结缚业。这个考察,在不与取等其余戒条中,也应当随其所应加以阐明。巴利
Vuccate – yathāvuttavadhakacetanāsahito saṅkhārānaṃ puñjo sattasaṅkhāto hantā, tena pavattitavadhakapayoganimittaṃ apagatusmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matavohārappavattinibandho yathāvuttavadhappayogākaraṇe uppajjanāraho rūpārūpadhammasamūho haññati, kevalo vā cittacetasikasantāno. Vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya rūpasantāne parena payojitajīvitindriyupacchedakapayogavasena tannibbattivibandhakavisadisarūpuppattiyā vihate vicchedo hotīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo, nāpi ahetuko pāṇātipāto, na ca payogo nippayojano paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katapayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathā anuppattito, khaṇikānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā, santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, na ca katturahito pāṇātipātappayogo nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu sannihitatāmattena upakārakesu attano anurūpaphaluppādananiyatesu kāraṇesu kattuvohārasiddhito yathā ‘‘padīpo pakāseti nisākaro candimā’’ti ca, na ca kevalassa vadhādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchito santānavasena avaṭṭhitasseva paṭijānanato, santānavasena pavattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ atthakiriyāsiddhi dissatīti attheva pāṇātipātena kammabaddho. Ayañca vicāro adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāvetabbo.
从断除的时候起就已经远离了,这句话是在指出:这里所说的离,是以断除为因的断除离。因为世尊以业尽智断除了杀生这种恶戒,所以说世尊从那时起就究竟彻底地远离了杀生,这是因为断和离都被理解为属于断除的方式。虽然断除和远离并没有谁先谁后的时间差别,但是,如果考察道法中的正见等以及正语等作为缘和缘所生法的关系,即使它们是同时生起的,也可以按缘与缘所生的方式来把握,于是就有前后的分别。按照这种把握方式,在作为缘的正见等能断之法中,断的行为有先前的时间称呼;在所缘生的离中,远离的行为有后来的时间称呼。这里的意思应当这样理解。或者,断应当按正断的方式、离应当按止息的方式来搭配。再者,所谓杀生,就是以此杀害生命,是杀生的因的法聚。那是什么呢?就是无惭、无愧、嗔、痴、害等烦恼。世尊以圣道断除并根除了这些烦恼,所以说他究竟彻底地远离了杀生这种恶戒,因为烦恼已断,烦恼所生的业便不再生起。在“离不与取”等中也是同样的道理。“远离了”这个限定词,是在显示那种远离没有时间等方面的局限。正如其他受持远离的人,由于心不稳定,为了利养、活命等因缘而破坏所受持的戒,世尊却不是这样。世尊因为完全断除了杀生,所以是究竟远离的。“我将违犯”这种想法,是夹杂在不犯之法中间偶尔生起的微弱不善法。然而,由于智者能够依身体和语言的运用而了知“此人的烦恼已生起”,所以这些法以这种方式被称为“眼识、耳识所知”。所谓身业,是指杀生等所依的强盛不善法。巴利
‘‘Pahīnakālatopaṭṭhāya viratovā’’ti etena pahānahetukā idhādhippetā samucchedaviratīti dasseti. Kammakkhayañāṇena hi pāṇātipātadussīlyassa pahīnattā bhagavā accantameva tato paṭiviratoti vuccati samucchedavasena pahānaviratīnaṃ adhippetattā. Kiñcāpi pahānaviramaṇānaṃ purimapacchimakālatā natthi, maggadhammānaṃ pana sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ sammāvācādīnañca paccayapaccayuppannabhāve apekkhite sahajātānampi paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena gahaṇaṃ purimapacchimabhāveneva hotīti gahaṇappavattiākāravasena paccayabhūtesu sammādiṭṭhiādīsu pahāyakadhammesu pahānakiriyāya purimakālavohāro, paccayuppannāsu ca viratīsu viramaṇakiriyāya aparakālavohāro ca hotīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Pahānaṃ vā samucchedavasena, virati paṭippassaddhivasena yojetabbā. Atha vā pāṇo atipātīyati etenāti pāṇātipāto, pāṇaghātahetubhūto dhammasamūho. Ko paneso? Ahirikānottappadosamohavihiṃsādayo kilesā. Te hi bhagavā ariyamaggena pahāya samugghāṭetvā pāṇātipātadussīlyato accantameva paṭiviratoti vuccati kilesesu pahīnesu kilesanimittassa kammassa anuppajjanato. ‘‘Adinnādānaṃ pahāyā’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo. Viratovāti avadhāraṇena tassā viratiyā kālādivasena apariyantataṃ dasseti. Yathā hi aññe samādinnaviratikāpi anavaṭṭhitacittatāya lābhajīvitādihetu samādānaṃ bhindanti, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana sabbaso pahīnapāṇātipātattā accantavirato evāti. Vītikkamissāmīti anavajjadhammehi vokiṇṇā antarantarā uppajjanakā dubbalākusalā. Yasmā pana kāyavacīpayogaṃ upalabhitvā ‘‘imassa kilesā uppannā’’ti viññunā sakkā ñātuṃ, tasmā te iminā pariyāyena ‘‘cakkhusotaviññeyyā’’ti vuttāti daṭṭhabbā. Kāyikāti pāṇātipātādinipphādake balavākusale sandhāyāha.
“以种姓而获得名称”——这是句义上的关联。为了说明这一点,应当依据梵授王所赞叹的功德之间的连接来展示,因为这段开示从一开始就是由此而发起的。这里的说明是这样的:“舍弃了杀生、远离杀生的沙门乔达摩的弟子僧团,放下了棍棒,放下了刀杖”——应当这样详细展开。难道梵授王没有赞叹法吗?确实赞叹了,但因为法源自正自觉者,是圣僧团的依止处,而且法的成就是由法本身的威力所成就的,所以在赞叹这两者时,法也就随之被说明了,因此没有单独提出来。事实上,正是依靠正法的威力,世尊和比丘僧团才有能力舍弃杀生等,而开示从一开始就是这样传承下来的。巴利
Gottavasena laddhavohāroti sambandho. Dīpetuṃ vaṭṭati brahmadattena bhāsitavaṇṇassa anusandhidassanavasena imissā desanāya āraddhattā. Tatthāyaṃ dīpanā – ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakasaṅgho nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho’’ti vitthāretabbaṃ. Nanu ca dhammassāpi vaṇṇo brahmadattena bhāsito? Saccaṃ bhāsito, so pana sammāsambuddhapabhavattā, ariyasaṅghādhārattā ca dhammassa dhammānubhāvasiddhattā ca tesaṃ tadubhayadīpaneneva dīpito hotīti visuṃ na uddhaṭo. Saddhammānubhāveneva hi bhagavā bhikkhusaṅgho ca pāṇātipātādippahānasamattho ahosi, desanā pana ādito paṭṭhāya evaṃ āgatāti.
这里的意思是:世尊想用“比丘们,还有其他法”等话,围绕那些不共于他人的佛功德,把后面的开示进一步展开,所以从一开始就以“若要说如来的功德”等语,完全依佛功德来开始说法,而不是依比丘僧团来说。因为世尊说法的常态就是这样:即使本来可以一味地显示教法,有时也不取某些内容。比如在色蕴的二法等项目以及它们的解说中,就没有取心所依处。因为与其他所依处行相不同,说法就会有分类。正如眼识等必定依眼等,而意识并不必定依心所依处;依所依而说的所依二法等教说,是以“有色是眼识的所依,有色不是眼识的所依”等方式展开的。即使对于必定依心所依处的部分,若在二法等中以“有色是意识的所依”等方式来说,也不会有与之相应的所缘二法等。因为不能说“有色是意识的所缘,有色不是意识的所缘”,这样所依和所缘的二法就会行相不同,教说也就不能一味了。同样,在安立品中,由于不以心生起的分别来宣说,在解答无寻无伺这一句时就不能说“有伺”,所以在解答无寻唯伺这一句时,虽然寻是存在的,也没有举出;否则就应该说“有寻”了。巴利
Etthāyaṃ adhippāyo – ‘‘atthi bhikkhave aññe ca dhammā’’tiādinā anaññasādhāraṇe buddhaguṇe ārabbha upari desanaṃ vaḍḍhetukāmo bhagavā ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyyā’’tiādinā buddhaguṇavaseneva desanaṃ ārabhi, na bhikkhusaṅghavasenāti. Esā hi bhagavato desanāya pakati, yaṃ ekaraseneva desanaṃ dassetuṃ labbhamānassāpi kassaci aggahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi rūpakaṇḍe dukādīsu tanniddesesu ca hadayavatthu na gahitaṃ. Itaravatthūhi asamānagatikattā desanābhedo hotīti. Yathā hi cakkhuviññāṇādīni ekantato cakkhādinissayāni, na evaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ ekantena hadayavatthunissayaṃ, nissitavasena ca vatthudukādidesanā pavattā ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthu, atthi rūpaṃ na cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthū’’tiādinā. Yampi ekantato hadayavatthunissayaṃ, tassa vasena ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa vatthū’’tiādinā dukādīsu vuccamānesupi na tadanurūpā ārammaṇadukādayo sambhavanti. Na hi ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ, atthi rūpaṃ na manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇa’’nti sakkā vattunti vatthārammaṇadukā bhinnagatikā siyunti na ekarasā desanā bhaveyyāti. Tathā nikkhepakaṇḍe cittuppādavibhāgena avuccamānattā avitakkaavicārapadavissajjane ‘‘vicāro cā’’ti vattuṃ na sakkāti avitakkavicāramattapadavissajjane labbhamānopi vitakko na uddhaṭo, aññathā ‘‘vitakko cā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā.
为了说明远离名为“杖”的杖、也就是伤害他人的行为,而说“放下刀杖”这句话,接着又说了“为了害他”等话。“从害的性行”的意思,是从恼害的性行来说。因为前面已经说过“也可以依比丘僧团来说明”,所以这里也顺便略加说明,而说了“但凡比丘”等话。巴利
Daṇḍanasaṅkhātassa daṇḍassa paraviheṭhanassa vivajjitabhāvadīpanatthaṃ daṇḍasatthānaṃ nikkhepavacananti āha ‘‘parūpaghātatthāyā’’tiādi. Viheṭhanabhāvatoti vihiṃsanabhāvato. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghavasenāpi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttattā tampi ekadesena dīpento ‘‘yaṃ pana bhikkhū’’tiādimāha.
这里说的“有惭者”,应当理解为:其中已经说到的“惭”,也把“愧”包含在内了。因为厌离恶行的人不可能没有惭,害怕恶行的人也不可能没有愧。或者说,由于诸佛与法以自重为尊,所以这里只把以自己为尊的“惭”说出来,而没有提到以世间为尊的“愧”。
为什么说“具足悲愍、慈心”呢?难道在“具足悲愍”这类说法里,“悲愍”一词指的不是悲吗?确实如此。不过这里的“悲愍”一词,是带着守护之义来使用的,它生起时可以通于慈和悲。这里则是就慈而说的。柔和、滋润,故为慈;有此慈者,故为有慈;有慈之心,故为慈心;其状态为慈心性,即慈本身。“对一切众生类心怀利益与怜愍”这句话,是以不害众生的方式显示慈的无限。众生类,即各类众生。怜愍者,即悲愍者。然而,因为慈是悲的殊胜助缘,所以说“以那悲愍性”。如此,以那些使不杀生得以圆满的诸法,显示了与惭、慈、悲相应。住者,即成为如此之后,以另一种威仪断除在一种威仪中生起的苦而承受、维持,或维持自身,这就是其义。因此说“行、维持、令住、守护”。巴利
Lajjīti ettha vuttalajjāya ottappampi vuttamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi pāpajigucchanaṃ pāputtāsanarahitaṃ, pāpabhayaṃ vā alajjanaṃ atthīti. Dhammagarutāya vā buddhānaṃ, dhammassa ca attādhīnattā attādhipatibhūtā lajjāva vuttā, na pana lokādhipati ottappaṃ. ‘‘Dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpanno’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu dayā-saddo ‘‘dayāpanno’’tiādīsu karuṇāya pavattatīti? Saccametaṃ , ayaṃ pana dayā-saddo anurakkhaṇamatthaṃ antonītaṃ katvā pavattamāno mettāya karuṇāya ca pavattatīti idha mettāya pavattamāno vutto. Midati siniyhatīti mettā, mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, mettaṃ cittaṃ etassāti mettacitto, tassa bhāvo mettacittatā, mettā icceva attho. ‘‘Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī’’ti etena tassā viratiyā sattavasena apariyantataṃ dasseti. Pāṇabhūteti pāṇajāte. Anukampakoti karuṇāyanako. Yasmā pana mettā karuṇāya visesapaccayo hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tāya eva dayāpannatāyā’’ti. Evaṃ yehi dhammehi pāṇātipātā virati sampajjati, tehi lajjāmettākaruṇāhi samaṅgībhāvo dassito. Viharatīti evaṃbhūto hutvā ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe uppannaṃ dukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā harati pavatteti, attabhāvaṃ vā yāpetīti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘iriyati yapeti yāpeti pāletī’’ti.
“只是行为仪戒而已”,意思是仅仅属于善士行为规范的戒。这里是在说明:即使是具备根律仪等功德的世间凡夫,也无法用那些功德来赞叹如来。同样地,在这段关于戒的讨论中,依根律仪而有的资具受用戒等,也没有被分别解说。巴利
Ācārasīlamattakanti sādhujanācārasīlamattakaṃ, tena indriyasaṃvarādiguṇehipi lokiyaputhujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ na sakkotīti dasseti. Tathā hi indriyasaṃvarapaccayaparibhogasīlāni idha sīlakathāyaṃ na vibhattāni.
“取他人之物”,就是拿走属于别人的东西。偷盗的人叫作贼,贼的状态就是偷盗。在这里,对微小的他人财物,过失轻;对贵重的财物,过失重。为什么?因为加行大。另外,在物品价值相同的情况下,如果烦恼和加行都轻缓,过失就轻;如果猛烈,过失就重——这个道理也要这样套用理解。巴利
Parasaṃharaṇanti parassa santakaharaṇaṃ. Theno vuccati coro, tassa bhāvo theyyaṃ. Idhāpi khuddake parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, mahante mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya, vatthuguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjaṃ, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjanti ayampi nayo yojetabbo.
在这里,“亲手等”是指:通过念咒、诵咒来夺取别人的东西,这属于“明所作”;不靠咒语,而是用身体和语言的行为去夺取别人的东西,或者依靠那种神通的力量去夺取,就属于“神变加行”。巴利
Sāhatthikādayoti ettha mantaparijappanena parasantakaharaṇaṃ vijjāmayo, vinā mantena kāyavacīpayogena parasantakassa ākaḍḍhanaṃ tādisaiddhānubhāvena iddhimayo payogo.
所谓“其余的”,就是指“已经舍断、远离”这一类说法。那只是前面已经讲过的道理。虽然这里没有用“学处”这个名称来讲远离,但在其他经文、律藏和阿毗达摩里,按照它们通行的说法,远离和思因为是增上戒学等的依止,又是其中的一部分,所以这里说“在第一学处”。这里虽然没有直接说“有惭耻心、有悲悯”,但按照所讨论的主题,意思其实已经说到了,应该这样理解。因为惭等既是断除杀生的特别助缘,同样也是断除不与取的特别助缘,所以也应该引用那段经文来说明。这个道理在后面的内容里也同样适用。或者也可以这样看:通过“成为清净者”这句话,已经表达了具备惭、愧等,以及断除了无惭、无愧等,所以不必再说“有惭耻心”等。巴利
Sesanti ‘‘pahāya paṭivirato’’ti evamādikaṃ. Tañhi pubbe vuttanayaṃ. Kiñcāpi nayidha sikkhāpadavohārena virati vuttā, ito aññesu pana suttapadesesu vinayābhidhammesu ca pavattavohārena viratiyo cetanā ca adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvato, tesu aññatarakoṭṭhāsabhāvato ca sikkhāpadanti āha ‘‘paṭhamasikkhāpade’’ti. Kāmañcettha ‘‘lajjī dayāpanno’’ti na vuttaṃ, adhikāravasena pana atthato vā vuttamevāti veditabbaṃ. Yathā hi lajjādayo pāṇātipātappahānassa visesappaccayo, evaṃ adinnādānappahānassāpīti, tasmā sāpi pāḷi ānetvā vattabbā. Eseva nayo ito paresupi. Atha vā ‘‘sucibhūtenā’’ti etena hirottappādīhi samannāgamo, ahirikādīnañca pahānaṃ vuttamevāti ‘‘lajjī’’tiādi na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“非胜行”是指非殊胜者、卑劣者的行为,或者就是非殊胜、低劣、下贱的生活方式,这里的意思是指淫欲。所谓“梵行是最胜的行为”,说的是远离淫欲。从“远避淫欲”这句话,应当看出它也显示了远离七种淫欲结合,就像《增支部》7.50 里说的:“在这里,某位婆罗门……不与女人行两两交合,但却接受对女人的涂油、按摩、沐浴、揉搓,他享受这个、贪求这个、以此作为生活方式。”在这里,以行非法为目的、通过身门生起、推动非道行道的思,就是非梵行;而邪淫则是违越不应行处的思,应当这样结合起来理解。其中,不应行处,对男子来说就是二十种女人:母护等十种,买得等十种。对女子来说,则是十二种其他男子:买得等十种,加上有守护者和有惩罚者等。对没有功德的人违犯,罪过轻;对有广大功德的人违犯,罪过重。即使对没有功德的人,以强力压制而犯,罪过也重;在双方意愿相同的情况下,则因烦恼和加行的轻微而罪过轻,因猛烈而罪过重,应当这样了知。非梵行有两个构成条件:想行淫的心,以及非道行道。而邪淫则有四个:存在不应行处、行淫的心、非道行道、以及领受。有人说:“即使被压制而违犯,虽然有非道行道,但因为先前没有生起行淫的意图和加行,被压制的人不构成邪淫。”这种说法认为,有行淫的心却没有加行,这不能作为标准,因为女人方面行淫的加行大多不存在;如果女人事先已生起行淫的心,也会因为没有加行而不构成邪淫。因此应当看到,这是就男子方面从最重的情况说了四种。另有人主张,否则女人在替男子行事时,男子方面也没有行淫的加行,就不构成邪淫了。这里的结论是:随自己喜好而行的有三种,被强迫而行的有三种,从全面含摄来说则有四种。一种加行只是亲手做的。巴利
Aseṭṭhacariyanti aseṭṭhānaṃ hīnānaṃ, aseṭṭhaṃ vā lāmakaṃ nihīnaṃ vuttiṃ, methunanti attho. ‘‘Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāra’’nti methunaviratimāha. ‘‘Ārācārī methunā’’ti etena ‘‘idha brāhmaṇa ekacco…pe… na heva kho mātugāmena saddhiṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, apica kho mātugāmassa ucchādanaparimaddananhāpanasambāhanaṃ sādiyati, so taṃ assādeti, taṃ nikāmeti, tena ca vittiṃ āpajjatī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 7.50) vuttā sattavidhamethunasaṃyogāpi paṭivirati dassitāti daṭṭhabbā. Idhāpi asaddhammasevanādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā maggenamaggapaṭipattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā abrahmacariyaṃ, micchācāre pana agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanāti yojetabbaṃ. Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ māturakkhitādayo dasa, dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dasannaṃ dhanakkitādīnaṃ sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānañca vasena dvādasannaṃ aññe purisā. Guṇavirahite vippaṭipatti appasāvajjā, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjā. Guṇarahitepi ca abhibhavitvā pavatti mahāsāvajjā, ubhinnaṃ samānacchandabhāvepi kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjā, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjāti veditabbā. Tassa dve sambhārā sevetukāmatācittaṃ, maggenamaggapaṭipattīti. Micchācāre pana agamanīyaṭṭhānatā, sevanācittaṃ maggenamaggapaṭipatti, sādiyanañcāti cattāro. ‘‘Abhibhavitvā vītikkamane maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsane satipi purimuppannasevanābhisandhipayogābhāvato abhibhuyyamānassa micchācāro na hotī’’ti vadanti. Sevanācitte sati payogābhāvo na pamāṇaṃ itthiyā sevanāpayogassa yebhuyyena abhāvato, itthiyā puretaraṃ upaṭṭhāpitasevanācittāyapi micchācāro na siyāti āpajjati payogābhāvato. Tasmā purisassa vasena ukkaṃsato cattāro vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, aññathā itthiyā purisakiccakaraṇakāle purisassapi sevanāpayogābhāvato micchācāro na siyāti eke. Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – attano ruciyā pavattitassa tayo, balakkārena pavattitassa tayo, anavasesaggahaṇena pana cattāroti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova.
9 为了说明这已经构成业道,所以说了“破坏利益者”。说“语门的行为或身门的行为”,是为了表明“妄语”这个词是以行为为核心的。想要欺骗的意图,在说之前的那一刹那和正在说的那一刹那都存在。正如律中所说:“在说之前他就有‘我要说妄语’的念头,正在说的时候又有‘我正在说妄语’的念头。”(《波罗夷》205)这两者才是构成妄语的支分,至于其他条件,有没有都无所谓,那些不算关键。“彼之”指的是那个欺骗者的。正如前面所说,以加行为基础——也就是依之而说妄语、让人知道、令其生起——这个思,就是妄语。巴利
9. Kammapathappattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atthabhañjanako’’ti vuttaṃ. Vacīpayogo kāyapayogo vāti musā-saddassa kiriyāpadhānataṃ dasseti. Visaṃvādanādhippāyo pubbabhāgakkhaṇe taṅkhaṇe ca. Vuttañhi ‘‘pubbevassa hoti ‘musā bhaṇissa’nti, bhaṇantassa hoti ‘musā bhaṇāmī’ti’’ (pārā. 205). Etañhi dvayaṃ aṅgabhūtaṃ, itaraṃ pana hotu vā mā vā, akāraṇametaṃ. Assāti visaṃvādakassa . Yathāvuttaṃ payogabhūtaṃ musā vadati viññāpeti, samuṭṭhāpeti vā etāyāti cetanā musāvādo.
按第一种解释,因为相不圆满,而且“妄语”这个词本身也可以表示欺诳之义,所以为了把妄语的相完整说清楚,就开始了第二种解释,从“妄语就是虚假、不真实的事情”等开始。在这种解释里,依它而说、依它而被称为妄语,这个思就是妄语。“破坏其利益”这句话,是从事情本身的角度来说明妄语罪过的轻和重。如果被破坏利益的对象没什么功德,罪过就轻;如果对方有大功德,罪过就重。就像不与取那样,也应该根据功德大小来理解。同样,根据烦恼的弱或强,也能得出罪过轻或重的差别。巴利
Purimanaye lakkhaṇassa abyāpitatāya, musā-saddassa ca visaṃvaditabbatthavācakattasambhavato paripuṇṇaṃ katvā musāvādalakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘musāti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthū’’tiādinā dutiyanayo āraddho. Imasmiñca naye musā vadīyati vuccati etāyāti cetanā musāvādo. ‘‘Yamatthaṃ bhañjatī’’ti vatthuvasena musāvādassa appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatamāha. Yassa atthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjo, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjoti adinnādāne viya guṇavasenāpi yojetabbaṃ. Kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasenāpi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā labbhatiyeva.
因为不想把自己的东西给出去,再加上用“补足之说”的方式来说,这时的妄语纯粹是以欺骗为出发点的。不过在这种情况下,思并不强,所以说是罪过较轻。为了补足还欠缺的那部分利益而说的话,就叫“补足之说”。巴利
Attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya, pūraṇakathānayena ca visaṃvādanapurekkhārasseva musāvādo. Tattha pana cetanā balavatī na hotīti appasāvajjatā vuttā. Appatāya ūnassa atthassa pūraṇavasena pavattā kathā pūraṇakathā.
“适合的”是指适合那个,也就是随顺欺诳的意思。“努力”是以努力为标题来说加行。即使怀着欺诳的意图做了加行,如果对方没有理解那件事,欺诳就不能成立,所以对方理解那件事被说成一个条件。不过有些人说:“不实语、欺诳心、对方理解那件事,这三个是条件。”在发动行动的思心所生起的那一刹那,就已经被妄语业绑住了,因为决断的思已经生起;即使对方因为迟钝,要稍微想一想才能理解那件事,意图仍然是这样。巴利
Tajjoti tassāruppo, visaṃvādanānurūpoti attho. ‘‘Vāyāmo’’ti vāyāmasīsena payogamāha. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena payoge katepi parena tasmiṃ atthe aviññāte visaṃvādanassa asijjhanato parassa tadatthavijānanaṃ eko sambhāro vutto. Keci pana ‘‘abhūtavacanaṃ visaṃvādanacittaṃ parassa tadatthavijānananti tayo sambhārā’’ti vadanti. Kiriyāsamuṭṭhāpakacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakakammunā bajjhati sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya nibbattattā, sacepi dandhatāya vicāretvā paro tamatthaṃ jānātīti adhippāyo.
就像“以真实、以坚固”等句(《中部》1.19)里那样,“theta”这个词是“坚固”的同义词;而坚固性因为具足真实语而更为殊胜,所以要从言语的角度来理解,因此说“坚固说者就是此义”。“非坚固说者”是说:就像姜黄的颜色等,因为其性不安住,所以不坚固;同样地,如果一个人的言语不坚固,他就是非坚固说者。应当这样把姜黄的颜色等作为言语的譬喻来配合理解。“如石刻”等比喻也适用同样的方法。巴利
‘‘Saccato thetato’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.19) viya theta-saddo thirapariyāyo, thirabhāvo ca saccavāditāya adhikatattā kathāvasena veditabboti āha ‘‘thirakathoti attho’’ti. Nathirakathoti yathā haliddirāgādayo anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya na thirā, evaṃ na thirā kathā yassa so na thirakathoti haliddirāgādayo yathā kathāya upamā honti, evaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Esa nayo ‘‘pāsāṇalekhā viyā’’tiādīsupi.
信在这里流布、生起,所以叫“信所”;信所就是可信的,就像说“可引导的”那样(《增支部》8.11;《波逸提》8)。或者,应当被信所寻求,就是可信的,意思是应当信受。因为会欺骗,所以成为应受谴责的状态——这是它的意趣。巴利
Saddhā ayati pavattati etthāti saddhāyo, saddhāyo eva saddhāyiko yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8). Saddhāya vā ayitabbo saddhāyiko, saddheyyoti attho. Vattabbataṃ āpajjati visaṃvādanatoti adhippāyo.
“空无”是指因为缺少喜而变得空虚。离间语,就是前面说的那种以声音为本质的言语,因为它让人失去所爱,所以叫离间语——这是从词源角度解释它的含义。或者,“pisati”是破坏的意思,离间语就是让和合的众生分裂、瓦解,这就是它的含义。巴利
Suññabhāvanti pītivirahitatāya rittataṃ. Sā pisuṇavācāti yāyaṃ yathāvuttā saddasabhāvā vācā, sā piyasuññakaraṇato pisuṇavācāti niruttinayena atthamāha. Pisatīti vā pisuṇā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vagge bhinne karotīti attho.
粗恶语是因为缺少柔和,所以显得粗劣。它本身也是粗恶的,因为是由忧恼引发,本性就是粗暴。这里说“作粗恶”,是从结果来代指;或者说“说粗恶”,应当理解为言语中“粗恶”这个音声的出现。而“它本身也是粗恶的”,是因为它伤到别人的痛处才生起,从根本上说就是极度粗暴;也可以依原因的假名来理解,应当知道这是言语中“粗恶”音声的出现。正因如此,它不悦耳,也因为义理败坏而不称心。巴利
Pharusanti sinehābhāvena lūkhaṃ. Sayampi pharusāti domanassasamuṭṭhitattā sabhāvenapi kakkasā. Ettha ca pharusaṃ karotīti phalūpacārena, pharusayatīti vā vācāya pharusa-saddappavatti veditabbā. Sayampi pharusāti paresaṃ mammacchedavasena pavattiyā ekantaniṭṭhuratāya sabhāvena, kāraṇavohārena ca vācāya pharusa-saddappavatti daṭṭhabbā. Tatoyeva ca neva kaṇṇasukhā. Atthavipannatāya na hadayaṅgamā.
用那种被称为废话的无意义言语,破坏、摧毁、消灭安乐与利益,所以得到“杂秽”这个名字——凡是任何对自己和他人没有帮助的闲扯,就是杂秽语。巴利
Yena samphaṃ palapatīti yena palāpasaṅkhātena niratthakavacanena sukhaṃ hitañca phalati vidarati vināsetīti ‘‘sampha’’nti laddhanāmaṃ attano paresañca anupakārakaṃ yaṃ kiñci palapati.
“染污心”是指被贪或嗔所逼迫、烧恼的心,或者被污染的心,这就是它的意思。思就是离间语,因为人们借着它来说离间的话。无论他让谁跟谁分裂,在双方还没分裂时,过失较轻;已经分裂时,过失就重。烦恼的轻微或强烈等差别,也是这样。巴利
Saṃkiliṭṭhacittassāti lobhena dosena vā vibādhitacittassa, upatāpitacittassa vā, dūsitacittassāti attho. Cetanā pisuṇavācā pisuṇaṃ vadanti etāyāti. Yassa yato bhedaṃ karoti, tesu abhinnesu appasāvajjaṃ, bhinnesu mahāsāvajjaṃ, tathā kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvisesesu.
如果他对某人说离间的话,不管那人有没有因此分裂,只要让对方明白这个意思,就算已经构成离间语了,所以说“让对方知道那个意思”。不过,离间语业道的真正成立,只有在对方确实已经分裂的时候。巴利
Yassa pesuññaṃ upasaṃharati, so bhijjatu vā mā vā, tassa atthassa viññāpanameva pamāṇanti āha ‘‘tadatthavijānana’’nti, kammapathappatti pana bhinne eva.
随力给予者,就是随顺给予力量的人,或者是以随顺的方式给予的人。那么,是对谁随顺、对谁给予呢?因为经文说“对和合者”,可知是对“连结”而言。因此说“连结的随力给予者”。由于以随顺的方式对连结给予,就是对连结的安立、守护或加固,所以说“意思是作加固者”。在此中喜乐,就是乐园,指应当喜乐的地方。由于即使不作词形分析,也能得到这个意思,所以说“经文也读作‘喜和合者’,这里正是这个意思”。巴利
Anuppadātāti anubalappadātā, anuvattanavasena vā padātā. Kassa pana anuvattanaṃ padānañca? ‘‘Sahitāna’’nti vuttattā ‘‘sandhānassā’’ti viññāyati. Tenevāha ‘‘sandhānānuppadātā’’ti. Yasmā pana anuvattanavasena sandhānassa padānaṃ ādhānaṃ, rakkhaṇaṃ vā daḷhīkaraṇaṃ hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘daḷhīkammaṃ kattāti attho’’ti. Āramanti etthāti ārāmo, ramitabbaṭṭhānaṃ . Yasmā pana ākārena vināpi ayamevattho labbhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samaggarāmotipi pāḷi, ayamevettha attho’’ti.
就像疮口一样,当那些疮口被粗恶语稍微碰触,或者像被恶疮被触碰那样,心就陷入极度的痛苦。那么,这些疮口是什么呢?就是出身等可以用来辱骂的题材。通过身业和语业的运作,使这些疮口被割裂、被破坏,这就是“割裂疮口者”。纯粹粗恶的思就是粗恶语,因为人们依这种思而说出粗恶的话。那么,纯粹粗恶的思是怎样生起的呢?是由于心怀瞋怒。这里说的“对那个”,就是指依纯粹粗恶的思而成为粗恶语的状态。其用意是:割裂疮口也就是语言上的粗恶。如果心是柔和的,粗恶语就不构成业道;但当心变得粗暴时,就无法阻止它成为业。这样,先从随顺的角度用思的粗暴来成立粗恶语,现在再从相反的角度来成立,所以说“由言语柔和”等等。那种粗恶语,“对某人”就是指对某个人。在这里也一样:还没达到业道程度的,过失较小;已经达到的,过失就大。同样,根据烦恼的轻微或猛烈,过失也有轻重的差别。有些论师说:“对某人发出粗恶语,只有在当面朝向他的时候才成立。”另一些论师说:“即使背地里说,粗恶语也照样成立。”对此,合理的理解应该是:当面造作时,由于对对方不尊重等心态比较强,所以思也比较强,而且对方也能知道那话的意思;背地里就不是这样。然而,就像在火葬场向被辱骂的死者致歉能止息毁谤的障碍一样,由此也可以知道“背地里发出的粗恶语也成立”。心怀愤怒,就是指以辱骂为目的而心怀愤怒,不是以杀害为目的。因为如果是以杀害为目的而心生愤怒,那就只是瞋害心了。在这里——巴利
Mammāni viya mammāni, yesu pharusavācāya chupitamattesu duṭṭhārūsu viya ghaṭṭitesu cittaṃ adhimattaṃ dukkhappattaṃ hoti. Kāni pana tāni? Jātiādīni akkosavatthūni. Tāni chijjanti, bhijjanti vā yena kāyavacīpayogena, so mammacchedako. Ekantena pharusacetanā pharusavācā pharusaṃ vadati etāyāti. Kathaṃ pana ekantapharusacetanā hoti? Duṭṭhacittatāya. Tassāti ekantapharusacetanāya eva pharusavācābhāvassa. Mammacchedako savanapharusatāyāti adhippāyo. Cittasaṇhatāya pharusavācā na hoti kammapatha’ppattattā, kammabhāvaṃ pana na sakkā vāretunti. Evaṃ anvayavasena cetanāpharusatāya pharusavācaṃ sādhetvā idāni tameva paṭipakkhanayena sādhetuṃ ‘‘vacanasaṇhatāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sā pharusavācā . Yanti yaṃ puggalaṃ. Etthāpi kammapathabhāvaṃ appattā appasāvajjā, itarā mahāsāvajjā, tathā kilesānaṃ mudutibbatābhāve. Keci pana ‘‘yaṃ uddissa pharusavācā payujjanti, tassa sammukhāva sīsaṃ etī’’ti, eke ‘‘parammukhāpi pharusavācā hotiyevā’’ti vadanti. Tatthāyamadhippāyo yutto siyā – sammukhā payoge agāravādīnaṃ balavabhāvato siyā cetanā balavatī, parassa ca tadatthajānanaṃ, na tathā asammukhāti. Yathā pana akkosite mate āḷahane katā khamanā upavādantarāyaṃ nivatteti, evaṃ ‘‘parammukhā payuttāpi pharusavācā hotiyevā’’ti sakkā viññātunti. Kupitacittanti akkosādhippāyeneva kupitacittaṃ, na maraṇādhippāyena. Maraṇādhippāyena hi cittakope sati byāpādoyeva hotīti. Etthāti –
这辆车有着无瑕的部件,覆着白色的顶盖,只有一个轮辐,它向前行进。
看那无恼害者走来,他已切断渴爱之流,不再有任何束缚。巴利
‘‘Nelaṅgo setapacchādo, ekāro vattatī ratho; Anīghaṃ passa āyantaṃ, chinnasotaṃ abandhana’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 4.347; udā. 65);
在这首偈颂里,“无过之肢”指的就是戒。所以质多居士说:“尊者,‘无过之肢’是戒的别名。”柔软,是因为不粗硬,所以柔和。对于城人,这里的“城”字应当理解为指住在城里的人,就像“村子来了”这类说法一样。因此说“城市居民”。令意满足、增长,就是称心,所以说“令心增长”。习行、修习、多作。如果是为使他人执持而说的教法,在他人未接受时,过失较小;一旦接受,过失便重大。这里也同样可以依烦恼的轻微或猛烈,而有小过患与大过患之分。巴利
Imissā gāthāya. Sīlañhettha ‘‘nelaṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha citto gahapati ‘‘nelaṅganti kho bhante sīlānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.347). Sukumārāti apharusatāya mudukā. Purassāti ettha pura-saddo tannivāsīvācako daṭṭhabbo ‘‘gāmo āgato’’tiādīsu viya. Tenevāha ‘‘nagaravāsīna’’nti. Manaṃ appāyati vaḍḍhetīti manāpā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cittavuḍḍhikarā’’ti. Āsevanaṃ bhāvanaṃ bahulīkaraṇaṃ. Yaṃ gāhayituṃ pavattito, tena aggahite appasāvajjo gahite mahāsāvajjoti, idhāpi kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasenāpi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā labbhatiyeva.
说“适时说话”等,是为了说明远离杂秽语的人是怎么做的。就像说“远离杀生”等,是为了说明断除杀生的做法。因为当说“断除杀生而住”时,怎样才是断除杀生呢?由于有期待,所以说“远离杀生”。那这个远离又是怎样的呢?所以说“放下棍棒,放下刀杖”。那放下棍棒和刀杖又是怎样的呢?所以说“有惭耻心”等。这样,后面的内容一步步说明前面的做法。对不与取等也是这样,按各自情况套用。因此说:“说‘适时说话’等,是为了说明远离杂秽语的人是怎么做的。”因为即使是有意义的话,如果时机不对,也可能没有利益,反而变成说无意义的话,所以要断除杂秽语的人应当避免不合时宜地说话,因此说“适时说话”。即使是在适当的时候说,如果说的不是真实的事,也会造成两种损害,所以应当避免不真实的话,因此说“说真实语”。为了说明即使说真实的话,也只应该说能带来此世和来世利益的话,所以说“说有义语”。为了说明即使说有义语,也不应该只说依赖世间法的话,而应该说依赖出世间法的话,所以说“说法语”。为了说明有义语怎样才是依赖出世间法,所以说“说律语”。因为依据五种防护——巴帝摩卡防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护,以及五种律——彼分断律、镇伏断律、正断律、安息律、出离律所说的义理,由于是证得涅槃的原因,所以是依赖出世间法。巴利
‘‘Kālavādī’’tiādi samphappalāpā paṭiviratassa paṭipattidassanaṃ. Yathā hi ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādi pāṇātipātappahānapaṭipattidassanaṃ. ‘‘Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya viharatī’’ti hi vutte kathaṃ pāṇātipātappahānaṃ hotīti? Apekkhāsabbhāvato ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, sā pana virati kathanti āha ‘‘nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho’’ti, tañca daṇḍasatthanidhānaṃ kathanti vuttaṃ ‘‘lajjī’’tiādi, evaṃ uttaruttaraṃ purimassa purimassa upāyasandassanaṃ, tathā adinnādānādīsu yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kālavādītiādi samphappalāpā paṭiviratassa paṭipattidassana’’nti. Atthasañhitāpi hi vācā ayuttakālappayogena atthāvahā na siyāti anatthaviññāpanavācaṃ anulometi, tasmā samphappalāpaṃ pajahantena akālavāditā parivajjetabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kālavādī’’ti. Kālena vadantenāpi ubhayānatthasādhanato abhūtaṃ parivajjetabbanti āha ‘‘bhūtavādī’’ti. Bhūtañca vadantena yaṃ idhalokaparalokahitasampādakaṃ, tadeva vattabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘atthavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthaṃ vadantenāpi na lokiyadhammasannissitameva vattabbaṃ, atha kho lokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ pīti dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā ca attho lokuttaradhammasannissito hoti, taṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vinayavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti hi pañcannaṃ saṃvarānaṃ, tadaṅgavinayo vikkhambhanavinayo samucchedavinayo paṭippassaddhivinayo nissaraṇavinayoti pañcannaṃ vinayānañca vasena vuccamāno attho nibbānādhigamahetubhāvato lokuttaradhammasannissito hotīti.
为了让“具足殊胜功德的义理在宣说时,若有教说善巧,便能辉耀并成办其事,否则不然”这一点显示出来,所以说了“说含藏之语”。现在,为了阐明那教说善巧,又说了“应时”等。对于依听众的意乐、事由和提问而进入教说范围的内容,先观察并确定一向记、分别记等记答方式的分别,然后以安立、理由、引证、连结,随应各个时机加以阐明。这样的教说,虽然形式有限有界,却能含摄极为广博、甚深、崇高、丰富的众多义理而广为铺展;能这样随他人的意乐,把他们安立在究竟义的成就中,就称为“教说善巧者”。这里应当这样理解义理的连结。巴利
Evaṃ guṇavisesayutto ca attho vuccamāno desanākosalle sati sobhati, kiccakaro ca hoti, nāññathāti dassetuṃ ‘‘nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni taṃ desanākosallaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kālenā’’tiādimāha. Ajjhāsayaṭṭhuppattīnaṃ pucchāya ca vasena otiṇṇe desanāvisaye ekaṃsādibyākaraṇavibhāgaṃ sallakkhetvā ṭhapanāhetudāharaṇasaṃsandanāni taṃtaṃkālānurūpaṃ vibhāventiyā parimitaparicchinnarūpāya vipulataragambhīrudārapahūtatthavitthārasaṅgāhakāya desanāya pare yathājjhāsayaṃ paramatthasiddhiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpento ‘‘desanākusalo’’ti vuccatīti evamettha atthayojanā veditabbā.
10 像这样按顺序分析了七条根本学处之后,虽然断除贪欲等也包含在律仪戒的修学范围内,但因为它属于更高层次的功德所摄,又超出世间凡夫的境界,世尊为了用更高的教法来统摄它,就暂且把它放在一边,转而分析普通大众都熟知的威仪戒,因此说了“伤害种子与植物之行”等话。在这里,“gāma”是集合的意思。难道树木等因为无心就不是众生吗?应该知道它们没有心,因为它们不会挣扎,砍断后还能再长出来,种类各不相同,也不属于四生。不过珊瑚、石头、盐等也有增长,所以增长并不能作为有生命的理由;至于感知对象和分别构想,就像梦境一样只是心的想象,同样,怀孕等也是如此。那么,为什么要求远离伤害种子与植物之行呢?这是为了符合沙门的身份,也是为了保护依附在这些植物上的众生。因此世尊说:“愚人对树木有生命想……”等。Nīlatiṇarukkhādikassa 是指青草等,也就是生草和生树木等。由“等”字应该知道,还包括药草、灌木、藤蔓等。巴利
10. Evaṃ paṭipāṭiyā satta mūlasikkhāpadāni vibhajitvā satipi abhijjhādippahānassa saṃvarasīlasikkhāsaṅgahe upariguṇasaṅgahato, lokiyaputhujjanāvisayato ca uttaradesanāya saṅgaṇhituṃ taṃ pariharitvā pacurajanapākaṭaṃ ācārasīlameva vibhajanto bhagavā ‘‘bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā’’tiādimāha. Tattha gāmoti samūho. Nanu ca rukkhādayo cittarahitatāya na jīvā, cittarahitatā ca paripphandābhāvato , chinne viruhanato, visadisajātikabhāvato, catuyoniappariyāpannato ca veditabbā, vuḍḍhi pana pavāḷasilālavaṇānampi vijjatīti na tesaṃ jīvabhāve kāraṇaṃ, visayaggahaṇañca parikappanāmattaṃ supanaṃ viya ciñcādīnaṃ, tathā dohaḷādayo, tattha kasmā bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirati icchitāti? Samaṇasāruppato, sannissitasattānurakkhaṇato ca. Tenevāha ‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisā manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi (pāci. 89). Nīlatiṇarukkhādikassāti allatiṇassa ceva allarukkhādikassa ca. Ādi-saddena osadhigacchalatādayo veditabbā.
“一食”就是一天只吃一顿饭。有这种习惯的人,就叫“一食者”,也就是一天当中只进食一次的人。不过,他也可能在夜里吃东西。为了排除这种情况,所以说“离夜食”。即便如此,还是可能有人午后吃东西,却自认为是一食者。为了消除这种疑问,所以说“远离非时食”。从曙光出现到正午,这是诸佛一向所行、所习的进食时间,除此之外就是非时。不过,在义注中,因为第二句已经否定了夜间进食,所以把午后称为“非时”。巴利
Ekaṃ bhattaṃ ekabhattaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti ekabhattiko, ekasmiṃ divase ekavārameva bhuñjanako. Tayidaṃ rattibhojanopi siyāti tannivattanatthamāha ‘‘rattūparato’’ti. Evampi aparaṇhabhojīpi siyā ekabhattikoti tadāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ ‘‘virato vikālabhojanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aruṇuggamanato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhanhikā, ayaṃ buddhānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo bhojanassa kālo nāma, tadañño vikālo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana dutiyapadena rattibhojanassa paṭikkhittattā aparaṇho ‘‘vikālo’’ti vutto.
简要来说,世尊的教法整体上遵循“诸恶莫作”等原则(《长部》2.90;《法句》183;《导论》30, 50, 116, 124),而观看舞蹈等行为源于极端强烈的欲贪,与教法并不相符,所以说“与教法不相符”。在律典中,无论是自己跳舞还是让别人跳舞,因为都属于跳舞这一共同性质,所以只用“舞”这一个词来涵盖;唱歌和演奏乐器也是如此,因此说“以自舞、令舞等方式”。“等”字涵盖了自唱、令唱、自奏、令奏。在这里,“看”通过举出一部分来代表其余,也包含了“听”的意思。或者说,因为前五识以“看”为本质,即使在听的行为中也有“看”的简略共通性质,所以只说“看”。偶尔听到不属于嬉戏性质的歌声,是可以允许的,因此说“娱乐性质的看除外”。正如《胜义光明》《小诵经注》中所说:“与法相应的歌在这里也是允许的,但与歌相应的法是不允许的。”巴利
Saṅkhepato ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50, 116, 124) nayappavattaṃ bhagavato sāsanaṃ accantachandarāgappavattito naccādīnaṃ dassanaṃ na anulometīti āha ‘‘sāsanassa ananulomattā’’ti. Attanā payojiyamānaṃ, parehi payojāpiyamānañca naccaṃ naccabhāvasāmaññato pāḷiyaṃ ekeneva nacca-saddena gahitaṃ, tathā gītavādita-saddena cāti āha ‘‘naccananaccāpanādivasenā’’ti. Ādi-saddena gāyanagāyāpanavādanavādāpanāni saṅgaṇhāti. Dassanena cettha savanampi saṅgahitaṃ virūpekasesanayena. Ālocanasabhāvatāya vā pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ savanakiriyāyapi dassanasaṅkhepasabbhāvato ‘‘dassanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Avisūkabhūtassa gītassa savanaṃ kadāci vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘visūkabhūtā dassanā’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ paramatthajotikāya khuddakapāṭhaṭṭhakathāya (khu. pā. aṭṭha. pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘dhammūpasaṃhitampi cettha gītaṃ vaṭṭati, gītūpasaṃhito dhammo na vaṭṭatī’’ti.
“高”这个词,和“高”这个音同义的另一个词,就是“卧具”——“躺在这里,所以叫卧具”。所谓“高广大床”,指的是不符合沙门身份、尺寸超标、不合法的铺垫物,所以注释里说“尺寸超标、不合法的铺垫物”。要知道,这里像狮子座之类的坐具,也被“卧具”这个词涵盖在内。不过,既然所依靠的器具被禁止了,那么依托这个器具的行为自然也就被禁止了,所以只说了“高广大床”;但从意义上说,这其实是在表明要远离以享受为目的的坐和躺。或者也可以这样理解:在这个意义上,是用“高床、大床的坐卧”来以偏概全地表达,就像“以名色为缘而有六处”那样的说法一样。由于坐的行为在顺序上先于躺卧,所以应当知道,这里用“卧具”这个词就已经把“坐”也包含进去了。巴利
Uccāti uccasaddena samānatthaṃ ekaṃ saddantaraṃ, seti etthāti sayanaṃ. Uccāsayanaṃ mahāsayanañca samaṇasārupparahitaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘pamāṇātikkantaṃ, akappiyattharaṇa’’nti . Āsandādiāsanañcettha sayanena saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā pana ādhāre paṭikkhitte tadādhārakiriyā paṭikkhittāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘uccāsayanamahāsayanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ, atthato pana tadupabhogabhūta nisajjānipajjanehi virati dassitāti daṭṭhabbā. Uccāsayanasayanamahāsayanasayanāti vā etasmiṃ atthe ekasesanayena ayaṃ niddeso kato yathā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1). Āsanakiriyāpubbakattā sayanakiriyāya sayanaggahaṇeneva āsanaṃ gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
通过让别人去接受,或者对别人寄存的东西表示认可,也能得到“接受”的含义,所以说“不让人接受,也不认可寄存的东西”。或者说,接受有三种:以身接受、以语接受、以意接受。其中,以身接受就是自己拿取,以语接受就是让别人拿取,以意接受就是认可。这样,用总说的方式,或者用举一摄余的方式,把这三种接受统称为“接受”,因此说“他不拿取……”等等。这个道理在“生谷的接受”等处也一样适用。之所以说“七种”,是因为像穇子之类的副粮已经包含在稻米等主粮里面了。因为经中说“诸比丘,我允许五种兽脂作药:熊脂、鱼脂、鳄脂、猪脂、驴脂”(《大品》262),所以这是特别开许的。但对此经中又说“于适当的时候接受”(《大品》262),所以接受是允许的,因此说“除了特别开许的以外”。巴利
Aññehi gāhāpane upanikkhittasādiyane ca paṭiggahaṇattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādīyatī’’ti. Atha vā tividhaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ kāyena vācāya manasā. Tattha kāyena paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggaṇhanaṃ, vācāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggahāpanaṃ, manasā paṭiggahaṇaṃ sādiyananti tividhampi paṭiggahaṇaṃ sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vā gahetvā ‘‘paṭiggahaṇā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘neva naṃ uggaṇhātī’’tiādi. Esa nayo ‘‘āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇā’’tiādīsupi. Nīvārādiupadhaññassa sāliyādimūladhaññantogadhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sattavidhassā’’ti. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave pañca vasāni bhesajjāni acchavasaṃ macchavasaṃ susukāvasaṃ sūkaravasaṃ gadrabhavasa’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā idaṃ odissa anuññātaṃ nāma, tassa pana ‘‘kāle paṭiggahita’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā paṭiggahaṇaṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘aññatra odissa anuññātā’’ti.
“压”就是挤压。在前期阶段挤压,这是连接关系。“心”是指量管等量具的内部。用管子等量取芝麻之类东西的时候,堆起来高出的顶端才叫“尖”,把它弄坏就是“减损”。有一些人,也就是精要略解师们,以及住在北寺的人,是这样认为的。巴利
Akkamatīti nippīḷeti. Pubbabhāge akkamatīti sambandho. Hadayanti nāḷiādimānabhājanānaṃ abbhantaraṃ. Tilādīnaṃ nāḷiādīhi minanakāle ussāpitasikhāyeva sikhā, tassā bhedo hāpanaṃ. Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca.
“杀”是指用拳头打、用刀砍等方式伤害对方,意思是恼害。“杀”这个词也有恼害的意思,比如在“一次又一次地伤害自己”这类说法里就能看到。就像虽然同样具有“不应接受”的性质,但为了说明出家人所不应接受的具体物品有不同种类,才把女人、少女、女仆、女奴等分别列举出来;同样,虽然就取走他人财物而言都属于“不与取”,但为了说明偷斤减两等不与取的不同形态,才分别加以叙述,并不是对“杀生”的同义词“杀”再重复提及有什么必要。也不能说“这里是自作,那里是令他作”,因为已经说过“以身、语的努力为等起的思,有六种努力”。所以,前面所说的含义更为妥当。至于注疏中说“vadhoti māraṇaṃ”(杀即夺命),那也可以理解为是针对“打击”而言,因为“夺命”这个词在表示“恼害”时也能见到。巴利
Vadhoti muṭṭhippahārakasātāḷanādīhi hiṃsanaṃ, viheṭhananti attho. Viheṭhanatthopi hi vadhasaddo dissati ‘‘attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 880). Yathā hi appaṭiggahabhāvasāmaññe satipi pabbajitehi appaṭiggahitabbavatthuvisesabhāvasandassanatthaṃ itthikumāridāsidāsādayo vibhāgena vuttā , evaṃ parassaharaṇabhāvato adinnādānabhāvasāmaññe satipi tulākūṭādayo adinnādānavisesabhāvadassanatthaṃ vibhāgena vuttā, na evaṃ pāṇātipātapariyāyassa vadhassa punaggahaṇe payojanaṃ atthi. ‘‘Tattha sayaṅkāro, idha paraṃkāro’’ti ca na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā chappayogā’’ti ca vuttattā. Tasmā yathāvuttoyeva attho sundarataro. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘vadhoti māraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, tampi pothanameva sandhāyāti ca sakkā viññātuṃ māraṇa-saddassa vihiṃsanepi dissanato.
“至此”是指从“离杀生”等开始,一直到“远离砍截……以及各种粗暴行为”这一段为止的经文。这里没有另分段落,而是按照巴利圣典中出现的顺序,把二十六条学处归在一起;因为其中大多数学处都没有逐条展开,所以叫“小戒”。这里说的小、中、大,是就说法的方式来说的,不是就法本身来分的。也就是说,在这里,对那些只是简略列举、还没有逐条展开的学处,通过分别解说来展开“中戒”的开示。所以文中才说“在详细展开中戒的时候”。巴利
Ettāvatāti ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādinā ‘‘chedana…pe… sahasākārā paṭivirato’’ti etaparimāṇena pāṭhena. Antarābhedaṃ aggahetvā pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayena chabbīsatisikkhāpadasaṅgahaṃ yebhuyyena sikkhāpadānaṃ avibhattattā cūḷasīlaṃ nāma. Desanāvasena hi idha cūḷamajjhimādibhāvo adhippeto, na dhammavasena. Tathā hi idha saṅkhittena uddiṭṭhānaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ avibhattānaṃ vibhajanavasena majjhimasīladesanā pavattā. Tenevāha ‘‘majjhimasīlaṃ vitthārento’’ti.
中戒的注释巴利
Majjhimasīlavaṇṇanā
11 这里,“如同”是表示譬喻的虚词。“或”是表示选择的词。“而”是修饰言辞的虚词。“一些人”指另外一些人。“尊敬的”是对善士们的亲切称呼。因为善士们称呼别人时会说“尊敬的”,或者说“诸天所爱者”,或者说“尊者”。凡是出家成为沙门的人,仅凭出身就被称为婆罗门。这段话的意思是:即使是一个凡夫,在鼓起热情称赞我的时候,也会用“他断除了杀生,远离了杀生”这样指称别人的方式来说;或者,有些人自称是沙门、婆罗门,别人也这样看待他们,但他们因为不知道、也没有能力践行与那种身份相应的修行,所以做不到;而这位沙门乔达摩却完全不是这样,他在一切方面都圆满践行了与沙门身份相应的修行。因此,无论用指称别人的方式,还是用指称自己的方式,他们都只会说到戒行本身,不会超出这个范围。巴利
11. Tattha yathāti opammatthe nipāto. Vāti vikappanatthe. Panāti vacanālaṅkāre. Eketi aññe. Bhontoti sādhūnaṃ piyasamudāhāro. Sādhavo hi pare ‘‘bhonto’’ti vā, ‘‘devānaṃ piyā’’ti vā ‘‘āyasmanto’’ti vā samālapanti. Yaṃ kiñci pabbajjaṃ upagatā samaṇā. Jātimattena brāhmaṇā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ussāhaṃ katvā mama vaṇṇaṃ vadamānopi puthujjano ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādinā parānuddesikanayena vā yathā paneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇabhāvaṃ paṭijānamānā, parehi ca tathāsambhāviyamānā tadanurūpapaṭipattiṃ ajānanato, asamatthato ca na abhisambhuṇanti, na evamayaṃ, ayaṃ pana samaṇo gotamo sabbathāpi samaṇasāruppapaṭipadaṃ pūresiyevāti evaṃ aññuddesikanayena vā sabbathāpi ācārasīlamattameva vadeyyuṃ, na taduttarinti.
在“伤害种子与植物”这一说法里,按照词序,种子与植物虽然本来不是重点,但因为需要被特别指出来,就取得了重点的地位。词序是一回事,义序是另一回事,所以才会问:“什么是种子与植物?”因为对它作了分别,伤害行为也就随着它所涉及的对象而得到分别。因此世尊说了“根种子”等。“根种子”就是:根本身就是种子,所以叫根种子;或者根是它的种子,也叫根种子。其余几类也按同样的方式理解。“节种子”指节茎的种子。“种子”一词,本来是指能生出同类果实的因,在其他因缘具备时,由于能产生同类果实而成为特别的因,所以在有发芽能力的真实果实上,安立了“种子”这个词。依据这个含义,“种子”一词也用在某些根等事物上,为了把它们从根等中区分出来,就特别用一个“种子”词来限定,说成“种种子”,就像“色色”“苦苦”那样的用法。那么,为什么在这里问了种子与植物之后,只分别了种子呢?不应该这样看。我们不是说过吗:“根本身就是种子,所以叫根种子;根是它的种子,也叫根种子。”其中,前一种说法指出了种子,后一种说法指出了植物;而且应当知道,这两种都是通过一般性的说明,或者说,在巴利文中是以省略并列的方式指出了根种子、根种子、根种子。因此世尊说了“一切”等。巴利
Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhapade saddakkamena appadhānabhūtopi bījagāmabhūtagāmo niddisitabbatāya padhānabhāvaṃ paṭilabhati. Añño hi saddakkamo añño atthakkamoti āha ‘‘katamo so bījagāmabhūtagāmo’’ti. Tasmiñhi vibhatte tabbisayatāya samārambhopi vibhattova hotīti . Tenevāha bhagavā ‘‘mūlabīja’’ntiādi. Mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ, mūlaṃ bījaṃ etassātipi mūlabījaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Phaḷubījanti pabbabījaṃ. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhaṇasamatthe sāraphale niruḷho bīja-saddo tadatthasaṃsiddhiyā mūlādīsupi kesuci pavattatīti mūlādito nivattanatthaṃ ekena bīja-saddena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘bījabīja’’nti. ‘‘Rūparūpaṃ , dukkhadukkha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.327) ca yathā. Kasmā panettha bījagāmabhūtagāmaṃ pucchitvā bījagāmo eva vibhattoti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nanu avocumha ‘‘mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ, mūlaṃ bījaṃ etassātipi mūlabījanti’’. Tattha purimena bījagāmo niddiṭṭho, dutiyena bhūtagāmo, duvidhopesa sāmaññaniddesena, mūlabījañca mūlabījañca mūlabījanti ekasesanayena vā pāḷiyaṃ niddiṭṭhoti veditabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbañheta’’ntiādi.
12 “已储存的”这一说法,是通过“储存后受用”这个表达,指出其中“作”这个词具有动作对象的意思。或者,就像本来该说“ācayaṃgamino”,却因为省略鼻音而说成“ācayagāmino”那样,这里本来该说“sannidhikāraṃ paribhoga”,也因为省略鼻音而说成“sannidhikāraparibhoga”,意思是:储存起来之后加以受用。巴利
12.‘‘Sannidhikatassā’’ti etena ‘‘sannidhikāraparibhoga’’nti ettha kāra-saddassa kammatthataṃ dasseti. Yathā vā ‘‘ācayaṃgamino’’ti vattabbe anunāsikalopena ‘‘ācayagāmino’’ti (dha. sa. 10) niddeso kato, evaṃ ‘‘sannidhikāraṃ paribhoga’’nti vattabbe anunāsikalopena ‘‘sannidhikāraparibhoga’’nti vuttaṃ, sannidhiṃ katvā paribhoganti attho.
“正确地把烦恼削掉,所以叫削减(sallekha)”,这是依照经教的方式来说的修行。“随宜运用,所以叫随宜(pariyāya)”,这是依照可用的说法来修行。因为会被烦恼碰到,所以叫“物质”(āmisa),指的是任何可以拿来享用的事物。因此说“物质,就是前面说过的其余那些东西”。这只是就储存物品举出的一个例子。“水中与泥中”(udakakaddame),就是在水里和在泥里。“请坐”(acchatha),就是请你们坐下。“伸脖子”(gīvāyāmakaṃ),意思是把脖子伸出去;就像因为吃得太饱,脖子不得不直直伸着那样,就是这个意思。“四分之一量”(catubhāgamattaṃ),相当于一俱卢陀的量。“可用的房屋”等等,是依照律藏来说的。巴利
Sammā kilese likhatīti sallekho, suttantanayena paṭipatti. Pariyāyati kappīyatīti pariyāyo, kappiyavācānusārena paṭipatti. Kilesehi āmasitabbato āmisaṃ, yaṃ kiñci upabhogārahaṃ vatthu. Tenevāha ‘‘āmisanti vuttāvasesa’’nti. Nayadassanañhetaṃ sannidhivatthūnaṃ. Udakakaddameti udake ca kaddame ca. Acchathāti nisīdatha. Gīvāyāmakanti gīvaṃ āyamitvā, yathā ca bhutte atibhuttatāya gīvā āyamitabbāva hoti, evanti attho. Catubhāgamattanti kuḍubamattaṃ. ‘‘Kappiyakuṭiya’’ntiādi vinayavasena vuttaṃ.
13 13. “仅此些许”也是在指称判决与审察所依之处的叙述。“仅为词义连接”:仅仅是词义的连接而已。然而,对于某个词,如果不借助详细解说就无法理解其意义,那么在这里,详细解说也仍然归入词义摄集之中。因为出于好奇而值得观看,所以称为“观看”,也就是依戏剧家的规则,由演员进行的演出。然而,因演员团体对大众所做的活动,所以说为“舞会”,在《精要摄集》中则说为“观看盛会”。“杖鼓”是指木制的击打乐器,或石条、石片制的击打乐器。“一些人”是指《精要摄集》的老师们和北方寺的住众。如同此处,以后出现“一些人”的地方也应如此理解。“方形鼓”是指以树心木等,或任何木材,做成方形,四面蒙上皮革而制成的乐器。“撒散”是指用色彩做装饰,也就是所谓的“欢喜”。“作美观者”是指作美观,在《精要摄集》中说为“美观屋”。“旃陀罗的”是指旃陀罗。把粗麻布用水浸湿后,互相拍打的游戏就是“洗麻布”。“以因陀罗网”:通过咒术念诵洗骨咒,使别人只看到骨头,如此以幻术让皮肤等隐没不见。“车阵等”:以“等”字包括轮阵、莲花阵、鸡罗阵等。巴利
13.Ettakampīti vinicchayavicāraṇāvatthukittanampi . Payojanamattamevāti padatthayojanamattameva. Yassa pana padassa vitthārakathaṃ vinā na sakkā attho viññātuṃ, tattha vitthārakathāpi padatthasaṅgahameva gacchati. Kutūhalavasena pekkhitabbato pekkhā, naṭasatthavidhinā naṭānañca payogo. Naṭasamūhena pana janasamūhe karaṇavasena ‘‘naṭasamajja’’nti vuttaṃ, sārasamāse ‘‘pekkhā maha’’nti vuttaṃ. Ghanatāḷaṃ nāma daṇḍamayatāḷaṃ, silāsalākatāḷaṃ vā. Eketi sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca. Yathā cettha, evaṃ ito paresupi ‘‘eke’’ti āgataṭṭhānesu. Caturassaambaṇakatāḷaṃ nāma rukkhasāradaṇḍādīsu yena kenaci caturassaambaṇakaṃ katvā catūsu passesu cammena onandhitvā katavāditaṃ. Abbhokkiraṇaṃ raṅgabalīkaraṇaṃ, yā ‘‘nandī’’ti vuccati. Sobhanakaranti sobhanakaraṇaṃ, ‘‘sobhanagharaka’’nti sārasamāse vuttaṃ. Caṇḍālānamidanti caṇḍālaṃ. Sāṇe udakena temetvā aññamaññaṃ ākoṭanakīḷā sāṇadhovanaṃ. Indajālenāti aṭṭhidhovanamantaṃ parijappitvā yathā pare aṭṭhīniyeva passanti, evaṃ tacādīnaṃ antaradhāpanamāyāya. Sakaṭabyūhādīti ādi-saddena cakkapadumakaḷīrabyūhādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
14 所谓“格子”,就是棋子安放的位置。所谓“十格戏”,是用两排共二十个格子来玩的赌博游戏。所谓“骰子”,是在六个面上各标出一到六点、投掷后用来玩的东西;人们把它掷出后,按照掷得的点数,逐一移走或移入棋子来玩。有人说,用罐子玩的游戏就叫“罐戏”。在許多签条中取出一根没有特别标记的签,投进去之后再把它抽出来,有些人把这叫作“签手”。用叶子做成竹管形状的管子,就叫“管”,所以说“吹奏它”。也有人说,“字戏”是取问话者口中说出的字,用来占卜得失等的游戏。还有人说,“如法”就是随着音乐跳舞或唱歌。这样做就会赢,否则就输——以胜负为先而采取行动,由此可知,越轨之类的事也属于赌博放逸的场合。应当知道,用竹木等做成的玩具,其成功或不成功会带来胜负,这样的玩法也包括在内。而“如法”一词,是就盲人等相似外相的显示,从赌博胜负的性质来说的。巴利
14.Padānīti sārīnaṃ patiṭṭhānaṭṭhānāni. Dasapadaṃ nāma dvīhi pantīhi vīsatiyā padehi kīḷanajūtaṃ. Pāsakaṃ vuccati chasu passesu ekekaṃ yāva chakkaṃ dassetvā katakīḷanakaṃ, taṃ vaḍḍhetvā yathāladdhaṃ ekakādivasena sāriyo apanentā upanentā ca kīḷanti. Ghaṭena kīḷā ghaṭikāti eke. Bahūsu salākāsu visesarahitaṃ ekaṃ salākaṃ gahetvā tāsu pakkhipitvā puna tasseva uddharaṇaṃ salākahatthanti eke. Paṇṇena vaṃsākārena katā nāḷikā. Tenevāha ‘‘taṃ dhamantā’’ti. ‘‘Pucchantassa mukhāgataṃ akkharaṃ gahetvā naṭṭhamutti lābhālābhādijānanakīḷā akkharikā’’tipi vadanti. ‘‘Vāditānurūpaṃ naccanaṃ gāyanaṃ vā yathāvajjaṃ’’ tipi vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ kate jayo bhavissati, aññathā parājayo’’ti jayaparājaye purakkhatvā payogakaraṇavasena parihārapathādīnampi jūtapamādaṭṭhānabhāvo veditabbo. Paṅgacīrādīhipi vaṃsādīhi kātabbakiccasiddhiasiddhijayaparājayāvaho payogo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Yathāvajja’’nti ca kāṇādīhi sadisatākāradassanehi jayaparājayavasena jūtakīḷitabhāvena vuttaṃ.
15 兽形,就是做成猛兽形状的床脚。“不可用的床或榻”出自《摄义》。彩绘,是指在墙壁、顶棚等处作画,使其色彩斑斓。木棉、藤棉、草棉,就是依这三种棉。上等毛布,是一些论师、《摄义》的老师以及北方住处比丘们的主张;单面毛布也同样如此。丝毛混织,就是用丝与毛混合织成的织物。纯丝,就是没有用宝物装饰的丝布。“除棉”这句话表明:即使没有宝物装饰,棉垫也不适用。“以宝物装饰”这句话则表明:用宝物装饰过的,若作为铺地物,或随宜铺在床、椅等上面使用,是允许的。以羚羊皮,就是用羚羊的皮。据说那些皮很薄,所以做成双层、三层再缝起来,因此说“羚羊缝”。依所说之方式,就是依律藏中所说的方式。巴利
15.Vāḷarūpānīti āharimāni vāḷarūpāni. ‘‘Akappiyamañcova pallaṅko’’ti sārasamāse. Vānavicittanti bhitticchadādivasena vānena vicitraṃ. Rukkhatūlalatātūlapoṭakītūlānaṃ vasena tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ. Uddalomiyaṃ kecīti sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca. Tathā ekantalomiyaṃ. Koseyyakaṭṭissamayanti koseyyakassaṭamayaṃ. Suddhakoseyyanti ratanaparisibbanarahitaṃ. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā tūlika’’nti etena ratanaparisibbanarahitāpi tūlikā na vaṭṭatīti dīpeti. ‘‘Ratanaparisibbitānī’’ti iminā yāni ratanaparisibbitāni, tāni bhūmattharaṇavasena, yathānurūpaṃ mañcapīṭhādīsu ca upanetuṃ vaṭṭatīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Ajinacammehīti ajinamigacammehi. Tāni kira cammāni sukhumāni, tasmā dupaṭṭatipaṭṭāni katvā sibbanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajinappaveṇī’’ti. Vuttanayenāti vinaye vuttanayena.
16 装饰与美化本身就是装饰,不是药,因为它所指向的只是打扮和装饰。在佛教教法中,“花”这个词也可以用来指纯粹的花,所以说“结缚的花或散花”。“土陶泥”是指用各种药材调制成的瑜伽用泥块。“扰动”是指被激怒的时候。“血沉滞”是指坏血耗尽的时候。巴利
16.Alaṅkārañjanameva na bhesajjaṃ maṇḍanānuyogassa adhippetattā. Mālā-saddo sāsane suddhapupphesupi niruḷhoti āha ‘‘baddhamālā vā’’ti. Mattikakakkanti osadhehi abhisaṅkhataṃ yogamattikakakkaṃ. Caliteti kupite. Lohite sannisinneti duṭṭhalohite khīṇe.
17 17. 因为能靠它从恶趣和轮回中出离,所以叫“出离”,也就是天道和解脱道。这种出离是应当得到的,或者与出离相应,或者以出离为结果,所以叫“能导出”。另一种解释是:从语恶行的杂染中出离,因此把长音ī缩短,把ya改成ka,就成了niyyānikā,指的是与思一起的远离杂秽语。与它相反的就是“非导出”,那种状态就是“非导出性”,所以说“由于是非导出性”。“畜生性”就是障碍性。“于业处修习中”就是在与无常相应的四圣谛业处修习中。“与义俱”就是有意义的,与利益相应的意思。“街道”就是住所的布局,以“街道”一词也包含了住在那里的人,就像“村庄来了”等说法一样。因此说“勇者、有能力者”,“有信心、净信者”。以“水瓶处”为名而说“水瓶女奴”,所以说“水瓶女奴论”。“以生起、住立、资粮等而说世间”,所以是“世间论”。巴利
17. Duggatito saṃsārato ca niyyāti etenāti niyyānaṃ, saggamaggo mokkhamaggo ca. Taṃ niyyānaṃ arahati, niyyāne vā niyuttā, niyyānaṃ vā phalabhūtaṃ etissā atthīti niyyānikā, vacīduccaritasaṃkilesato niyyātīti vā ī-kārassa rassattaṃ, ya-kārassa ca ka-kāraṃ katvā niyyānikā, cetanāya saddhiṃ samphappalāpā veramaṇi. Tappaṭipakkhato aniyyānikā, tassā bhāvo aniyyānikattaṃ, tasmā aniyyānikattā. Tiracchānabhūtāti tirokaraṇabhūtā. Kammaṭṭhānabhāveti aniccatāpaṭisaṃyuttacatusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāve. Saha atthenāti sātthakaṃ, hitapaṭisaṃyuttanti attho. Visikhāti gharasanniveso, visikhāgahaṇena ca tannivāsino gahitā ‘‘gāmo āgato’’tiādīsu viya. Tenevāha ‘‘sūrā samatthā’’ti, ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’ti ca. Kumbhaṭṭhānāpadesena kumbhadāsiyo vuttāti āha ‘‘kumbhadāsīkathā vā’’ti. Uppattiṭhitisambhārādivasena lokaṃ akkhāyatīti lokakkhāyikā.
18 “连贯”是指前后不矛盾。巴利
18.Sahitanti pubbāparāviruddhaṃ.
19 信使的工作就是信使事务,关于这件事的谈论就是信使事务之谈。巴利
19. Dūtassa kammaṃ dūteyyaṃ, tassa kathā dūteyyakathā.
20 “三种”是指:依近处低语、依威仪、依资具受用这三种方式。“令人惊奇”是指:让他人对自己生起“啊,真是奇特之人”的惊奇。“吹嘘”是指:抬高自己或施主,以便对方给出什么,就这样夸大其词地说。“依相而行,或制造相”——称为占相者;所谓“相”,是指能让他人产生布施之心的身业和语业。“压榨”:就是压榨;压榨者就是压榨者。所谓压榨,就像狡黠之人为了利养和恭敬而辱骂、讥嫌、嘲讽、背后中伤等行为。巴利
20.Tividhenāti sāmantajappanairiyāpathasannissitapaccayapaṭisevanabhedato tippakārena. Vimhāpayantīti ‘‘aho acchariyapuriso’’ti attani paresaṃ vimhayaṃ uppādenti. Lapantīti attānaṃ, dāyakaṃ vā ukkhipitvā yathā so kiñci dadāti, evaṃ ukkācetvā kathenti. Nimittena caranti, nimittaṃ vā karontīti nemittikā nimittanti ca paresaṃ paccaya dānasaññuppādakaṃ kāyavacīkammaṃ vuccati. Nippiṃsantīti nippesā, nippesāyeva nippesikā, nippesoti ca saṭhapuriso viya lābhasakkāratthaṃ akkosakhuṃsanuppaṇḍanaparapiṭṭhimaṃsikatādi.
21 21. 因为是以肢体为对象而生起的,所以与肢体相应的学问就称为“肢”。在这里,“相”也应当依同样的道理来理解。不过有些人说,“肢”是指肢体的变化,也就是通过观察别人肢体的变化,来预知得利或损失之类的学问。般度王是南摩腊婆的统治者。说“大的”,是用来说明:有小的征兆、大的征兆,还有灾异。所谓“看见这个”,意思是:如果有人在梦里看见自己骑上公牛、大象、楼阁或高山,他就会得到这样的结果。梦书,就是关于梦的学问。“肢”只是就肢体的圆满与缺陷来显示;“相”则是通过显示能成就大威力的特殊肢体特征来显示,这就是二者的区别。“新的”指没用过的。从这里开始:对于天、罗刹、人等各种不同类别的事物,若从这里或那里被截断,就会有这样的受用等结果。达毗火供等,是依据火供器具等具体差异来显示不同果报而说的。火供,是依其余成就方式而进行的火供。肢骨,就是身体。云学,是护云者所造的论书,叫护云者论。地学,是使庄稼增长的学问,这是依据《精要略集》说的。有翅者……中略……四足者:指苍蝇等有翅类、壁虎等无翅类、天与人、鹭等两足类、豺狼等四足类。巴利
21. Aṅgāni ārabbha pavattattā aṅgasahacaritaṃ satthaṃ ‘‘aṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Nimittanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Keci pana ‘‘aṅganti aṅgavikāra’’nti vadanti, paresaṃ aṅgavikāradassanenāpi lābhālābhādivijjāti. Paṇḍurājāti dakkhiṇāmadhurādhipati. ‘‘Mahantāna’’nti etena appakaṃ nimittaṃ, mahantaṃ nimittaṃ uppātoti dasseti. Idaṃ nāma passatīti yo vasabhaṃ kuñjaraṃ pāsādaṃ pabbataṃ vā āruḷhaṃ supine attānaṃ passati, tassa idaṃ nāma phalaṃ hotīti. Supinakanti supinasatthaṃ. Aṅgasampattivipattidassanamattena ādisanaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘aṅga’’nti iminā, ‘‘lakkhaṇa’’nti iminā pana mahānubhāvatānipphādakaaṅgalakkhaṇavisesadassanenāti ayametesaṃ visesoti. Ahateti nave. Ito paṭṭhāyāti devarakkhasamanussādibhedena vividhavatthabhāge ito vā etto vā sañchinne idaṃ nāma bhogādi hotīti. Dabbihomadīni homassupakaraṇādivisesehi phalavisesadassanavasena pavattāni. Aggihomaṃ vuttāvasesasādhanavasena pavattaṃ homaṃ. Aṅgalaṭṭhinti sarīraṃ. Abbhino satthaṃ abbheyyaṃ, māsurakkhena kato gantho māsurakkho. Bhūrivijjā sassabuddhikaraṇavijjāti sārasamāse. Sapakkhaka…pe… catuppadānanti piṅgalamakkhikādisapakkhaka gharagolikādiapakkhakadevamanussakoñcādidvipadakakaṇṭakajambukādicatuppadānaṃ.
23 “在某一天”这种说法,是按半月里的第二天、第三天等日期来说的。“由某星宿”则是就与昴宿等星宿相会合而言。巴利
23.‘‘Asukadivase’’ti ‘‘pakkhassa dutiye tatiye’’tiādi tithivasena vuttaṃ. Asukanakkhattenāti rohiṇīādinakkhattayogavasena.
24 24. “流星坠落”是指光明的坠落。当风团猛烈地互相撞击时,就会产生像灯火一样的光明,从空中落下来,这种情况就叫做流星坠落。“不净”则是就云、雾等来说的。巴利
24.Ukkānaṃ patananti ukkobhāsānaṃ patanaṃ. Vātasaṅghātesu hi vegena aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭentesu dīpakobhāso viya obhāso uppajjitvā ākāsato patati, tatthāyaṃ ukkāpātavohāro. Avisuddhatā abbhamahikādīhi.
25 降雨就是倾泻而下。用手来示意表达,叫手印,其实不过是弯屈手指来计数罢了。像波斯人、蔑戾车人等那样,以九的倍数来计数,叫无孔计数。六十产生等,其中的等字,涵盖了脱落、份额、夺取等类事情。以思维的方式,应当知道:思维诗人是自己长时间思索事与义理之后才创作的;闻诗人是听到一些之后,把听到的内容和没听到的内容连接起来而创作的;义诗人是领会了某一义理之后,用略说、广释等方式来创作的;辩才诗人是看到别人所作的诗歌或戏剧后,凭自己应机而发的辩才,创作出与之相类似的作品。巴利
25.Dhārānupavecchanaṃ vassanaṃ. Hatthena adhippetaviññāpanaṃ hatthamuddā, taṃ pana aṅgulisaṅkocanena gaṇanāyeva. Pārasika milakkhakādayo viya navantavasena gaṇanā acchiddakagaṇanā. Saṭuppādanādīti ādi-saddena vokalanabhāgahārādike saṅgaṇhāti. Cintāvasenāti vatthuṃ anusandhiñca sayameva cirena cintetvā karaṇavasena cintākavi veditabbo, kiñci sutvā sutena assutaṃ anusandhetvā karaṇavasena sutakavi, kañci atthaṃ upadhāretvā tassa saṅkhipanavitthāraṇādivasena atthakavi, yaṃ kiñci parena kataṃ kabbaṃ nāṭakaṃ vā disvā taṃ sadisameva aññaṃ attano ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānena karaṇavasena paṭibhānakavi veditabbo.
26 26. 以执取的方式让女孩被接受,就是迎娶。同样,让女孩被给出,就是嫁出。在别的地方,以取得两倍、三倍等回报的方式来运用物品,就是投资。在那里或别处,按照时间限定,以获取增长的方式来运用,就是回收。也有人说:“让没有本金的人去做买卖,然后说‘连本金带这么多利润一起还回来’,这样给钱就是投资;只是暂时给钱就是回收。”关于“以三种原因”:这里的意思是,当风或虫等毁坏胎儿时,并不是过去的业留出了机会,而是以那为条件的业在成熟。可是,当业自己留出了机会时,就不一定非要看风或虫等,因此应理解业被单独说成一种原因。“应当熄灭”:就是令其止息。“对治”:就是做到让他们不再咬啮。“翻转之义”:就是连同武器等一起,把已经举起的手再以举起的方式翻转。“耳语”:就是像把心愿说给天神听那样,在耳边祈请。“侍奉日神”:就是用夹竹桃花鬘作供养后,整天面向太阳站着,以此来侍奉日神。有人读作“以头呼唤”,它的意思是:诵咒之后,用头呼唤所想要的事。巴利
26. Pariggahabhāvena dārikāya gaṇhāpanaṃ āvāhanaṃ. Tathā dāpanaṃ vivāhanaṃ. Desantare diguṇatiguṇādigahaṇavasena bhaṇḍappayojanaṃ payogo. Tattha vā aññattha vā yathākālaparicchedaṃ vaḍḍhigahaṇavasena payojanaṃ uddhāro. ‘‘Bhaṇḍamūlarahitānaṃ vāṇijjaṃ katvā ettakenudayena saha mūlaṃ dethāti dhanadānaṃ payogo, tāvakālikadānaṃ uddhāro’’ti ca vadanti. Tīhi kāraṇehīti ettha vātena, pāṇakehi vā gabbhe vinassante na purimakammunā okāso kato, tappaccayā kammaṃ vipaccati. Sayameva pana kammunā okāse kate na ekantena vāto pāṇakā vā apekkhitabbāti kammassa visuṃ kāraṇabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nibbāpanīyanti upasamakaraṃ. Paṭikammanti yathā te na khādanti, tathā paṭikaraṇaṃ. Parivattanatthanti āvudhādinā saha ukkhittahatthassa ukkhipanavasena parivattanatthaṃ. Icchitatthassa devatāya kaṇṇe kathanavasena jappanaṃ kaṇṇajappananti. Ādiccapāricariyāti karavīramālāhi pūjaṃ katvā sakaladivasaṃ ādiccābhimukhāvaṭṭhānena ādiccassa paricaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Siravhāyana’’nti keci paṭhanti, tassatthomantaṃ parijappitvā sirasā icchitassa atthassa avhāyananti.
27 “成就之时”是指所祈愿的事情实现的时候。“寂止许诺业”是指:为了向天神祈请,应当做的回报寂止,对此作出承诺、应答的行为,也就是寂止的祈请之用。在这里,是指作为许诺果报的、所如愿的业,即所谓“如果我这件事能够成就”。对此,即寂止许诺,也称为“誓愿”。因为按照许诺进行供养时,誓愿和祈请就已经交付了。只是让妇女处于没有欲望的状态。“相”指男根。举行祭祀,既是为了挡灾,也是为了招福。“过失”指胆汁等过患。这里,所说的“呕吐”是指向下清除。而“上泻”就是呕吐,因为说“向上排出过失”。同样,“泻”就是泻。然而“下泻”则是指净衣、迦尸等布料的洗浣等行为,因为说“向下排出过失”。头部放血是排出痰等。眼膜是指眼翳。针医之业就是眼科医术,应当知道这是为了摄集所说剩余的眼科医术而说的。因为涂眼药等也属于眼科医术。根即主要的、能息灭疾病的药物,是根药;或者,根即疾病的药物,是根药。因为疾病依根随行而有两种。根病若得治疗,其余大多也会止息。“显示身治疗”这一句,是因为关于童子医、外科、眼科等种种差别之论典在各地都有所说,所以依剩余之理而说;因此,其余论典也应在此摄集。所有这些在此都只是指以邪命为因的,因为说“以邪命维持生活”。然而在各地巴利中说的“iti vā”,其中“iti”是不变词,表示种类之义;“vā”表示抉择之义。这里所说的是:以这种方式,或者不是从此以外的其他方式。由此应当知道:那些从此以外的出家外道所依止的、作为生活手段的技艺处、明处等,以邪命为生而活命者,对他们也已作了摄受。巴利
27.Samiddhikāleti āyācitassa atthassa siddhikāle. Santipaṭissavakammanti devatāyācanāya yā santi paṭikattabbā, tassā paṭiññāpaṭissavakammakaraṇaṃ, santiyā āyācanappayogoti attho. Tasminti paṭissavaphalabhūte yathābhipatthitakammasmiṃ, yaṃ ‘‘sace me idaṃ nāma samijjhissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassāti santipaṭissavassa, yo ‘‘paṇidhī’’ti ca vutto. Yathāpaṭissavañhi upahāre kate paṇidhi āyācanā katā niyyātitā hotīti. Acchandikabhāvamattanti itthiyā akāmakabhāvamattaṃ. Liṅganti purisaliṅgaṃ. Balikammakaraṇaṃ upaddavapaṭibāhanatthañceva vaḍḍhiāvahanatthañca. Dosānanti pittādidosānaṃ. Ettha ca vamananti pacchaṭṭanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Uddhaṃvirecananti vamanaṃ ‘‘uddhaṃ dosānaṃ nīharaṇa’’nti vuttattā. Tathā virecananti virecanameva. Adhovirecananti pana suddhivatthikasāvatthiādi vatthikiriyāpi adhippetā ‘‘adho dosānaṃ nīharaṇa’’nti vuttattā. Sīsavirecanaṃ semhanīharaṇādi. Paṭalānīti akkhipaṭalāni. Salākavejjakammanti akkhivejjakammaṃ, idaṃ vuttāvasesasālākiyasaṅgahaṇatthaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbanti. Tappanādayopi hi sālākiyānevāti. Mūlāni padhānāni rogūpasame samatthāni bhesajjāni mūlabhesajjāni, mūlānaṃ vā byādhīnaṃ bhesajjāni mūlabhesajjāni. Mūlānubandhavasena hi duvidho byādhi. Mūlaroge ca tikicchite yebhuyyena itaraṃ vūpasamatīti. ‘‘Kāyatikicchanaṃdassetī’’ti idaṃ komārabhaccasallakattasālākiyādikaraṇavisesabhūtatantīnaṃ tattha tattha vuttattā pārisesavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā tadavasesāya tantiyāpi idha saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sabbāni cetāni ājīvahetukāniyeva idhādhippetāni ‘‘micchājīvena jīvikaṃ kappentī’’ti vuttattā . Yaṃ pana tattha tattha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘iti vā’’ti vuttaṃ, tattha itīti pakāratthe nipāto, vā-iti vikappanatthe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti iminā pakārena, ito aññe na vāti. Tena yāni ito bāhirakapabbajitā sippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānādīni jīvikopāyabhūtāni ājīvapakatā upajīvanti, tesaṃ pariggaho katoti veditabbo.
关于过去际的常见论者的解说巴利
Pubbantakappikasassatavādavaṇṇanā
28 比丘僧团所说的解释,是指从“乃至世尊……”等语句开始的解释。这里的关联是这样的:诸比丘,并非只有你们所知道的这些佛陀功德,还有不明显的功德,如“诸比丘,还有其他法……”等详细展开的内容。其中,通过“这些见处被如此执取”等语句,说明了常见等见处虽然被执取,其体性其实是空的;通过“他了知那而不执取”这句话,指出了戒等法具有不执取、能导向出离的性质,从而显示了它们没有恒常实核等。再者,那些未离贪染的外道,对于诸受生起了这些见的纷扰;而这一教说通过显示这些纷扰的缘——如痴等——以及感受者、作者的自性并不存在,彰显了一切法无我、无我所;又通过显示无执取的般涅槃,表明这一教说以彰显空性为主要目的,所以说“开始揭示空性”。所谓教典,就是分为律藏等不同部类的经论。所谓教说,就是对那教典以心意确定而作的阐明,或者根据法义如理宣说而成的言说,或者以随顺等方式进行的解说。教典与教说的差别,前面已经界定过了,所以说“于教说中,于教典中”。所谓“如这些等”中的“等”字,包含了真理、自性、定、慧、自然、福德、罪过、所应知等。比如,“法”这个词,在“诸比丘,对四法的不证知……”等中指的是真理;在“善法、不善法……”等中指的是自性;在“那些世尊具有如是法……”等中指的是定;在“真实、法、坚忍、舍离,彼死后不忧”等中指的是慧;在“诸比丘,那些具有生法的众生,如是生起愿望……”等中指的是自然;在“善行之法带来安乐”等中指的是福德;在“四波罗夷法”等中指的是罪过;在“诸佛世尊以一切方式,一切法皆来入智门之境”等中指的是所应知。所谓“诸法存在”,就是“空,唯有法存在”的意思。巴利
28.Bhikkhusaṅghena vuttavaṇṇo nāma ‘‘yāvañcidaṃ tena bhagavatā’’tiādinā vuttavaṇṇo. Etthāyaṃ sambandho – na bhikkhave ettakā eva buddhaguṇā, ye tumhākaṃ pākaṭā, apākaṭā pana ‘‘atthi bhikkhave aññe dhammā’’ti vitthāro. Tattha ‘‘ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṃ gahitā’’tiādinā sassatādidiṭṭhiṭṭhānānaṃ yathāgahitākārasuññatabhāvappakāsanato, ‘‘tañca pajānanaṃ na parāmasatī’’ti sīlādīnañca aparāmāsaniyyānikabhāvadīpanena niccasārādivirahappakāsanato, yāsu vedanāsu avītarāgatāya bāhirakānaṃ etāni diṭṭhivipphanditāni sambhavanti, tesaṃ paccayabhūtānañca sammohādīnaṃ vedakakārakasabhāvābhāvadassanamukhena sabbadhammānaṃ attattaniyatāvirahadīpanato, anupādāparinibbānadīpanato ca ayaṃ desanā suññatāvibhāvanappadhānāti āha ‘‘suññatāpakāsanaṃ ārabhī’’ti. Pariyattīti vinayādibhedabhinnā tanti. Desanāti tassā tantiyā manasāvavatthāpitāya vibhāvanā, yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpabhūtā vā paññāpanā, anulomādivasena vā kathananti pariyattidesanānaṃ viseso pubbeyeva vavatthāpitoti āha ‘‘desanāyaṃ pariyattiya’’nti. Evaṃ ādīsūti ettha ādi-saddena saccasabhāvasamādhipaññāpakatipuññaāpattiñeyyādayo saṅgayhanti. Tathā hi ayaṃ dhamma-saddo ‘‘catunnaṃ bhikkhave dhammānaṃ ananubodhā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.186; a. ni. 4.1) sacce vattati, ‘‘kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1) sabhāve, ‘‘evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.378) samādhimhi, ‘‘saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, sa ve pecca na socatī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 190) paññāya, ‘‘jātidhammānaṃ bhikkhave sattānaṃ evaṃ icchā uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.373; paṭi. ma. 1.33) pakatiyaṃ, ‘‘dhammo suciṇṇo sukhamāvahātī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 184; theragā. 303; jā. 1.10.102) puññe, ‘‘cattāro pārājikā dhammā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 233) āpattiyaṃ, ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthaṃ āgacchantī’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.6) ñeyye vattati (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.suttanikkhepavaṇṇanā; abhi. aṭṭha. 1.tikamātikāpadavaṇṇanā; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. ratanacaṅkamanakaṇḍavaṇṇanā). Dhammā hontīti suññā dhammamattā hontīti attho.
“难见”这个词本身,就已经说明了这些法难以深入。如果有人不知道自己的限度,想凭智慧去深入这些法,他的智慧根本站不住脚,就像蚊子的嘴想刺进大海一样,所以经文说“得不到立足处”。应该理解这里的构词是:立足处在此中不可得,所以叫“不可得立足处”。因为无法深入不可得立足处,无法看到“这些就只有这么多、就是这样”,所以说“正因为甚深,所以难见”。如果连看都看不到,那就更谈不上深入其中去觉悟了,所以说“正因为难见,所以更难觉”。
这些法生起于一切热恼完全止息的境地,又与熄灭一切热恼的等至境界相融,所以叫“熄灭一切热恼”。说它们以寂静为所缘,是因为自性不寂静的烦恼和诸行都不存在了。或者也可以这样理解:由于散乱已被彻底断除,作意始终安住在定中,依此所缘的诸法就呈现寂静的状态,就像破除遍相之后,空无边处识所显现的无限性一样。
就像射手不偏离靶心就能射中一样,不偏离诸法而如实了知诸法的自性,这是甘美而殊胜的,所以说“以不满足的含义”。因为这是已通达者的境界,而且只有诸佛才能以一切方式将其纳入认知范围,所以不是推理智慧所能触及的,因此说“是最上智慧的行境”等。“微细”是指在对所知境上,以锐利明净的作用而称为善巧。然而,这种善巧之所以明显,是因为它在所缘境上运作无碍,能够把握微细的所知境,因此说“因为自性微细”。巴利
‘‘Duddasā’’ti eteneva tesaṃ dhammānaṃ dukkhogāhatā pakāsitā hoti. Sace pana koci attano pamāṇaṃ ajānanto ñāṇena te dhamme ogāhituṃ ussāhaṃ kareyya, tassa taṃ ñāṇaṃ appatiṭṭhameva makasatuṇḍasūci viya mahāsamuddeti āha ‘‘alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā’’ti. Alabbhaneyyā patiṭṭhā etthāti alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhāti padaviggaho veditabbo. Alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhānaṃ ogāhituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ‘‘ettakā ete īdisā cā’’ti passituṃ na sakkāti vuttaṃ ‘‘gambhīrattā eva duddasā’’ti. Ye pana daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tesaṃ ogāhitvā anubujjhane kathā eva natthīti āha ‘‘duddasattā eva duranubodhā’’ti. Sabbapariḷāhapaṭippassaddhimatthake samuppannattā, nibbutasabbapariḷāhasamāpattisamokiṇṇattā ca nibbutasabbapariḷāhā. Santārammaṇāni maggaphalanibbānāni anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ saṅkhārānañca abhāvato. Atha vā samūhatavikkhepatāya niccasamāhitassa manasikārassa vasena tadārammaṇadhammānaṃ santabhāvo veditabbo kasiṇugghāṭimākāsatabbisayaviññāṇānaṃ anantabhāvo viya. Avirajjhitvā nimittapaṭivedho viya issāsānaṃ avirajjhitvā dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvabodho sāduraso mahāraso ca hotīti āha atittikaraṇaṭṭhenāti. Paṭivedhappattānaṃ, tesu ca buddhānaṃyeva sabbākārena visayabhāvūpagamanato na takkabuddhiyā gocarāti āha ‘‘uttamañāṇavisayattā’’tiādi. ‘‘Nipuṇā’’ti ñeyyesu tikkhavisadavuttiyā chekā. Yasmā pana so chekabhāvo ārammaṇe appaṭihatavuttitāya sukhumañeyyagahaṇasamatthatāya supākaṭo hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā’’ti.
另一种解释:从阐明律的制定等深奥且需要引导才能理解的意义来说,所以称为“甚深”。有时即使经过无数大劫,也极难有机会见到,所以称为“难见”。这里所说的“见”,应当理解为只依慧眼而见。被称为“法随觉”的随顺觉悟,只有极少数人才能生起,所以称为“更难觉”。因为体性寂静,又因为是可教化众生的功德最终达到圆满的依处,所以称为“寂静”。因为依靠自身的种种条件而被引导至最殊胜的状态,所以称为“殊胜”。因为已证得真实之相,不是逻辑推理所能触及,也不是推理性的智慧所能行及的领域,所以称为“非寻思所行”。因为微细,或者因为能以真实、缘起等方式阐明微细之义,所以称为“微妙”。这些法只有世间最顶尖的智者——正自觉者——才能了知并宣示,所以称为“唯智者能知”。因为世尊获得了无碍智,所以宣说“我是一切知者……诸比丘,如来具足十力……”等语,以此显示自己一切知性等功德。因此说“自己证知、作证后宣说”。巴利
Aparo nayo – vinayapaṇṇattiādigambhīraneyyavibhāvanato gambhīrā. Kadāci asaṅkhyeyyamahākappe atikkamitvāpi dullabhadassanatāya duddasā. Dassanañcettha paññācakkhuvaseneva veditabbaṃ. Dhammanvayasaṅkhātassa anubodhassa kassacideva sambhavato duranubodhā. Santasabhāvato, veneyyānañca guṇasampadānaṃ pariyosānattā santā. Attano ca paccayehi padhānabhāvaṃ nītatāya paṇītā. Samadhigatasaccalakkhaṇatāya atakkehi, atakkena vā ñāṇena avacaritabbatāya atakkāvacarā. Nipuṇaṃ, nipuṇe vā atthe saccappaccayākārādivasena vibhāvanato nipuṇā. Loke aggapaṇḍitena sammāsambuddhena vedīyanti pakāsīyantīti paṇḍitavedanīyā. Anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhato hi bhagavā ‘‘sabbavidū haṃ asmi, (dha. pa. 353; mahāva. 11; kathā. 405) dasabalasamannāgato bhikkhave tathāgato’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.21) attano sabbaññutādiguṇe pakāseti. Tenevāha ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetī’’ti.
在这里,虽然一切知智并不像果与涅槃那样,是应当被亲证的法,但当漏尽智已经证得时,它也就随之证得了,所以把它的现前成就称为“作证”,因此说“以殊胜的智现前作证后”。“以殊胜的智”是表示原因的工具格,意思是“以殊胜智的证得为原因”。或者,当“殊胜智”指的是省察智时,工具格的用法也同样成立。这里的“宣说”应当理解为:它能成就对诸谛等智所行境界的说法作用,也由于“我是正自觉者”等宣称。在“正在说者”中,māna这个词是“意欲”的意思,就是“正努力想说者”。处于这种状态的人,就是想要说的人,所以说“想要宣说功德者”。即使有所保留地说,也像颠倒说一样,不能说是在“正确地宣说”,因此说“无遗漏地”,以此显示这里的“正”字具有无余的含义。用“能说”来说明“说”这个词本身就有表示自身意义的作用。在这里,虽然世尊的十力等智也是不与他人共通的,但由于那些智的所缘范围是局部的,所以凭借它们并不能无遗漏地把握佛陀的功德;然而,由于一切知智的所缘范围是毫无剩余的,当它被把握时,一切佛陀功德也就确实被把握了。为了显示这个道理,所以说“若有人……能说”。此智的所缘众多,故为“多所缘”,意思是它是一切所缘。或者,在“多所缘”这一意义上说为“puthuārammaṇato”,这是省略了一个“所缘”词,如“oṭṭhamukho kāmāvacara”等语中那样,以此显示它成就多种智的作用。如是,此智于三时中是无碍智,是区分四生的智,是区分五趣的智,在六种不共智中是其余不共智,是分别七种圣补特伽罗的智,在八种众中不动摇的智,是遍知九种有情居的智,是十力智,如此等无数百千种类的智,它随其所应成就作用。“一再一再地生起”这一说法,显示一切知智的次第转起。因为它也是次第地在诸所缘中转起的,并非仅只一次,如外道所说“一切知者仅只一次知道一切,并非次第地”。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ phalanibbānāni viya sacchikātabbasabhāvaṃ na hoti, āsavakkhayañāṇe pana adhigate adhigatameva hotīti tassa paccakkhakaraṇaṃ sacchikiriyāti āha ‘‘abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena paccakkhaṃ katvā’’ti. Abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇenāti ca hetuatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, abhivisiṭṭhañāṇādhigamahetūti attho. Abhivisiṭṭhañāṇanti vā paccavekkhaṇañāṇe adhippete karaṇavacanampi yujjatiyeva. Pavedanañcettha aññāvisayānaṃ saccādīnaṃ desanākiccasādhanato, ‘‘ekomhi sammāsambuddho’’tiādinā (mahāva. 11; kathā. 405) paṭijānanato ca veditabbaṃ. Vadamānāti ettha sattiattho māna-saddo, vattuṃ ussāhaṃ karontoti attho. Evaṃbhūtā ca vattukāmā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ vattukāmā’’ti. Sāvasesaṃ vadantopi viparītaṃ vadanto viya ‘‘sammā vadatī’’ti na vattabboti āha ‘‘ahāpetvā’’ti, tena anavasesattho idha sammā-saddoti dasseti. ‘‘Vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyu’’nti iminā ‘‘vadeyyu’’nti sakatthadīpanabhāvamāha. Ettha ca kiñcāpi bhagavato dasabalādiñāṇānipi anaññasādhāraṇāni, sappadesavisayattā pana tesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ na tehi buddhaguṇā ahāpetvā gahitā nāma honti, nippadesavisayattā pana sabbaññutaññāṇassa tasmiṃ gahite sabbepi buddhaguṇā gahitā eva nāma hontīti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘yehi…pe… vadeyyu’’nti. Puthūni ārammaṇāni etassāti puthuārammaṇaṃ, sabbārammaṇattāti adhippāyo. Atha vā puthuārammaṇārammaṇatoti etasmiṃ atthe ‘‘puthuārammaṇato’’ti vuttaṃ, ekassa ārammaṇa-saddassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘oṭṭhamukho kāmāvacara’’nti ādīsu viya, tenassa puthuñāṇakiccasādhakataṃ dasseti. Tathā hetaṃ tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇaṃ, pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ, chasu asādhāraṇañāṇesu sesāsādhāraṇañāṇāni, sattaariyapuggalavibhāvakañāṇaṃ, aṭṭhasupi parisāsu akampanañāṇaṃ, navasattāvāsaparijānanañāṇaṃ, dasabalañāṇanti evamādīnaṃ anekasatasahassabhedānaṃ ñāṇānaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ kiccaṃ sādhetīti. ‘‘Punappunaṃ uppattivasenā’’ti etena sabbaññutaññāṇassa kamavuttitaṃ dasseti. Kamenāpi hi taṃ visayesu pavattati, na sakiṃyeva yathā bāhirakā vadanti ‘‘sakiṃyeva sabbaññū sabbaṃ jānāti, na kamenā’’ti.
如果真是这样,那么对于具有不可思议、不可度量差别的所知,怎么能以一个有局限的单一智完全通达呢?又是谁说过“佛陀的智是有局限的”呢?因为那智如同所知一样是无量的。经中确实这样说:“所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。”即便如此,当所知按生类、界、自性等,以及按方位、地点、时间等分成无数差别,被逐渐把握时,完全通达确实不可能。但事实并非如此。为什么?因为凡是世尊想要了知的,无论是全部还是一部分,智都能以毫无障碍的方式直接现前运作;又因为没有散乱,世尊在任何时候都安住在定中,想要了知的对象直接现前这一点无法被阻止,正如经中说“佛陀世尊的智系于愿望”等。这里不应理解为:世尊的智在通达众多法时,像远远看一幅画的人那样,或者像观照“一切法无我”的人那样,是以不取具体形相的方式运作。应当知道,这是因为佛智具有不可思议的威神力。因此经中说“佛的境界不可思议”。这里的结论是:世尊因为获得了能依一切方式通达一切法、系于愿望而运作的无障碍智,又因为断除了一切所知障,所以其相续能够通达一切法,因此是“一切知者”,而不是仅一次就通达一切法——就像火因为能依次烧尽一切柴薪而被称为“一切所食者”一样。巴利
Yadi evaṃ acinteyyāparimeyyabhedassa ñeyyassa paricchedavatā ekena ñāṇena niravasesato kathaṃ paṭivedhoti, ko vā evamāha ‘‘paricchedavantaṃ buddhañāṇa’’nti. Anantañhi taṃ ñāṇaṃ ñeyyaṃ viya. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyya’’nti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5). Evampi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne ñeyye kamena gayhamāne anavasesapaṭivedho na sambhavati yevāti, nayidamevaṃ. Kasmā? Yaṃ kiñci bhagavatā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ sakalaṃ ekadeso vā. Tattha appaṭihatacāratāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati, vikkhepābhāvato ca bhagavā sabbakālaṃ samāhitova ñātuṃ, icchitassa paccakkhabhāvo na sakkā nivāretuṃ ‘‘ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇa’’ntiādi (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato, na cettha dūrato cittapaṭaṃ passantānaṃ viya, ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti vipassantānaṃ viya ca anekadhammāvabodhakāle anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti gahetabbaṃ acinteyyānubhāvatāya buddhañāṇassa. Tenevāha ‘‘buddhavisayo acinteyyo’’ti (a. ni. 4.77). Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃsabbākārena sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthassa ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhavuttino anāvaraṇañāṇassa paṭilābhena bhagavā santānena sabbadhammapaṭivedhasamattho ahosi sabbaneyyāvaraṇassa pahānato, tasmā sabbaññū, na sakiṃyeva sabbadhammāvabodhato , yathā santānena sabbaindhanassa dahanasamatthatāya pāvako ‘‘sabbabhū’’ti vuccatīti.
“决定说”就是下结论的话,意思是确定不移的说法。这里通过这种确定,指出被排除掉的是什么,即“不是离杀生等”。而这个“唯”字,就像“亦”字一样,因为它并不固定只出现在某一处,所以在它被说出的地方之外,也会随着表达的需要而出现,因此注释说“或者是甚深……”等等。
“以一切句”,是指一直到“唯智者能知”这一句为止,用前面所有的句子。
“声闻波罗蜜智”,是指声闻通过圆满布施等波罗蜜而成就的智慧,它分为三明、六神通、四无碍解等类别。
“由此”,即从声闻波罗蜜智。
“于此”,即在声闻波罗蜜智上。
“乃至更由此”,是指从紧接着说到的独觉佛智起,言下之意是:连独觉佛智都尚且如此,更何况声闻波罗蜜智呢?
这里的义理衔接是这样的:虽然声闻波罗蜜智相对于较低的有学智和凡夫智来说是甚深的,但相对于独觉佛智来说,就不是那样甚深了,所以不能绝对地说“唯是甚深”。同样,独觉佛智相对于一切知智,也无法确立这种确定性。然而,一切知智所了知的法,不像声闻波罗蜜智等那样需要依靠某个对比对象才被称为甚深,所以它本身就是甚深的,因此说“或者是甚深”等等。正如这里所展示的确定性那样,声闻波罗蜜智是难见的,而独觉佛智比它更难见,因此在那里没有确定性,应当通过“没有确定性”等说法来理解决定性的存在。因此注释说:“同样地,它们都是难见的……(中略)……应当了知。”巴利
Vavatthāpanavacananti sanniṭṭhāpanavacanaṃ, avadhāraṇavacananti attho. Aññe vāti ettha avadhāraṇena nivattitaṃ dasseti ‘‘na pāṇātipātā veramaṇiādayo’’ti, ayañca eva-saddo aniyatadesatāya ca-saddo viya yattha vutto, tato aññatthāpi vacanicchāvasena upatiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘gambhīrā vā’’tiādi. Sabbapadehīti yāva ‘‘paṇḍitavedanīyā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ, tāva sabbapadehi. Sāvakapāramiñāṇanti sāvakānaṃ dānādipāripūriyā nipphannaṃ vijjattayachaḷabhiññācatuppaṭisambhidādibhedaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tatoti sāvakapāramiñāṇato. Tatthāti sāvakapāramiñāṇe. Tatopīti anantaraniddiṭṭhato paccekabuddhañāṇatopi, ko pana vādo sāvakapāramiñāṇatoti adhippāyo. Etthāyaṃ atthayojanā – kiñcāpi sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ heṭṭhimasekkhañāṇaṃ puthujjanañāṇañca upādāya gambhīraṃ, paccekabuddhañāṇaṃ upādāya na tathā gambhīranti ‘‘gambhīramevā’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ. Tathā paccekabuddhañāṇampi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ upādāyāti tattha vavatthānaṃ na labbhati, sabbaññutaññāṇadhammā pana sāvakapāramiñāṇādīnaṃ viya kiñci upādāya agambhīrabhāvābhāvato gambhīrā vāti. Yathā cettha vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ duddasaṃ, paccekabuddhañāṇaṃ pana tato duddasataranti tattha vavatthānaṃ natthītiādinā vavatthānasabbhāvo netabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘tathā duddasāva…pe… veditabba’’nti.
为什么这段经文要这样开头呢?这里的用意是:先不说别的,一切知智虽然只是一种智,但它能够无余地开显诸佛的功德,所以用“诸比丘,还有其他法”这样复数形式的语句来总摄,以此说明它具备众多所依、多种所缘和多种智的作用。那么,在解释这段经文时,为什么不按照真实、缘起等特有的、不共的方式来做分别解说,却要从分析各种“见”入手来开头呢?这是为了说明:正如对真实、缘起等的分别是不共的、只属于一切知智的范围,同样,对恶见的无余分别也只属于一切知智的范围,所以接下来才用“因为佛陀……”等语句开始。这里,“处”就是原因的意思。“吼声广大”,是说因为所要教导的义理种类繁多、又难以理解,当以种种理路展开教导时,这教法的狮子吼就极其广大、极其广博,而且具有多种分类。“智随入”:正因为如此,教导的智慧在把所教之法加以区分剖析时,就随之契入其中,仿佛安住在里面一样——这就是它的意思。巴利
Kasmā panetaṃ evaṃ āraddhaṃti etthāyaṃ adhippāyo – bhavatu tāva niravasesabuddhaguṇavibhāvanūpāyabhāvato sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ekampi puthunissayārammaṇañākiccasiddhiyā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave aññeva dhammā’’tiādinā bahuvacanena uddiṭṭhaṃ, tassa pana vissajjanaṃ saccapaccayākārādivisesavasena anaññasādhāraṇena vibhajananayena anārabhitvā sanissayānaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ vibhajanavasena kasmā āraddhanti. Tattha yathā saccapaccayākārādīnaṃ vibhajanaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇasseva visayo, evaṃ niravasesena diṭṭhigatavibhajanampīti dassetuṃ ‘‘buddhānañhī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ṭhānānīti kāraṇāni. Gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hotīti desetabbassa atthassa anekavidhatāya, duviññeyyatāya ca nānānayehi pavattamānaṃ desanāgajjitaṃ mahantaṃ vipulaṃ, bahubhedañca hoti. Ñāṇaṃ anupavisatīti tato eva ca desanāñāṇaṃ desetabbadhamme vibhāgaso kurumānaṃ anupavisati, te anupavissa ṭhitaṃ viya hotīti attho.
佛陀智慧的广大,由此可以看出来:能宣说并亲证这样深奥法义的人,他的教说智慧和亲证智慧都极为殊胜,这一点变得很清楚。在这里,虽然依照“佛陀世尊的一切语业都以智慧为先导、以智慧为随从”这句话,世尊的所有开示没有哪一次是离开智慧的,而且因为他的说法像狮子一样,在任何地方都以同样的勇猛精进推动;但应当知道,随着所教法的不同,开示在特定情况下确实会更深地契入智慧,所讲的法义也显得更加甚深。那么,当涉及律仪的制定时,开示又是怎样带上无常、苦、无我这三相,并与空性相应的呢?在那里,开示同样是随在场大众的意乐而展开,所以也会阐明诸行的无常等性质,并显示一切法没有自我、没有我所的本质。正因如此,经文才说“以种种方式作了法谈”等等。巴利
Buddhañāṇassa mahantabhāvo paññāyatīti evaṃvidhassa nāma dhammassa desakaṃ paṭivedhakañcāti buddhānaṃ desanāñāṇassa paṭivedhañāṇassa ca uḷārabhāvo pākaṭo hoti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi ‘‘sabbaṃ vacīkammaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivattī’’ti (mahāni. 69; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5; netti. 14) vacanato sabbāpi bhagavato desanā ñāṇarahitā natthi, sīhasamānavuttitāya ca sabbattha samānussāhappavatti desetabbadhammavasena pana desanā visesato ñāṇena anupaviṭṭhā gambhīratarā ca hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathaṃ pana vinayapaṇṇattiṃ patvā desanā tilakkhaṇāhatā suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttā hotīti? Tatthāpi ca sannisinnaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ pavattamānā desanā saṅkhārānaṃ aniccatādivibhāvanī, sabbadhammānaṃ attattaniyatābhāvappakāsanī ca hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammiṃ kathaṃ katvā’’tiādi.
“地之差别”,是指诸法的状态差别和处所差别。其中,状态差别是指念处、根、力、觉支、道支等分类;处所差别是指欲界等分类。“缘起句”的含义,前面已经说过。“时之差别”,是指见的差别,也就是种种不同的见解;或者也指其他时机。如此,当以轻、重等情形相应的事由出现时,便据此制定学处。巴利
Bhūmantaranti dhammānaṃ avatthāvisesañca ṭhānavisesañca. Tattha avatthāvisesosatiādidhammānaṃ satipaṭṭhānindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgādibhedo. Ṭhānaviseso kāmāvacarādibhedo. Paccayākārapadassa attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Samayantaranti diṭṭhivisesā, nānāvihitā diṭṭhiyoti attho, aññasamayaṃ vā. Evaṃ otiṇṇe vatthusminti evaṃ lahukagarukādivasena tadanurūpe otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanaṃ.
虽然通过身随观等方式,念处等法在经藏中也有分别说明,但通过经分别等方式,它们只在阿毗达摩中才得到特别详细的分别,因此他说“这四念处……分别阿毗达摩藏”。其中,“七触”是就与七识界相应而说的。“七受”等也是如此。在“出世间法是名”这句中,“iti”这个词表示起始义,或者表示种类义,因此它统摄了阿毗达摩中所述其余诸法应当被分别的方式。这里有二十四种周遍发趣,所以叫“二十四周遍发趣”,也就是阿毗达摩藏。这里不取缘的方式,只从法本身的角度说周遍发趣有二十四种。正如所说:巴利
Yadipi kāyānupassanādivasena satipaṭṭhānādayo suttantapiṭakepi (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107) vibhattā, suttantabhājanīyādivasena pana abhidhammeyeva te savisesaṃ vibhattāti āha ‘‘ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā…pe… abhidhammapiṭakaṃ vibhajitvā’’ti. Tattha ‘‘satta phassā’’ti sattaviññāṇadhātusampayogavasena vuttaṃ. Tathā ‘‘satta vedanā’’tiādīsupi. Lokuttarā dhammā nāmāti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena vuttāvasesaṃ abhidhamme āgataṃ dhammānaṃ vibhajitabbākāraṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Catuvīsati samantapaṭṭhānāni etthāti catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaṃ, abhidhammapiṭakaṃ. Ettha paccayanayaṃ aggahetvā dhammavaseneva samantapaṭṭhānassa catuvīsatividhatā vuttā. Yathāha –
三法与最上发趣,以及最胜二法,
以及二法与三法、三法与二法;
三法组合与二法组合,
在顺次中,有六种甚深理趣。巴利
‘‘Tikañca paṭṭhānavaraṃ dukuttamaṃ, Dukatikañceva tikadukañca; Tikatikañceva dukadukañca, Cha anulomamhi nayā sugambhīrā. (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa 41, 44, 48, 52);
三法……中略……在逆的方面,有六种甚深理趣。
三法……中略……在顺逆里,有六种甚深的理趣。
三法……中略……在逆顺之中,理趣甚深。巴利
Tikañca…pe… cha paccanīyamhi nayā sugambhīrā; Tikañca…pe… cha anulomapaccanīyamhi nayā sugambhīrā; Tikañca…pe… paccanīyānulomamhi nayā sugambhīrā’’ti. (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa 44, 52);
这样,按法的分类有二十四种,在三法发趣等每一类里,再按缘的方式、随顺等的方式各分四种,所以共有九十六种周遍发趣。其中,在法随顺的三法发趣里,就善三法来说,在缘分别、缘随顺、因根之中,按因缘来说,有四十九种问的方式、七种答的方式等,这样展示出来的理路有无量差别,所以说“无边理”。这里还有:巴利
Evaṃ dhammavasena catuvīsatibhedesu tikapaṭṭhānādīsu ekekaṃ paccayanayena anulomādivasena catubbidhaṃ hotīti channavuti samantapaṭṭhānāni. Tattha pana dhammānulome tikapaṭṭhāne kusalattike paṭiccavāre paccayānulome hetumūlake hetupaccayavasena ekūnapaññāsa pucchānayā satta vissajjananayāti ādinā dassiyamānā anantabhedā nayāti āha ‘‘anantanaya’’nti. Hoti cettha –
所谓“发趣”,就是针对每一个法,在随顺等(顺、逆、顺逆、逆顺)四种方式中,依三法、二法等分类,以缘为根本而特别区分的理,共有七种趣向。巴利
‘‘Paṭṭhānaṃ nāma paccekaṃ dhammānaṃ anulomādimhi tikadukādīsu yā paccayamūlavisiṭṭhā catunayato sattadhā gatī’’ti.
以九种行相:也就是依“生”等九种缘的行相。其中,“生”是指果从它而生起,所以叫“生”,意思是生起的原因性。当无明存在时,诸行就生起;无明不存在时,就不生起。因此,无明以“生”的方式成为诸行的缘。同样地,当无明存在时,诸行运转、持续、安住;当无明存在时,它们把果投向“有”等之中;它们造作、积聚,为生果而努力;它们与自己的果相结合;在自己生起的相续中,它们系缚那个相续;当其他诸缘和合时,它们生起、出现;并且,无明完成了对诸行的因性——也就是“缘于无明,诸行生起”而运转。像这样,无明在成就诸行因性上的种种差别,就是“生”等九种行相,应当了知。同样地,对于行等缘于识等,也是如此。巴利
Navahākārehīti uppādādīhi navahi paccayākārehi. Tattha uppajjati etasmā phalanti uppādo, uppattiyā kāraṇabhāvo. Sati ca avijjāya saṅkhārā uppajjanti, na asati, tasmā avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ uppādo hutvā paccayo hoti. Tathā avijjāya sati saṅkhārā pavattanti dharanti, nivisanti ca, te avijjāya sati phalaṃ bhavādīsu khipanti, āyūhanti phaluppattiyā ghaṭanti, saṃyujjanti attano phalena, yasmiṃ santāne sayañca uppannā, taṃ palibundhanti, paccayantarasamavāye udayanti uppajjanti, hinoti ca saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchati, paṭicca avijjaṃ saṅkhārā ayanti pavattantīti evaṃ avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvūpagamanavisesā uppādādayo veditabbā. Tathā saṅkhārādīnaṃ viññāṇādīsu.
在“生、住”等说法里,“依它而住”所以叫“住”,也就是因。生本身就是住,所以叫“生住”。其余各项也是同样的道理。因为不如理作意,而且依照“由漏集起故无明集起”的说法,诸漏也是无明的缘,所以说“这两种法都是缘所生”。“缘摄受慧”,是指对诸行和无明,在生起等缘的方式上辨别把握而生起的慧。“法住智”,是指对缘所生诸法,从它们作为缘所生的角度,了知称为法住的缘起,这就是关于缘起的智。因为缘法在缘起中,依照“十二缘起”的说法,就是十二种缘。这个道理不只适用于现在,也适用于过去和未来;不只是无明对诸行,诸行等对识等也同样适用。为了完整说明缘的方式已被详细分别,就接着以“过去时”等经文开始。《发趣》中所说的因等诸缘,在这里是以生起等缘的方式来理解的,所以应当按各自相应的情况提取出来加以配合说明,但因为怕太冗长,我们就没有逐一配合。巴利
Uppādaṭṭhitītiādīsu ca tiṭṭhati etenāti ṭhiti, kāraṇaṃ. Uppādo eva ṭhiti uppādaṭṭhiti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Yasmā ayonisomanasikāro, ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103) vacanato āsavā ca avijjāya paccayo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhopete dhammā paccayasamuppannā’’ti. Paccayapariggahe paññāti saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāya ca uppādādike paccayākāre paricchinditvā gahaṇavasena pavattā paññā. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti dhammānaṃ paccayuppannānaṃ paccayabhāvato dhammaṭṭhitisaṅkhāte paṭiccasamuppāde ñāṇaṃ. Paccayadhammā hi paṭiccasamuppāde ‘‘dvādasa paṭiccasamuppādā’’ti vacanato dvādasa paccayā. Ayañca nayo na paccuppanne eva, atha kho atītānāgatakālepi, na ca avijjāya eva saṅkhāresu, atha kho saṅkhārādīnampi viññāṇādīsu labbhatīti paripuṇṇaṃ katvā paccayākārassa vibhattabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atītampi addhāna’’ntiādi pāḷiṃ ārabhi. Paṭṭhāne (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa 1) dassitā hetādipaccayā evettha uppādādipaccayākārehi gahitāti te yathāsambhavaṃ nīharitvā yojetabbā, ativitthārabhayena pana na yojayimha.
对于那个那个法,就是指那个那个由行等缘所生的法。以如此如此的缘的方式,是指以生起等、因等作为缘的方式。因为以过去、现在、未来三时来说,有这三种时间,所以叫“三时”。以因果、果因、因果三种连结来说,有这三种连接,所以叫“三连结”。在这里,“摄”是指无明等和识等,也就是业与果报。或者说,在这里“摄”是指无明等和识等。“摄”这个词也有部分、类别的意思。在过去,以业摄等的方式有四种摄,所以叫“四种摄”。虽然未直接说明它们各自的自性,但在每一种摄中,通过把握无明、行等项目而得以显现、表明,所以叫“行相”;或者说,过去因等的类别就是“行相”。这些行相在每一种摄中各有五种,总共二十种行相,所以叫“二十行相”。巴利
Tassa tassa dhammassāti tassa tassa saṅkhārādipaccayuppannadhammassa. Tathā tathā paccayabhāvenāti uppādādihetādipaccayabhāvena. Atītapaccuppannānāgatavasena tayo addhā kālā etassāti tiyaddhaṃ. Hetuphalaphalahetuhetuphalavasena tayo sandhī etassāti tisandhiṃ. Saṅkhippanti ettha avijjādayo viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepo, kammaṃ vipāko ca. Saṅkhippanti etthāti vā saṅkhepo, avijjādayo viññāṇādayo ca. Koṭṭhāsapariyāyo vā saṅkhepa-saddo. Atīte kammasaṅkhepādivasena cattāro saṅkhepā etassāti catusaṅkhepaṃ. Sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅkhepe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā, atīte hetuādīnaṃ vā pakārā ākārā, te saṅkhepe pañca pañca katvā vīsatiākārā etassāti vīsatākāraṃ.
常住论者虽然因为刹帝利等种姓差别而分成很多种,但按照他们执著的原因——比如能忆念百千生等——来算,其实只有四种,不会超出这个数目。为了说明常住论等的数量界限和它们各自的范围,才说“四种人”等等。其中,“四种人”就是四类人。“依此”,是指对这种此缘性的错误把握;在那里,虽然因果相续紧密一团、没有区分,从胜义上说也确实存在差别,但他们没有去分辨这种差别的道理,就执取为单一。“执此”,是指执取这种常见而说。以这种方式,这里也应视情况把“一分常住论”等相应地套用来说明。“破除”是指以“热忱随逐”等分别,以“比丘们,那如来知道这个”等摧伏,令见结无结、无缠,以解开见结、揭开见缠。巴利
Khattiyādibhedena anekabhedabhinnāpi sassatavādino jātisatasahassānussaraṇādino abhinivesahetuno vasena cattārova honti , na tato uddhaṃ adhoti sassatavādādīnaṃ parimāṇaparicchedassa anaññavisayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cattāro janā’’tiādimāha. Tattha cattāro janāti cattāro janasamūhā. Idaṃ nissāyāti idaṃ idappaccayatāya sammā aggahaṇaṃ, tatthāpi ca hetuphalabhāvena sambandhānaṃ santatighanassa abheditattā paramatthato vijjamānampi bhedanibandhanaṃ nānattanayaṃ anupadhāretvā gahitaṃ ekattaggahaṇaṃ nissāya. Idaṃ gaṇhantīti idaṃ sassataggahaṇaṃ abhinivissa voharanti, iminā nayena ekaccasassatavādādayopettha yathāsambhavaṃ yojetvā vattabbā. Bhinditvāti ‘‘ātappamanvāyā’’tiādinā vibhajitvā ‘‘tayidaṃ bhikkhave tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādinā vimadditvā nijjaṭaṃ nigumbaṃ katvā diṭṭhijaṭāvijaṭanena diṭṭhigumbavivaraṇena ca.
“因此”等话,因为这场开示是围绕佛陀的功德而发起的,所以先指出一切知智,再表明:世尊善于说法,他以把握其他宗派的方式,来专门解释一切知智。“存在”这个词,则说明那些持邪见的人确实存在、从未间断;同时也说明,法王通过削弱和辨析他们的邪执,已经完成了自己教法应做的事,而且真实不虚。巴利
‘‘Tasmā’’tiādinā buddhaguṇe ārabbha desanāya samuṭṭhitattā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uddisitvā desanākusalo bhagavā samayantaraviggāhaṇavasena sabbaññutaññāṇameva vissajjetīti dasseti. ‘‘Santī’’ti iminā tesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vijjamānatāya avicchinnataṃ, tato ca nesaṃ micchāgāhato sithilakaraṇavivecanehi attano desanāya kiccakāritaṃ, avitathatañca dīpeti dhammarājā.
29 “有”这个词,和“存在”意思相同,是一个适用范围很广的独立小品词,就像“在这个身体里有头发”等说法中那样。以常见等分别前际的人,就叫前际论者。不过,因为他们先用先前成立的贪和见的分别去分别那前际,又因为反复修习的力量而变得强有力,以种种方式演绎,之后又以随后成立的、已成为执著的贪和见的执取去执取、执著、固持,所以说“分别前际、演绎之后而执取”。或者也可以说,分别和执取应当理解为依爱取而来,因为爱是取的缘。“部分”等处,这里应理解为“部分之类”。因为“边”这个词也出现在填词、邻近、邪道等场合。比如“来,你受持经、偈或阿毗达摩”以及“在经中求得开许后”等句中,“边”用作填词;“靠近村边”“村边坐卧处”等中,表示邻近;“沉溺欲乐是一边,迦旃延,说‘有’是一边”等中,表示邪道。巴利
29.Atthīti ‘‘saṃvijjantī’’ti iminā samānattho puthuvacanavisayo eko nipāto ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.377; ma. ni. 1.110; ma. ni. 3.154; saṃ. ni. 4.127; khu. pā. 3.1) viya. Sassatādivasena pubbantaṃ kappentīti pubbantakappikā. Yasmā pana te taṃ pubbantaṃ purimasiddhehi taṇhādiṭṭhikappehi kappetvā, āsevanabalavatāya vicittavuttitāya ca vikappetvā aparabhāgasiddhehi abhinivesabhūtehi taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhehi gaṇhanti abhinivisanti parāmasanti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbantaṃkappetvā vikappetvā gaṇhantī’’ti. Taṇhupādānavasena vā kappanaggahaṇāni veditabbāni. Taṇhāpaccayā hi upādānaṃ. Koṭṭhāsesūti ettha koṭṭhāsādīsūti attho veditabbo. Padapūraṇasamīpaummaggādīsupi hi anta-saddo dissati. Tathā hi ‘‘iṅgha tvaṃ suttante vā gāthāyo vā abhidhammaṃ vā pariyāpuṇassu (pāci. 442), suttante okāsaṃ kārāpetvā’’ti (pāci. 1221) ca ādīsu padapūraṇe anta-saddo vattati, gāmantaṃ osareyya, (pārā. 409; cūḷava. 343) gāmantasenāsana’’ntiādīsu samīpe , ‘‘kāmasukhallikānuyogo eko anto, atthīti kho kaccāna ayameko anto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.15; 3.90) ummaggeti.
“劫”这个词,适用于大劫、遍满状态、烦恼欲、寻、时间、施设、相似状态等种种含义,所以说“适用于多种含义”。同样地,它在“诸比丘,这些是劫的无数”等(《增支部》4.156)中,指的是大劫;在“以整片劫光照竹林”等(《相应部》1.94)中,指的是遍满;在“意图是欲,贪是欲,意图与贪是欲”等(《大义释》1;《小义释》8)中,指的是烦恼欲;在“思、寻、意图”等(《法集论》7)中,指的是寻;在“我常常如此而住”等(《中部》1.387)中,指的是时间;在“如是尊者劫”等(《经集》1090;《小义释》113)中,指的是施设;在“我们与如同导师一般的弟子一起商议,却不知道”等(《中部》1.260)中,指的是相似状态。这里所依据的是《大义释》(《大义释》28)。“以爱和见之力”:指的是作为见的亲依止、与见俱生、以随喜为性质的爱,以及以常见等形态执著者的邪执之力。“前”这个词,因为意指对先前所住之法的分别构想,所以是表示过去时间的用语;“边”这个词,因为离开色等蕴就没有分别构想的基础,所以是部分的意思,因此说“过去蕴的部分”。“分别构想之后”:指的是对那个前际,使爱著和执取得以成立、得以完成。“住立”:指的是不放弃那种见解。“依止”:指的是以此为所缘。因为那见解的领域就是前际。正因为它作为领域,所以那前际就是那见解生起之处,也是所缘缘,因此说“依止、缘于”。巴利
Kappa-saddo mahākappasamantabhāvakilesakāmavitakkakālapaññattisadisabhāvādīsu vattatīti āha ‘‘sambahulesu atthesu vattatī’’ti. Tathā hesa ‘‘cattārimāni bhikkhave kappassa asaṅkhyeyyānī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.156) mahākappe vattati, ‘‘kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.94) samantabhāve, ‘‘saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmo’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 1; cūḷani. 8) kilesakāme, ‘‘takko vitakko saṅkappo’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 7) vitakke, ‘‘yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) kāle, ‘‘iccāyasmā kappo’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 1090; cūḷani. 113) paññattiyaṃ, ‘‘satthukappena vata kira bho sāvakena saddhiṃ mantayamānā na jānimhā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.260) sadisabhāve vattatīti. Vuttampi cetanti mahāniddesaṃ (mahāni. 28) sandhāyāha. Taṇhādiṭṭhivasenāti diṭṭhiyā upanissayabhūtāya sahajātāya abhinandanabhūtāya ca taṇhāya, sassatādiākārena abhinivisantassa micchāgāhassa ca vasena. Pubbenivutthadhammavisayāya kappanāya adhippetattā atītakālavācako idha pubba-saddo, rūpādikhandhavinimuttassa kappanāvatthuno abhāvā anta-saddo ca bhāgavācakoti āha ‘‘atītaṃ khandhakoṭṭhāsa’’nti. ‘‘Kappetvā’’ti ca tasmiṃ pubbante taṇhāyanābhinivesānaṃ samatthanaṃ pariniṭṭhāpanamāha. Ṭhitāti tassā laddhiyā avijahanaṃ. Ārabbhāti ālambitvā. Visayo hi tassā diṭṭhiyā pubbanto. Visayabhāvato eva hi so tassā āgamanaṭṭhānaṃ, ārammaṇapaccayo cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘āgamma paṭiccā’’ti.
“增语词”就是施设词。比如在“奴仆”等词中,“西利瓦达”之类的称呼,只是纯粹的语言,以语言为依托而使用,所以叫增语,也就是施设。另一种解释:“adhi”这个词头表示“上面”,“vuccati”是“说”的意思,上面之说就是增语,也就是在被造色等之上所施设的,即“取施设”的意思。因此应当理解为:这是表达施设的词。因为“我”“世间”这类说法只是施设而已,不像色、受等那样是究竟真实。又或者,因为具有增说的性质,各种见解也被称为“增说”。因为各种见解在自性法之上,增益了常住、本性、实体、命者、身体等不真实的意义而生起。巴利
Adhivacanapadānīti paññattipadāni. Dāsādīsu sirivaḍḍhakādi-saddā viya vacanamattameva adhikāraṃ katvā pavattiyā adhivacanaṃ paññatti. Atha vā adhi-saddo uparibhāve, vuccatīti vacanaṃ, upari vacanaṃ adhivacanaṃ, upādābhūtarūpādīnaṃ upari paññāpiyamānā upādāpaññattīti attho , tasmā paññattidīpakapadānīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Paññattimattañhetaṃ vuccati, yadidaṃ ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca, na rūpavedanādayo viya paramattho. Adhikavuttitāya vā adhivuttiyoti diṭṭhiyo vuccanti. Adhikañhi sabhāvadhammesu sassatādiṃ pakatiādidabbādiṃ jīvādiṃ kāyādiñca abhūtamatthaṃ ajjhāropetvā diṭṭhiyo pavattantīti.
30 他们说“只有这才是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”,固执地坚持这一点,然后说“这是法,这不是法”等等,互相争论。“宣称”这个词用的是现在时,是为了表明这种宣称的行为至今还没有中断。“见所至”就是把见本身叫作见所至,就像“漏所至”“行所至”等说法一样。或者,因为见没有实际可到达的地方,它仅仅是见的到达,意思只是见的执取。又或者,“见所至”是指见的种类。世间的语法学家们认为“种类”“到达”“形态”这些词意思相同。对于每一个“我”和“世间”,都是依据那种特殊的执取而安立的,所以注释说“在色等当中,抓住其中某一个,把它当作‘我’和‘世间’”。“不死的”“常的”“恒久的”都是“常住”的同义词。“不死”是因为没有死亡;“常”是因为没有生起,在任何时候都存在;“恒久”是以坚固之义而说,因为它不会变异。从“如所说”等开始,通过释义和无碍解的方式,阐明了上面所说的义理。这个义理是根据“他视色为我,视受、想、行、识为我”这五种身见而说的。然而,根据“视具有色的我”等十五种身见,则是取四蕴中的每一蕴为“我”,而将其余的安立为“世间”,这个义理也能成立。同样地,取一蕴为“我”,而将其余的作为自己受用对象的“世间”;或者,取自己相续中所摄的蕴为“我”,而将其余的安立为“世间”,在这里应当这样理解其义。对此有人问:既然他们意谓“我”和“世间”是常住的,而不是“论”,为什么说“这些是常住论者”呢?确实如此,但由于与常住相伴,所以说“论是常住的”,就像“矛在转动”的说法一样。或者,“sassato iti vādo etesaṃ”中的“iti”一词应视为省略。又或者,他们宣说常住,固执地坚持“只有这才是真实的”而如此言说,所以是“常住论者”,即持常见者,在这里应当这样理解其义。巴利
30.Abhivadantīti ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 203, 427; ma. ni. 3.27, 29) abhinivisitvā vadanti ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, nāyaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā vivadanti. Abhivadanakiriyāya ajjāpi avicchedabhāvadassanatthaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ. Diṭṭhi eva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘muttagataṃ, (ma. ni. 2.119; a. ni. 9.11) saṅkhāragata’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 41) viya. Gantabbābhāvato vā diṭṭhiyā gatamattaṃ, diṭṭhiyā gahaṇamattanti attho. Diṭṭhippakāro vā diṭṭhigataṃ. Lokiyā hi vidhayuttagatapakāra-sadde samānatthe icchanti. Ekekasmiñca ‘‘attā’’ti, ‘‘loko’’ti ca gahaṇavisesaṃ upādāya paññāpanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘rūpādīsu aññataraṃ attā ca loko cāti gahetvā’’ti. Amaraṃ niccaṃ dhuvanti sassatavevacanāni. Maraṇābhāvena vā amaraṃ, uppādābhāvena sabbathāpi atthitāya niccaṃ, thiraṭṭhena vikārābhāvena dhuvaṃ. ‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ niddesapaṭisambhidāpāḷīhi vibhāveti. Ayañca attho ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, vedanaṃ, saññaṃ, saṅkhāre, viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti imissā pañcavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena vutto. ‘‘Rūpavantaṃ attāna’’ntiādikāya pana pañcadasavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena cattāro cattāro khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadaññaṃ ‘‘loko’’ti paññapentīti ayampi attho labbhati. Tathā ekaṃ khandhaṃ ’’attā’’ti gahetvā tadaññe attano upabhogabhūto lokoti, sasantatipatite vā khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadaññe ‘‘loko’’ti paññapentīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Etthāha – sassato vādo etesanti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu tesaṃ attā loko ca sassatoti adhippeto, na vādo ti? Saccametaṃ, sassatasahacaritatāya pana ‘‘vādo sassato’’ti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti. Sassato iti vādo etesanti vā iti-saddalopo daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā sassataṃ vadanti ‘‘idameva sacca’’nti abhinivissa voharantīti sassatavādā, sassatadiṭṭhinoti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
31 31. “热烈”是指对烦恼的压制、摧毁和断除。“勤”是指不给懈怠可乘之机,持续地策励心。“精勤”是指为了让定达到殊胜的层次,而不断地修习精进。因为这里指的是带来近行定和安止定、令心调柔的精进,所以说“三种精进”。“不放逸”是指以此而不放逸,也就是不迷失。“如理作意”是指以此用正确的方法将业处运用于心,这就是智。所以说“精进、念与智”。在此处,即经文“依于热烈……乃至……作意”这一段中。与戒清净一起证得四种色界禅那的修行方法本应详细说明,但它在《清净道论》中已详细讲述过了,所以说“简要的意义”。“彼类那样的”是指通过十四种调心方法,将第四色界禅那调伏的状态。巴利
31.Ātāpanaṃ kilesānaṃ vibādhanaṃ pahānaṃ. Padahanaṃ kosajjapakkhe patituṃ adatvā cittassa ussahanaṃ. Anuyogo yathā samādhi visesabhāgiyataṃ pāpuṇāti, evaṃ vīriyassa bahulīkaraṇaṃ. Idha upacārappanācittaparidamanavīriyānaṃ adhippetattā āha ‘‘tippabhedaṃ vīriya’’nti . Nappamajjati etenāti appamādo, asammoso. Sammā upāyena manasi karoti kammaṭṭhānaṃ etenāti sammāmanasikāro ñāṇanti āha ‘‘vīriyañca satiñca ñāṇañcā’’ti. Etthāti ‘‘ātappa…pe… manasikāraṃ anvāyā’’ti imasmiṃ pāṭhe. Sīlavisuddhiyā saddhiṃ catunnaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ adhigamanapaṭipadā vattabbā, sā pana visuddhimagge vitthārato vuttāti āha ‘‘saṅkhepattho’’ti. ‘‘Tathārūpa’’nti cuddasavidhehi cittadamanehi rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānassa damitataṃ vadati.
对于具足等引等八支、证得第四色界禅那的修行者来说,那是他禅定威力的展现,属于世间神通。经文里说“禅那等”,意思是:对获得禅那的人来说,禅那的种种法会特别清晰地呈现在心中,以这些法为入口,其余的法也随之呈现。这样说,是为了否定“能生”这一性质。因为如果真有“能生”的性质,那么禅那等法就会像色法等、像乐受等那样,依赖条件才能起作用,也就成了有生起的东西。既然有生起,就必然有灭去,这样一来,“常住”就完全没有可能了。“如山般稳固”这个词,应当理解为世间用来表示绝对恒常、永不变化的意思。“如柱坚立”则是说,就像城门柱不会被风吹倒一样,它不会因任何事物而发生变异,这是说明它没有变异性。而“如山般稳固”则是说明它没有无常性。因为变异本身就是毁灭,所以论中说“两者都在说明世间没有毁灭”。“本来就存在着的”这句话,是通过显示果在因中已经实有存在,来阐明“显现论”。所谓“显现”,就是“走向显现”的意思。可是,先前没有显现而后来才显现的存在者,怎么能说它本来就存在呢?就像被黑暗遮住的陶罐,因为灯光而得以显现。巴利
Samādhānādiaṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatarūpāvacaracatutthajjhānassa yogino samādhivijambhanabhūtā lokiyābhiññā jhānānubhāvo. ‘‘Jhānādīna’’nti idaṃ jhānalābhissa visesena jhānadhammā āpāthaṃ āgacchanti, taṃmukhena sesadhammāti imamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Janakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Sati hi janakabhāve rūpādidhammānaṃ viya sukhādidhammānaṃ viya, ca paccayāyattavuttitāya uppādavantatā viññāyati, uppāde ca sati avassambhāvī nirodhoti anavakāsāva niccatā siyāti. Kūṭaṭṭha-saddo vā loke accantanicce niruḷho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito’’ti etena yathā esikā vātappahārādīhi na calati, evaṃ na kenaci vikāraṃ āpajjatīti vikārābhāvamāha, ‘‘kūṭaṭṭho’’ti iminā pana aniccatābhāvaṃ. Vikāropi vināsoyevāti āha, ‘‘ubhayenapi lokassa vināsābhāvaṃ dīpetī’’ti. ‘‘Vijjamānamevā’’ti etena kāraṇe phalassa atthibhāvadassanena abhibyattivādaṃ dīpeti. Nikkhamatīti ca abhibyattiṃ gacchatīti attho. Kathaṃ pana vijjamānoyeva pubbe anabhibyatto abhibyattiṃ gacchatīti? Yathā andhakārena paṭicchanno ghaṭo ālokena abhibyattiṃ gacchati.
这里应当加以考察:光到底做了什么,才被称为“照亮瓶子”?如果说是生起了以瓶子为对象的认知,那么因为说明了尚未生起的认知的生起,“显现”的说法就站不住了。如果说是驱散了障碍瓶子认知的黑暗,那么“显现”的说法同样站不住。因为,如果瓶子认知已经存在,黑暗怎么能成为它的障碍呢?正如瓶子的显现说不通,认知自身的显现也说不通。在那里也是一样:如果是由根、境等的和合,使尚未生起的认知得以生起,那么仅凭“生起”这个说法,“显现”的说法就站不住了,常住的说法也一样站不住。如果说是通过驱散处于认知生起之障碍地位的、相当于黑暗的愚痴,那么当认知已经存在时,愚痴怎么能成为障碍呢?因为可能存在某种差别。事实上,能显现的日月、宝珠、灯烛等虽然有差别,所显现的瓶子等并不会因此有差别;然而随着对象不同,认知却会有不同。所以“显现”的说法更加说不通。而且在这里,用这种说法来安立主张也不合适,因为言说和言说所指的对象不能是彼此无关的。所谓“那些众生在流转”,意思是:那些在这里以人的状态存在的众生,正是他们自己,由于转生为天等状态,从此处去往别处;否则,已造的业就会失坏,未造的业也会凭空而来。巴利
Idamettha vicāretabbaṃ – kiṃ karonto āloko ghaṭaṃ pakāsetīti vuccati, yadi ghaṭavisayaṃ buddhiṃ karonto, buddhiyā anuppannāya uppattidīpanato abhibyattivādo hāyati. Atha ghaṭabuddhiyā āvaraṇabhūtaṃ andhakāraṃ vidhamanto, evampi abhibyattivādo hāyatiyeva. Sati hi ghaṭabuddhiyā andhakāro kathaṃ tassā āvaraṇaṃ hotīti, yathā ghaṭassa abhibyatti na yujjati, evaṃ attanopi. Tatthāpi hi yadi indriyavisayādisannipātena anuppannāya buddhiyā uppatti, uppattivacaneneva abhibyattivādo hāyati, tathā sassatavādo. Atha buddhippavattiyā āvaraṇabhūtassa andhakāraṭṭhāniyassa mohassa vidhamanena. Sati buddhiyā kathaṃ moho āvaraṇanti, kiñci bhedasambhavato. Na hi abhibyañjanakānaṃ candasūriyamaṇipadīpādīnaṃ bhedena abhibyañjitabbānaṃ ghaṭādīnaṃ bhedo hoti, hoti ca visayabhedena buddhibhedoti bhiyyopi abhibyatti na yujjatiyeva, na cettha vuttikappanā yuttā vuttiyā vuttimato ca anaññathānujānanatoti . Teca sattā sandhāvantīti ye idha manussabhāvena avaṭṭhitā, teyeva devabhāvādiupagamanena ito aññattha gacchanti, aññathā katassa kammassa vināso, akatassa ca abbhāgamo āpajjeyyāti adhippāyo.
从一种有到另一种有,就叫“展转”。他们这样被称为在流转,并不是因为自我有恒常不变的本质而有死此生彼,也不是因为遍及一切而有到处奔走、轮回转生;实际上,只是由于诸法生起方式的差别,才这样被称为在流转、被这样言说,这就是这里的意旨。借此显示:对于没有固定本质的自我,以及对于属于法的法,只是纯粹地生起又灭去——这就是变异论。至于这里还需要说明的内容,后面再讲。“破坏自己的主张”,意思是:以流转等说法所成立的无常性,破坏、摧毁了他先前所承认的常住论。“常恒”或者应当理解为:它的意思是常、坚固、永远恒久。巴利
Aparāparanti aparasmā bhavā aparaṃ bhavaṃ. Evaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gacchantīti attano niccasabhāvattā na cutūpapattiyo, sabbabyāpitāya nāpi sandhāvanasaṃsaraṇāni, dhammānaṃyeva pana pavattivisesena evaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti, evaṃ voharīyantīti adhippāyo. Etena avaṭṭhitasabhāvassa attano, dhammino ca dhammamattaṃ uppajjati ceva vinassati cāti imaṃ vipariṇāmavādaṃ dasseti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato vakkhāma. Attano vādaṃ bhindatīti sandhāvanādivacanasiddhāya aniccatāya pubbe paṭiññātaṃ sassatavādaṃ bhindati, viddhaṃsetīti attho. Sassatisamanti vā etassa sassataṃ thāvaraṃ niccakālanti attho daṭṭhabbo.
“显示因”是指:对那些把“我”和世间都设定为“常住”的见执者,显示他们这样设定的原因。意思是说,他并不是用自己现前亲证的意义来直接证明自己的见解,而是用自己现前亲证的意义,去证明自己尚未现前亲证的意义。因为他只是把自己所认定的见解拿去让别人信服,而不是把自己不认定的见解拿去让别人信服。
这里说的“显示因”,这个因的显示就是:在这无数百千生中,这个“我”和世间都是同一个,因为有随念回忆的可能。凡是亲身经历过某个对象的人,他才能随念回忆那个对象,别人不能。因为别人经历过的对象,另一个人无法随念回忆,就像佛授经历过的对象,法授不能随念回忆一样。就像在这一生是这样,在更早的许多生中也是这样。
为什么说“我的我和世间是常住的”?而且,就像我这样,其他众生的我和世间也是常住的吗?那个执持常见、跳进见执密林的见执者,也让别人安立在这个见解里。不过,经典里说“他们宣说种种言词。他这样说……”,由此可见,这里说的显示因,是依据推度他人、以类比方式来显示的。
因有三种:能达因、能生因、能知因。其中,圣道是涅槃的能达因,种子是芽的能生因,缘所生性等是了知无常等的能知因。这里指的只是能知因。能知因之所以是因,是因为它成为了知所知对象之智的原因。那个智依它而住、依它而转,所以叫“处”,也叫“依处”,因为它住在那里、在那里生起。世尊也是这样,先用“依处”这个词指出,再用“处”这个词说明。巴利
Hetuṃ dassentoti yesaṃ ‘‘sassato’’ti attānañca lokañca paññapeti ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko, tesaṃ hetuṃ dassentoti attho. Na hi attano diṭṭhiyā paccakkhakatamatthaṃ attanoyeva sādheti, attano pana paccakkhakatena atthena attano appaccakkhabhūtampi atthaṃ sādheti. Attanā hi yathānicchitaṃ parehi viññāpeti, na anicchitaṃ. ‘‘Hetuṃ dassento’’ti ettha idaṃ hetudassanaṃ – etesu anekesu jātisatasahassesu ekovāyaṃ me attā, loko ca anussaraṇasabbhāvato. Yo hi yamatthaṃ anubhavati, so eva taṃ anussarati, na añño. Na hi aññena anubhūtamatthaṃ añño anussarituṃ sakkoti yathā taṃ buddharakkhitena anubhūtaṃ dhammarakkhito. Yathā cetāsu, evaṃ ito purimatarāsupi jātīsūti. Kasmā sassato me attā ca loko ca. Yathā ca me, evaṃ aññesampi sattānaṃ sassato attā ca loko cāti? Sassatavasena diṭṭhigahanaṃ pakkhando diṭṭhigatiko parepi tattha patiṭṭhapeti, pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘anekavihitāni adhivuttipadāni abhivadanti. So evaṃ āhā’’ti ca vacanato parānumānavasena idha hetudassanaṃ adhippetanti viññāyati. Kāraṇanti tividhaṃ kāraṇaṃ sampāpakaṃ nibbattakaṃ ñāpakanti. Tattha ariyamaggo nibbānassa sampāpakaṃ kāraṇaṃ, bījaṃ aṅkurassa nibbattakaṃ kāraṇaṃ, paccayuppannatādayo aniccatādīnaṃ ñāpakaṃ kāraṇaṃ, idhāpi ñāpakakāraṇameva adhippetaṃ. Ñāpako hi ñāpetabbatthavisayassa ñāṇassa hetubhāvato kāraṇanti. Tadāyattavuttitāya taṃ ñāṇaṃ tiṭṭhati tatthāti ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti, vasati tattha pavattatīti ‘‘vatthū’’ti ca vuccati. Tathā hi bhagavatā vatthu-saddena uddisitvāpi ṭhānasaddena niddiṭṭhanti.
32-33 第二和第三种论与第一种论相比,除了时间上的差别以外,没有别的不同,所以说“后面两种论也是同样的道理”。如果真是这样,那为什么常见论被分成四种呢?难道不应该像无因生论那样,只分成两种就可以了吗?对此回答说:“因为外道是钝慧之人”等等。巴利
32-33. Dutiyatatiyavādānaṃ paṭhamavādato natthi viseso ṭhapetvā kālavisesanti āha ‘‘upari vādadvayepi eseva nayo’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā sassatavādo catudhā vibhatto, nanu adhiccasamuppannikavādo viya duvidheneva vibhajitabbo siyāti āha ‘‘mandapañño hi titthiyo’’tiādi.
34 所谓“寻思”,就是推度、衡量,意思是以常见等行相,把心投向这个或那个所缘。“寻”具有撞击或决断的特征,是成为诸见立足处的思惟。“伺察”就是审察,但在这里,从意义上说,它是与贪俱行、类似慧的心生起,或者是邪执的非理作意,又或者在前期是见的躁动;应当这样理解。因此说“衡量、喜好、容忍”。“遍击”就是寻对所缘的把握,所以说“以种种方式寻思之后”。“随伺察”是依伺察而随转,或者是以随伺察而行的审察来研磨。“各各照耀”就是辩才(paṭibhāna),指能彰显所确立行相差别的心生起。巴利
34.Takkayatīti ūhayati, sassatādiākārena tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropetīti attho. Takkoti ākoṭanalakkhaṇo vinicchayalakkhaṇo vā diṭṭhiṭṭhānabhūto vitakko. Vīmaṃsā nāma vicāraṇā, sā panettha atthato paññāpatirūpako lobhasahagatacittuppādo, micchābhiniveso vā ayonisomanasikāro, pubbabhāge vā diṭṭhivipphanditanti daṭṭhabbā. Tenevāha ‘‘tulanā ruccanā khamanā’’ti. Pariyāhananaṃ vitakkassa ārammaṇaūhanaṃ evāti āha ‘‘tena tena pakārena takketvā’’ti. Anuvicaritanti vīmaṃsāya anupavattitaṃ, vīmaṃsānugatena vā vicārena anumajjitaṃ. Paṭi paṭi bhātīti paṭibhānaṃ, yathāsamihitākāravisesavibhāvako cittuppādo. Paṭibhānato jātaṃ paṭibhānaṃ, sayaṃ attano paṭibhānaṃ sayaṃ paṭibhānaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘attano paṭibhānamattasañjāta’’nti. Matta-saddena visesādhigamādayo nivatteti.
“未来也会这样存在”这句话,并不是只针对这里所说的寻思者而说,而是为了显示:获得殊胜境界的寻思者也有这种可能,所以应当看作是在展示这种可能性。凡是自己所得的颜色等、快乐等,在这里获得,就叫作“得”,并不是指禅那等殊胜境界。“如此存在时,这个就发生”——在无常的事物中,就会得出“一个人造作,另一个人感受”的结论,这样一来,所作的就坏灭,未作的却出现了。而在常住的事物中,造作者本身就是感受者,就没有这个过失。这就是在展示寻思者寻求合理性的推理方式。巴利
‘‘Anāgatepievaṃ bhavissatī’’ti idaṃ na idhādhippetatakkīvaseneva vuttaṃ, lābhītakkino evampi sambhavatīti sambhavadassanavasena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ kiñci attanā paṭiladdhaṃ rūpādi sukhādi ca idha labbhatīti lābho, na jhānādiviseso. ‘‘Evaṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti aniccesu bhāvesu añño karoti, añño paṭisaṃvedetīti āpajjati, tathā ca sati katassa vināso, akatassa ca abbhāgamo siyā. Niccesu pana bhāvesu yo karoti, so paṭisaṃvedetīti na doso āpajjatīti takkikassa yuttigavesanākāraṃ dasseti.
仅仅靠推理本身,因为不存在传承、证得、传闻等依据,所以纯粹只是推理。难道不是这样吗?即使那些获得了殊胜成就的常住论者,也是以自身殊胜证得为因,在许多百千生中、在十次坏成劫中、在四十次坏成劫中,随念自己所经历的相续以及与之相关联的“我、世间”,然后据此推想:在更早更早的诸生中也是如此存在的。接着又以推想一切众生也同样如此存在的方式,才执著常住。这样一来,所有常住论者就都跟那位随念宿住、忆念生世的推理者一样,因为他们都是依凭自己所得的经验事实,以推理来安立其主张,所以都应归入推理者这一类。而且,必然应当承认有上述这种推理,否则,获得殊胜成就的常住论者岂不是要归入一分常论或无因生论那一类了吗?然而,不应这样看待。因为对获得殊胜成就者来说,对蕴相续极其长久、更为长久、最为长久的随念,才是他们执著常住的独特原因。正如经中所说:“我随念种种宿住。以此,我知道此事。”这里正是以随念本身作为主要原因来显示的。至于他基于“以此,我知道此事”而产生的推理,在这里并非主要,因为它相对于随念只是次要的。如果这样的话,那传闻等不也成了主要原因吗?不是的。因为他们没有现证,所以是以推理为主;而且以主要原因来作说明,在圣教和世间中都是惯用的,比如“眼识”“幼芽”等说法。巴利
Takkamattenevāti āgamādhigamādīnaṃ anussavādīnañca abhāvā suddhatakkeneva. Nanu ca visesalābhinopi sassatavādino attano visesādhigamahetu anekesu jātisatasahassesu dasasu saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu cattālīsāya saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu yathānubhūtaṃ attano santānaṃ tappaṭibaddhañca ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca anussaritvā tato purimapurimatarāsupi jātīsu tathābhūtassa atthitānuvitakkanamukhena sabbesampi sattānaṃ tathābhāvānuvitakkanavaseneva sassatābhinivesino jātā, evañca sati sabbopi sassatavādī anussutijātissaratakkikā viya attano upaladdhavatthunibandhanena takkanena pavattavādattā takkīpakkheyeva tiṭṭheyya, avassañca vuttappakāraṃ takkanamicchitabbaṃ , aññathā visesalābhī sassatavādī ekaccasassatikapakkhaṃ, adhiccasamuppannikapakkhaṃ vā bhajeyyāti ? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, yasmā visesalābhīnaṃ khandhasantānassa dīghadīghataradīghatamakālānussaraṇaṃ sassataggāhassa asādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarāmi. Imināmahametaṃ jānāmī’’ti anussaraṇameva padhānakāraṇabhāvena dassitaṃ. Yaṃ pana tassa ‘‘imināmahametaṃ jānāmī’’ti pavattaṃ takkanaṃ, na taṃ idha padhānaṃ anussaraṇaṃ pati tassa appadhānabhūtattā. Yadi evaṃ anussavādīnampi padhānabhāvo āpajjatīti ce? Na, tesaṃ sacchikiriyāya abhāvena takkapadhānattā, padhānakāraṇena ca niddeso niruḷho sāsane loke ca yathā ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, yavaṅkuro’’ti ca.
或者,为了说明不依靠殊胜证得的推理单独成为执取常住的原因,应当把殊胜证得单独说为另一种执取常住的原因。而这种殊胜证得,按钝慧、中慧、利慧分为三种。世尊把一切纯粹只是推理的人,以“都是推理者”这一共性归在一起,从而把常住论确定为四种。即使像依靠传闻等的人那样,钝慧者等也因低劣等差别而有许多分类,获得殊胜者同样可以有许多分类;然而,把一切获得殊胜者按钝慧、中慧、利慧分成三类之后,在其中以最高等的为代表,通过随念多生、十万生、十劫坏成、四十劫坏成,作了这样的区分。在三类中,钝慧者和中慧者随念的比所说的界限要少;而利慧者则不会随念超出所说的界限——这里正是这样开示的。因此,正是通过收摄于某一种分类的方式,世尊分别了四种依据,确立了常住论者的四种类型。因为在这里,法王世尊所宣说的是无余的法。巴利
Atha vā visesādhigamanibandhanarahitassa takkanassa visuṃ sassataggāhe kāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ visesādhigamo visuṃ sassataggāhakāraṇaṃ vattabbo , so ca mandamajjhatikkhapaññāvasena tividhoti bhagavatā sabbatakkino takkībhāvasāmaññena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā catudhā vavatthāpito sassatavādo. Yadipi anussavādivasena takkikānaṃ viya mandapaññādīnampi hīnādivasena anekabhedasabbhāvato visesalābhīnampi bahudhā bhedo sambhavati, sabbe pana visesalābhino mandapaññādivasena tayo rāsī katvā tattha ukkaṭṭhavasena anekajātisatasahassadasasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭacattārīsasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭānussaraṇena ayaṃ vibhāgo vutto. Tīsupi rāsīsu ye hīnamajjhapaññā, te vuttaparicchedato ūnakameva anussaranti. Ye pana tattha ukkaṭṭhapaññā, te vuttaparicchedaṃ atikkamitvā nānussarantīti evaṃ panāyaṃ desanā. Tasmā aññatarabhedasaṅgahavaseneva bhagavatā cattāriṭṭhānāni vibhattānīti vavatthitā sassatavādīnaṃ catubbidhatā. Na hi idha sāvasesaṃ dhammaṃ deseti dhammarājā.
35 为了说明“以某一种”这个说法的含义,所以说了“以一种”。为了显示“或”这个词的不确定含义,所以说了“以两种或三种”。由此表明:在四种情形当中,某一项对另一项的安立,随其适宜而成为辅助因。那么,这些事究竟是执取的因,还是安立主张的因呢?如果在这里先说它是执取的因,那为什么只取了随念和推论,而没有取想颠倒等呢?因为颠倒想、不如理作意、亲近恶人、听闻非正法等等,都是邪见生起的所依。如果说是安立主张的因,那么就像证得的理证一样,教证也应该作为事由被提出来。在这两种情况下,“除此之外没有”这句话不都说不通了吗?不是的。为什么呢?就执取这一面来说,这个持邪见的人由于亲近恶人、听闻非正法,不如理地浮泛起来,成为颠倒想者;他不能了知色等诸法刹那刹那坏灭的本质,却越过法理去追逐,错误地执取“一性”之说,然后通过上面所说的随念和推论,在诸蕴上生起了“我与世间是常”的执取。因此,随念和推论既是近因,又是主因,而且举出它们也就等于举出了其余的,所以这里只取了随念和推论。就安立主张这一面来说,教证也还是站在理证这一边的,尤其是因为外道是执取推论的人,所以这里只把随念和推论取为见的依据。还有更进一步的理由:胜义法有两种相,即自性相和共相。其中,通达自性相是现量智,通达共相相是比量智;而教证由于能成就闻所成慧,所以它带来的也只是比量智。对于所闻之法,通过以行相加以推究,安住于审察忍可之中,生起思所成慧,然后逐步通过修习证得现量智。这样一来,教证也没有超出推论的范围,所以可以理解为:举出推论也就等于举出了教证。注疏中是以“未闻推论”来举出的,因此“除此之外没有”这句话是妥当的。又因为经中说“他们宣说种种增上语,安立我与世间是常”,所以应当知道,这里所指的就是安立主张的依据。巴利
35.‘‘Aññatarenā’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vā-saddassa pana aniyamatthataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dvīhi vā tīhi vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena catūsu ṭhānesu yathārahaṃ ekaccaṃ ekaccassa paññāpane sahakārīkāraṇanti dasseti. Kiṃ panetāni vatthūni abhinivesassa hetu, udāhu patiṭṭhāpanassa. Kiñcettha yadi tāva abhinivesassa, kasmā anussaraṇatakkanāniyeva gahitāni, na saññāvipallāsādayo. Tathāhi viparītasaññā ayonisomanasikāraasappurisūpanissayaasaddhammassavanādīni micchādiṭṭhiyā pavattanaṭṭhānāni. Atha patiṭṭhāpanassa adhigamayuttiyo viya āgamopi vatthubhāvena vattabbo, ubhayatthāpi ‘‘natthi ito bahiddhā’’ti vacanaṃ na yujjatīti? Na. Kasmā? Abhinivesapakkhe tāva ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko asappurisūpanissayaasaddhammassavanehi ayoniso ummujjitvā vipallāsasañño rūpādidhammānaṃ khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanasabhāvassa anavabodhato dhammayuttiṃ atidhāvanto ekattanayaṃ micchā gahetvā yathāvuttānussaraṇatakkehi khandhesu ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.31) abhinivesaṃ janesi. Iti āsannakāraṇattā, padhānakāraṇattā, taggahaṇeneva ca itaresampi gahitattā anussaraṇatakkanāniyeva idha gahitāni. Patiṭṭhāpanapakkhe pana āgamopi yuttipakkheyeva ṭhito visesato bāhirakānaṃ takkagāhibhāvatoti anussaraṇatakkanāniyeva diṭṭhiyā vatthubhāvena gahitāni. Kiñca bhiyyo duvidhaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ paramatthadhammānaṃ sabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇañcāti. Tattha sabhāvalakkhaṇāvabodho paccakkhañāṇaṃ, sāmaññalakkhaṇāvabodho anumānañāṇaṃ, āgamo ca sutamayāya paññāya sādhanato anumānañāṇameva āvahati, sutānaṃ pana dhammānaṃ ākāraparivitakkanena nijjhānakkhantiyaṃ ṭhito cintāmayaṃ paññaṃ nibbattetvā anukkamena bhāvanāya paccakkhañāṇaṃ adhigacchatīti evaṃ āgamopi takkavisayaṃ nātikkamatīti taggahaṇena gahitovāti veditabbo. So aṭṭhakathāyaṃ anussutitakkaggahaṇena vibhāvitoti yuttaṃ evidaṃ ‘‘natthi ito bahiddhā’’ti. ‘‘Anekavihitāni adhivuttipadāni abhivadanti, sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.30) ca vacanato patiṭṭhāpanavatthūni idhādhippetānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
36 见本身就是见的立足处,因为它是导致种种祸害的最严重因素。正如经中所说:“比丘们,我说邪见是最严重的过错。”(《增支部》1.310)接着以“正如所说”等语句,引用《无碍解道》(《无碍解道》1.124)的经文,说明见的立足处的分类。其中,诸蕴也是见的立足处,因为从所缘的角度来说,如“把色看作我”等(《相应部》3.81, 345)经文所讲。无明也是见的立足处,因为它以亲依止等为条件而运作。正如经中说:“比丘们,未听闻的凡夫,不见诸圣者,不精通圣法……”(《中部》1.2;《无碍解道》1.130)。触也是见的立足处。正如经中说:“那也是以触为缘”(《长部》1.118等),“一次次触后,一次次感受”(《长部》1.144)。想也是见的立足处。经中也这样说:“想确实是戏论的根源”(《经集》880;《大义释》109),“从地想为地……”(《中部》1.2)等。寻也是见的立足处。经中也这样说:“在诸见中构造推论后,他们说有两种法:真实与虚妄”(《经集》892),“他是推论者、审察者”(《长部》1.34)等。不如理作意也是见的立足处。因此世尊说:“他这样不如理作意时,六种见中的某一种见就生起:或者‘我有我’这样的见,在他那里作为真实、坚固的见而生起”等(《中部》1.19)。由它而生起,所以叫生起;生起的体性,就是生起处之义。说“转起”,是指在他人相续中令它生起。说“成办”,是指达到执着的终点和顶点。说“以所缘的方式”,是指在八种见的立足处中,就诸蕴而说。说“以转起的方式”,是指无明等。说“以亲近的方式”,是指亲近恶友、他人言语等也是可以得到的。或者,“如是趣者”就是如是而行、如是而终的意思。这里所说的是:这些被称为见的立足处,就是在胜义中不存在的自我及其常性,这样增益后执取、执着,是愚者的言说;只要智者不加追问,它们就这样行、这样转。但被智者追问时,它们就没有安立的基础,经不起检验,就像日出时的露珠,也像萤火虫一样,破碎、灭尽。巴利
36.Diṭṭhiyeva diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ paramavajjatāya anekavihitānaṃ anatthānaṃ hetubhāvato. Yathāha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ bhikkhave vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 1.310) ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādinā paṭisambhidāpāḷiyā (paṭi. ma. 1.124) diṭṭhiyā ṭhānavibhāgaṃ dasseti. Tattha khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇaṭṭhena ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.81, 345) vacanato. Avijjāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādibhāvena pavattanato. Yathāha ‘‘assutavā bhikkhave puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.2; paṭi. ma. 1.130). Phassopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathā cāha ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā, (dī. ni. 1.118 ādayo) phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.144) ca . Saññāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā, (su. ni. 880; mahāni. 109) pathavito saññatvā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.2) ca ādi. Vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘takkañca diṭṭhīsu pakappayitvā, saccaṃ musāti dvayadhammamāhū’’ti (su. ni. 892) ‘‘takkī hoti vīmaṃsī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.34) ca ādi. Ayonisomanasikāropi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘tassa evaṃ ayoniso manasi karoto channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjati. ‘Atthi me attā’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.19). Samuṭṭhāti etenāti samuṭṭhānaṃ samuṭṭhānabhāvo samuṭṭhānaṭṭho. Pavattitāti parasantānesu uppāditā. Pariniṭṭhāpitāti abhinivesassa pariyosānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpitāti attho. ‘‘Ārammaṇavasenā’’ti aṭṭhasu diṭṭhiṭṭhānesu khandhe sandhāyāha. Pavattanavasenāti avijjādayo. Āsevanavasenāti pāpamittaparatoghosādīnampi sevanaṃ labbhatiyeva. Atha vā evaṃgatikāti evaṃgamanā, evaṃniṭṭhāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime diṭṭhisaṅkhātā diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṃ paramatthato asantaṃ attānaṃ sassatabhāvañcassa ajjhāropetvā gahitā, parāmaṭṭhā ca bālalapanā yāva paṇḍitā na samanuyuñjanti, tāva gacchanti pavattanti. Paṇḍitehi samanuyuñjiyamānā pana anavaṭṭhitavatthukā avimaddakkhamā sūriyuggamane ussāvabindū viya khajjopanakā viya ca bhijjanti vinassanti cāti.
在这里,针对这个审问的简略说明是:如果他人所构想的“我”或“世间”是常住的,那么由于它没有变异,不会舍弃先前的形态,因此无法对任何人做出任何殊胜的改造;为了从不利中回转、为了实践利益而作的教导,对常住论者来说就完全无用。再者,既然没有变异,那种教导又如何能进行呢?这样一来,常住的我就如同虚空一样,布施等行为、伤害等行为都不可能发生。同样,对常住论者来说,感受乐与苦的关联也完全说不通,因为他不被业所束缚;又因为没有生等,哪里还有解脱?如果他辩解说:“对于那个我,只是有一些法生起又灭去,借着这些法才有行为等假名。”即便如此,对于一个不舍弃先前形态、恒常安住的“我”,也无法合理地认定它“只是法”。再者,那些属于他的法,是作为他的状态而存在,还是与他不同?如果不同,那么即使那些法生起,对他也没有任何差别。然而他却认为,他借着那些法来造作、感受、死亡和投生,因此他就处于如前所说的过失状态。而且,这种对法的施设也会变得毫无意义。如果那些法不是不同的,而是生灭的诸状态与他不异,那么他自己也就像那些法一样具有生灭的本性,哪里还有常住的余地?或者,如果那些法也像他一样常住,那么束缚与解脱就都不可能存在。因此,常住论根本说不通。在这里,也没有任何论者能够对诸法的常住性说出真正清净合理的道理,而缺乏合理性的言论不会让智者的心感到满意。因此说:“只要智者还没有审问,它们就一直流转下去。”以业的力量面向并趣向那里,所以叫“趣向来世”,也就是他世。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ anuyuñjane saṅkhepakathā – yadi hi parena parikappito attā loko vā sassato siyā, tassa nibbikāratāya purimarūpāvijahanato kassaci visesādhānassa kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ahitato nivattanatthaṃ, hite ca paṭipattiatthaṃ upadeso eva nippayojano siyā sassatavādino, kathaṃ vā so upadeso pavattīyati vikārābhāvato, evañca attano ajaṭākāsassa viya dānādikiriyā hiṃsādikiriyā ca na sambhavati. Tathā sukhassa dukkhassa anubhavananibandho eva sassatavādino na yujjati kammabaddhābhāvato, jātiādīnañca asambhavato kuto vimokkho, atha pana dhammamattaṃ tassa uppajjati ceva vinassati ca, yassa vasenāyaṃ kiriyādivohāroti vadeyya, evampi purimarūpāvijahanena avaṭṭhitassa attano dhammamattanti na sakkā sambhāvetuṃ, te vā panassa dhammā avatthābhūtā aññe vā siyuṃ anaññe vā. Yadi aññe, na tāhi tassa uppannāhipi koci viseso atthi. Yāhi karoti paṭisaṃvedeti cavati upapajjati cāti icchitaṃ, tasmā tadavattho eva yathāvuttadoso. Kiñca dhammakappanāpi niratthikā siyā, athānaññe uppādavināsavantīhi avatthāhi anaññassa attano tāsaṃ viya uppādavināsasabbhāvato kuto niccatāvakāso, tāsampi vā attano viya niccatāti bandhavimokkhānaṃ asambhavo evāti na yujjatiyeva sassatavādo. Na cettha koci vādī dhammānaṃ sassatabhāve parisuddhaṃ yuttiṃ vattuṃ samattho, yuttirahitañca vacanaṃ na paṇḍitānaṃ cittaṃ ārādhetīti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yāva paṇḍitā na samanuyuñjanti, tāva gacchanti pavattantī’’ti. Kammavasena abhimukho sampareti etthāti abhisamparāyo, paroloko.
这里说“及一切知智”,是因为在此要对一切知智加以分别;或者说,当说到一切知智时,由于漏尽智以它为所依,又因为与它不相离,所以世尊的十力智等一切智也就都被包含在内了,因此这样说。“虽了知”中的“虽”字表示推想,用它来说明“及彼”中“而”字的意思。这里说的是:就连那比恶见更殊胜、堪称精华的戒等功德殊胜,如来也不执取,更何况轮回中的诱饵呢?“我”这个词,是从“见”的角度说明执取的方式。“我了知”中的“iti”是表方式的词,用它来显示从“爱”的角度执取为“我所”的方式。所谓执取,就是超越了法的真实本性,而向别处抓取。因为在诸蕴中,确实没有任何一法可以被执取为“我”或“我所”。而那种执取无非就是贪爱等烦恼,这些烦恼世尊在菩提树下就已经断除了,所以说“于所执取的烦恼”等。“因无所执取故”是“寂灭了感受者”的原因说明;或者,这是与“已了知”相呼应,用了充当主语的属格形式;又或者,这里的意思应当这样理解:由于无所执取的修行,如来自己证得了无为界。巴利
‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇañcā’’ti idaṃ idha sabbaññutaññāṇassa vibhajiyamānattā vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ vā vutte tadadhiṭṭhānato āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, tadavinābhāvato sabbampi vā bhagavato dasabalādiñāṇaṃ gahitameva hotīti katvā. Pajānantopīti pi-saddo sambhāvane, tena ‘‘tañcā’’ti ettha vuttaṃ ca-saddatthamāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – taṃ diṭṭhigatato uttaritaraṃ sārabhūtaṃ sīlādiguṇavisesampi tathāgato nābhinivisati, ko pana vādo vaṭṭāmiseti. ‘‘Aha’’nti diṭṭhivasena vā taṃ parāmasanākāramāha. Pajānāmīti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho, tena ‘‘mama’’nti taṇhāvasena parāmasanākāraṃ dasseti. Dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanaṃ parāmāso. Na hi taṃ atthi, khandhesu yaṃ ‘‘aha’’nti vā, ‘‘mama’’nti vā gahetabbaṃ siyā. Yo pana parāmāso taṇhādayova, te ca bhagavato bodhimūleyeva pahīnāti āha ‘‘parāmāsakilesāna’’ntiādi. Aparāmāsatoti vā nibbutivedanassa hetuvacanaṃ, ‘‘viditā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ apekkhitvā kattari sāmivacanaṃ, aparāmasanahetu parāmāsarahitāya paṭipattiyā tathāgatena sayameva asaṅkhatadhātu adhigatāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
从“于哪些受”等语句,世尊展示了自己说法的善巧。确实,即使在依蕴、处等而说的种种四谛教法中都有可能,但这是诸佛说法的一贯做法:为了显示那些见行者因错误的修行而闯入见的密林,同时也为了显示遍知的基础,所以特别把受提出来说。业处就是四谛的业处。如实了知后,意思是以观慧,通过所缘通达的方式,了知受的集起等;以道慧,通过无痴通达的方式,了知、通达。缘集之义,就是依“此有故彼有,此生故彼生”所说的特征,由无明等诸缘的生起,以及不以道断除。生起相就是生起的特征,即“生”的意思。关于五相,这里也应取四缘的生起相而说,应当如此理解,因为缘相也是可以得到的,并且也是这样解说的。缘灭之义,这里也应按所说的方法理解其义。“由于”即因为,或者“乐、悦”。“依止”即依所缘缘等而得的受。“此”即乐与悦的缘性,或者就是乐与悦本身,但“味”一词是依男性名词而说。这里简略之义是:对于先前生起的受,生起悦时,那先前受的可味著行相、悦的味著行相,这就是味。然而,如何依受而生起乐呢?因为意指心所乐,所以这不是过失。这里的限定语“悦”的取用,如“树是瞻波树”一样,是乐与悦。巴利
‘‘Yāsu vedanāsū’’tiādinā bhagavato desanāvilāsaṃ dasseti. Tathā hi khandhāyatanādivasena anekavidhāsu catusaccadesanāsu sambhavantīsupi ayaṃ tathāgatānaṃ desanāsu paṭipatti, yaṃ diṭṭhigatikā micchāpaṭipattiyā diṭṭhigahanaṃ pakkhandāti dassanatthaṃ vedanāyeva pariññāya bhūmidassanatthaṃ uddhaṭā. Kammaṭṭhānanti catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ viditvāti vipassanāpaññāya vedanāya samudayādīni ārammaṇapaṭivedhavasena maggapaññāya asammohapaṭivedhavasena jānitvā, paṭivijjhitvāti attho. Paccayasamudayaṭṭhenāti ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.404; saṃ. ni. 2.21; udā. 1) vuttalakkhaṇena avijjādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ uppādena ceva maggena asamugghātena ca. Nibbattilakkhaṇanti uppādalakkhaṇaṃ, jātinti attho. Pañcannaṃ lakkhaṇānanti ettha catunnaṃ paccayānampi uppādalakkhaṇameva gahetvā vuttanti gahetabbaṃ, yasmā paccayalakkhaṇampi labbhatiyeva, tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Paccayanirodhaṭṭhenāti etthāpi vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Yanti yasmā, yaṃ vā sukhaṃ somanassaṃ. Paṭiccāti ārammaṇapaccayādibhūtaṃ vedanaṃ labhitvā. Ayanti sukhasomanassānaṃ paccayabhāvo, sukhasomanassameva vā, ‘‘assādo’’ti padaṃ pana apekkhitvā pulliṅganiddeso. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – purimuppannaṃ vedanaṃ ārabbha somanassuppattiyaṃ yo purimavedanāya assādetabbākāro somanassassādanākāro, ayaṃ assādoti. Kathaṃ pana vedanaṃ ārabbha sukhaṃ uppajjatīti? Cetasikasukhassa adhippetattā nāyaṃ doso. Visesanaṃ hettha somanassaggahaṇaṃ sukhaṃ somanassanti ‘‘rukkho siṃsapā’’ti yathā.
以“无常”这个词,是依行苦的角度指出了舍受的过患,或者说指出了一切受的过患;以其余两个词(“苦”和“变易”),则依次依苦苦和坏苦的角度,指出了苦受和乐受的过患;或者不加区分地,这三个词都可以用来对应一切受,说明它们的过患。“此”指的是:受那种“已生而灭”意义上的无常性,那种“被生灭逼迫”意义上的苦性,以及“会被老与死两种方式改变”的特质——这就是受的过患;或者说,正是由于这种过患,才产生了衰败和极度的悲悯。“从受中出离”这句话里,“受”是从格用法。只要一个人还没有舍断对受的欲贪,他就仍然黏着于受。一旦他舍断了那欲贪,这个人就从受中出离、脱离了。所以,欲贪的舍断就被称为“从受中出离”。在这里,以“受”来代表,凡是与受俱生的、作为受的依止的、成为受的所缘的色法和非色法,也都已经被包含在内了。因此应当知道,这里实际上已经举示了全部五取蕴。不过,开示是以受为纲领先说的,其中的道理前面已经讲过。或者,这个道理也可以用“相”和“引导”的方法来阐明。其中,以“受”这个词所包含的五取蕴是苦谛;以“受之集”所包含的无明等是集谛;以“灭”和“出离”这些说法是灭谛;以“如实了知”这句话是道谛——这样,在这里应当知道有四圣谛。因为其余的取都以欲取为根本,而且当欲取被断除时,其余的取也就不存在了,所以说“离了欲贪,所以无取着”。“无取着而解脱”这句话,是世尊显示自己证得了道果。以“于诸受”等语句,法王开示说:他能依据因、依据趣处、依据类别来分别这个邪见,是因为他已经善巧通达了法界;这显示了一切知智连同它之前修行阶段的生起之处。巴利
‘‘Aniccā’’ti iminā saṅkhāradukkhatāvasena upekkhāvedanāya, sabbavedanāsuyeva vā ādīnavamāha, itarehi itaradukkhatāvasena yathākkamaṃ dukkhasukhavedanānaṃ, avisesena vā tīṇipi padāni sabbāsampi vedanānaṃ vasena yojetabbāni. Ayanti yo vedanāya hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccabhāvo, udayabbayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhabhāvo, jarāya maraṇena cāti dvedhā vipariṇāmetabbabhāvo ca, ayaṃ vedanāya ādīnavo, yato vā ādīnaṃ paramakāruññaṃ vāti pavattatīti. Vedanāya nissaraṇanti ettha vedanāyāti nissakkavacanaṃ, yāva vedanāpaṭibaddhaṃ chandarāgaṃ na pajahati, tāvāyaṃ puriso vedanaṃ allīnoyeva hoti. Yadā pana taṃ chandarāgaṃ pajahati, tadāyaṃ puriso vedanāya nissaṭo visaṃyutto hotīti chandarāgappahānaṃ vedanāya nissaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca vedanāggahaṇena vedanāya sahajātanissayārammaṇabhūtā ca rūpārūpadhammā gahitā eva hontīti pañcannampi upādānakkhandhānaṃ gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vedanāsīsena pana desanā āgatā, tattha kāraṇaṃ vuttameva, lakkhaṇahāranayena vā ayamattho vibhāvetabbo. Tattha vedanāggahaṇena gahitā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ, vedanānaṃ samudayaggahaṇena gahitā avijjādayo samudayasaccaṃ, atthaṅgamanissaraṇapariyāyehi nirodhasaccaṃ, ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ viditvā’’ti etena maggasaccanti evamettha cattāri saccāni veditabbāni. Kāmupādānamūlakattā sesupādānānaṃ, pahīne ca kāmupādāne upādānasesābhāvato ‘‘vigatachandarāgatāya anupādāno’’ti vuttaṃ. Anupādāvimuttoti attano maggaphalappattiṃ bhagavā dasseti. ‘‘Vedanāna’’ntiādinā hi yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā imaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ sakāraṇaṃ sagatikaṃ pabhedato vibhajituṃ samattho ahosi , tassa sabbaññutaññāṇassa saddhiṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya uppattibhūmiṃ dasseti dhammarājā.
一分常住论的注释巴利
Ekaccasassatavādavaṇṇanā
38 38. 在众生和诸行当中,认为其中某一部分是常住的,这就是“一分常住”;持这种主张的就是“一分常住论”。这些人持有这种见解,所以被称为“一分常住论者”。然而,因为他们把“一分常住论”当作自己的见解,所以才叫做“一分常住论者”。为了说明这个意思,才说“一分常住论者”。按照同样的方法,对于“一分无常论者”这个词的含义也应当理解。有人问:说了“一分常住论者”,那另外那一部分是无常,这个结论不就已经成立了吗?回答是:从意义上说的确已经成立,但从字面上并没有直接说出来。所以为了让意思更加清楚明白,才又说“一分无常论者”。因为法主世尊在这里说法,不会只说一半就让人去猜。这里的“在这里”,是指“一分常住论者”这个词。取了这个意思,就这样说了出来,也就把意思显示出来了。或者,“在这里”也可以指在这整个教导当中。确实如此,前面三种论是按众生来区分的,第四种则是按诸行来区分的。“一分行常住论者”这个说法,是为了如实显示那些被执为常住的法的真实本性,而不是按照一分常住论者的见解来说的。因为他们的主张是:被他们认定为常住的,就是无为法。所以他才说“心……乃至……将住立”。因为,对于一个存在,如果承认它是由诸缘所造作的,那么不用发疯的人也能承认它并非常住、恒常等等。由此也就说明了“生灭恒常相应”之类的七种断灭论是不合理的。巴利
38. Sattesu saṅkhāresu ca ekaccaṃ sassataṃ etassāti ekaccasassato, ekaccasassatavādo. So etesaṃ atthīti ekaccasassatikā. Te pana yasmā ekaccasassato vādo diṭṭhi etesanti ekaccasassatavādā nāma honti, tasmā tamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘ekaccasassatavādā’’ti. Iminā nayena ekaccaasassatikā dipadassapi attho veditabbo. Nanu ca ‘‘ekaccasassatikā’’ti vutte tadaññassa ekaccassa asassatatāsanniṭṭhānaṃ siddhameva hotīti? Saccaṃ siddhameva hoti atthato, na pana saddato. Tasmā supākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ekaccaasassatikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi idha sāvasesaṃ katvā dhammaṃ deseti dhammassāmī. Idhāti ‘‘ekaccasassatikā’’ti imasmiṃ pade. Gahitāti vuttā, tathā ceva attho dassito. Idhāti vā imissā desanāya. Tathā hi purimakā tayo vādā sattavasena, catuttho saṅkhāravasena vibhatto. ‘‘Saṅkhārekaccasassatikā’’ti idaṃ tehi sassatabhāvena gayhamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ yāthāvasabhāvadassanavasena vuttaṃ, na panekaccasassatikamatadassanavasena. Tassa hi sassatābhimataṃ asaṅkhatamevāti laddhi. Tenevāha ‘‘cittanti vā…pe… ṭhassatī’’ti. Na hi yassa bhāvassa paccayehi abhisaṅkhatabhāvaṃ paṭijānāti, tasseva niccadhuvādibhāvo anummattakena sakkā paṭiññātuṃ. Etena ‘‘uppādavayadhuvatāyuttabhāvā siyā niccā, siyā aniccā siyā na vattabbā’’tiādinā pavattassa sattabhaṅgavādassa ayuttatā vibhāvitā hoti.
在这里,要说明这种说法的不合理之处:如果有人说“任何法以某种自性被称为存在,就以那种自性不存在”等等,那就会变成不定论。如果换一种方式来说,就不会变成不定论。而且在这里,不适合说它跟方位差别等有什么关系,因为这一点是一切世间都公认的,没有争议。但有些人说:“就像用金瓶做成王冠时,瓶性消失了,冠性生起了,而金性仍然存在;同样,在一切存在中,有些法灭去,有些法生起,而自性却依然存在。”对这些人应当这样说:“那个在瓶和王冠中一直存在的‘金’到底是什么?如果是色等,那它就像声音一样是无常的。如果是色等的集合,所谓集合只是假名而已,在它里面根本找不到‘存在’‘不存在’或‘常’这些性质。”这样就不会变成不定论。而且,诸法以及具有这些法的事物在种种变化上的过失,在考察常见论的地方已经说过了。所以,那里的道理应当按那里所说的方式来理解。再者,由于在究竟义上承认有‘我’和‘世间’的存在,它们就呈现出既不能说是常也不能说是无常的样子,就像常等中的某一种色,或者像灯焰等一样。因为灯焰等这些有生灭自性的事物,根本无法被理解为既非常也非无常的自性,就像命者的常等中的某一种色一样。这样一来,就像七种断灭论一样,其余各种断灭论也都不可能成立。因此,应当知道七种断灭论的说法是不合理的。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ ayuttatāvibhāvanā – yadi ‘‘yena sabhāvena yo dhammo atthīti vuccati, teneva sabhāvena so dhammo natthī’’tiādinā vucceyya, siyā anekantavādo. Atha aññena, siyā na anekantavādo. Na cettha desantarādisambandhabhāvo yutto vattuṃ tassa sabbalokasiddhattā, vivādābhāvato . Ye pana vadanti ‘‘yathā suvaṇṇaghaṭena makuṭe kate ghaṭabhāvo nassati, makuṭabhāvo uppajjati, suvaṇṇabhāvo tiṭṭhatiyeva, evaṃ sabbabhāvānaṃ koci dhammo nassati, koci dhammo uppajjati, sabhāvo pana tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Te vattabbā ‘‘kiṃ taṃ suvaṇṇaṃ, yaṃ ghaṭe makuṭe ca avaṭṭhitaṃ, yadi rūpādi, so saddo viya anicco. Atha rūpādi samūho, samūho nāma sammutimattaṃ. Na tassa atthitā natthitā niccatā vā labbhatī’’ti anekantavādo na siyā. Dhammānañca dhammino aññathānaññathāsu doso vuttoyeva sassatavādavicāraṇāyaṃ. Tasmā so tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Apica niccāniccanavattabbarūpo attā loko ca paramatthato vijjamānatāpaṭijānanato yathā niccādīnaṃ aññataraṃ rūpaṃ, yathā vā dīpādayo. Na hi dīpādīnaṃ udayabbayasabhāvānaṃ niccāniccanavattabbasabhāvatā sakkā viññātuṃ, jīvassa niccādīsu aññataraṃ rūpaṃ viyāti evaṃ sattabhaṅgassa viya sesabhaṅgānampi asambhavoyevāti sattabhaṅgavādassa ayuttatā veditabbā.
在这里,如果有人主张“自在天是常住的,其他众生是无常的”,这种论说就属于“一部分众生是常住的”这一类,比如主张自在天的人。如果有人主张“极微是常的、不变的,由极微所构成的事物是无常的”,这种论说就属于“一部分行是常住的”这一类,比如迦那陀派的人。难道在“有些法是常住的,有些法是无常的”这个主张里,确认眼等是无常的,不正是如实了知它们的本来面目吗?这怎么会是邪见呢?又有谁会这样说:“确认眼等是无常的,这是邪见”?其实,正是在这些无常的法里面,对某些法固执地认为它们是常住的,这才是这里所说的邪见。可是,当这种邪见一生起,对眼等无常性的了知就被它破坏了,因为两者混在一起,就像掺了毒的精制酥油一样,已经无法发挥它本来的作用,所以不能把它归入正见这一边。或者说,即使眼等已经被确认是无常的,可那些持邪见的人仍然把它们执取为具有“命者”的自性,这样一来,对它们无常性的了解就难免变成邪见。所以经中才说:“眼……乃至……身,这就是我的我。”这样一来,依据无为界和有为界,依次说“有些法是常住的,有些法是无常的”,持这种分别说的论者也会落入“一部分是常住”的主张。因此,这类指责就没有成立的余地,因为这是对法的真实自性如理通达的缘故。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘issaro nicco, aññe sattā aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā sattekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi issaravādā. ‘‘Paramāṇavo niccā dhuvā, aṇukādayo aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā saṅkhārekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi kāṇādā. Nanu ‘‘ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti etasmiṃ vāde cakkhādīnaṃ asassatatāsanniṭṭhānaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodho eva, tayidaṃ kathaṃ micchādassananti, ko vā evamāha ‘‘cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ micchādassana’’nti? Asassatesuyeva pana kesañci dhammānaṃ sassatabhāvābhiniveso idha micchādassanaṃ. Tena pana ekavāre pavattamānena cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvāvabodho vidūsito saṃsaṭṭhabhāvato visasaṃsaṭṭho viya sappimaṇḍo sakiccakaraṇāsamatthatāya sammādassanapakkhe ṭhapetabbataṃ nārahatīti. Asassatabhāvena nicchitāpi vā cakkhuādayo samāropitajīvasabhāvā eva diṭṭhigatikehi gayhantīti tadavabodhassa micchādassanabhāvo na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘cakkhuṃ itipi…pe… kāyo itipi ayaṃ me attā’’tiādi. Evañca katvā asaṅkhatāya saṅkhatāya ca dhātuyā vasena yathākkamaṃ ‘‘ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti evaṃ pavatto vibhajjavādopi ekaccasassatavādo āpajjatīti evaṃpakārā codanā anavakāsā hoti aviparītadhammasabhāvasampaṭipattibhāvato.
在这里,即使在前一种论点中,把无常的法执取为“常住”,也特别是一种邪见;但把常住的法执取为“常住”,就不是邪见,因为这是如实地执取。然而,正是在那些无常的法当中,由于区分出“某些法确实是常住的,某些是无常的”这样应当执取的法,才说这种论点不同于别的论点。在这里不能说:“因为部分包含在整体之中,所以对一部分有所保留的常住执取,就归入无保留的常住执取之中。”因为立论者是按照所取对象的差别,才生起这两种论点的。有一类执见者坚执“一切法都是常住的”,另一类则坚执“有一部分是常住的”。对诸行无保留地全部执取,与只执取一部分,正是这两种论点的区别所在。还有更进一步的原因:他们所坚执的对象,有的是多种类的蕴相续,有的是单一类的蕴相续。四种常住论者,由于类别不同,或者依止于种种色身的聚集,或者依止于无色法的聚集,生起常住的坚执;他们或者靠神通智,或者靠随念之类,执取色身的坏灭。经中也这样说:“从那里死后,生到了别处”,以及“他们死去,他们投生”等等。获得更殊胜境界的一分常住论者,在没有分辨差别的蕴相续上,以执取常住相的方式生起坚执,因为他的这种坚执只以一生范围内蕴的相续为对象。这样一来,在三种论点中,都只说“他忆念过去生,再往前就不能忆念了”这么多。而推理者、常住论者和一分常住论者,他们常住坚执的差别,是以色法、无色法为对象,这一点非常明显。巴利
Kāmañcettha purimavādepi asassatānaṃ dhammānaṃ ‘‘sassatā’’ti gahaṇaṃ visesato micchādassanaṃ, sassatānaṃ pana ‘‘sassatā’’ti gāho na micchādassanaṃ yathāsabhāvaggahaṇabhāvato. Asassatesuyeva pana ‘‘kecideva dhammā sassatā, keci asassatā’’ti gahetabbadhammesu vibhāgappavattiyā imassa vādassa vādantaratā vuttā, na cettha ‘‘samudāyantogadhattā ekadesassa sappadesasassataggāho nippadesasassataggāhe samodhānaṃ gacchatī’’ti sakkā vattuṃ vādī tabbisayavisesavasena vādadvayassa pavattattā. Aññe eva hi diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘sabbe dhammā sassatā’’ti abhiniviṭṭhā, aññe ‘‘ekaccasassatā’’ti. Saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ, ekadesapariggaho ca vādadvayassa paribyattoyeva. Kiñca bhiyyo anekavidhasamussaye ekavidhasamussaye ca khandhapabandhe abhinivesabhāvato. Catubbidhopi hi sassatavādī jātivisesavasena nānāvidharūpakāyasannissaye eva arūpadhammapuñje sassatābhinivesī jāto abhiññāṇena anussavādīhi ca rūpakāyabhedaggahaṇato. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘tato cuto amutra udapādi’’nti (dī. ni. 1.32) ‘‘cavanti upapajjantī’’ti ca ādi. Visesalābhī ekaccasassatiko anupadhāritabhedasamussayeva dhammapabandhe sassatākāraggahaṇena abhinivisanaṃ janesi ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhasantānavisayattā tadabhinivesassa. Tathā ca tīsupi vādesu ‘‘taṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati, tato paraṃ nānussaratī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ, takkīnaṃ pana sassatekaccasassatavādīnaṃ sassatābhinivesaviseso rūpārūpadhammavisayatāya supākaṭoyevāti.
39 经过极长时间的超越,是指离开了坏劫和坏劫住的状态。由于“界”这个词有多种含义,加上前缀saṃ的vaṭṭa一词是表示毁灭的意思,所以说“灭尽”,意思是依灭尽而进行。从能造成毁灭的大雨云生起开始,一直到连极微细的行都不存在为止,这期间就说世间在坏灭。这里的“世间”,指的是大地等器世间。“在上层梵天世间中”,是指在少净天等色界梵天世间中。这里所说的劫坏,主要是指以火来毁灭,因为火比较常发生,所以世尊说“他们成为转生光音天者”。“或在无色界中”,这里的“或”字,应当理解为在坏灭的世间界和其他世间界之间作选择。因为不能认为“所有恶趣众生那时都投生到色界、无色界”,原因是恶趣中寿命极长的众生不可能投生到人界。虽然一切众生都是依造作之心而结生,但由于没有外在条件、唯由心而生,所以色界有情被称为“意所成”。如果这样,那欲界的化生有情不也成了意所成吗?不会,为了说明“意所成”这个称呼是用在由殊胜心——也就是增上心——所生的有情上,他说“由于是由禅那心所生,所以是意所成”。那么无色界有情不也成了意所成吗?不会,因为在无色界并没有“需要靠外在条件来产生”这种疑虑,而且“唯由心而生”这个限定并不成立。或者说,这个“意所成”的说法在世间是约定俗成的,用在色界有情上。比如那些主张吠陀的人就以五种方式说自我:“食所成、气所成、意所成、喜所成、识所成。”在断灭论中也会说到“天界的、有色的、意所成的”。在这些天中有清净的光明,所以叫“净”。他说“以殊胜”,是指光音天;而少光天和无量光天则住两劫和四劫。住八劫,就是八个大劫。巴利
39.Dīghassakālassa atikkamenāti vivaṭṭavivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīnaṃ apagamena. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ saṃ-saddena yutto vaṭṭa-saddo vināsavācīti āha ‘‘vinassatī’’ti, saṅkhayavasena vattatīti attho. Vipattikaramahāmeghasamuppattito paṭṭhāya hi yāva aṇusahagatopi saṅkhāro na hoti, tāva loko saṃvaṭṭatīti vuccati. Lokoti cettha pathavīādibhājanaloko adhippeto. Uparibrahmalokesūti parittasubhādīsu rūpībrahmalokesu. Agginā hi kappavuṭṭhānaṃ idhādhippetaṃ bahulaṃ pavattanato. Tenevāha bhagavā ‘‘ābhassarasaṃvattanikā hontī’’ti. Arūpesuvāti vā-saddena saṃvaṭṭamānalokadhātūhi aññalokadhātūsu vāti vikappanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Na hi ‘‘sabbe apāyasattā tadā rūpārūpabhavesu uppajjantī’’ti sakkā viññātuṃ apāyesu dīghatamāyukānaṃ manussalokūpattiyā asambhavato. Satipi sabbasattānaṃ abhisaṅkhāramanasā nibbattabhāve bāhirapaccayehi vinā manasāva nibbattattā ‘‘manomayā’’ti vuccanti rūpāvacarasattā. Yadi evaṃ kāmabhave opapātikasattānampi manomayabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati adhicittabhūtena atisayamanasā nibbattasattesu manomayavohāratoti dassanto āha ‘‘jhānamanena nibbattattā manomayā’’ti. Evaṃ arūpāvacarasattānampi manomayabhāvo āpajjatīti ce? Na, tattha bāhirapaccayehi nibbattetabbatāsaṅkāya eva abhāvato, ‘‘manasāva nibbattā’’ti avadhāraṇāsambhavato. Niruḷho vāyaṃ loke manomayavohāro rūpāvacarasattesu. Tathā hi ‘‘annamayo pānamayo manomayo ānandamayo viññāṇamayo’’ti pañcadhā attānaṃ vedavādino vadanti. Ucchedavādepi vakkhati ‘‘dibbo rūpī manomayo’’ti (dī. ni. 1.86). Sobhanā pabhā etesu santīti subhā. ‘‘Ukkaṃsenā’’ti ābhassaradeve sandhāyāha, parittābhā appamāṇābhā pana dve cattāro ca kappe tiṭṭhanti. Aṭṭhakappeti aṭṭha mahākappe.
40 “住立”:从能带来成就的大云雨生起开始,依地持水、水持风、风持大地等生起的方式而安住;或者因为“界”有多种含义,意思就是“生起”。“自然”:就是依自性,这与“空”这个词相关联。在这里,说出原因:“因为没有已投生的众生”,意思是尚未投生。以此说明:有些天宫因为其中已投生的众生死去而成为空的,但这里不是这样。梵众天、梵辅天、大梵天是梵类诸天,他们所住的地方也叫“梵类天”。“业缘”:业是此地的亲依止缘,所以叫业缘。或者,因为那里投生众生的受报业具有资助缘的性质,所以是业的缘,叫业缘。“时节所生”:即从时节所生。或者读作“业缘时节所生”:业是资助的缘,或者作为业的资助的缘就是业缘,那个本身就是时节,即业缘时节,它就是此地的生源——应这样连接理解。“在这里”:即在称为“梵宫”的梵类天之地。怎么在殊胜的第二禅天地安住的有情,会投生到较低劣的初禅天地呢?为此说了“那时众生……”等文。“降下”:即以投生的方式前往下方之地。巴利
40.Saṇṭhātīti sampattikaramahāmeghasamuppattito paṭṭhāya pathavīsandhārakudakataṃsandhārakavāyumahāpathavīādīnaṃ samuppattivasena ṭhāti, ‘‘sambhavati’’ icceva vā attho anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ. Pakatiyāti sabhāvena, tassa ‘‘suñña’’nti iminā sambandho. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘nibbattasattānaṃ natthitāyā’’ti, anuppannattāti attho, tena yathā ekaccāni vimānāni tattha nibbattasattānaṃ cutattā suññāni honti, na evamidanti dasseti. Brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmāno brahmakāyikā, tesaṃ nivāso bhūmipi ‘‘brahmakāyikā’’ti vuttā. Kammaṃ upanissayavasena paccayo etissāti kammapaccayā. Atha vā tattha nibbattasattānaṃ vipaccanakakammassa sahakārīpaccayabhāvato, kammassa paccayāti kammapaccayā. Utu samuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti utusamuṭṭhānā. ‘‘Kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānā’’ti vā pāṭho, kammasahāyo paccayo, kammassa vā sahāyabhūto paccayo kammapaccayo , sova utu kammapaccayautu, so samuṭṭhānaṃ etissāti yojetabbaṃ. Etthāti ‘‘brahmavimāna’’nti vuttāya brahmakāyikabhūmiyā. Kathaṃ paṇītāya dutiyajjhānabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitānaṃ hīnāya paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyā upapatti hotīti āha ‘‘atha sattāna’’ntiādi. Otarantīti upapajjanavasena heṭṭhābhūmiṃ gacchanti.
“寿量微小”是指:他所造的那种殊胜福业,由于其所应生起的果报相续,使得他的寿命极为有限。“唯依寿量”就是唯依最长的寿量。那么,什么叫做最长寿?它又是怎样被限定为有量的呢?应当这样说明:正如各类众生在各自不同的生存状态中,由于过去世已成就的愿求和亲依止缘之力,而有身体、肢节、肤色、形态、大小等种种差别;同样,对于胎生者、欲界天和色界的有情来说,由精血、时节、食物等为缘而生起、并由诸缘所支持的果报相续,其住立时间的限定,在各自趣、部类等中大多是一定的。那(寿量)对于诸天、地狱众生和北俱卢洲人来说,是决定有限的;而北俱卢洲人的寿量则完全是决定有限的。其余的人、饿鬼、畜生,则因为能导致长久住立的业多,其时,依那些与业俱行的相续所生的精血等缘,以及以那些为根本的月亮、太阳等平等不平等转变所生的时节、食物等平等不平等诸缘之力,其时间有长有短,没有决定的限量。而它的决定,正如先前已成就的愿求之力那样,在各自趣、部类等中,肤色、形态等差别之决定,由见闻等而成立;同样,从最初受取时便已成立。如是,在种种投生中受生的众生,其寿命大多等量住立的时间,由见闻而得,执取那为究竟,依所发起的愿求之力,从最初即可知决定的限量。然而,因为业在种种投生中,能如其所应地产生各自投生所决定的肤色等,同样,在决定寿量限度的投生中,业不能越过限度而产生果报,所以说“唯依寿量而命终”。又因为,由支持、俱行、保护诸缘,所执取诸蕴得以生起的行相,实际上就是最长寿;由于它不越过如上所说的限度,即使还有余业,也不可能住立,因此说“不能以自己的福德之力而住立”。或者“劫”是指无数劫,或者其半劫,或者少于半劫,或者多于半劫,这里的“或”字是表示分别之义。巴利
Appāyuketi yaṃ uḷāraṃ puññakammaṃ kataṃ, tassa uppajjanārahavipākapabandhato appaparimāṇāyuke. Āyuppamāṇenevāti paramāyuppamāṇeneva. Kiṃ panetaṃ paramāyu nāma, kathaṃ vā taṃ paricchinnapamāṇanti? Vuccate – yo tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhavavisese purimasiddhabhavapatthanūpanissayavasena sarīrāvayavavaṇṇasaṇṭhānapamāṇādivisesā viya taṃtaṃgatinikāyādīsu yebhuyyena niyataparicchedo gabbhaseyyakakāmāvacaradevarūpāvacarasattānaṃ sukkasoṇitautubhojanādi utuādipaccayuppannapaccayūpatthambhito vipākapabandhassa ṭhitikālaniyamo, so yathāsakaṃ khaṇamattāvaṭṭhāyīnampi attano sahajātānaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ ṭhapanākāravuttitāya pavattakāni rūpārūpajīvitindriyāni yasmā na kevalaṃ nesaṃ khaṇaṭhitiyā eva kāraṇabhāvena anupālakāni, atha kho yāva bhavaṅgupacchedā anupabandhassa avicchedahetubhāvenāpi, tasmā āyuhetukattā kāraṇūpacārena āyu, ukkaṃsaparicchedavasena paramāyūti ca vuccati. Taṃ pana devānaṃ nerayikānaṃ uttarakurukānañca niyataparicchedaṃ, uttarakurukānaṃ pana ekantaniyataparicchedameva, avasiṭṭhamanussapetatiracchānānaṃ pana ciraṭṭhitisaṃvattanikakammabahule kāle taṃkammasahitasantānajanitasukkasoṇitappaccayānaṃ taṃmūlakānañca candasūriyasamavisamaparivattanādijanitautuāhārādisamavisama paccayānaṃ vasena cirācirakālato aniyataparicchedaṃ, tassa ca yathā purimasiddhabhavapatthanāvasena taṃtaṃgatinikāyādīsu vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivisesaniyamo siddho dassanānussavādīhi, tathā ādito gahaṇasiddhiyā. Evaṃ tāsu tāsu upapattīsu nibbattasattānaṃ yebhuyyena samappamāṇaṭṭhitikālaṃ dassanānussavehi labhitvā taṃ paramataṃ ajjhosāya pavattitabhavapatthanāvasena ādito paricchedaniyamo veditabbo. Yasmā pana kammaṃ tāsu tāsu upapattīsu yathā taṃtaṃupapattiniyatavaṇṇādinibbattane samatthaṃ, evaṃ niyatāyuparicchedāsu upapattīsu paricchedātikkamena vipākanibbattane samatthaṃ na hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘āyuppamāṇeneva cavantī’’ti. Yasmā pana upatthambhakasahāyehi anupālakappaccayehi upādinnakakkhandhānaṃ pavattetabbākāro atthato paramāyu, tassa yathāvuttaparicchedānatikkamanato satipi kammāvasese ṭhānaṃ na sambhavati, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘attano puññabaleneva ṭhātuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Kappaṃ vāti asaṅkhyeyyakappaṃ vā tassa upaḍḍhaṃ vā upaḍḍhakappato ūnamadhikaṃ vāti vikappanattho vā-saddo.
41 不喜乐,就是因独处而生的不欢喜。不过,这种不喜乐之所以生起,是因为希望和其他人会合,所以说它是“期盼其他有情前来”。由于与可爱的事物分离,或者得不到可爱的事物,内心受到扰乱,产生厌倦,这在意义上就是忧俱心的生起,因此说“与嗔相应”。对于长久沉浸在禅那之乐中的人,当上述那种不喜乐的相状生起时,成为执取“我的”和“我”的原因的贪爱和邪见,在这里就叫作“发颤”。而它们又是内心先前状态的动摇和震颤,所以说“恐惧、悸动”。因此说:“贪爱所引的发颤和邪见所引的发颤,两者都适用。”不过在义理摄释中说:“‘啊,但愿其他有情也来到这个状态!’这叫作贪爱所引的发颤。”这是为了显示有别于邪见所引发颤的单独例子,才把贪爱所引的发颤从中单独提出来说的,不应认为那里没有邪见所引的发颤。那种发颤就是心的惊恐。“怖畏”是指面对可怕所缘相而生起的强烈恐惧。由它导致身体僵直的状态,就是“惊悚”。“怖畏、悚惧”之中,“怖畏”是指在坏灭随观修习纯熟之后,对一切行生起畏惧而出现的怖畏智。“悚惧”是指与愧俱生的智,或者就是愧本身。“惊恐”是指通过过患随观和厌离随观而对诸行生起的惊恐之智。与智者俱在、共同运作,或者覆盖住嗔,所以叫“俱在者”,即同伴,那种状态就是“同伴性”。巴利
41.Anabhiratīti ekavihārena anabhirati. Sā pana yasmā aññehi samāgamicchā hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aparassāpi sattassa āgamanapatthanā’’ti. Piyavatthuvirahena piyavatthualābhena vā cittavighāto ukkaṇṭhitā, sā atthato domanassacittuppādo yevāti āha ‘‘paṭighasampayuttā’’ti. Dīgharattaṃ jhānaratiyā ramamānassa vuttappakāraṃ anabhiratinimittaṃ uppannā ‘‘mama’’nti ca ‘‘aha’’nti ca gahaṇassa kāraṇabhūtā taṇhādiṭṭhiyo idha paritassanā. Tā pana cittassa purimāvatthāya calanaṃ kampananti āha ‘‘ubbijjanā phandanā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘taṇhātassanāpi diṭṭhitassanāpi vaṭṭatī’’ti. Yaṃ pana atthuddhāre ‘‘aho vata aññepi sattā itthattaṃ āgaccheyyunti ayaṃ taṇhātassanā nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ diṭṭhitassanāya visuṃ udāharaṇaṃ dassentena taṇhātassanaṃyeva tato niddhāretvā vuttaṃ, na pana tattha diṭṭhitassanāya abhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tāsatassanā cittutrāso. Bhayānakanti bheravārammaṇanimittaṃ balavabhayaṃ. Tena sarīrassa thaddhabhāvo chambhitattaṃ bhayaṃ saṃveganti ettha bhayanti bhaṅgānupassanāya ciṇṇante sabbasaṅkhārato bhāyanavasena uppannaṃ bhayañāṇaṃ. Saṃveganti sahottappañāṇaṃ, ottappameva vā. Santāsanti ādīnavanibbidānupassanāhi saṅkhārehi santassanañāṇaṃ. Saha byāyati pavattati, dosaṃ vā chādetīti sahabyo, sahāyo, tassa bhāvaṃ sahabyataṃ.
42 “征服之后而安住”:这是指“这些有情”。然而,因为他以值得赞叹的状态和最殊胜的状态,自认为“我征服了那些有情而安住”,所以经文说“我是最胜者”。另外,“见十方”是通过说明见无阻碍,以及能把握所知之差别,来宣称自己是无遮障的见者,因此说“我看见一切,这就是意思”。“已存在的与将存在的”:“已存在”指过去已生起,“将存在”指现在存在和未来将存在。不过,在注释书中,“将存在”这个词只是按现在时的意义来解。“于第一心刹那”:在结生心刹那。虽然那位梵天由于见不稳固,以凡夫之态,忘失了先前诸生所熟习的业自受用智,因幻化神变之力,被仅依心念生起而化作的有情所颠倒,执取“我是自在者、作者、创造者”等自在所作之见而陷入执著,以执取的方式安住,并非以安立的方式,因为经文说“他这样想”,是以安立的方式而说;然而,为了显示他的那种执取是从安立的方式产生的,所以说“想从原因上成立”,以及“作了承认”。因此世尊说“那是什么原因”等。其中,“意的希求”:是仅用意识而起的希求,亦即只是心念活动的意思。“如此存在”:即这种状态。然而,因为“如此”在此处是指梵天的存在,所以说“梵天的存在,这就是意思”。难道诸天在投生之后即刻没有“从某某趣死后,由此某某业投生于此”的观察吗?确实有,但那是对于在先前诸生中已完全安住于业自受用智的人而言。然而,应知这些有情在先前诸生中也是以自在所作之见而系缚执取的。因此说“以此我”等。巴利
42.Abhibhavitvā ṭhito ime satteti adhippāyo. Yasmā pana so pāsaṃsabhāvena uttamabhāvena ca ‘‘te satte abhibhavitvā ṭhito’’ti attānaṃ maññati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘jeṭṭhakohamasmī’’ti. Aññadatthu dasoti dassane antarāyābhāvavacanena, ñeyyavisesapariggāhikabhāvena ca anāvaraṇadassāvitaṃ paṭijānātīti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ passāmīti attho’’ti. Bhūtabhabyānanti ahesunti bhūtā, bhavanti bhavissantīti bhabyā, aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana vattamānakālavaseneva bhabya-saddassa attho dassito. Paṭhamacittakkhaṇeti paṭisandhicittakkhaṇe. Kiñcāpi so brahmā anavaṭṭhitadassanattā puthujjanassa purimatarajātiparicitampi kammassakataññāṇaṃ vissajjetvā vikubbaniddhivasena cittuppattimattapaṭibaddhena sattanimmānena vipallaṭṭho ‘‘ahaṃ issaro kattā nimmātā’’tiādinā issarakuttadassanaṃ pakkhandamāno abhinivisanavaseneva patiṭṭhito, na patiṭṭhāpanavasena ‘‘tassa evaṃ hotī’’ti vuttattā, patiṭṭhāpanakkameneva pana tassa so abhiniveso jātoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘kāraṇato sādhetukāmo’’ti, ‘‘paṭiññaṃ katvā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’tiādi. Tattha manopaṇidhīti manasā eva patthanā, tathā cittappavattimattamevāti attho, itthabhāvanti idappakārataṃ. Yasmā pana itthanti brahmattabhāvo idhādhippeto, tasmā ‘‘brahmabhāvanti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Nanu ca devānaṃ upapattisamanantaraṃ ‘‘imissā nāma gatiyā cavitvā iminā nāma kammunā idhūpapannā’’ti paccavekkhaṇā hotīti? Saccaṃ hoti, sā pana purimajātīsu kammassakataññāṇe sammadeva niviṭṭhajjhāsayānaṃ. Ime pana sattā purimāsupi jātīsu issarakuttadassanavasena vinibandhābhinivesā ahesunti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘iminā maya’’ntiādi.
43 “Īsati”就是“自在”,意思是“胜伏”。大的自在者就是大自在天;不过,由于他具有善巧安立的大自在性,别人称他为“大自在”,所以他就是“大威德者”;更殊胜的大威德,就是“更大威德者”——应当这样理解这个词的含义。然而,这种大威德的状态是通过主宰与眷属的圆满而被人认知的,因此说:“依自在与眷属而有更大的美誉。”巴利
43. Īsatīti īso, abhibhūti attho. Mahā īso maheso, suppatiṭṭhamahesatāya pana parehi ‘‘maheso’’ti akkhātabbatāya mahesakkho, atisayena mahesakkho mahesakkhataroti vacanattho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā pana so mahesakkhabhāvo ādhipateyyaparivārasampattiyā viññāyati, tasmā ‘‘issariyaparivāravasena mahāyasataro’’ti vuttaṃ.
44 44.“就是在这里到来”:指就在这个人间世界,以结生的方式到来。“某个有情”中的“yaṃ”只是语助词,或者是在具格中表示反身指代,意思是“以某种状态”,也可以指动作本身。“来至此生”:这里说的是,这种“来至此生”的情形是存在的。这个道理也适用于“出家、触证心定、随念宿住”等语句。因为“比丘们,确实存在这种情形:某个有情……”这一句,应当分别与“出家”等语句连接起来理解。巴利
44.Idheva āgacchatīti imasmiṃ manussaloke eva paṭisandhivasena āgacchati. Yaṃ aññataro sattoti ettha yanti nipātamattaṃ, karaṇe vā paccattaniddeso, yena ṭhānenāti attho, kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā. Itthattaṃ āgacchatīti ettha yadetaṃ itthattassa āgamanaṃ, etaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatīti attho. Esa nayo ‘‘pabbajati, cetosamādhiṃ phusati, pubbenivāsaṃ anussaratī’’ti etesupi padesu. ‘‘Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ bhikkhave vijjati, yaṃ aññataro satto’’ti imañhi padaṃ ‘‘pabbajatī’’tiādīhi padehi paccekaṃ yojetabbanti.
45 45. “因嬉戏而败坏”是指因嬉戏而败坏的天众;这些因嬉戏而败坏的天众就是“嬉戏败坏者”。或者,因为他们具有“嬉戏败坏”这一性质,所以称为“嬉戏败坏者”。“超过时限”就是过度,意思是超过了受用食物的时间。由男女交合所生的快乐、嬉戏欢笑的快乐,就是乐法、乐的自性。关于“食物”:这里,天众的食物是什么?进食的时间又是什么?所有欲界天众都以甘露为食,从下层天到上层天,这甘露越来越精妙。他们各自按自己的一天为周期,每天进食。但有些人说:“他们吃下像猫脚印那么大小的甘露,放在舌头上的一瞬间,就能遍满全身直到发尖和指甲尖,而且能维持七天。”“不停地咀嚼吞咽”这种说法,是出于假设而说的。业生的火界之所以强盛,是因为它由广大的福德所生,也因为广大、厚重、润滑的甘露食物被消化。而化身则柔软、纤细、娇嫩,所以羸弱。正因如此,世尊在因德娑罗窟中,对无法站在自然地面上的帝释天说:“请你决意让身体变粗重吧。”“他们的”指人类的;“事”指化身;“有些人”指无畏山寺的僧众。巴利
45. Khiḍḍāya padussantīti khiḍḍāpadosino, khiḍḍāpadosino eva khiḍḍāpadosikā, khiḍḍāpadoso vā etesaṃ atthīti khiḍḍāpadosikā. Atikkantavelaṃ ativelaṃ, āhārūpabhogakālaṃ atikkamitvāti attho. Methunasampayogena uppajjanakasukhaṃ keḷihassasukhaṃ ratidhammo ratisabhāvo. Āhāranti ettha ko devānaṃ āhāro, kā āhāravelāti? Sabbesampi kāmāvacaradevānaṃ sudhā āhāro, sā heṭṭhimehi uparimānaṃ paṇītatamā hoti, taṃ yathāsakaṃ divasavasena divase divase bhuñjanti. Keci pana ‘‘biḷārapadappamāṇaṃ sudhāhāraṃ bhuñjanti, so jivhāya ṭhapitamatto yāva kesagganakhaggā kāyaṃ pharati, tesaṃyeva divasavasena sattadivase yāpanasamattho ca hotī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Nirantaraṃ khādantā pivantā’’ti idaṃ parikappanavasena vuttaṃ. Kammajatejassa balavabhāvo uḷārapuññanibbattattā, uḷāragarusiniddhasudhāhārajīraṇato ca. Karajakāyassa mandabhāvo mudusukhumālabhāvato. Teneva hi bhagavā indasālaguhāyaṃ pakatipathaviyaṃ saṇṭhātuṃ asakkontaṃ sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ ‘‘oḷārikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhehī’’ti āha. Tesanti manussānaṃ. Vatthunti karajakāyaṃ. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino.
47 “以意”是指被嫉妒所败坏的心。由于嫉妒而使心败坏,这叫意败坏;他们认为这种意败坏是毁灭之因,所以叫“意败坏者”,这里应当这样理解。“不怒者能保护自己”:愤怒者的愤怒,面对另一方不愤怒的人时,因为对方没有执取、愤怒只生起一次而不成为习惯,所以无法使对方退堕,就像火焰到了水边就熄灭一样。因此,不愤怒的人能保护自己免于退堕。然而当双方都愤怒时,彼此的敌意一再增长,愤怒变得极其锐利、具有烧毁所依的作用,生起时就烧灼心的所依处,摧毁那极其微细柔嫩的化身,随后整个生命体都消失。因此说“然而当两者皆……”等。世尊也这样说过:“彼此以败坏的心、疲惫的身体……退堕。”“法性”就是法的规律。由于他们的化身羸弱,而如此生起的愤怒又极为强烈,所以他们自然会从那个状态退堕——这就是那些色法与无色法的本性,也是这里的意趣。巴利
47.Manenāti issāpakatattā paduṭṭhena manasā. Usūyāvasena manasova padoso manopadoso, so etesaṃ atthi vināsahetubhūtoti manopadosikāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Akuddho rakkhatīti kuddhassa so kodho itarasmiṃ akujjhante anupādāno ekavārameva uppattiyā anāsevano cāvetuṃ na sakkoti udakantaṃ patvā aggi viya nibbāyati, tasmā akuddho taṃ cavanato rakkhati, ubhosu pana kuddhesu bhiyyo bhiyyo aññamaññamhi parivaḍḍhanavasena tikhiṇasamudācāro nissayadahanaraso kodho uppajjamāno hadayavatthuṃ nidahanto accantasukhumālakarajakāyaṃ vināseti, tato sakalopi attabhāvo antaradhāyati. Tenāha ‘‘ubhosu panā’’tiādi . Tathā cāha bhagavā ‘‘aññamaññaṃ paduṭṭhacittā kilantakāyā…pe… cavantī’’ti. Dhammatāti dhammaniyāmo. So ca tesaṃ karajakāyassa mandatāya, tathāuppajjanakakodhassa ca balavatāya ṭhānaso cavanaṃ, tesaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ sabhāvoti adhippāyo.
49 看见眼等的坏灭:因为在违逆的缘聚合时,能见到它们发生变异,最后又归于看不见,所以看到它们的坏灭;这是因为色法的坏灭比较粗显。给予缘:指以无间缘等方式成为缘。更强大:这是针对心的坏灭更为迅速而说的。事实上,在一个色法还持续存在的时候,就有十六个心识坏灭。不见坏灭:心虽然刹那刹那地坏灭,但它是作为后一个心的无间缘而坏灭的,因此就好像把前一个心的消失遮盖住了,让后一个心生起,于是存在的这一面更强大、更明显,而不是不存在的那一面,所以看不到心的坏灭。这个意思通过旋火轮的比喻就能非常清楚地了解。然而,推理者们因为对多样性的理路极其陌生,又对单一性的理路错误执取,于是就生起这样的执著:“这个识在任何时候都以同一种形态运转,这就是我,是常。”因此说“他不见此……”等等。巴利
49.Cakkhādīnaṃ bhedaṃ passatīti virodhipaccayasannipāte vikārāpattidassanato, ante ca adassanūpagamanato vināsaṃ passati oḷārikattā rūpadhammabhedassa. Paccayaṃ datvāti anantarapaccayādivasena paccayo hutvā. ‘‘Balavatara’’nti cittassa lahutaraṃ bhedaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ekasmiṃ rūpe dharanteyeva soḷasa cittāni bhijjanti. Bhedaṃ na passatīti khaṇe khaṇe bhijjantampi cittaṃ parassa anantarapaccayabhāveneva bhijjatīti purimacittassa abhāvaṃ paṭicchādetvā viya pacchimacittassa uppattito bhāvapakkho balavataro pākaṭo ca hoti, na abhāvapakkhoti cittassa vināsaṃ na passati, ayañca attho alātacakkadassanena supākaṭo viññāyati. Yasmā pana takkīvādī nānattanayassa dūrataratāya ekattanayassapi micchāgahitattā ‘‘yadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sabbadāpi ekarūpena pavattati, ayameva attā nicco’’tiādinā abhinivesaṃ janeti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘so taṃ apassanto’’tiādi.
有边无边论的注释巴利
Antānantavādavaṇṇanā
53 53. “有边无边论者”在这里:“边”是指自性在那里终结、走到尽头,也就是界限。否定这个界限,就是“无边”。有边和无边合在一起,就是“有边无边”,再加上“非有边非无边”,总称为“有边无边”——这是用总名来指称,或者像“以名色为缘而有六处”等说法那样,是一种省略的表达。那么,是谁的有边、无边呢?所谓“世间”,被那些追求出离轮回的见行者所认知,或者他们通过世间来认知福行、非福行以及它们的异熟果报,所以称为世间,这里指的就是自我。因此世尊说:“他们安立世间为有边、无边。”那么,这个自我到底是什么呢?是禅那所缘的遍相。这位见行者就把它执取为世间想。经中也这样说:“执取它之后,就以为是世间。”不过有些人说:“禅那以及与之相应的心所法,在这里被执取为‘自我’和‘世间’。”以有边、无边为谈论内容,就叫“有边无边”,就像说“矛在闪耀”(用矛指代持矛的人);或者以有边、无边为所依的谈论,如同“床在呼喊”(用床指代床上的人)。他们具有这种谈论,所以是“有边无边论者”。又因为他们如上所述,把这样的有边无边论执为见解,所以得名“有边无边论者”。因此,注释书中先说“有边无边论者”,然后用“或有边”等说法来展开解释。巴利
53.Antānantikāti ettha amati gacchati ettha sabhāvo osānanti anto, mariyādā. Tappaṭisedhena ananto, anto ca ananto ca antānanto ca nevantānānanto ca antānantā sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesena vā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.176; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1) viya. Kassa pana antānantoti? Lokīyati saṃsāranissaraṇatthikehi diṭṭhigatikehi, lokīyanti vā ettha tehi puññāpuññaṃ tabbipāko cāti lokoti saṅkhyaṃ gatassa attano. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘antānantaṃ lokassa paññapentī’’ti. Ko pana eso attāti? Jhānavisayabhūtakasiṇanimittaṃ. Tattha hi ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko lokasaññī. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ lokoti gahetvā’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘jhānaṃ taṃsampayuttadhammā ca idha ‘attā , loko’ti ca gahitā’’ti vadanti. Antānantasahacaritavādo antānanto, yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti antānantasannissayo vā yathā ‘‘mañcā ghosantī’’ti. So etesaṃ atthīti antānantikā. Te pana yasmā yathāvuttanayena antānanto vādo diṭṭhi etesanti ‘‘antānantavādā’’ti vuccanti. Tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘antānantavādā’’ti vatvā ‘‘antaṃ vā’’tiādinā attho vibhatto.
这里有人问:前三类论师的主张确实是围绕有边、无边、亦有边亦无边而展开的,所以称他们为有边无边论者还说得通;但最后一类论师是以否定这两者的方式来提出主张的,怎么也能叫有边无边论者呢?回答:正是因为他以否定这两者的方式来提出主张。因为否定有边无边的论说,也仍然落在有边无边的范围内,它是围绕这个主题而展开的。注释里说“围绕它而展开论说”,正是为了说明这个意思。或者也可以这样理解:就像在第三类主张中,由于地点的不同,同一个我既可以是有边也可以是无边;同样,在推理者的主张中,由于时间的不同,两者都能成立,所以他以互相否定的方式来说这两者。怎么说呢?因为否定了有边性,就是在说无边性;否定了无边性,就是在说有边性。而有边与无边并不是第三种状态,这里是按时间不同来理解的。这段话的意思是:这个被称为世间的我,已被证得殊胜境界的大圣者们有时现见为无边,所以不能说它是有边;但那些圣者们有时又现见为有边,所以也不能说它是无边。就像依传闻来推理的方式一样,依宿命通等来推理的方式也应当按各自的情况套用。因为这位推理者,由于遍相先前没有增长,在增长的时候,按增长的时间来说,他不能亲自现见,所以只停留在传闻等层面,否定说“非有边”。按还没有增长的时间来说,则说“并非无边”,但并不是像“非有想非无想”那样,绝对地否定有边和无边。对前三类主张的否定,是因为它们不符合自己心中所认定的形态;而第四类主张如果不这样理解,就会落入犹豫论那一类。因为除了有边、无边以及这两者之外,并没有别的自己的形态;而推理者是以推理为方法的,按时间的不同,这两者在同一个我上也并非不能成立。巴利
Etthāha – yuttaṃ tāva purimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vādīnaṃ antattañca anantattañca antānantattañca ārabbha pavattavādattā antānantikattaṃ, pacchimassa pana tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā katha antānantikattanti? Tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā eva. Yasmā antānantapaṭisedhavādopi antānantavisayo eva taṃ ārabbha pavattattā. Etadatthaṃyeva hi sandhāya aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ārabbha pavattavādā’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā yathā tatiyavāde desabhedavasena ekasseva antavantatā anantatā ca sambhavati, evaṃ takkīvādepi kālabhedavasena ubhayasambhavato aññamaññapaṭisedhena ubhayaññeva vuccati. Kathaṃ? Antavantatāpaṭisedhena hi anantatā vuccati, anantatāpaṭisedhena ca antavantatā, antānantānañca na tatiyavādabhāvo kālabhedassa adhippetattā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yasmā ayaṃ lokasaññito attā adhigatavisesehi mahesīhi ananto kadāci sakkhidiṭṭhoti anusuyyati, tasmā nevantavā. Yasmā pana tehiyeva kadāci antavā sakkhidiṭṭhoti anusuyyati, tasmā na pana anantoti. Yathā ca anussutitakkīvasena, evaṃ jātissaratakkī ādīnañca vasena yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Ayañhi takkiko avaḍḍhitabhāvapubbakattā paṭibhāganimittānaṃ vaḍḍhitabhāvassa vaḍḍhitakālavasena appaccakkhakāritāya anussavādimatte ṭhatvā ‘‘nevantavā’’ti paṭikkhipati. Avaḍḍhitakālavasena pana ‘‘na panānanto’’ti, na pana antatānantatānaṃ accantamabhāvena yathā taṃ ‘‘nevasaññināsaññī’’ti. Purimavādattayapaṭikkhepo ca attanā yathādhippetappakāravilakkhaṇatāya tesaṃ, avassañcetaṃ evaṃ viññātabbaṃ, aññathā vikkhepapakkhaṃyeva bhajeyya catutthavādo. Na hi antatāanantatātadubhayavinimutto attano pakāro atthi, takkīvādī ca yuttimaggako, kālabhedavasena ca tadubhayaṃ ekasmimpi na na yujjatīti.
有些人则这样解说第四种主张的形成:如果这个我是有边的,那么忆念在远方投生等事就无法成立;如果它是无边的,那么住在这里的人也可能在天界、地狱等处感受苦乐;如果它既有边又无边,就会同时具有这两种过失。因此,这个我是“有边”还是“无边”,是不可记说的。他们就是这样以推理的方式提出第四种主张。这样说来,后两种论师称为有边无边论者还算合理,因为他们的论说以有边和无边为对象,涉及这两者的范围。但前两种论师怎么能单独称为有边无边论者呢?这是依近行用语的转起来说的。因为“有边无边”这个词,是在总称有边无边论者时使用的,由于它已经惯用于那个场合,所以也单独用于每一位有边无边论者,就像“八解脱”的名称也单独用于每一种无色定,又如世间所说的“众生住所”。或者,这是根据他们先前执取和先前时期的活动而施设的名称。因为那些邪见者在证得那种心三摩地之前,惯常执取“这个世界是有边的,还是无边的”这两方面来思惟,由此形成“有边无边性”的惯用称呼;即使后来因获得殊胜而执取一边,也仍依先前已确立的惯用语来称呼。巴利
Keci pana yadi panāyaṃ attā antavā siyā, dūradese upapajjanānussaraṇādi kiccanipphatti na siyā. Atha ananto, idha ṭhitassa devalokanirayādīsu sukhadukkhānubhavanampi siyā. Sace pana antavā ca ananto ca, tadubhayadosasamāyogo. Tasmā ‘‘antavā, ananto’’ti ca abyākaraṇīyo attāti evaṃ takkanavasena catutthavādappavattiṃ vaṇṇenti. Evampi yuttaṃ tāva pacchimavādīdvayassa antānantikattaṃ antānantānaṃ vasena ubhayavisayattā tesaṃ vādassa. Purimavādīdvayassa pana kathaṃ visuṃ antānantikattanti? Upacāravuttiyā. Samuditesu hi antānantavādīsu pavattamāno antānantika-saddo tattha niruḷhatāya paccekampi antānantikavādīsu pavattati, yathā arūpajjhānesu paccekaṃ aṭṭhavimokkhapariyāyo, yathā ca loke sattāsayoti. Atha vā abhinivesato purimakālappavattivasena ayaṃ tattha vohāro kato. Tesañhi diṭṭhigatikānaṃ tathārūpacetosamādhisamadhigamato pubbakālaṃ ‘‘antavā nu ayaṃ loko, ananto nū’’ti ubhayākārāvalambino parivitakkassa vasena niruḷho antānantikabhāvo visesalābhena tattha uppannepi ekaṃsaggāhe purimasiddharuḷhiyā voharīyatīti.
54-60 按照上面所说的方法,也就是像“寻思者,所以叫寻思者”这样从词源上说,以及像“有四种寻思者”这样从意义上说,都是依照常见论里所说的方式。“依照先前所见而随念”,就是用作为见的识,去随念先前所领受过的有边之类。这样做之后,传闻寻思者和纯粹寻思者也就都包括在这里面了。或者,单凭“见”这个说法,就应该知道,就像在“观看舞蹈、歌唱、音乐、表演等”这些语境中一样,闻等也包括在内了。由于“有边”等论说,是以执取自己所想要的自我恒常存在的方式而生起的,所以应该看成属于常见。正如后面将会说:“其余的属于常见。”巴利
54-60.Vuttanayenāti ‘‘takkayatīti takkī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34) saddato, ‘‘catubbidho takkī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34) atthato ca sassatavāde vuttavidhinā. Diṭṭhapubbānusārenāti dassanabhūtena viññāṇena upaladdhapubbassa antavantādino anussaraṇena. Evañca katvā anussutitakkīsuddhatakkīnampi idha saṅgaho siddho hoti. Atha vā diṭṭhaggahaṇeneva ‘‘naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 10, 194) viya sutādīnampi gahitatā veditabbā. ‘‘Antavā’’tiādinā icchitassa attano sabbadā bhāvaparāmasanavaseneva imesaṃ vādānaṃ pavattanato sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 97-98).
不死矫乱论的解释巴利
Amarāvikkhepavādavaṇṇanā
61 不死就是不断灭。“这样我也不是”等说法,是以种种不同方式驳斥、搅乱其他论敌,这叫散乱。由于依止不死的邪见和言论而搅乱,所以叫不死矫乱者。不死矫乱者就是不死矫乱论者。因为他们在任何一种自性上都无法确定,所以从这里跑到那里,流转不定。或者说,他们像鳗鱼一样滑来滑去、搅乱不定——词义应按照前面那种方式理解。巴利
61.Na maratīti na ucchijjati. ‘‘Evampi me no’’tiādinā vividho nānappakāro khepo parena paravādīnaṃ khipanaṃ vikkhepo. Amarāya diṭṭhiyā vācāya ca vikkhipantīti vā amarāvikkhepino. Amarāvikkhepino eva amarāvikkhepikā. Ito cito ca sandhāvati ekasmiṃ sabhāve anavaṭṭhānato. Amarā viya vikkhipantīti vā purimanayeneva saddattho daṭṭhabbo.
62 62. 对于持散乱论的人来说,他们没有以自性差别来了知对上人法的智之力,也没有以自性差别来了知不善法的智之力,所以“善”与“不善”这两个词,只是依照善业道与不善业道来理解其含义。依照第一种方式,为了说明无边际的散乱——也就是像鳗鱼一样滑来滑去、无法确定的散乱——才说“像这样,我也不是”,这就是不定型的散乱。其中,“不定型的散乱”是指:不固定在常见等任何一种主张上而作散乱,也就是当其他论者问起任何一种主张时,他都加以否定。依照第二种方式,为了显示像鳗鱼一样滑溜的不死散乱,就说“被问到‘这是善’……”等等。或者,通过“像这样,我也不是”等话,以不确定的方式否定常见、一分常见、断见以及诡辩之论,他就是对那些主张一一加以否定,因为他属于无边际散乱论者。然而,由于他自己不确立任何主张,所以不站在任何一边,因此说“然而自己……回答说”。现在,通过不回答善等问题,来说明同样的不确立,就说“被问到‘这是善’……”等等。因此说“不站在任何一边”。巴利
62. Vikkhepavādino uttarimanussadhamme, akusaladhammepi sabhāvabhedavaseneva ñātuṃ ñāṇabalaṃ natthīti kusalākusalapadānaṃ kusalākusalakammapathavaseneva attho. Paṭhamanayavaseneva apariyantavikkhepatāya amarāvikkhepaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘evantipi me noti aniyamitavikkhepo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha aniyamitavikkhepoti sassatādīsu ekasmimpi pakāre aṭṭhatvā vikkhepakaraṇaṃ, paravādinā yasmiṃ kismiñci pucchite pakāre tassa paṭikkhepoti attho. Dutiyanayavasena amarāsadisāya amarāya vikkhepaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kusalanti vā puṭṭho’’tiādimāha. Atha vā ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādinā aniyamatova sassatekaccasassatucchedatakkīvādānaṃ paṭisedhanena taṃ taṃ vādaṃ paṭikkhipateva apariyantavikkhepavādattā amarāvikkhepino. Attanā pana anavaṭṭhitavādattā na kismiñci pakkhe avatiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘sayaṃ pana…pe… byākarotī’’ti. Idāni kusalādīnaṃ abyākaraṇena tameva anavaṭṭhānaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘idaṃ kusalanti vā puṭṭho’’tiādinā. Tenevāha ‘‘ekasmimpi pakkhe na tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
63 对于不能如实了知善与不善的人:当我在某些时候只把善回答为“善”,只把不善回答为“不善”,而他们因为这种回答而对我作恭敬尊重,说“啊!真是智者”时,我对此生起欲或贪——或者生起嗔或对抗。这里应当按相反的方式对应理解。不过,注释书里是就自己对“智者”身份的贪等来作说明的。“欲与贪这两者就是取”,这是按阿毗达摩的方式说的。因为在阿毗达摩中,只有爱和见被称为“取”;但在经中,嗔也被称为“取”,比如“被嗔取所系缚而遭受苦恼”等。因此说“或者两者都因为坚执而称为取”。坚执就是不放开。因为嗔以怨恨等方式转起时,也不放开所缘。恼害就是伤害、逼迫。贪也因为热恼而表现出激昂,逼迫自己的依处。这与“因为想要破坏而执取所缘”相连。巴利
63. Kusalākusalaṃ yathābhūtaṃ appajānantopi yesamahaṃ samayena kusalameva ‘‘kusala’’nti, akusalameva ca ‘‘akusala’’nti byākareyyaṃ, tesu tathā byākaraṇahetu ‘‘aho vata re paṇḍito’’ti sakkārasammānaṃ karontesu mama chando vā rāgo vā assāti evampettha attho sambhavati. Doso vā paṭigho vāti ettha vuttavipariyāyena yojetabbaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana attano paṇḍitabhāvavisayānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ vasena yojanā katā. ‘‘Chandarāgadvayaṃ upādāna’’nti abhidhammanayena vuttaṃ. Abhidhamme hi taṇhādiṭṭhiyova ‘‘upādāna’’nti āgatā, suttante pana dosopi ‘‘upādāna’’nti vutto ‘‘kodhupādānavinibandhā vighātaṃ āpajjantī’’tiādīsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhayampi vā daḷhaggahaṇavasena upādāna’’nti . Daḷhaggahaṇaṃ amuñcanaṃ. Paṭighopi hi upanāhādivasena pavatto ārammaṇaṃ na muñcati. Vihananaṃ hiṃsanaṃ vibādhanaṃ. Rāgopi hi pariḷāhavasena sāraddhavuttitāya nissayaṃ vibādhatīti. Vināsetukāmatāya ārammaṇaṃ gaṇhātīti sambandho.
64 “智性”就是指智慧。一个人因为具备某种法而被称为“智者”,那个法就是“智性”。这里指的是由听闻和思惟所成的智慧,不是由业力自然生起的本性智慧。“kata”这个词是表示一般动作的词,就像在“katavijja”(已学技艺者)等词中那样,“kata”表达的是与智慧相应,所以说“已了知其他教说者”。能射穿七分瓣发端尖端的,就是所谓的“发射者”。巴利
64.Paṇḍiccenāti paññāya. Yena hi dhammena yutto ‘‘paṇḍito’’ti vuccati, so dhammo paṇḍiccaṃ, tena sutacintāmayaṃ paññaṃ dasseti, na pākatikakammanibbattaṃ sābhāvikapaññaṃ. Kata-saddassa kiriyāsāmaññavācakattā ‘‘katavijjo’’tiādīsu viya kata-saddo ñāṇānuyuttataṃ vadatīti āha ‘‘viññātaparappavādā’’ti. Sattadhā bhinnassa vālaggassa aṃsukoṭivedhako ‘‘vālavedhī’’ti adhippeto.
65-6 在这里,前三种人虽然也因为不能如实了知善等诸法的自性而有些迟钝,但他们对自己不了知善等法这一点,是有一种特殊的觉察的;后一种人因为没有这种觉察,所以才被说成是愚钝又愚痴。难道后一种人不是也会说“如果有他世,我就回答‘有他世’,那样我也不是”这样的话吗?从这种说法来看,他似乎也觉察到自己对法不了知。虽然如此,但他并不像前几种人那样,因为不了知法而在回答时对妄语等生起恐惧和厌恶;他其实是最为愚痴的人。或者,“那样我也不是”等话语,只是他在应对提问时制造扰乱,展示的仅仅是提问的方式,而不是自己对法的了知。因此,才特别说他是“愚钝且愚痴者”。正因如此,针对持这种论说的散若耶毗罗梨子,才说:“此人在这些沙门、婆罗门中,是最愚钝、最愚痴者。”
其中,“有他世”这一问题,是从常见或正见的角度提出的。“无他世”是从断见或正见的角度提出的。“亦有亦无他世”是从断见或正见的角度提出的。“非有非无他世”:在否定了前三种方式之后,由于再没有其他可能的方式,“他世”既不能说为有,也不能说为无,所以这只是为了扰乱而提出,或者是依正见而提出。其余三组四句也应按照同样的方式理解。就像福行等三行一样,身行等三行所摄的义理,已经包含在前一组四句中。其余三组四句,则按执取自我、福行等果报的责难方式加以包含。巴利
65-6. Ettha ca kiñcāpi purimānampi tiṇṇaṃ kusalādidhammasabhāvānavabodhato attheva mandabhāvo, tesaṃ pana attano kusalādidhammānavabodhassa avabodhaviseso atthi, tadabhāvā pacchimoyeva mandamomūhabhāvena vutto. Nanu ca pacchimassāpi ‘‘atthi paroloko’ti iti ce me assa, ‘atthi paroloko’ti iti te naṃ byākareyyaṃ, evantipi me no’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.65) vacanato attano dhammānavabodhassa avabodho atthiyevāti? Kiñcāpi atthi, na tassa purimānaṃ viya apariññātadhammabyākaraṇanibandhanamusāvādādibhayaparijigucchanakāro atthi, atha kho mahāmūḷhoyeva. Atha vā ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādinā pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇatthaṃ ‘‘atthi paroloko’ti iti ce maṃ pucchasī’’ti pucchāṭhapanameva tena dassīyati, na attano dhammānavabodhoti ayameva visesena ‘‘mando ceva momūho cā’’ti vutto. Teneva hi tathāvādinaṃ sañjayaṃ belaṭṭhaputtaṃ ārabbha ‘‘ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbamando sabbamūḷho’’ti (dī. ni. 1.181) vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘atthi paroloko’’ti sassatadassanavasena sammādiṭṭhivasena vā pucchā. ‘‘Natthi paroloko’’ti natthikadassanavasena sammādassanavasena vā pucchā. ‘‘Atthi ca natthi ca paroloko’’ti ucchedadassanavasena sammādiṭṭhivasena eva vā pucchā. ‘‘Neva atthi na natthi paroloko’’ti vuttappakārattayapaṭikkhepe sati pakārantarassa asambhavato atthitānatthitāhi navattabbākāro parolokoti vikkhepaññeva purekkhārena sammādiṭṭhivasena vā pucchā. Sesacatukkattayepi vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Puññasaṅkhārattiko viya hi kāyasaṅkhārattikena purimacatukkasaṅgahito eva attho. Sesacatukkattayena attaparāmāsapuññādi phalatācodanānayena saṅgahitoti.
不死扰乱论者因为对常见等法自己都不认同,所以在一切问题上都只用“如此我也不是”这类说法来搅乱。这里,“如此我也不是”等话,是通过否定对方提问的方式来显示搅乱的样子。有人会问:扰乱论者不是应该承认并安住在扰乱这一立场上才算合理吗?不是的,因为他在那种情况下也是彻底糊涂的,而且扰乱论本身正是通过否定的方式才得以进行的。就像散若耶毗罗梨子被阿阇世王问及现世可见的沙门果时,他就是以否定他世等三类问题的方式,作出了扰乱性的回答。巴利
Amarāvikkhepiko sassatādīnaṃ attano aruccanatāya sabbattha ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādinā vikkhepaññeva karoti. Tattha ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādi tattha tattha pucchitākārapaṭisedhanavasena vikkhipanākāradassanaṃ. Nanu ca vikkhepavādino vikkhepapakkhassa anujānanaṃ vikkhepapakkhe avaṭṭhānaṃ yuttarūpanti? Na, tatthāpi tassa sammūḷhattā, paṭikkhepavaseneva ca vikkhepavādassa pavattanato. Tathā hi sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto raññā ajātasattunā sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ puṭṭho paralokattikādīnaṃ paṭisedhanamukhena vikkhepaṃ byākāsi.
这里有人问:难道这个不死论者不也是因为不能如实了知善等诸法以及他世等三类法,所以在各处被问到问题时,只是对提问作出扰乱而已吗?那他怎么会是见行者呢?因为,一个不想回答的人,不知道所问的意义,仅仅作出扰乱,这并不足以构成见行者。回答是:他并不是仅凭对提问作出扰乱就成为见行者,而是因为错误的执取。一个人以常见而错误地执取,由于智慧迟钝,不能如实通达善等诸法以及他世等三类法;自己都不明白的道理,当然也无法让别人明白,同时又害怕犯妄语等过失,所以才作出扰乱。正如后文将会说:“其中七种是断见,其余的是常见。”(《长部注》1.97-98)或者另一种情况:由于对福、非福及其果报既不了知也不信受,认为对这类问题加以扰乱才是好的,于是生起认可和喜好,倾心执著于此,这样就产生了一种单独的见,就像七分见那样。应当这样理解。正如所说:“见行者的见和语都没有边际。”(《长部注》1.61)那么,这种见为什么被归入常见呢?因为它不是以断灭的方式执取的。世间人多有争论,没有人能如实了知诸法,但由于执取“正是如此”以及“对法的审察在世间是无始的”这样的见解,这里也就获得了常见的一分。巴利
Etthāha – nanu cāyaṃ sabbopi amarāvikkhepiko kusalādayo dhamme, paralokattikādīni ca yathābhūtaṃ anavabujjhamāno tattha tattha pañhaṃ puṭṭho pucchāya vikkhepanamattaṃ āpajjati, tassa kathaṃ diṭṭhigatikabhāvo. Na hi avattukāmassa viya pucchitamatthamajānantassa vikkhepakaraṇamattena diṭṭhigatikatā yuttāti? Vuccate – na heva kho pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇamattena tassa diṭṭhigatikatā, atha kho micchābhinivesavasena. Sassatābhinivesena micchābhiniviṭṭhoyeva hi puggalo mandabuddhitāya kusalādidhamme paralokattikādīni ca yāthāvato appaṭipajjamāno attanā aviññātassa atthassa paraṃ viññāpetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya musāvādādibhayena ca vikkhepaṃ āpajjatīti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘yāsaṃ satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.97-98) atha vā puññapāpānaṃ tabbipākānañca anavabodhena asaddahanena ca tabbisayāya pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇaṃyeva sundaranti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā abhinivisantassa uppannā visuṃyevesā ekā diṭṭhi sattabhaṅgadiṭṭhi viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā cā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.61). Kathaṃ panassā sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho? Ucchedavasena anabhinivesato. Natthi koci dhammānaṃ yathābhūtavedī vivādabahulattā lokassa, ‘‘evameva’’nti pana saddantarena ‘‘dhammanijjhānanā anādikālikā loke’’ti gāhavasena sassatalesopettha labbhatiyeva.
无因生论的解释巴利
Adhiccasamuppannavādavaṇṇanā
67 认为“我”和“世间”是无因偶然生起的这种见解,就是无因生论。具体来说:有些人主张,任何事物的产生,要么是偶然的、随意的,要么不需要以某人的修行为前提条件——这种见解以“诸蕴无因生起”这种行相为所缘而生起,因为它依止于那种行相,又与那种行相相伴,所以称为“无因生论”。就像说“床在叫唤”“矛在行走”一样——为了说明这个道理,所以说:“认为我与世间是无因生的见解,就是无因生论。”巴利
67. Adhicca yadicchakaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ, kassaci vuddhipubbaṃ vā vinā samuppannoti attalokasaññitānaṃ khandhānaṃ adhiccuppattiākārārammaṇaṃ dassanaṃ tadākārasannissayena pavattito, tadākārasahacaritatāya ca ‘‘adhiccasamuppanna’’nti vuccati yathā ‘‘mañcā ghosanti, kuntā pacarantī’’ti ca imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘adhiccasamuppanno attā ca loko cāti dassanaṃ adhiccasamuppanna’’nti.
68-73 “开示的首要”是指以开示中最上首的来取它,借此表明:世尊是只把想当作核心来作这番开示的,并不是说在那里就没有其他非色法的存在。因此才说“非心所生”等等。因为世尊宣说出世间法时,是以定或慧为核心;宣说世间法时,则是以心或想为核心。其中,像“当他修习出世间禅那的时候”“有五支正定、五智正定”“以慧见后,诸漏已尽”这些文句,以及“当欲界善心生起时”“比丘,你以什么为心”“诸法以意为前导”“诸比丘,有众生身异想异”“非想非非想处”等诸经,都应当看作能证明这个道理的例证。“外道处”是指在其他外道的教派中。因为外道把某种殊胜的投生当作解脱想,或者看到想有离染与不离染的过患和功德,于是修成无想定,结果投生在非时地,佛教修行者则不是这样。在风遍上作遍作,就是在风遍上生起初禅等三禅,在第三禅获得自在后,从那里出定,为了证得第四禅而作遍作。因此才说“生起第四禅”。巴利
68-73.Desanāsīsanti desanāya jeṭṭhakabhāvena gahaṇaṃ, tena saññaṃyeva dhuraṃ katvā bhagavatā ayaṃ desanā katā, na pana tattha aññesaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ atthibhāvatoti dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘acittuppādā’’tiādi. Bhagavā hi yathā lokuttaradhammaṃ desento samādhiṃ paññaṃ vā dhuraṃ karoti, evaṃ lokiyadhammaṃ desento cittaṃ saññaṃ vā dhuraṃ karoti. Tattha ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye lokuttaraṃ jhānaṃ bhāveti (dha. sa. 277) pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi [dī. ni. 3.355 (kha)] pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, [dī. ni. 3.355 (ja); vibha. 2.804] paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā hontī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.271) tathā ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, (dha. sa. 1) kiṃcitto tvaṃ bhikkhu (pārā. 146, 180) manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, (dha. pa. 1, 2; netti. 90; peṭako. 83) santi bhikkhave sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, (dī. ni. 3.332, 342, 357; a. ni. 9.24; cūḷani. 83) na nevasaññānāsaññāyatana’’ntiādīni suttāni (dī. ni. 3.358) etassa atthassa sādhakāni daṭṭhabbāni. Titthāyataneti aññatitthiyasamaye. Titthiyā hi upapattivisese vimuttisaññino, saññāvirāgāvirāgesu ādīnavānisaṃsadassino vā hutvā asaññasamāpattiṃ nibbattetvā akkhaṇabhūmiyaṃ uppajjanti, na sāsanikā. Vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvāti vāyokasiṇe paṭhamādīni tīṇi jhānāni nibbattetvā tatiyajjhāne ciṇṇavasī hutvā tato vuṭṭhāya catutthajjhānādhigamāya parikammaṃ katvā. Tenevāha ‘‘catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā’’ti.
那么,为什么这里只说到风遍的准备工作呢?回答是:就像在那些作为色法相似相的遍处差别中,通过显现色法,而证得被称为“色离欲修习”的无色定;同样地,在作为无色法相似相、没有清晰形体的遍处差别中,通过显现无色法,而证得被称为“无色离欲修习”的色界定。在这里,通过“想是病、想是疮”等以及“呸,心!那心该被呵责”等方式,以观察无色界运作的过患,并在其不存在时确认寂静殊胜,来造作色界定;而色离欲修习则连同近行定一起属于无色定,其中特别是第一无色禅那。如果是这样,那就应该说“在限定虚空遍处中也一样”,因为在那里也能获得无色法的相似相。这确实是某些人所接受的,但这里的古师们没有这样说,因为他们没有采纳这种说法。就像色离欲修习仅仅因为所离染之法的存在而圆满,并显现在与所离染之法相似的所缘差别中;同样地,无色离欲修习也是如此。这样说并没有矛盾。然而,由于那种定是外道也能修的,而外道们正是系缚于那种禅那在感官领域上修习的,所以应该看到,被见地所困的古师们只在第四大种遍处说到无色离欲修习的准备工作。再者,就像在色遍处中一样,在前三种大种遍处中,也只是颜色影像作为概念所缘而成为禅那的所缘,这是随顺世间惯例而说的。这样做了之后,在《清净道论》中,地遍被说为像镜中月轮一样的说法也就成立了。而第四大种遍处,只是大种之影像本身成为禅那的所缘境,所以只有它才适合作为无色法的相似相。因此应当知道,只说到风遍的准备工作。巴利
Kasmā panettha vāyokasiṇeyeva parikammaṃ vuttanti? Vuccate – yatheva hi rūpapaṭibhāgabhūtesu kasiṇavisesesu rūpavibhāvanena rūpavirāgabhāvanāsaṅkhāto arūpasamāpattiviseso sacchikarīyati, evaṃ aparibyattaviggahatāya arūpapaṭibhāgabhūte kasiṇavisese arūpavibhāvanena arūpavirāgabhāvanāsaṅkhāto rūpasamāpattiviseso adhigamīyatīti ettha ‘‘saññā rogo saññā gaṇḍo’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.24) ‘‘dhi cittaṃ, dhibbate taṃ citta’’ntiādinā ca nayena arūpappavattiyā ādīnavadassanena, tadabhāve ca santapaṇītabhāvasanniṭṭhānena rūpasamāpattiyā abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ, rūpavirāgabhāvanā pana saddhiṃ upacārena arūpasamāpattiyo, tatthāpi visesena paṭhamāruppajjhānaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘paricchinnākāsakasiṇepī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tassāpi hi arūpapaṭibhāgatā labbhatīti? Icchitamevetaṃ kesañci avacanaṃ panettha pubbācariyehi aggahitabhāvena. Yathā hi rūpavirāgabhāvanā virajjanīyadhammabhāvamattena parinipphannā, virajjanīyadhammapaṭibhāgabhūte ca visayavisese pātubhavati, evaṃ arūpavirāgabhāvanāpīti vuccamāne na koci virodho, titthiyeheva pana tassā samāpattiyā paṭipajjitabbatāya, tesañca visayapathesupanibandhanasseva tassa jhānassa paṭipattito diṭṭhivantehi pubbācariyehi catuttheyeva bhūtakasiṇe arūpavirāgabhāvanāparikammaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñca vaṇṇakasiṇesu viya purimabhūtakasiṇattayepi vaṇṇapaṭicchāyāva paṇṇatti ārammaṇaṃ jhānassa lokavohārānurodheneva pavattito. Evañca katvā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.57) pathavīkasiṇassa ādāsacandamaṇḍalūpamāvacanañca samatthitaṃ hoti, catutthaṃ pana bhūtakasiṇaṃ bhūtappaṭicchāyameva jhānassa gocarabhāvaṃ gacchatīti tasseva arūpapaṭibhāgatā yuttāti vāyokasiṇeyeva parikammaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“就在这里”是指就在五蕴有当中。“在那里”是指在无想有当中。如果在无想有中只有色蕴显现出来,那么没有无色的依止,色在那里怎么能够生起运作呢?再者,没有色的依止,在无色界当中无色又怎么能够生起运作呢?这一点也只是与那同类的。为什么?因为在这里就看不到了。如果这样的话,那么没有食团食,在色界当中色就不应该生起运作了,这是什么原因呢?因为在这里就看不到了。而且,就像对于某个心相续的出生之因来说,如果对色的渴爱还没有离去,它就会与色一起生起,依止色而运作;而对于出生之因中对色的渴爱已经离去的人,因为他的因中不涉及色、不依赖色,所以就能没有色而生起运作。同样地,对于那些色相续的出生之因,在无色当中对色的渴爱已经离去的人,他的运作就是没有无色。因此,在无想有当中,只有色蕴结生。然而,在那里,纯粹的色相续怎么能够没有现前缘而长时间地运作呢?又能运作多久呢?把这样的质疑放在心里之后,就说“犹如被弓弦之力弹射出去的箭”等等,以此表明,在这里并非只靠教理,这也是合乎道理的。“那么长的时间”:从最上来说,无想有情甚至能住立五百大劫。“禅那之力”:指以无想定所滋养的业力。“消亡”:指由于缘的灭尽而灭尽,不再运作。巴利
Idhevāti pañcavokārabhaveyeva. Tatthāti asaññabhave. Yadi rūpakkhandhamattameva asaññabhave pātubhavati, kathamarūpasannissayena vinā tattha rūpaṃ pavattati, kathaṃ pana rūpasannissayena vinā arūpadhātuyaṃ arūpaṃ pavattati, idampi tena samānajātiyameva. Kasmā? Idheva adassanato. Yadi evaṃ kabaḷīkārāhārena vinā rūpadhātuyaṃ rūpena na pavattitabbaṃ, kiṃ kāraṇaṃ ? Idheva adassanato. Api ca yathā yassa cittasantānassa nibbattikāraṇaṃ rūpe avigatataṇhaṃ, tassa saha rūpena sambhavato rūpaṃ nissāya pavatti, yassa pana nibbattikāraṇaṃ rūpe vigatataṇhaṃ, tassa vinā rūpena rūpanirapekkhatāya kāraṇassa, evaṃ yassa rūpappabandhassa nibbattikāraṇaṃ vigatataṇhaṃ arūpe, tassa vinā arūpena pavatti hotīti asaññabhave rūpakkhandhamattameva nibbattati. Kathaṃ pana tattha kevalo rūpappabandho paccuppannapaccayarahito cirakālaṃ pavattatīti paccetabbaṃ, kittakaṃ vā kālaṃ pavattatīti codanaṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘yathā nāma jiyāvegukkhitto saro’’tiādi, tena na kevalamāgamoyeva ayamettha yuttīti dasseti. Tattakameva kālanti ukkaṃsato pañca mahākappasatānipi tiṭṭhanti asaññasattā. Jhānavegeti asaññasamāpattiparikkhate kammavege. Antaradhāyatīti paccayanirodhena nirujjhati nappavattati.
这里说的“此处”,是指欲有。可是,经过成百上千劫那么久、早已灭去的识,怎么还能在这里生起识呢?难道没看见吗:眼已经灭了,眼识却还能生起?这事不能一概而论。因为即使是灭了很久的心,由于同类的心之间没有间隔生起,它仍然只是起无间缘的作用,而不是种子;种子是业。所以,对那些从无想有死去的众生,依靠作为种子的业,以及所缘等诸缘,在欲界中确实会有结生识生起。因此说“在这里,结生识生起”。在这里应当知道:就像有些树按季节规律开花,有固定的时节,但如果给它施加催化的力量,由于这催力的作用,它就不再按原来的规律开花;同样,在五蕴有中,色法和非色法不间断地运转着,当施加了离色贪和离非色贪的修习催力时,随着这种定力的催力,在无色有和无想有中,诸蕴就依次以没有色、或没有非色的方式运转。难道在这里,依据无想生存生在百千生、十劫灭等的顶端或中间这一点,得无因生论者的说法不就像得常见论者的说法一样,会有许多种分类吗?确实会有。不过应当这样看:由于紧接着成就的无想再生,得无因生论者的说法,按照理路展示的方式,只显示为一种。或者,因为无因生论者的说法被常见所包含,常见中所述的一切教说理路,也应尽可能被无因生论者的说法所采用;为了显示这一特殊之处,世尊没有加以分别,就开示了得无因生论者的说法。而且,无因生论者的说法必然应被接受为被常见所包含,因为在杂染方面,众生的心性倾向有两种。正如注疏中所说:“常见与断见”;后面也会说到:“这七种是断灭见,其余的是常见。”巴利
Idhāti kāmabhave. Kathaṃ pana anekakappasatasamatikkamena ciraniruddhato viññāṇato idha viññāṇaṃ samuppajjati. Na hi niruddhe cakkhumhi cakkhuviññāṇamuppajjamānaṃ diṭṭhanti? Nayidamekantato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ciraniruddhampi hi cittaṃ samānajātikassa antarānuppajjanato anantarapaccayamattaṃ hotiyeva, na bījaṃ, bījaṃ pana kammaṃ. Tasmā kammato bījabhūtato ārammaṇādīhi paccayehi asaññabhavato cutānaṃ kāmadhātuyā upapattiviññāṇaṃ hotiyeva. Tenāha ‘‘idha paṭisandhisaññā uppajjatī’’ti. Ettha ca yathā nāma utuniyāmena pupphaggahaṇe niyatakālānaṃ rukkhānaṃ vekhe dinne vekhabalena na yathā niyāmatā hoti pupphaggahaṇassa, evameva pañcavokārabhave avippayogena vattamānesu rūpārūpadhammesu rūpārūpavirāgabhāvanāvekhe dinne tassa samāpattivekhabalassa anurūpato arūpabhave asaññābhave ca yathākkamaṃ rūparahitā arūparahitā ca khandhānaṃ pavatti hotīti veditabbaṃ. Nanu ettha jātisatasahassadasasaṃvaṭṭādīnaṃ matthake, abbhantarato vā pavattāya asaññūpavattiyā vasena lābhīadhiccasamuppannikavādo lābhīsassatavādo viya anekabhedo sambhavatīti? Saccaṃ sambhavati, anantarattā pana āpannāya asaññūpapattiyā vasena lābhīadhiccasamuppannikavādo nayadassanavasena ekova dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgahato adhiccasamuppannikavādassa sassatavāde āgato sabbo desanānayo yathāsambhavaṃ adhiccasamuppannikavādepi gahetabboti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ bhagavatā lābhīadhiccasamuppannikavādo avibhajitvā desito. Avassañca sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho adhiccasamuppannikavādassa icchitabbo saṃkilesapakkhe sattānaṃ ajjhāsayassa duvidhattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sassatucchedadiṭṭhi cā’’ti. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘yāsaṃ satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.97-98).
把无因生论归入常见,这难道不合理吗?因为它是以“我从前不存在”这类方式生起的,执取的是先前从未出现过的众生;而常见则执取自我和世间为恒常存在,是以“实为常住不变”的方式生起的。并非不合理,因为他们对未来看不到任何边际。虽说这种理论是以“我现在存在,是从不存在转变而来的”这种方式,通过追溯自我和世间的过去边际而生起,但从现在开始,他们看不到这些在未来的任何边际。尤其是对现在和未来都看不到边际,这正是常见论的力量所在,正如他们所说:“如同常住一样,将会一直那样保持下去。”如果是这样,那么这种理论连同常见等其他论点被归入前际论者,难道不合理吗?因为它们是以涉及未来的方式而运作的。并非不合理,因为它们的生起属于过去的部分。事实上,它们的产生被宿住随念智以及类似传闻等所引发的推论所涵盖,注释书也是这样解释的。或者,因为法主、论王以无碍之智,毫无遗漏地如实亲自证知一切来处和去处之后,宣说了这些见解。因此,对于世尊所开示的一切见解,以及他开示的方式,都应当依照他的决断而信受,在这里不应以推理来追究,因为这是佛的境界。佛的境界确实是不可思议的。巴利
Nanu ca adhiccasamuppannikavādassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho na yutto. ‘‘Ahañhi pubbe nāhosi’’ntiādivasena pavattanato, apubbasattapātubhāvaggāhattā, attano lokassa ca sadābhāvagāhinī ca sassatadiṭṭhi ‘‘atthitveva sassatisama’’nti pavattanato? No na yutto anāgate koṭiadassanato. Yadipi hi ayaṃ vādo ‘‘somhi etarahi ahutvā santatāya pariṇato’’ti (dī. ni. 1.68) attano lokassa ca atītakoṭiparāmasanavasena pavatto, tathāpi vattamānakālato paṭṭhāya na tesaṃ katthaci anāgate pariyantaṃ passati, visesena ca paccuppannānāgatakālesu pariyantādassanapabhāvito sassatavādo. Yathāha ‘‘sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassatī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ imassa vādassa, sassatavādādīnañca pubbantakappikesu saṅgaho na yutto anāgatakālaparāmasanavasena pavattattāti? Na, samudāgamassa atītakoṭṭhāsikattā. Tathā hi nesaṃ samuppatti atītaṃsapubbenivāsañāṇehi, tappaṭirūpakānussavādippabhāvitatakkanehi ca saṅgahitāti, tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Atha vā sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇena vādivarena dhammassāminā niravasesato agatiñca gatiñca yathābhūtaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā paveditā etā diṭṭhiyo, tasmā yāvatikā diṭṭhiyo bhagavatā desitā, yathā ca desitā, tathā tathāva sanniṭṭhānato sampaṭicchitabbā, na ettha yuttivicāraṇā kātabbā buddhavisayattā. Acinteyyo hi buddhavisayoti.
后际论者的解说巴利
Aparantakappikavādavaṇṇanā
74 就像“于后际有智”“有后际随见者”等语句中那样,这里的“apara”一词是指未来时的用语,所以说“称为未来分位”。在“执取后际”等表述中,应当按照“执取前际”等所说的方式来理解其含义。这里只说明其差别。巴利
74. ‘‘Aparante ñāṇaṃ, aparantānudiṭṭhino’’tiādīsu viya apara-saddo idha anāgatakālavācakoti āha ‘‘anāgatakoṭṭhāsasaṅkhāta’’nti. Aparantaṃ kappetvātiādīsu ‘‘pubbantaṃ kappetvā’’tiādīsu vuttanayena attho veditabbo. Visesamattameva vakkhāma.
有想论者的解说巴利
Saññīvādavaṇṇanā
75 75. “死后有想”是指由“死后有想”这种说法所引出的论说,持有这种论说的人就是死后有想论者。然而,因为那些见行者说“自我在死后不变坏”,所以说“他们宣说死后有想,因此是死后有想论者”。他们持有“有想”的主张,所以是有想论者,就像说“他有觉,所以是觉者”一样。或者,“有想”是指由“有想”引出的论说,按照俱行的方式,论说本身也称为“有想”;他们的论说就是“有想”,所以是有想论者。巴利
75. Uddhamāghātanāti pavatto vādo uddhamāghātano, so etesaṃ atthīti uddhamāghātanikā. Yasmā pana te diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘uddhaṃ maraṇā attā nibbikāro’’ti vadanti, tasmā ‘‘uddhamāghātanā attānaṃ vadantīti uddhamāghātanikā’’ti vuttaṃ. Saññīvādo etesaṃ atthīti saññīvādā ‘‘buddhaṃ assa atthīti buddho’’ti yathā. Atha vā saññīti pavatto vādo saññī sahacaraṇanayena, saññī vādo etesanti saññīvādā.
76-77 有色之我:在这里,难道不应该有一个脱离色的自我吗?就像想属于自我一样,色也属于自我。因为在有想之我这里,想并不是自我。正因如此,才说把在那里生起的想执取为想。既然这样,为什么把遍色执取为我而这样说呢?其实不应该这样理解:他拥有色,所以是有色者;而应该理解为:他以坏灭为性质,所以是有色者。在这里,由于类似于色,遍色在增长和不增长的时期所出现的差别状态就是坏灭,而且因为确实存在小、广大等差别,所以不能说没有这种情况。如果这样,把这种观点归入常见,是否不合理呢?并非不合理。因为他认可身体破裂之后,自我是恒常不变坏的,正如他所说的:死后无病,更上。或者,即使解释为他拥有色,所以是有色者,也没有过失。因为即使对于以假立而不成立的区分,也能看到对无区分者的描述,就像说石女儿的身体一样。又或者,坏灭本身就是色的自性,也就是色法,他拥有这样的色,所以是有色者,就像有色法等等中的用法那样。这样一来,由于自我以色为自性,说有色的我这句话就是合乎道理的,所以说执取遍色为我。由于主张决定说,否定业果,所以在邪命外道等人当中没有获得禅那与等至,因此说:或者像邪命外道等人那样,仅仅通过推论而认为有色之我。因为有些邪命外道在六种人中,把其中某一种承认为自我。没有病,就是坏灭,所以无病一词应当理解为恒常的同义词;或者,以没有病为名,他承认由于不变坏而恒常,这位见行者因此说:无病就是恒常。巴利
76-77.Rūpī attāti ettha nanu rūpavinimuttena attanā bhavitabbaṃ saññāya viya rūpassapi attaniyattā. Na hi ‘‘saññī attā’’ti ettha saññā attā. Teneva hi ‘‘tattha pavattasaññañcassa saññāti gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sati kasmā kasiṇarūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā vuttanti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘rūpaṃ assa atthīti rūpī’’ti, atha kho ‘‘ruppanasīlo rūpī’’ti. Ruppanañcettha rūpasarikkhatāya kasiṇarūpassa vaḍḍhitāvaḍḍhitakālavasena visesāpatti, sā ca ‘‘natthī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ parittavipulatādivisesasabbhāvato. Yadi evaṃ imassa vādassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho na yujjatīti? No na yujjati kāyabhedato uddhaṃ attano nibbikāratāya tena adhippetattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘arogoparaṃ maraṇā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘rūpaṃ assa atthīti rūpī’’ti vuccamānepi na doso. Kappanāsiddhenapi hi bhedena abhedassāpi niddesadassanato, yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti. Ruppanaṃ vā rūpasabhāvo rūpaṃ, taṃ etassa atthīti rūpī, attā ‘‘rūpino dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. dukamātikā 11) viya. Evañca katvā rūpasabhāvattā attano ‘‘rūpī attā’’ti vacanaṃ ñāyāgatamevāti ‘‘kasiṇarūpaṃ ‘attā’ti gahetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Niyatavāditāya kammaphalapaṭikkhepato natthi ājīvakesu jhānasamāpattilābhoti āha ‘‘ājīvakādayo viya takkamatteneva vā rūpī attā’’ti. Tathā hi kaṇhābhijātiādīsu chaḷābhijātīsu aññataraṃ attānaṃ ekacce ājīvakā paṭijānanti. Natthi etassa rogo bhaṅgoti arogoti aroga-saddassa niccapariyāyatā veditabbā, rogarahitatāsīsena vā nibbikāratāya niccataṃ paṭijānāti diṭṭhigatikoti āha ‘‘arogoti nicco’’ti.
破除遍净色而生的虚空、空无边处、识无边处、无所有处,这些是无色定的所缘相。就像苦味存在于柠檬叶中一样,无色的自我安住在那里,大小与身体相同。这是尼乾陀的主张,所以说“就像尼乾陀等人那样”。所谓以混杂的方式执取,就是把色定和无色定的所缘相合在一起,认为“这是一个我”,并以执取在那里生起的想为“想”的方式来进行执取。因为这位持邪见的人证得了色定和无色定,那些所缘相就以有色和无色的形态显现为自我,所以他生起了“有色也无色”的固执,就像内论者那样;或者仅仅通过推理,以混杂执取色法和无色法的方式,认定“有色且无色的我存在”。巴利
Kasiṇugghāṭimākāsapaṭhamāruppaviññāṇanatthibhāvaākiñcaññāyatanāni arūpasamāpattinimittaṃ nimbapaṇṇe tittakaraso viya sarīraparimāṇo arūpī attā tattha tiṭṭhatīti nigaṇṭhāti āha ‘‘nigaṇṭhādayo viyā’’ti. Missakagāhavasenāti rūpārūpasamāpattīnaṃ nimittāni ekajjhaṃ katvā ‘‘eko attā’’ti, tattha pavattasaññañcassa ‘‘saññā’’ti gahaṇavasena. Ayañhi diṭṭhigatiko rūpārūpasamāpattilābhitāya tannimittaṃ rūpabhāvena arūpabhāvena ca attā upatiṭṭhati, tasmā ‘‘rūpī ca arūpī cā’’ti abhinivesaṃ janesi ajjhattavādino viya, takkamatteneva vā rūpārūpadhammānaṃ missakaggahaṇavasena ‘‘rūpī arūpī ca attā hotī’’ti.
以这样的推理执取:就像那些只剩下诸行、达到极微细状态的法,因为极度微细而无法发挥作用,又如柱子、墙壁、手脚等的聚合体一样,它既不是有色——因为它没有超出色法的本质,也不是无色——他就是以这样的推理来执取的。或者,可以像有边无边四论那样,通过互相否定的方式来理解其含义。只不过在那里,是根据处所和时间的差别而展示了第三和第四种论说;而在这里,则是根据时间和所依处的差别——这就是唯一的不同。在这里,由于时间的差别,第三种论说的产生是因为色相和无色相都不现前;而第四种论说则是由于所依处的差别,对色法和无色法的总集以“一个我”的推理方式而产生——应按照那里所说的方式来了知。巴利
Takkagāhenevāti saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvappattadhammā viya accantasukhumabhāvappattiyā sakiccasādhanāsamatthatāya thambhakuṭṭahatthapādādisaṅghāto viya neva rūpī, rūpasabhāvānativattanato na arūpīti evaṃ pavattatakkagāhena. Atha vā antānantikacatukkavāde viya aññamaññapaṭikkhepavasena attho veditabbo. Kevalaṃ pana tattha desakālabhedavasena tatiyacatutthavādā dassitā, idha kālavatthubhedavasenāti ayameva visesoti. Kālabhedavasena cettha tatiyavādassa pavatti rūpārūpanimittānaṃ saha anupaṭṭhānato. Catutthavādassa pana vatthubhedavasena pavatti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ samūhato ‘‘eko attā’’ti takkanavasenāti tattha vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ.
在第二组四论里,应当依据有边无边论中“此中存在之终极”等所说的方式,来理解这里应当说的内容。巴利
Dutiyacatukke yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ ‘‘amati gacchati ettha bhāvo osāna’’ntiādinā antānantikavāde vuttanayena veditabbaṃ.
即使对证得八等至的执见者来说,随着等至的不同,想也会不同,所以从入定者的角度,也能成立“我是有种种想”这种说法。但是,在等至中,想是以单一形态现起的,所以从入定者的角度,又说“我是一向有单一想”。正因如此,这里才采用了“入定者”这个说法。或者,应当只就证得同一种等至的人来理解这个意思。虽然随着等至的不同,想也会有不同,但为了说明:对于外在的、以种种事物为所缘的境界,由于想是粗显的、多种多样的,所以称为“有种种想”,因此说“从非入定者的角度,是有种种想”。至于“依小遍处,是有小想”,这是说明:即使是对与想无关的法,他们也说“想就是我”。这里举出遍处,是为了显示想的所缘范围;对“依广大遍处”等说法,也应同样理解。这样解释之后,在有边无边论和这里的有边无边四论中,通过第一和第二种说法,这两种说法的区别就成立了;否则,在所说的各种说法中,虽然依前际、后际的安立而有某些区别,但有些其实根本没有区别。或者,也可以这样理解:“有小想”是指像“我如拇指那么大、我如麦粒那么大、我如极微那么小”等等这样执取我的人;“有无量想”是指像迦毗罗、迦那陀等人那样,认为自己遍满一切处。这里应当这样理解其义。巴利
Yadipi aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino diṭṭhigatikassa vasena samāpattibhedena saññābhedasambhavato ‘‘nānattasaññī attā’’ti ayampi vādo samāpannakavasena labbhati. Tathāpi samāpattiyaṃ ekarūpeneva saññāya upaṭṭhānato samāpannakavasena ‘‘ekattasaññī’’ti āha. Tenevettha samāpannakaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Ekasamāpattilābhino eva vā vasena attho veditabbo. Samāpattibhedena saññābhedasambhavepi bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe saññānānattena oḷārikena nānattasaññitaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘asamāpannakavasena nānattasaññī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Parittakasiṇavasena parittasaññī’’ti iminā satipi saññāvinimutte dhamme ‘‘saññāyeva attā’’ti vadatīti dassitaṃ hoti. Kasiṇaggahaṇañcettha saññāya visayadassanaṃ, evaṃ vipulakasiṇavasenāti etthāpi attho veditabbo. Evañca katvā antānantikavāde , idha ca antānantikacatukke paṭhamadutiyavādehi imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vādānaṃ viseso siddho hoti, aññathā vuttappakāresu vādesu pubbantāparantakappanabhedena satipi kehici visese kehici natthi yevāti. Atha vā ‘‘aṅguṭṭhappamāṇo attā, yavappamāṇo, aṇumatto vā attā’’ti ādidassanavasena paritto saññī cāti parittasaññī, kapilakaṇādādayo viya attano sabbagatabhāvapaṭijānanavasena appamāṇo saññī cāti appamāṇasaññīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
因为天眼是辅助条件,由天眼威力所产生的随业往生智,虽然能见到众生具有乐等状态,但这是通过天眼本身见到的,所以说“以天眼……”等等。有人问:像“一向乐的自我”这类说法属于后际之见,那么说“见到正在转生”是否不成立?并非不成立,因为他们是以见到当下的转生为依据,来构想未来的一向乐等状态,这就是论师的意思。因此他说:“见到正在转生者,便执取为‘一向乐’。”在这里应当理解:由于在某一生存地中,大多见到与乐等相伴的法在生起,所以他们便执取为“一向乐”。或者,这些见行者就像盲人摸象一样,见到什么就执取什么并加以宣称;对此不应去寻求其中的合理性。巴利
Dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍatāya yathākammūpagañāṇassa dibbacakkhupabhāvajanitena yathākammūpagañāṇena dissamānāpi sattānaṃ sukhādisamaṅgitā dibbacakkhunāva diṭṭhā hotīti āha ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’tiādi. Nanu ca ‘‘ekantasukhī attā’’tiādivādānaṃ aparantadiṭṭhibhāvato ‘‘nibbattamānaṃ disvā’’ti vacanaṃ anupannanti? Nānupapannaṃ, anāgatassa ekantasukhibhāvādikassa pakappanaṃ paccuppannāya nibbattiyā dassanena adhippetanti. Tenevāha ‘‘nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘ekantasukhī’ti gaṇhātī’’ti. Ettha ca tassaṃ tassaṃ bhūmiyaṃ bahulaṃ sukhādisahitadhammappavattidassanena tesaṃ ‘‘ekantasukhī’’ti gāho daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā hatthidassakaandhā viya diṭṭhigatikā yaṃ yadeva passanti, taṃ tadeva abhinivissa voharantīti na ettha yutti maggitabbā.
无想论与非想非非想论的注释巴利
Asaññī nevasaññīnāsaññīvādavaṇṇanā
78-83 78-83. 在无想论中,第一论是就生于无想有的众生而说。第二论则依照“把想看作我”那里所说的方式,仅仅把想执取为“我”,由于作为其附属物的其他想并不存在,所以成立为“无想”的论说。第三论同样是把想连同色法,或者把一切色法与无色法都执取为“我”而成立。第四论纯粹是依据推理执取而成立。它的含义应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。在第二组四论中,因为遍处色具有不认知的本质,所以成立为“无想”;这四论都应当依照“有边无边论”中所说的方式来了知。同样,在非想非非想论中,第一论是就生于非想非非想有的众生而言,在其死亡心与结生时,或者在任何情况下,承认存在一种无法执行粗想作用的微细想,据此而成立。第二论等则如无想论中所说,是依据微细想、并承认其具有认知的本质而成立。这样一来,虽然也可以为这些主张寻找理由,但为了显示这些见行者的论说不足采信,所以说“对此不应决定地寻求原因”。再者,这些有想论、无想论、非想非非想论,由于都从“死后无病”这一说法而来,其归属于常见是很明显的。巴利
78-83. Asaññīvāde asaññabhave nibbattasattavasena paṭhamavādo, ‘‘saññaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti ettha vuttanayena saññaṃyeva ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tassa kiñcanabhāvena ṭhitāya aññāya saññāya abhāvato ‘‘asaññī’’ti pavatto dutiyavādo, tathā saññāya saha rūpadhamme, sabbe eva vā rūpārūpadhamme ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā pavatto tatiyavādo, takkagāhavaseneva catutthavādo pavatto. Tassa pubbe vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Dutiyacatukkepi kasiṇarūpassa asañjānanasabhāvatāya asaññīti katvā antānantikavāde vuttanayeneva cattāropi veditabbā. Tathā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādepi nevasaññīnāsaññībhave nibbattasattasseva cutipaṭisandhīsu, sabbattha vā paṭusaññākiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthāya sukhumāya saññāya atthibhāvapaṭijānanavasena paṭhamavādo, asaññīvāde vuttanayena sukhumāya saññāya vasena, sañjānanasabhāvatāpaṭijānena ca dutiyavādādayo pavattāti evaṃ ekena pakārena satipi kāraṇapariyesanassa sambhave diṭṭhigatikavādānaṃ anādaraṇīyabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘tattha na ekantena kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabba’’nti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etesañca saññīasaññīnevasaññīnāsaññīvādānaṃ ‘‘arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vacanato sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho pākaṭoyeva.
断灭论的详细解说巴利
Ucchedavādavaṇṇanā
84 84. 因为不存在的东西谈不上灭尽,所以断灭见必定以执着某种存在为基础,因此经文说“有的”。就像依因果而生的自性法,虽然同属一个相续,但若落入不同相续而有差别,则在究竟意义上,因与果的自性确实不同;正如那些落入不同相续的法一样,以它们必然彻底别异为定论,这种对“种种”理的邪执,就是执取断灭见的原因。同样,为了说明:因与果诸法虽然存在,但因自性有别,若以它们同属一个相续为由,而对“一”理生起彻底无差别的执着,这也同样是一种原因,所以经文说“众生的”。实际上,对于依相续而转的诸蕴,由于不能破除密集而执为众生;又因为想着“只要此我还没被断灭,此我就一直存在”,基于这种执取,便被断灭见所束缚;或者说,灭尽意义上的灭尽,在这里就是“断灭”,所以说“断坏”。特别的灭就是坏灭,就是不存在。而这种不存在,已经超越了肉眼和慧眼的观察范围,所以说“不见”。因为“灭”这个词在世间,正是建立在“看不见”之上的。“离去有”就是出离了自性。因为凡是依灭尽而坏灭的,它就不会以自己的自性而住立。证得者就是获得天眼智的人。只是死而已,就是说对有学凡夫来说也只是死而已。不能看见再生,是因为没有前世的修行,或者因为没有做准备工作,所以无法看见再生。或者说“没有获得的人,谁也不知道他方世界”,这是依无他世论的立场;或者纯粹因为极度愚痴,才说不理解“从此之外还有他方世界”。感官所能触及的范围就只有这么大而已。就像国王为了抓住自己女儿的手那样,或者因为贪著欲乐。像落叶不再生长一样,这是说已落下的叶子从叶柄处不再连接。同样,众生也是如此:就像枯黄的叶子从枝干脱落之后不再连接,一切众生也都要经历不再连接的死亡。因为众生如水泡一般,这是他的见解。如此,就是按所说的那样。即使是证得者,也是因为从死后向上看不见什么,这些见解才生起的,所以说“或者分别之后”。巴利
84. Asato vināsāsambhavato atthibhāvanibandhano ucchedoti vuttaṃ ‘‘sato’’ti. Yathā hetuphalabhāvena pavattamānānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ satipi ekasantānapariyāpannānaṃ bhinnasantatipatitehi visese hetuphalānaṃ paramatthato bhinnasabhāvattā bhinnasantānapatitānaṃ viya accantabhedasanniṭṭhānena nānattanayassa micchāgahaṇaṃ ucchedābhinivesassa kāraṇaṃ, evaṃ hetuphalabhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ vijjamānepi sabhāvabhede ekasantatipariyāpannatāya ekattanayena accantamabhedaggahaṇampi kāraṇaṃ evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sattassā’’ti vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ. Santānavasena hi vattamānesu khandhesu ghanavinibbhogābhāvena sattagāho, sattassa ca atthibhāvagāhanibandhano ucchedagāho yāvāyaṃ attā na ucchijjati, tāvāyaṃ vijjatiyevāti gahaṇato, nirudayavināso vā idha ucchedoti adhippetoti āha ‘‘upaccheda’’nti. Visesena nāso vināso, abhāvo. So pana maṃsacakkhupaññācakkhūnaṃ dassanapathātikkamoyeva hotīti āha ‘‘adassana’’nti. Adassane hi nāsa-saddo loke niruḷhoti. Bhāvavigamanti sabhāvāpagamaṃ. Yo hi nirudayavināsavasena ucchijjati, na so attano sabhāvena tiṭṭhatīti. Lābhīti dibbacakkhuñāṇalābhī. Cutimattamevāti sekkhaputhujjanānampi cutimattameva. Na upapātanti pubbayogābhāvena, parikammākaraṇena vā upapātaṃ daṭṭhuṃ na sakkoti. ‘‘Alābhī ca ko paralokaṃ na jānātī’’ti natthikavādavasena, mahāmūḷhabhāveneva vā ‘‘ito añño paraloko atthī’’ti anavabodhamāha. Ettakoyeva visayo, yo yaṃ indriyagocaroti. Attano dhītuyā hatthagaṇhanakarājādi viya kāmasukhagiddhatāya vā. ‘‘Na puna viruhantī’’ti patitapaṇṇānaṃ vaṇṭena appaṭisandhikabhāvamāha. Evameva sattāti yathā paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto na paṭisandhiyati, evaṃ sabbe sattā appaṭisandhikamaraṇameva nigacchantīti. Jalapubbūḷakūpamā hi sattāti tassa laddhi. Tathāti vuttappakārena. Lābhinopi cutito uddhaṃ adassaneneva imā diṭṭhiyo uppajjantīti āha ‘‘vikappetvā vā’’ti.
这里有人问:像不死矫乱论那样,是纯粹依据未证得者来说明的;像死后有想论的四种论那样,也是纯粹依据证得者来说明的;但这一断灭论并不是这样。它倒像常见论、一分常见论等那样,是依据证得者和未证得者两种情况展开的。经里也确实这样说:“其中有两类人……”等等。如果是这样,那为什么这里的开示和常见论等的开示方式不一样呢?回答是:这是因为开示善巧。佛陀、世尊们具有开示的善巧,会随顺所化众生的意乐,用种种方式来说法。或者,世尊在这里也可以这样开示:“比丘们,在这里,某个沙门或婆罗门依靠精勤……心得定之后,把心转向了知众生死亡与再生的智。他用清净、超越常人的天眼,看见阿拉汉的死心,或者看见许多其他众生的死心,却看不见他们死后再生的情况。于是他说:‘正如尊者们,这个我……’”这样就是把有殊胜证得的人和有推论的人分开来说。所以应当知道,正是由于开示的善巧,为了随顺所化众生的意乐,这里的开示才和常见论等的开示方式不同。巴利
Etthāha – yathā amarāvikkhepikavādā ekantaalābhīvaseneva dassitā, yathā ca uddhamāghātanikasaññīvādacatukko ekantalābhīvaseneva, na evamayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana sassatekaccasassatavādādayo viya lābhīalābhīvasena pavatto. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha dve janā’’tiādi. Yadi evaṃ kasmā sassatavādādidesanāhi idha aññathā desanā pavattāti? Vuccate – desanāvilāsappattito. Desanāvilāsappattā hi buddhā bhagavanto, te veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vividhenākārena dhammaṃ desenti, aññathā idhāpi ca evaṃ bhagavā deseyya ‘‘idha bhikkhave ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya…pe… yathāsamāhite citte sattānaṃ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṃ abhininnāmeti, so dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena arahato cuticittaṃ passati, puthūnaṃ vā parasattānaṃ, na heva kho taduddhaṃ upapattiṃ, so evamāha ‘yathā kho bho ayaṃ attā’’’ tiādinā visesalābhino, takkino ca visuṃ katvā, tasmā desanāvilāsena veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ sassatavādādidesanāhi aññathāyaṃ desanā pavattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
或者,不像在一分常见论等主张那样,这里的断灭论并不是以推论者的主张和证悟者的主张各有不同形态来呈现的;恰恰相反,因为二者属于同一类别,所以形态也相同。世尊为了显示这一特点,才把这种断灭论说成与前面那些主张不同的形态。因为推论者也可能依靠传闻等途径,像已证悟的人一样在这里产生执著。又或者,这些见解并不是世尊以“未来将会如此”的方式开示的,也不是凭虚妄构想开示的,而是依照见行者们所认定的“唯有这是真实的,其余都是虚妄的”,以一切知智如实地界定并揭示出来。正是通过这些甚深、非凡夫所能了知的佛法的开示,以及对它们的称扬,如来才被正确地赞叹。那些持断灭论见解的见行者,就像那些看见更高层次存在的主张者一样,为了否定持后有者的主张,各自安立自己的主张;此处的开示也是这样成立的。因此,不应当用先前那些开示的方式来指责此论在开示方式上有差异。这样理解之后,应当知道:就像按无色有的类别来分析一样,也可以按欲有、色有的类别来分析断灭论。或者,不应当像对欲有、色有各别分析那样,又按无色有来分析;如果那样做,世尊所说的断灭论就会变成比所说的众生分类有更多类别,或者更少类别,因此这类指责都没有成立的余地。巴利
Atha vā ekaccasassatavādādīsu viya na idha takkīvādito visesalābhīvādo bhinnākāro, atha kho samānabhedatāya samānākāroyevāti imassa visesassa pakāsanatthaṃ bhagavatā ayamucchedavādo purimavādehi visiṭṭhākāro desito. Sambhavati hi takkinopi anussavādivasena adhigamavato viya idha abhiniveso. Atha vā na imā diṭṭhiyo bhagavatā anāgate evaṃ bhāvīvasena desitā, nāpi parikappavasena, atha kho yathā yathā diṭṭhigatikehi ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti paññattā, tathā tathā yathābhuccaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇena paricchinditvā pakāsitā. Yehi gambhīrādippakārā aputhujjanagocarā buddhadhammā pakāsanti, yesañca parikittanena tathāgatā sammadeva thomitā honti. Ucchedavādīhi ca diṭṭhigatikehi yathā uttaruttarabhavadassīhi aparabhavadassīnaṃ tesaṃ vādapaṭisedhavasena sakasakavādā patiṭṭhāpitā, tathāyaṃ desanā pavattāti purimadesanāhi imissā desanāya pavattibhedo na codetabbo. Evañca katvā arūpabhavabhedavasena viya kāmarūpabhavabhedavasenāpi ucchedavādo vibhajitvā daṭṭhabbo. Atha vā paccekaṃ kāmarūpabhavabhedavasena viya arūpabhavavasenāpi na vibhajitvā vattabbo, evañca sati bhagavatā vuttasattakato bahutarabhedo, appatarabhedo vā ucchedavādo āpajjatīti evaṃ pakārāpi codanā anavakāsāvāti.
这里有人提出:在前三种主张里说“身坏”,这是说得通的,因为那些主张是围绕五蕴所摄的个体存在而生起的;可是在后四种主张里,它们是依四蕴所摄的个体存在而生起的,为什么也说“身坏”呢?毕竟无色界的众生确实没有身体。确实如此。不过,执持恶见的人是把自己在有色个体存在时所用的世俗说法,也套用到无色个体存在上,所以才说“身坏”。而且,世尊只是照见行者们安立恶见的方式,如实地把它开示出来。或者也可以这样理解:所谓“身”,是指由触等诸法聚集而成的无色个体存在。在这里,主张“欲天等个体存在一切都彻底断灭”的第二类等主张,被称为后际论者是合理的,因为它们的主张以未来为所缘;而主张“作为见行者现量亲证的人之个体存在断灭”的第一类主张,由于以现在为所缘,就不该算作后际论者。其实,第二类等主张所说的“此我尚未如此完全断灭”等,正是就它们各自所含摄的前前、后后诸有的断灭而言,这才合乎后际论者的性质;其中所说的“然而,贤者,还有另一个我”,是着眼于人身的殊胜而说的,并不是说在一切方面都是另一个存在。不,这并不矛盾。即使第一类主张的所缘属于此世,但由于它的意趣在于未来之时,所以第一类主张者也可以称为后际论者,这并没有矛盾。巴利
Etthāha – yuttaṃ tāva purimesu tīsu vādesu ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti vuttaṃ pañcavokārabhavapariyāpannaṃ attabhāvaṃ ārabbha pavattattā tesaṃ vādānaṃ, catuvokārabhavapariyāpannaṃ pana attabhāvaṃ nissāya pavattesu catutthādīsu catūsu vādesu kasmā ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti vuttaṃ . Na hi arūpīnaṃ kāyo vijjatīti? Saccametaṃ, rūpattabhāve pavattavohāreneva pana diṭṭhigatiko arūpattabhāvepi kāyavohāraṃ āropetvā āha ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti. Yathā ca diṭṭhigatikā diṭṭhiyo paññāpenti, tathā ca bhagavā dassetīti, arūpakāyabhāvato vā phassādidhammasamūhabhūte arūpattabhāve kāyaniddeso daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca kāmadevattabhāvādiniravasesavibhavapatiṭṭhāpakānaṃ dutiyavādādīnaṃ yutto aparantakappikabhāvo anāgataddhavisayattā tesaṃ vādānaṃ, na pana diṭṭhigatikapaccakkhabhūtamanussattabhāvasamucchedapatiṭṭhāpakassa paṭhamavādassa paccuppannavisayattā. Dutiyavādādīnañhi purimapurimavādasaṅgahitasseva attano taduttaruttaribhavopapannassa samucchedato yujjati aparantakappikatā, tathā ca ‘‘no ca kho bho ayaṃ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ, yaṃ pana tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘atthi kho bho añño attā’’ti, taṃ manussakāyavisesāpekkhāya vuttaṃ, na sabbathā aññabhāvatoti? No na yutto, idhalokapariyāpannattepi ca paṭhamavādavisayassa anāgatakālasseva tassa adhippetattā paṭhamavādinopi aparantakappikatāya na koci virodhoti.
见法涅槃论的释义巴利
Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavaṇṇanā
93 “见法”是指通过作为见的智慧所证得的法。在这里,有些法虽然不属于感官的对象,但因为极其明显,也就如同感官的对象一样,所以说“见法就称为现前之法”。也正是因为这样,才说“这是对在各处所获得的状态的称呼”。巴利
93.Diṭṭhadhammoti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena upaladdhadhammo. Tattha yo anindriyavisayo, sopi supākaṭabhāvena indriyavisayo viya hotīti āha ‘‘diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkhadhammo vuccatī’’ti. Teneva ca ‘‘tattha tattha paṭiladdhattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ.
95 以内灼为特相:当一个人的心被亲属、财富、疾病、戒行、见解等灾祸触动时,内心深处的灼热、忧愁,就是内灼;这就是它的特相,所以叫以内灼为特相。以依彼悲叹为特相:依止那作为生起原因的愁,叫依彼;强烈的哭号、悲叹,叫悲叹;依彼和悲叹合在一起,就是依彼悲叹;这就是它的特相,所以叫以依彼悲叹为特相。被亲属灾祸等触动的人,即使通过悲泣也无法排解,由内心潜藏的愁所引发的极度苦恼,就是恼。然而,由于它是心不清净的表现形态,因此说它以颓丧为特相。巴利
95.Antonijjhāyanalakkhaṇoti ñātibhogarogasīladiṭṭhibyasanehi phuṭṭhassa cetaso anto abbhantaraṃ nijjhāyanaṃ socanaṃ antonijjhāyanaṃ, taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti antonijjhāyanalakkhaṇo. Tannissitalālappanalakkhaṇoti taṃ sokaṃ samuṭṭhānahetuṃ nissitaṃ tannissitaṃ, bhusaṃ vilāpanaṃ lālappanaṃ, tannissitañca lālappanañca tannissitalālappanaṃ, taṃ lakkhaṇaṃ etassāti tannissitalālappanalakkhaṇo. Ñātibyasanādinā phuṭṭhassa paridevenāpi asakkuṇantassa antogatasokasamuṭṭhito bhuso āyāso upāyāso. So pana yasmā cetaso appasannākāro hoti, tasmā ‘‘visādalakkhaṇo’’ti vutto.
96 96. “寻思”就是所寻之物,而它本身就是具有安立作用的寻,所以说“寻……即寻”。对“所伺”这个词,这里也应同样理解。因为寻与伺的特性是扰动,与它们相应的禅那就好像带着刺一样,所以说“如似有刺”。巴利
96. Vitakkanaṃ vitakkitaṃ, taṃ pana abhiniropanasabhāvo vitakkoyevāti āha ‘‘abhi…pe… vitakko’’ti. Esa nayo vicāritanti etthāpi. Khobhakarasabhāvattā vitakkavicārānaṃ taṃsahitaṃ jhānaṃ saubbilanaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sakaṇḍakaṃ viya khāyatī’’ti.
97 当那种使心踊跃的喜生起时,心就被称为“踊跃”;然而,心之所以有踊跃的状态,是因为那种喜存在,没有它就不会有,所以那种喜被称为“使心踊跃的原因”。巴利
97. Yāya ubbilāpanapītiyā uppannāya cittaṃ ‘‘ubbilāvita’’nti vuccati, sā pīti ubbilāvitattaṃ yasmā pana cittassa ubbilabhāvo tassā pītiyā sati hoti, nāsati, tasmā sā ‘‘ubbilabhāvakāraṇa’’nti vuttā.
98 “作意”是指心向内倾斜的状态,也就是心朝向所缘、低俯于所缘的意思。因为当快乐生起时,心会倾向于所缘,不像苦生起时那样背离所缘,也不像不苦不乐时那样既不倾向也不背离。在这里,第一种主张的人不如理地冒出这样的想法:“就像被饥渴等逼迫的人,面对可口食物等欲乐,当他要远离欲乐时,对执取所缘的渴望反而特别增长;可是,已经充分享受了殊胜欲味而满足的人,就像吃饱了美食的人一样,不再有想吃东西的欲望;即使是对欲境贪染极深、难以脱离的人,也会像水蛭一样自己松开。”他由此认为,靠满足五欲乐就能止息轮回之苦。第二种等主张的人,则通过揭示欲乐等的过患,以及初禅等快乐的寂静,认为满足于初禅等快乐就能断除轮回之苦。对于断灭论,这里也应当按同样方式加以考察。不过这里有一个差别:在同一个生命体中,可以有五种主张。也正因如此,圣典里并没有特别提出“另一个我”。那么,为什么开示完全涅槃的见法涅槃论者被归入常见,而不是断见呢?因为他阐明:通过获得种种殊胜快乐而脱离束缚之后,纯粹的我便安住在自己的本性之中。巴利
98.Ābhogoti vā cittassa ābhuggabhāvo, ārammaṇe oṇatabhāvoti attho. Sukhena hi cittaṃ ārammaṇe abhinataṃ hoti, na dukkhena viya apanataṃ, nāpi adukkhamasukhena viya anabhinataṃ anapanatañca. Tattha ‘‘khuppipāsādiabhibhūtassa viya manuññabhojanādīsu kāmehi viveciyamānassupādārammaṇapatthanā visesato abhivaḍḍhati, uḷārassa pana kāmarasassa yāvadatthaṃ tittassa manuññarasabhojanaṃ bhuttāvino viya suhitassa bhottukāmatā kāmesu pātabyatā na hoti, visayassāgiddhatāya visayehi dummociyehipi jalūkā viya sayameva muñcatī’’ti ca ayoniso ummujjitvā kāmaguṇasantappitatāya saṃsāradukkhavūpasamaṃ byākāsi paṭhamavādī. Kāmādīnaṃ ādīnavadassitāya, paṭhamādijjhānasukhassa santabhāvadassitāya ca paṭhamādijjhānasukhatittiyā saṃsāradukkhupacchedaṃ byākaṃsu dutiyādivādino, idhāpi ucchedavāde vuttappakāro vicāro yathāsambhavaṃ ānetvā vattabbo. Ayaṃ panettha viseso – ekasmiñhi attabhāve pañca vādā labbhanti. Teneva hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘añño attā’’ti aññaggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ. Kathaṃ panettha accantanibbānapaññāpakassa attano diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādassa sassatadiṭṭhiyā saṅgaho, na pana ucchedadiṭṭhiyāti? Taṃtaṃsukhavisesasamaṅgitāpaṭiladdhena bandhavimokkhena suddhassa attano sakarūpe avaṭṭhānadīpanato.
其余是指剩下的五十五种邪见。在这些邪见当中,有边无边论者等所持的常见性质,在各处都已经说明了。巴利
Sesāti sesā pañcapaññāsa diṭṭhiyo. Tāsu antānantikavādādīnaṃ sassatadiṭṭhibhāvo tattha tattha pakāsitoyeva.
101-3 那么,为什么只把过去际和未来际显示为见执的领域,而不把这两者合起来当作一个中间际呢?因为那不可能。并不像过去际和未来际那样,在脱离这两者的中间际上能安立见解,因为时间太短暂。如果说现在有就是这两者的中间,那么这样一来,它兼具两者的性质,就已经包含在过去际和未来际里面了,怎么能说没有被显示呢?或者,因为具有过去际和未来际,所以中间也被称为“过去未来际”;而说“过去未来际论者或过去未来际随见者”时,已经把它和过去际、未来际分开来说了,应当这样理解。在义注中,也应当知道,通过“一切后际论者即前际后际论者”这个总称,或者通过省略的方式,已经把它们包含进去了;否则,强行归纳而说的话就变得没有意义了。那么,哪些是前际后际论者呢?应当知道,就是那些持有边无边论和见法涅槃论等见解的人。巴利
101-3. Kiṃ pana kāraṇaṃ pubbantāparantā eva diṭṭhābhinivesassa visayabhāvena dassitā, na pana tadubhayamekajjhanti? Asambhavato. Na hi pubbantāparantesu viya tadubhayavinimutte majjhante diṭṭhikappanā sambhavati ittarakālattā, atha pana paccuppannabhavo tadubhayavemajjhaṃ, evaṃ sati diṭṭhikappanakkhamo tassa ubhayasabhāvo pubbantāparantesuyeva antogadhoti kathamadassitaṃ. Atha vā pubbantāparantavantatāya ‘‘pubbantāparanto’’ti majjhanto vuccati , so ca ‘‘pubbantāparantakappikā vā pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhino’’ti vadantena pubbantāparantehi visuṃ katvā vuttoyevāti daṭṭhabbo. Aṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘sabbepi te aparantakappike pubbantāparantakappike’’ti etena sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesena vā saṅgahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, aññathā saṅkaḍḍhitvā vuttavacanassa anatthakatā āpajjeyyāti. Ke pana te pubbantāparantakappikā? Ye antānantikā hutvā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti evaṃ pakārā veditabbā.
在这里,应当知道:经中说“所有这些都只是依这六十二种事,或依其中任何一种,此外没有别的”,而且除了前际论者等三类之外,并不存在其他任何持恶见的人。因此,其他经典中所说的无业论、无因论、无有论等,以及在外道中也可见到的尊佑论、生主论、士夫论、时论、自性论、必然论、随意论等种种恶见,都应知道它们也包含在这里面,都摄于其中。如何呢?无业论首先由“不孕者、伪善者”等语显示无有作用,故摄于常见;同样,由“有这些身”等语所展开的迦罗鸠驮论,由“无因无缘使众生杂染”等语,无因论摄于无因生起论。“无他世”等语,无有论摄于断灭论。正如那里所说“身坏后断灭”等。以第一个“等”字,尼乾子论等也被摄集。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi, etesaṃ vā aññatarena, natthi ito bahiddhā’’ti vacanato, pubbantakappikādittayavinimuttassa ca kassaci diṭṭhigatikassa abhāvato yāni tāni sāmaññaphalādi (dī. ni. 1.166) suttantaresu vuttappakārāni akiriyāhetukanatthikavādādīni, yāni ca issarapajāpatipurisakālasabhāvaniyatiyadicchāvādādippabhedāni diṭṭhigatāni (visuddhi. ṭī. 2.563; vibha. anuṭī. 189 passitabbaṃ) bahiddhāpi dissamānāni, tesaṃ ettheva saṅgaho, antogadhatā ca veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Akiriyavādo tāva ‘‘vañjho kūṭaṭṭho’’tiādinā kiriyābhāvadīpanato sassatavāde antogadho, tathā ‘‘sattime kāyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.174) nayappavatto pakudhavādo, ‘‘natthi hetu natthi paccayo sattānaṃ saṃkilesāyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.168) vacanato ahetukavādo adhiccasamuppannikavāde antogadho. ‘‘Natthi paro loko’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.171) vacanato natthikavādo ucchedavāde antogadho. Tathā hi tattha ‘‘kāyassa bhedā ucchijjatī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.86) vuttaṃ. Paṭhamena ādi-saddena nigaṇṭhavādādayo saṅgahitā.
即使圣典中把尼干子的主张按修行层面收在“四重防护”里,但由于它超出了七种主张的范围,属于散乱论,所以尼干子的主张也和散惹耶的主张一样,归入不死矫乱论中。
像“命就是身,命与身不同”这类主张,归入“我是有色的、无病、死后存在”等说法中。“如来死后存在”“有化生众生”这类说法,归入常见。“如来死后不存在”“没有化生众生”这类说法,归入断见。“如来死后也存在也不存在”“化生众生也有也没有”这类说法,包含在一分常见中。“如来死后既非存在也非不存在”“化生众生既非有也非无”这类说法,包含在不死矫乱论中。
自在天、生主、原人、时间等主张,包含在一分常见中,胜论派的主张也一样。自性、宿命、意欲等主张,归入无因生论。
按照这个方式,应当知道:在其他经典中以及外道那里见到的各种见解,都包含在这六十二见之中。巴利
Yadipi pāḷiyaṃ nāṭaputtavāda (dī. ni. 1.178) bhāvena cātuyāmasaṃvaro āgato, tathāpi sattavatātikkamena vikkhepavāditāya nāṭaputtavādopi sañcayavādo viya amarāvikkhepavādesu antogadho. ‘‘Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīraṃ, aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīra’’nti (dī. ni. 1.377; ma. ni. 2.122; saṃ. ni. 2.35) evaṃ pakārā vādā ‘‘rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’tiādivādesu saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, ‘‘hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, ‘‘atthi sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃ pakārā sassatavāde. ‘‘Na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃ pakārā ucchedavādena saṅgahitā. ‘‘Hoti ca na hoti ca tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, atthi ca natthi ca sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃ pakārā ekaccasassatavāde antogadhā. ‘‘Neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, nevatthi na natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti ca evaṃ pakārā amarāvikkhepavāde antogadhā. Issarapajāpatipurisakālavādā ekaccasassatavāde antogadhā, tathā kaṇādavādo. Sabhāvaniyatiyadicchāvādā adhiccasamuppannikavādena saṅgahitā. Iminā nayena suttantaresu, bahiddhā ca dissamānānaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ imāsu dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīsu antogadhatā veditabbā.
“意欲”是指对见解的意乐。因为众生在杂染这一边,依常见和断见而有两种意欲。世尊以一切知智,在无量世界中、对无量众生、就无量所知差别里生起的种种意欲——虽然种类繁多、各不相同——依照“有四类人是常住论者”等说法,把它们归纳为六十二种分类来开示,就像用标准秤在称量一样,所以说“如同用秤在称量”。后文也将说到“内有网罗”等。而“如同从须弥山脚取沙”这一句,是为了显示:除了世尊的一切知智,其他人根本不可能胜任这个开示。巴利
Ajjhāsayanti diṭṭhijjhāsayaṃ. Sassatucchedadiṭṭhivasena hi sattānaṃ saṃkilesapakkhe duvidho ajjhāsayo, tañca bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ aparimāṇe eva ñeyyavisese uppajjanavasena anekabhedabhinnānampi ‘‘cattāro janā sassatavādā’’tiādinā dvāsaṭṭhiyā pabhedehi saṅgaṇhanavasena sabbaññutaññāṇena paricchinditvā dassento pamāṇabhūtāya tulāya dhārayamāno viya hotīti āha ‘‘tulāya tulayanto viyā’’ti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘anto jālīkatā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.146). ‘‘Sinerupādato vālukaṃ uddharanto viyā’’ti etena sabbaññutaññāṇato aññassa imissā desanāya asakkuṇeyyataṃ dasseti.
连结就是连接。由提问所形成的连接,叫作“问之连结”。或者,能连接起来的,就是连结;以提问作为它的连结,所以叫“问之连结”。又或者,通过提问而被连接起来,所以叫“问之连结”。对于“意欲连结”,道理也是一样。至于“随顺连结”,这里应当理解为:被连接起来的就是连结;每一种连结都是“随顺连结”,也就是随顺于连结,所以叫“随顺连结”。这个意思在义注中是这样说的:“所谓‘随顺连结’,应当这样理解:起初由某一法引出了开示,后来在哪些经中,接着以与该法相应的法,或者以与它相对立的法,继续出现进一步的教导,就依据这些经来理解‘随顺连结’。比如怎样呢?《若希望经》中,开头由戒引出了开示,后面则出现了六种神通……《锯喻经》中,开头由不忍引出了开示,后面则出现了锯喻”等等。巴利
Anusandhānaṃ anusandhi, pucchāya kato anusandhi pucchānusandhi. Atha vā anusandhayatīti anusandhi, pucchā anusandhi etassāti pucchānusandhi. Pucchāya anusandhiyatīti vā pucchānusandhi. Ajjhāsayānusandhimhipi eseva nayo. Yathānusandhīti ettha pana anusandhīyatīti anusandhi, yā yā anusandhi yathānusandhi, anusandhianurūpaṃ vā yathānusandhīti saddattho veditabbo, so ‘‘yena pana dhammena ādimhi desanā uṭṭhitā, tassa dhammassa anurūpadhammavasena vā paṭipakkhavasena vā yesu suttesu upari desanā āgacchati, tesaṃ vasena yathānusandhi veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ? Ākaṅkheyyasutte (ma. ni. 1.64-69) heṭṭhā sīlena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari cha abhiññā āgatā…pe… kakacūpame (ma. ni. 1.222) heṭṭhā akkhantiyā uṭṭhitā, upari kakacūpamā āgatā’’tiādinā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.100-104) vutto.
“据说”这句话,是在说明世尊所教导的“无我”令他们不乐。这是对法的呼唤。“非我所作”,是指不是自己造作的,或者是由无我的诸蕴所造作的。“将触及哪一个我?”意思是:既然没有我,而诸蕴又是刹那生灭的,那么业将以其果报触及哪一个我呢?是谁在感受业果呢?“非明者”,是指因为缺少闻法等条件,对圣法不精通,所以不是明者。“具无明者”,是指被无明所覆盖,因为在圣法上未受调伏,所以未能断除无明。“以爱为主导的心”,是说心里生起这样的想法:“如果我确实不存在,那我所造之业的果报由谁来感受?如果真有一个我存在,才谈得上受用果报。”这种由爱为主导而产生的,就是爱为主导的心,也就是与“我执”相应的心。“应超越”,意思是:虽然诸行是刹那生灭的,但在某个相续中造了业,果报就在那个相续中产生,因此业与果的关系只是依于法的积聚而成立;如果错误地执取为一性之理,认为必须有一个同时是造作者和受者的实体,否则“业与果的关系就无法成立”,从而认为应当跨越导师教法中揭示我空、我所空的教导。巴利
Iti kirāti bhagavato yathādesitāya attasuññatāya attano aruccanabhāvadīpanaṃ. Bhoti dhammālapanaṃ. Anattakatānīti attanā na katāni, anattakehi vā khandhehi katāni. Kamattānaṃ phusissantīti asati attani khandhānañca khaṇikattā kammāni kaṃ attānaṃ attano phalena phusissanti, ko kammaphalaṃ paṭisaṃvedetīti attho. Avidvāti sutādivirahena ariyadhammassa akovidatāya na vidvā. Avijjāgatoti avijjāya upagato, ariyadhamme avinītatāya appahīnāvijjoti attho. Taṇhādhipateyyena cetasāti ‘‘yadi ahaṃ nāma koci natthi , mayā katassa kammassa ko phalaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti, sati pana tasmiṃ siyā phalūpabhogo’’ti taṇhādhipatito āgato taṇhādhipateyyo, tena. Attavādupādānasahagata cetasā. Atidhāvitabbanti khaṇikattepi saṅkhārānaṃ yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ kataṃ, tattheva phaluppattito dhammapuñjamattasseva ca siddhe kammaphalasambandhe ekattanayaṃ micchā gahetvā ekena kārakavedakabhūtena bhavitabbaṃ, aññathā ‘‘kammaphalānaṃ sambandho na siyā’’ti attattaniyasuññatāpakāsanaṃ satthusāsanaṃ atikkamitabbaṃ maññeyyāti attho.
“上面提到了六种神通”——这是按照随顺法的角度来显示前后文的连接;其余那些则是按照对立法的角度来显示。关于烦恼,比如“贪是心的随烦恼”等等,是从烦恼的角度来讲的。“于此亦尔”中的“亦”字,是在表示:就像在前面已说的那些经里按照对立法显示前后文的连接一样,在这部经里也是如此。确实,这个开示是因为执取恒常、坚实等而引生的恶见所引发的,最终以揭示恒常、坚实等为空无实质而结束。巴利
‘‘Upari cha abhiññā āgatā’’ti anurūpadhammavasena yathānusandhiṃ dasseti, itarehi paṭipakkhavasena. Kilesenāti ‘‘lobho cittassa upakkileso’’tiādinā kilesavasena. Imasmimpīti pi-saddena yathā vuttasuttādīsu paṭipakkhavasena yathānusandhi, evaṃ imasmimpi sutteti dasseti. Tathā hi niccasārādipaññāpakānaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ vasena uṭṭhitā ayaṃ desanā niccasārādisuññatāpakāsanena niṭṭhāpitāti.
关于恐惧与颤动的篇章的注释巴利
Paritassitavipphanditavāravaṇṇanā
105-117 105-117. 为了显示界限的区分:是为了通过如实看见常见等邪见,来阐明正见与它们之间没有混杂。那也是被感受的,这是前后文的关联。对于不知不见的人:就是指那些不能如实了知我与世间是常、不能如实了知这个见处就是如此执取、如此把握、如此受持、如此趣向来世的人。同样,对于在那种被感受的事物上因为未离贪爱而执取这样的邪见的人,他们不能从集起等角度如实了知、如实看见那种感受。通过这一点,说明如来等以无障碍的智慧和周全的眼,对这里的事物有如实知见,而执邪见的人则不是这样,他们只有贪爱和邪见的执取。正是因为这个缘故,这个教导就成了显示界限区分的教导。不过在注释书里,则笼统地说成对诸法的自性不能如实知见的人。因为并不是仅仅不了知有为法的自性就会产生错误执著。总说的阐明会落实到特殊情况上,所以做了这种特别的连接。感受,是指以我与世间是常这种见解的施设方式而生起的、被邪见所体验的体验。入于爱者,就是已进入贪爱、被贪爱所侵袭,或者持续流转于贪爱的人。而那也正是,这是回顾前面所说的那种感受。因为它确实是轮回的过患,被见和爱的刺所贯穿,所以极为动荡不安,不像道果之乐那样以单一形态安住。正因如此才说被恐惧所动摇等等。巴利
105-117.Mariyādavibhāgadassanatthanti sassatādidiṭṭhidassanassa sammādassanena saṅkarābhāvavibhāvanatthaṃ. Tadapi vedayitanti sambandho. Ajānataṃ apassatanti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti ‘‘idaṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ evaṃgahikaṃ evaṃparāmaṭṭhaṃ evaṃgahitaṃ hoti evaṃabhisamparāya’’nti yathābhūtaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ. Tathā yasmiṃ vedayite avītataṇhatāya evaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ upādiyanti, taṃ vedayitaṃ samudayādito yathābhūtaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ, etena anāvaraṇañāṇasamantacakkhūhi yathā tathāgatānaṃ yathābhūtamettha ñāṇadassanaṃ, na evaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ, atha kho taṇhādiṭṭhiparāmāsoyevāti dasseti. Teneva cāyaṃ desanā mariyādavibhāgadassanatthā jātā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantāna’’nti avisesena vuttaṃ. Na hi saṅkhatadhammasabhāvaṃ ajānanamattena micchā abhinivisantīti. Sāmaññajotanā visese avatiṭṭhatīti ayaṃ visesayojanā katā. Vedayitanti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti diṭṭhipaññāpanavasena pavattaṃ diṭṭhiyā anubhūtaṃ anubhavanaṃ. Taṇhāgatānanti taṇhāya gatānaṃ upagatānaṃ, pavattānaṃ vā. Tañca kho panetanti ca yathāvuttaṃ vedayitaṃ paccāmasati. Tañhi vaṭṭāmisabhūtaṃ diṭṭhitaṇhāsallānuviddhatāya saubbilattā cañcalaṃ, na maggaphalasukhaṃ viya ekarūpena avatiṭṭhatīti. Tenevāha ‘‘paritassitenā’’tiādi.
或者,从有差别的因出发,把六十二种恶见分别说明之后,现在为了从无差别的因来显示它们,就开始了“诸比丘,对此……”这一段开示。因为对一切持恶见的人来说,受、无明和渴爱就是无差别的因。这里“那也是”指的是:在“他们施设我与世间是常”这句话里,这种“我与世间是常”的施设,那也是受。对于乐等三种感受,他们或者依次从苦、从箭、从无常的角度,或者总体上从集、灭、味、过患、出离的角度,不能如实了知、不能如实看见;也正因为对乐等产生希求,所以成了进入渴爱、被渴爱所侵袭的人。他们只是因为渴爱的恐惧而表现出见的悸动、见的摇摆,或者仅仅是在身门和语门中由见所引起的躁动而已;并不是说,有任何可以由见来施设的“常”法存在。这就是这段话的意思。在一分常见论等情形中,道理也是这样。巴利
Atha vā evaṃ visesakāraṇato dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni vibhajitvā idāni avisesakāraṇato tāni dassetuṃ ‘‘tatra bhikkhave’’tiādikā desanā āraddhā. Sabbesañhi diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vedanā avijjā taṇhā ca avisiṭṭhakāranti. Tattha tadapīti ‘‘sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapenti’’ti ettha yadetaṃ ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti paññāpanaṃ, tadapi. Sukhādibhedaṃ tividhavedayitaṃ yathākkamaṃ dukkhasallāniccato, avisesena samudayatthaṅgamassādādīnavanissaraṇato vā yathābhūtaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ, tato eva ca sukhādipatthanāsambhavato taṇhāya upagatattā taṇhāgatānaṃ taṇhāparitassitena diṭṭhivipphanditameva diṭṭhicalanameva, ‘‘asati attani ko vedanaṃ anubhavatī’’ti kāyavacīdvāresu diṭṭhiyā copanappattimattameva vā, na pana diṭṭhiyā paññāpetabbo sassato koci dhammo atthīti attho. Ekaccasassatavādādīsupi eseva nayo.
触缘部分的详细解释巴利
Phassapaccayavāravaṇṇanā
118 118. 那些恶见,是被渴爱所逼迫的心所生起的;对于这样的心来说,感受是它的缘,而感受又以触为缘。这一开示,是在确定见的缘的次第传承,所以说“为了显示传承的缘”。由此应当看出:就像能施设的法就是见,那些以它为缘的法也各自依缘的力量而生起,不会没有缘;同样,应当被施设的法,比如色、受等,在这里面并没有任何“我”,也没有“世间是常”这回事——这个道理已经显示出来了。巴利
118. Yena taṇhāparitassitena etāni diṭṭhigatāni pavattanti, tassa vedayitaṃ paccayo, vedayitassāpi phasso paccayoti desanā diṭṭhiyā paccayaparamparaniddhāraṇanti āha ‘‘paramparapaccayadassanattha’’nti, tena yathā paññāpanadhammo diṭṭhi, tappaccayadhammā ca yathāsakaṃ paccayavaseneva uppajjanti, na paccayehi vinā, evaṃ paññāpetabbā dhammāpi rūpavedanādayo, na ettha koci attā vā loko vā sassatoti ayamattho dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“没有这个道理”这一部分的解释巴利
Netaṃṭhānaṃvijjativāravaṇṇanā
131 “它的缘”是指触的缘。在“以见为缘的受”中,意思是:以触为根本、由它自己的诸缘所生的受。即使没有眼等依处,也没有某些相应法,受仍然可以生起;但受绝不可能离开触而生起,所以触是受强有力的因,因此说“为了显示有力”。即使所缘已经现前,如果心识生起时不具备触的作用,就不能以所缘缘为缘,所以只有触才是相应法的特殊之缘。同样,世尊在分析心识生起时,首先举出的是触,而受只是被确定而已。巴利
131.Tassapaccayassāti phassapaccayassa diṭṭhivedayiteti diṭṭhiyā paccayabhūte vedayite, phassapadhānehi attano paccayehi nipphādetabbeti attho. Vināpi cakkhādivatthūhi, sampayuttadhammehi ca kehici vedanā uppajjati, na pana kadāci phassena vināti phasso vedanāya balavakāraṇanti āha ‘‘balavabhāvadassanattha’’nti. Sannihitopi hi visayo sace phusanākārarahito hoti cittuppādo, na tassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hotīti phassova sampayuttadhammānaṃ visesapaccayo. Tathā hi bhagavatā cittuppādaṃ vibhajantena phassoyeva paṭhamaṃ uddhaṭo, vedanāya pana adhiṭṭhānameva.
关于“执取于恶见之轮转”的解说巴利
Diṭṭhigatikādhiṭṭhānavaṭṭakathāvaṇṇanā
144 在下面三个轮次里,受都更为突出,而且下文将要说到“他们感受”,所以这里以受为主,因此说“总集一切见所受”。“总集”这个词,也显示了在“那些”等各处出现的“也”字的意思。把受归入触,正是为了显示触为缘的性质,也就是“六内处感受六种所缘,完全以六触为因”。在这里生起,“生起”这个词在此处是“依处”的意思,所以说“在生起处”。同样,“汇集”这个词也应当这样理解。在这里,果报伸展出来,或者说,因为它以果报为依赖而运作,所以能伸展、令自己的果报生起,因此叫“处”,也就是因。就像树林和灌木丛聚集的地方,人们约定俗成地叫“林野”,“林野”本身就是“林野处”,所以说“仅是概念假立”。在“三种意义”中,“也”字应当理解为含摄未说出的意义,由此也包含了矿藏、住处、依止处等意思。在“金处(金矿)”“金处(金器)”“婆苏天处”“作业处(工坊)”等用法中,“处”字就是用在矿藏、住处、依止处这些意义上。在眼等处中,触等法是遍布的,而那些处也是它们的住处、依止处,因为它们具有依止缘的性质。应当以三种——境、根、识——会合的状态来理解触,所以触被称为“会合”。正因如此,它被说为“以聚集为现起”。依照这个方式,虽然还有其他相应法存在,但就像在这部经中“眼以及……触”这样,为了显示受是主要之因,所以以触为首来说法;同样,在这里的《梵网经》中,从“触缘受”等开始,以触为起点来说明后际缘起,为了显示缘的次第,所以以触为门而说“以触处触了又触”。巴利
144. Heṭṭhā tīsupi vāresu adhikatattā, upari ca ‘‘paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti vakkhamānattā vedayitamettha padhānanti āha ‘‘sabbadiṭṭhivedayitāni sampiṇḍetī’’ti. Sampiṇḍetīti ca ‘‘yepi te’’ti tattha tattha āgatassa pi-saddassa atthaṃ dasseti. Vedayitassa phasse pakkhipanaṃ phassapaccayatādassanameva ‘‘chahi ajjhattikāyatanehi chaḷārammaṇapaṭisaṃvedanaṃ ekantato chaphassahetukamevā’’ti. Sañjāyanti etthāti adhikaraṇattho sañjāti-saddoti āha ‘‘sañjātiṭṭhāne’’ti. Evaṃ samosaraṇasaddopi daṭṭhabbo. Āyatati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāya, āyabhūtaṃ vā attano phalaṃ tanoti pavattetīti āyatanaṃ, kāraṇaṃ. Rukkhagacchasamūhe araññavohāro araññameva araññāyatananti āha ‘‘paṇṇattimatte’’ti. Atthattayepīti pi-saddena avuttatthasampiṇḍanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tena ākāranivāsādhiṭṭhānatthe saṅgaṇhāti. Hiraññāyatanaṃ suvaṇṇāyatanaṃ, vāsudevāyatanaṃ kammāyatananti ādīsu ākaranivāsādhiṭṭhānesu āyatanasaddo. Cakkhādīsu ca phassādayo ākiṇṇā, tāni ca nesaṃ nivāso, adhiṭṭhānañca nissayapaccayabhāvatoti. Tiṇṇampi visayindriyaviññāṇānaṃ saṅgatibhāvena gahetabbo phassoti ‘‘saṅgatī’’ti vutto. Tathā hi so ‘‘sannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti vuccati. Iminā nayenāti vijjamānesupi aññesu sampayuttadhammesu yathā ‘‘cakkhuñca…pe… phasso’’ti (ma. ni. 1.204; ma. ni. 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; saṃ. ni. 4.60; kathā. 465) etasmiṃ sutte vedanāya padhānakāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ phassasīsena desanā katā, evamidhāpi brahmajāle ‘‘phassapaccayā vedanā’’tiādinā phassaṃ ādiṃ katvā aparantapaṭiccasamuppādadīpanena paccayaparamparaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘phassāyatanehi phussa phussā’’ti phassamukhena vuttaṃ.
触虽然属于无色法,也不完全黏着在所缘上,但它以触击的方式生起,就好像真的在触碰一样,所以论师说“正是触在触碰一个个所缘”。也正因为这样,它被称为“以触碰为特相,以撞击为作用”。至于“以触处触碰了又触碰”这句话,就像“床在响”之类的说法一样,那些处本来并没有触碰的作用,却是借着世俗假说的表达方式,把它们说成有触碰的作用,因此论师说“将它安立在触上”,意思是:把它们当作以触为去向,让它们进入触的范畴。所谓范畴,其实只是世俗言说而已,并不能靠它成就真实之义,所以接着说了“因此”等话。巴利
Phasso arūpadhammopi samāno ekadesena ārammaṇe anallīyamānopi phusanākārena pavattati phusanto viya hotīti āha ‘‘phassova taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusatī’’ti, yena so ‘‘phusanalakkhaṇo, saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti ca vuccati. ‘‘Phassāyatanehi phussa phussā’’ti aphusanakiccānipi āyatanāni ‘‘mañcā ghosantī’’tiādīsu viya nissitavohārena phusanakiccāni katvā dassitānīti āha ‘‘phasse upanikkhipitvā’’ti, phassagatikāni katvā phassūpacāraṃ āropetvāti attho. Upacāro hi nāma vohāramattaṃ, na tena atthasiddhi hotīti āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi.
受可依其自身所依的六种触来分类,即从眼触所生受到意触所生受,简略地说有六种;详细地说,则有一百零八种分类。关于色爱等的分类,即从色爱到法爱,简略地说有六种分类,详细地说有一百零八种分类。所谓“从亲依止的角度”,就是以亲依止为首要。那么,为什么这里只举出亲依止缘呢?难道乐受和不苦不乐受对于渴爱,不是以唯所缘缘、所缘增上缘、所缘亲依止缘和本性亲依止缘这四种方式成为缘吗?而苦受不是以唯所缘缘和本性亲依止缘这两种方式成为缘吗?确实如此,但这一切都已被包含在亲依止之中。所缘亲依止缘因为与亲依止有共通性,所以把它归入亲依止缘来统摄,这还说得通;但对于唯所缘缘和所缘增上缘,又该怎么解释呢?应当知道,它们也是因为与所缘有共通性,才被所缘亲依止缘所含摄,而不是被本性亲依止缘所含摄。正是为了说明这个意思,这里才说“从亲依止的角度”,而不是说“以亲依止缘”。巴利
Attano paccayabhūtānaṃ channaṃ phassānaṃ vasena cakkhusamphassajā yāva manosamphassajāti saṅkhepato chabbidhā vedanā, vitthārato pana aṭṭhasatapariyāyena aṭṭhasatabhedā. Rūpataṇhādibhedāyāti rūpataṇhā yāva dhammataṇhāti saṅkhepato chappabhedāya, vitthārato aṭṭhasatabhedāya. Upanissayakoṭiyāti upanissayasīsena. Kasmā panettha upanissayapaccayova uddhaṭo, nanu sukhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā vedanā ca taṇhāya ārammaṇamattaārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayapakatūpanissayavasena catudhā paccayo, dukkhā ca ārammaṇamattapakatūpanissayavasena dvidhāti? Saccametaṃ, upanissaye eva pana taṃ sabbaṃ antogadhaṃ. Yuttaṃ tāva ārammaṇūpanissayassa upanissayasāmaññato upanissayena saṅgaho, ārammaṇamattaārammaṇādhipatīnaṃ pana kathanti? Tesampi ārammaṇasāmaññato ārammaṇūpanissayena saṅgahova kato, na pakatūpanissayenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etadatthamevettha ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā’’ti vuttaṃ, na ‘‘upanissayenā’’ti.
“四种”是指欲取一直到我语取这四种。难道渴爱本身就是欲取吗?确实如此。不过在这里,微弱的渴爱只是渴爱,强烈的渴爱才成为欲取。或者说,对尚未得到的对象心生希求,这是渴爱,就像盗贼在黑暗中伸手摸索;对已经得到的对象加以执取,这是取,就像盗贼抓住已经到手的财物。渴爱是少欲知足的反面,取是知足的反面。渴爱是寻求之苦的根源,取是守护之苦的根源,这就是它们之间的区别。对于取,应当理解为:不与业同时生起的取,是从亲依止的角度来说;与业同时生起的取,是从俱生的角度来说。其中,对于无间缘等,通过无间缘、等无间缘、无间亲依止缘、无有缘、离去缘、习行缘为缘;对于非无间缘,则通过亲依止缘为缘;而作为所缘的取,则通过所缘缘、所缘增上缘、所缘亲依止缘,或者仅仅通过所缘缘为缘——把这一切都归入亲依止缘来理解,所以说“从亲依止的角度”。又因为众生通过渴爱贪著色等对象,从而沉溺于欲乐,所以渴爱是欲取的亲依止缘。同样,正因为对色等迷惑颠倒,才会以“没有布施”等说法生起邪见;想要从轮回中解脱的人,却把不净之道执取为清净之道;对诸蕴执取为我、我所的身见——因此应当知道,渴爱也是其余诸取的亲依止缘。而对于同时生起的取,渴爱则通过俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、不离缘、因缘等方式作为缘。针对这一切,所以说“从俱生的角度”。巴利
Catubbidhassāti kāmupādānaṃ yāva attavādupādānanti catubbidhassa. Nanu ca taṇhāva kāmupādānanti? Saccametaṃ. Tattha dubbalā taṇhā taṇhāva, balavatī taṇhā kāmupādānaṃ. Atha vā appattavisayapatthanā taṇhā tamasi corānaṃ karapasāraṇaṃ viya. Sampattavisayaggahaṇaṃ upādānaṃ, corānaṃ karappattadhanaggahaṇaṃ viya. Appicchatāpaṭipakkhā taṇhā, santosapaṭipakkhā upādānaṃ. Pariyesanadukkhamūlaṃ taṇhā, ārakkhadukkhamūlaṃ upādānanti ayametesaṃ viseso. Upādānassāti asahajātassa upādānassa upanissayakoṭiyā, itarassa sahajātakoṭiyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha anantarassa anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi, anānantarassa upanissayena, ārammaṇabhūtā pana ārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayehi, ārammaṇamatteneva vāti taṃ sabbaṃ upanissayeneva gahetvā ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ca taṇhāya rūpādīni assādetvā kāmesu pātabyataṃ āpajjati, tasmā taṇhā kāmupādānassa upanissayo. Tathā rūpādibhedeva sammūḷho ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 1.171; ma. ni. 1.445; ma. ni. 2.94, 95, 225; ma. ni. 3.91, 116, 136; saṃ. ni. 3.210; dha. sa. 1221; vibha. 938) micchādassanaṃ, saṃsārato muccitukāmo asuddhimagge suddhimaggaparāmasanaṃ, khandhesu attattaniyagāhabhūtaṃ sakkāyadassanaṃ gaṇhāti, tasmā itaresampi taṇhā upanissayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sahajātassa pana sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatahetuvasena taṇhā paccayo hoti. Taṃ sabbaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sahajātakoṭiyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“同样”是指从亲依止的角度和从俱生的角度来说的。“有”则指业有和生有这两种。其中,以思等行所造的一切趣向投生的业是业有;欲有等九种是生有。对于这些有来说,四种取因为是生有的因——也就是业有的因,又因为成为它的助伴,所以以本性亲依止的方式成为缘。而在以业为所缘来造作的当下,与业同时生起的欲取,则以所缘缘的方式成为生有的缘。对于业有来说,与它同时生起的取,通过俱生、相互、依止、相应、有、不离这些方式,以及通过因、道这些方式,以多种形式成为缘;不与它同时生起的取,则通过无间、等无间、无间亲依止、无有、离去、习行这些方式成为缘;其余的取,以本性亲依止的方式成为缘;在思惟等时候,则以所缘缘的方式成为缘。在这里,把无间等归入亲依止缘,把俱生等归入俱生缘,所以说“从亲依止的角度和从俱生的角度”。巴利
Tathāti upanissayakoṭiyā ceva sahajātakoṭiyā cāti attho. Bhavassāti kammabhavassa ceva upapattibhavassa ca. Tattha cetanādisaṅkhā taṃ sabbaṃ bhavagāmikammaṃ kammabhavo, kāmabhavādiko navavidho upapattibhavo, tesaṃ upapattibhavassa catubbidhampi upādānaṃ upapattibhavakāraṇakammabhavakāraṇabhāvato , tassa ca sahāyabhāvūpagamanato pakatūpanissayavasena paccayo hoti. Kammārammaṇakaraṇakāle pana kammasahajātakāmupādānaṃ upapattibhavassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo hoti. Kammabhavassa pana sahajātassa sahajātaṃ upādānaṃ sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena ceva hetumaggavasena ca anekadhā paccayo hoti, asahajātassa anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanavasena, itarassa pakatūpanissayavasena, sammasanādikālesu ārammaṇavasena ca paccayo hoti. Tattha anantarādike upanissayapaccaye, sahajātādike sahajātapaccaye pakkhipitvā vuttaṃ ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā ceva sahajātakoṭiyā cā’’ti.
“有缘生”这句话里,“有”指的是业有。因为业有才是生的缘,不是生有。生有就是最初结生出来的那些蕴,那本身就是生。所以论中说:“这里应当把生理解为有变化的五蕴。”所谓“有变化”,是依结生的变化而说变化,从义理上说,它们其实就是生有。因为同一个东西不可能成为它自己的因。而业有通过业缘和亲依止缘成为生有的缘,所以说“有,从亲依止的角度,是生的缘”。巴利
Bhavo jātiyāti ettha bhavoti kammabhavo adhippeto. So hi jātiyā paccayo, na upapattibhavo. Upapattibhavo hi paṭhamābhinibbattā khandhā jātiyeva. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jātīti panettha savikārā pañcakkhandhā daṭṭhabbā’’ti. Savikārāti ca nibbattivikārena savikārā, te ca atthato upapattibhavoyeva. Na hi tadeva tassa kāraṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttanti. Kammabhavo ca upapattibhavassa kammapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena ca paccayo hotīti āha ‘‘bhavo jātiyā upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo’’ti.
因为有了生,才有老死;被老死等触及的愚人才会生起愁等,没有生就不会有这些,所以说“生……是缘”。由于这里是按俱生和亲依止这两大类来考察缘,还没有涉及对各支的考察,所以他说“这是这里的略说”。缘起的考察范围极其广大,怎么可能毫无遗漏地讲完呢?因此他说“若广说……”等。为了说明这里只是部分地讲了缘起,并举例说明理由,他说了“因为世尊……”等。其中“前际不可知”的意思是:某位正自觉者或转轮王之时生起了无明,而从此以前无明的初始界限不可知;对于连障碍都不可阻挡的我的一切知智来说,也不可知,因为无明根本不存在的缘故。这个缘是此缘,所以是“此缘”,从此因故是“有漏缘”的意思。“有爱”即有之结缚的爱。“有见”即常见。“从此处到彼处、在此处”显示无始以来的辗转相续生起。巴利
Yasmā ca sati jātiyā jarāmaraṇaṃ, jarāmaraṇādinā phuṭṭhassa bālassa sokādayo ca sambhavanti, nāsati, tasmā ‘‘jāti…pe… paccayo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sahajātūpanissayasīsena paccayavicāraṇāya dassitattā, aṅgavicāraṇāya ca anāmaṭṭhattā āha ‘‘ayamettha saṅkhepo’’ti. Mahāvisayattā paṭiccasamuppādavicāraṇāya sā niravasesā kuto laddhabbāti āha ‘‘vitthārato’’tiādi. Ekadesena cettha kathitassa paṭiccasamuppādassa tathā kathane saddhiṃ udāharaṇena kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha koṭi na paññāyatīti asukassa nāma sammāsambuddhassa, cakkavattino vā kāle avijjā uppannā, na tato pubbeti avijjāya ādimariyādā appaṭihatassa mama sabbaññutaññāṇassāpi na paññāyati avijjamānattāyevāti attho. Ayaṃ paccayo idappaccayo, tasmā idappaccayā, imasmā kāraṇā āsavapaccayāti attho. Bhavataṇhāyāti bhavasaṃyojanabhūtāya taṇhāya. Bhavadiṭṭhiyāti sassatadiṭṭhiyā. ‘‘Ito ettha etto idhā’’ti apariyantaṃ aparāparuppattiṃ dasseti.
离转论的解说等巴利
Vivaṭṭakathādivaṇṇanā
145 “受的集”等这些经文,应当看作是以受为所缘的业处。其中“触的集、触的灭”指的是所说的触处。“食”应当理解为抟食。因为依据“抟食对此身以食缘为缘”这句话,它确实也是业所生诸法的支撑缘。虽然入流者等也能如实了知,但这里的开示是以最殊胜的通达之智为标准,以阿罗汉果为顶点来结束的。在这里,“诸比丘,比丘……如实了知”这句话,通过法的引导作用,同时也显示了僧团的善行。正因如此,此处的注疏中说:“谁这样了知?漏已尽者了知,乃至已开始修观者也了知”,这样圆满地说明之后,显示了比丘僧团。因此,所说的“也可以依比丘僧团来说明”这句话,应当知道正是按照经文本身的文句得到了阐明。巴利
145. ‘‘Vedanānaṃ samudaya’’ntiādipāḷi vedanākammaṭṭhānanti daṭṭhabbā. Tanti ‘‘phassasamudayā phassanirodhā’’ti vuttaphassaṭṭhānaṃ. Āhāroti kabaḷīkāro āhāro veditabbo. So hi ‘‘kabaḷīkāro āhāro imassa kāyassa āhārapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.paccayaniddesa 429) vacanato kammasamuṭṭhānānampi upatthambhakapaccayo hotiyeva. Yadipi sotāpannādayo yathābhūtaṃ pajānanti, ukkaṃsagativijānanavasena pana desanā arahattanikūṭena niṭṭhāpitā. Ettha ca ‘‘yato kho bhikkhave bhikkhu…pe… yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti etena dhammassa niyyānikabhāvena saddhiṃ saṅghassa suppaṭipattiṃ dasseti. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyamettha ‘‘ko evaṃ jānātīti? Khīṇāsavo jānāti, yāva āraddhavipassako jānātī’’ti paripuṇṇaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅgho dassito, tena yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghavasenapi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti, (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.8) taṃ yathārutavaseneva dīpitaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
146 146. “在网内”就是网里面,在网里被安置,就叫“被网住”。由于投生到恶趣,就是向下沉;由于投生到福报的生存状态,就是向上升。同样地,按小地和大地的区别、按退缩和奔驰的区别、按前际见和后际见的区别,应当依次把向下沉和向上升搭配起来理解。说“一万世界”,是就众生出生的范围而说的。巴利
146. Anto jālassāti antojālaṃ, antojāle katāti antojālīkatā. Apāyūpapattivasena adho osīdanaṃ, sampattibhavavasena uddhaṃ uggamanaṃ. Tathā parittabhūmimahaggatabhūmivasena, olīnatā’tidhāvanavasena, pubbantānudiṭṭhiaparantānudiṭṭhivasena ca yathākkamaṃ adho osīdanaṃ uddhaṃ uggamanaṃ yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Dasasahassilokadhātū’’ti jātikhettaṃ sandhāyāha.
147 “非施设的状态”是指:现行的施设成为非施设的状态。不过,从过去的状态来看,那样的施设在教法隐没之前一直存在,从那之后乃至在其他佛陀出世时也仍然成立。正如接下来将要说的:“将仅仅成为假名而已。”(《长部注》1.147)“身”指有身,也就是色法与非色法(名法)的集合。只有这样理解,有身与芒果树的相似,以及它的各部分——色蕴、眼等——与芒果果实的相似,才说得通。在这里,就像截断果蒂时,依附于果蒂的芒果果实便与芒果树分离一样,在截断有轮时,依附于有轮的色蕴等便与相续分离——应当仅以此譬喻来理解。巴利
147.Apaṇṇattikabhāvanti dharamānakapaṇṇattiyā apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ. Atītabhāvena pana tathā paṇṇatti yāva sāsanantaradhānā, tato uddhampi aññabuddhuppādesu vattati eva. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘vohāramattameva bhavissatī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.147). Kāyoti attabhāvo, yo rūpārūpadhammasamūho. Evaṃ hissa ambarukkhasadisatā, tadavayavānañca rūpakkhandhacakkhādīnaṃ ambapakkasadisatā yujjatīti. Ettha ca vaṇṭacchede vaṇṭūpanibandhānaṃ ambapakkānaṃ ambarukkhato vicchedo viya bhavanettichede tadupanibandhānaṃ rūpakkhandhādīnaṃ santānato vicchedoti ettāvatā opammaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
148 “法门”是就经典本身来说的。“此处的义”指现世的利益。“他处的义”指后世的利益。靠这个战胜战斗,所以叫“战斗的胜利”。因为义理圆满,所以是“义之网”。因为言辞圆满,又解说了戒等没有过失的法,所以是“法之网”。因为是最上的意义,又分别解说了属于梵的道、果和涅槃,所以是“梵之网”。以辨析诸见为入口,阐明空性,使正见得以显明,所以是“见之网”。因为是摧破外道言论的方法,所以是“无上的战斗胜利”。在这里,应当知道就是这样连接理解的。巴利
148.Dhammapariyāyeti pāḷiyaṃ. Idhatthoti diṭṭhadhammahitaṃ. Paratthoti samparāyahitaṃ. Saṅgāmaṃ vijināti etenāti saṅgāmavijayo. Atthasampattiyā atthajālaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā, sīlādianavajjadhammaniddesato ca dhammajālaṃ. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtānaṃ maggaphalanibbānānaṃ vibhattattā brahmajālaṃ. Diṭṭhivivecanamukhena suññatāpakāsanena sammādiṭṭhiyā vibhāvitattā diṭṭhijālaṃ. Titthiyavādanimmaddanūpāyattā anuttaro saṅgāmavijayoti evampettha yojanā veditabbā.
149 心悦,是指心被喜悦所占据。正因如此,他才说“由佛所生之……”等等。然而,就像不悦的人因为损害自己的利益,而成为他人的不悦、怨敌的喜悦,名为“敌悦”——如“方向对方向”(《法句经》42;《优陀那》33)这首偈颂所说——心悦的人则不是这样。这些人因为成就了自己的利益,是自心欢喜的,所以说“心悦即自心欢喜”。或者,心悦意为全然欢喜,意思是借由这个开示,心念圆满具足。喜乐有渴爱的含义,因此说“也通于渴爱”。由于字根有多义,喜乐也有亲近、承事的含义,因此说“也通于亲近”。同样,喜乐也有接受之意,因此说“也通于接受”。由“已喜乐”一词所表达的含义,正是通过“已随喜”一词来阐明,因此他说“喜乐”一词此处即随喜之意,所以说“也通于随喜”。至于像“诸比丘,那是什么呢?”(《长部》1.7)这样在各个地方出现的、因想阐明而发问、并以回答形式展开的,这部经便成为“记说”。然而,尽管以问答形式展开、且带有偈颂的经被称为“祇夜”,但由于无偈颂才是其特点,无偈颂的才称为记说,因此说道:“因为无偈颂,所以……”巴利
149.Attamanāti pītiyā gahitacittā. Tenevāha ‘‘buddhagatāyā’’tiādi. Yathā pana anattamanā attano anatthacaratāya paramanā verimanā nāma honti. Yathāha ‘‘diso disa’’nti (dha. pa. 42; udā. 33) gāthā, na evaṃ attamanā. Ime pana attano atthacaratāya sakamanā hontīti āha ‘‘attamanāti sakamanā’’ti. Atha vā attamanāti samattamanā, imāya desanāya paripuṇṇamanasaṅkappāti attho. Abhinandatīti taṇhāyatīti atthoti āha ‘‘taṇhāyampi āgato’’ti. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ abhinandantīti upagacchanti sevantīti atthoti āha ‘‘upagamanepi āgato’’ti. Tathā abhinandantīti sampaṭicchantīti atthoti āha ‘‘sampaṭicchanepi āgato’’ti. ‘‘Abhinanditvā’’ti iminā padena vuttoyeva attho ‘‘anumoditvā’’ti iminā pakāsīyatīti abhinandanasaddo idha anumodanasaddatthoti āha ‘‘anumodanepi āgato’’ti. ‘‘Katamañca taṃ bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.7) tattha tattha pavattāya kathetukamyatāpucchāya vissajjanavasena pavattattā idaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ hoti. Yasmā pana pucchāvissajjanavasena pavattampi sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ nāma hoti, niggāthakattameva pana aṅganti gāthārahitaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘niggāthakattā hi idaṃ veyyākaraṇanti vutta’’nti.
在其他那些地方,“也”这个字还涵盖了波罗蜜的修习。因为《佛种姓经》中这样说:巴利
Aparesupīti ettha pisaddena pāramiparicayampi saṅgaṇhāti. Vuttañhi buddhavaṃse –
正在如实观照这些法的自性、作用与特相的人,
凭借法的威力,大地和一万个世界一起震动了。巴利
‘‘Ime dhamme sammasato, sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇe; Dhammatejena vasudhā, dasasahassī pakampathā’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.166);
以精进之力:是指在大出家时,以舍弃转轮王荣华为因的精进威力;以及在走向菩提树下时,按照“宁可只剩下皮肤、筋、骨,血肉干枯……”(《中部》2.184;《相应部》2.22;《大义释》196)所说的那样,具足四支的精进威力。被稀有之速所冲击:是指被带来惊奇的所作威力所冲击。关于浣洗粪扫衣,有些人说是“以福德的威力”,但“被稀有之速所冲击”看起来更合理;在《须大拏本生》中,因为圆满波罗蜜的福德威力,大地多次震动,所以说是“非时之震动”。为了给予随喜赞叹而震动,正如转法轮时那样(《相应部》5.1081;《大品》13;《无碍解道》2.30)。在结集等场合,也应当知道是为了给予随喜赞叹而震动。以上是这部注疏中对隐晦含义的解释。巴利
Vīriyabalenāti mahābhinikkhamane cakkavattisiripariccāgahetubhūtavīriyappabhāvena, bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamane ‘‘kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatū’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22; mahāni. 196) vuttacaturaṅgasamannāgatavīriyānubhāvena. Acchariyavegābhihatāti vimhayāvahakiriyānubhāvaghaṭṭitā . Paṃsukūladhovane keci ‘‘puññatejenā’’ti vadanti , acchariyavegābhihatāti yuttaṃ viya dissati, vessantarajātake pāramiparipūraṇapuññatejena anekakkhattuṃ kampitattā ‘‘akālakampanenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sādhukāradānavasena akampittha yathā taṃ dhammacakkappavattane (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30). Saṅgītikālādīsupi sādhukāradānavasena akampitthāti veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ tāvettha aṭṭhakathāya līnatthavaṇṇanā.
论书方式的义解巴利
Pakaraṇanayavaṇṇanā
不过,按照论书的方式对巴利圣典所作的意义解释是这样的:这种意义解释,因为在对教法的生起原因、目的、对象分类以及总体含义都确定之后,才容易进行、也容易理解,所以我们首先要确定这部经的生起原因等。其中,生起原因首先已经说过,就是“说净与不净”。此外,在谴责和赞叹中,如果让应受调伏的人产生嗔恨、欢喜等状态,那就是生起原因;而在那里显示过患,也是生起原因。同样,对谴责和赞叹的实践次第、对作为赞叹对象的戒(按小、中、大等分为多种)、对在常见等邪见立足之处及其超越之处都无碍运行的佛智、以及对如来在某些地方不被含摄这一点不能理解,也都是生起原因。巴利
Ayaṃ pana pakaraṇanayena pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanā – sā panāyaṃ atthavaṇṇanā yasmā desanāya samuṭṭhānappayojanabhājanesu piṇḍatthesu ca niddhāritesu sukarā hoti suviññeyyā ca, tasmā suttadesanāya samuṭṭhānādīni paṭhamaṃ niddhārayissāma. Tattha samuṭṭhānaṃ tāva vuttaṃ ‘‘vaṇṇāvaṇṇabhaṇana’’nti. Apica nindāpasaṃsāsu vineyyāghātānandādibhāvānāpatti, tattha ca ādīnavadassanaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā nindāpasaṃsāsu paṭipajjanakkamassa, pasaṃsāvisayassa khuddakādivasena anekavidhassa sīlassa, sabbaññutaññāṇassa sassatādidiṭṭhiṭṭhānesu tatuttari ca appaṭihatacāratāya, tathāgatassa ca katthaci apariyāpannatāya anavabodho samuṭṭhānaṃ.
要从相反的角度来理解它的用意。令应受调伏者生起嗔恨、欢喜等,就是这部教说的最初用意。同样,破除诡诈、花言巧语等种种邪命,解开六十二见的罗网,以见为首阐明缘起的行相,依六触处说明四圣谛的业处,彻底穷尽一切恶见,以及显示自己无取著的般涅槃,这些都是它的用意。巴利
Vuttavipariyāyena payojanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Vineyyāghātānandādibhāvāpatti ādikañhi imaṃ desanaṃ payojetīti. Tathā kuhanalapanādinānāvidhamicchājīvaviddhaṃsanaṃ, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhijālaviniveṭhanaṃ, diṭṭhisīsena paccayākāravibhāvanaṃ, chaphassāyatanavasena catusaccakammaṭṭhānaniddeso, sabbadiṭṭhigatānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ, attano anupādāparinibbānadīpanañca payojanāni.
内心被好看与不好看的相状牵着走,生起贪著和抗拒,沉迷于装模作样等种种邪命,沉陷在常见等邪见的泥沼里,又因为戒蕴等没有修圆满,不能真正体悟殊胜功德的智慧——这样的人,就是这场说法的当机者。巴利
Vaṇṇāvaṇṇanimittaṃ anurodhavirodhavantacittā kuhanādivividhamicchājīvaniratā sassatādidiṭṭhipaṅkaṃ nimuggā, sīlakkhandhādīsu aparipūrakāritāya anavabuddhaguṇavisesañāṇā vineyyā imissā dhammadesanāya bhājanaṃ.
此外,通过“不应做嗔恨等”这句话,说明了:按照誓愿而将“沙门想”付诸实践;勤修忍耐与柔和;致力于慈、悲、喜、舍的修习;信与慧相结合;安住于念与正知;思择修习的力量得以成就;断除缠缚烦恼与随眠烦恼;修行自他二利;不为世间八法所染污。同样,通过“远离杀生等”这句话,说明了:戒的清净;由此具足惭与愧;具足慈与悲;断除违犯;以彼分断的方式断除;断除恶行与杂染;成就三种离;获得可爱、可意、可敬、可尊重的品格;获得利养、恭敬与名声;成为止与观的基础;使不善根变得薄弱;培植善根;远离自他双方的不利;在大众中无所畏惧;安住于不放逸;不被他人所侵害;以及具足无悔等品质。巴利
Piṇḍatthā pana āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatāvacanena paṭiññānurūpaṃ samaṇasaññāya niyojanaṃ, khantisoraccānuṭṭhānaṃ, brahmavihārabhāvanānuyogo, saddhāpaññāsamāyogo, satisampajaññādhiṭṭhānaṃ, paṭisaṅkhānabhāvanābalasiddhi, pariyuṭṭhānānusayappahānaṃ, ubhayahitapaṭipatti, lokadhammehi anupalepo ca dassitā honti. Tathā pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanena sīlavisuddhi dassitā, tāya ca hirottappasampatti, mettākaruṇāsamaṅgitā , vītikkamappahānaṃ, tadaṅgapahānaṃ, duccaritasaṃkilesappahānaṃ, viratittayasiddhi, piyamanāpagarubhāvanīyatānipphatti, lābhasakkārasilokasamudāgamo, samathavipassanānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvo, akusalamūlatanukaraṇaṃ, kusalamūlaropanaṃ, ubhayānatthadūrīkaraṇaṃ, parisāsu visāradatā, appamādavihāro,parehi duppadhaṃsiyatā, avippaṭisārādisamaṅgitā ca dassitā honti.
通过“甚深”等语句,说明了:甚深法的阐明、难以获得的立足处、即使经过无数劫也难得出现、即使以微细的智慧也无法现前通达、即使以名为“法随”的推理智慧也难以达到、一切躁动止息的轻安、寂静法的阐明、结尾的善美、令人不满足、成为精勤的境界、如实智的行境、本质微细,以及大慧的展现。通过显示诸见的语句,简要地说明了常见与断见,即:说明退缩与过度奔驰、指出系缚于方法、宣说邪执、显示走入歧途、令颠倒执取得以明了、执取谬执、安立关于前际后际的邪见、区分有见与无见、贪爱与无明的运作、宣说有边与无边的见、导入二边,以及分辨漏、流、轭、烦恼、结、取等差别。同样,通过“受之集”等语句,说明了:成就对四圣谛的随觉与通达、以镇伏与正断而断除、贪爱与无明的消失、执取正法住立的相、成就教法与证法、行持自他二利、具足三种慧、勤修念与正知、信与慧相结合、致力于正勤与止,以及成就止观。巴利
‘‘Gambhīrā’’tiādivacanehi gambhīradhammavibhāvanaṃ, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhatā, kappānaṃ asaṅkhyeyyenāpi dullabhapātubhāvatā, sukhumenapi ñāṇena paccakkhato paṭivijjhituṃ asakkuṇeyyatā, dhammanvayasaṅkhātena anumānañāṇenāpi duradhigamanīyatā, passaddhasabbadarathatā, santadhammavibhāvanaṃ, sobhanapariyosānatā, atittikarabhāvo, padhānabhāvappatti, yathābhūtañāṇagocaratā, sukhumasabhāvatā, mahāpaññāvibhāvanā ca dassitā honti. Diṭṭhidīpakapadehi samāsato sassatucchedadiṭṭhiyo pakāsitāti olīnatātidhāvanavibhāvanaṃ, upāyavinibaddhaniddeso, micchābhinivesakittanaṃ, kummaggapaṭipattiyā pakāsanā, vipariyesaggāhapaññāpanaṃ, parāmāsapariggaho, pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhipatiṭṭhāpanaṃ, bhavavibhavadiṭṭhivibhāgo, taṇhāvijjāpavatti, antavānantavādiṭṭhiniddeso, antadvayāvatāraṇaṃ, āsavoghayogakilesaganthasaṃyojanūpādānavisesavibhajjanañca dassitāni honti. Tathā ‘‘vedanānaṃ samudaya’’ntiādivacanehi catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ anubodhapaṭivedhasiddhi, vikkhambhanasamucchedappahānaṃ , taṇhāvijjāvigamo, saddhammaṭṭhitinimittapariggaho, āgamādhigamasampatti, ubhayahitapaṭipatti, tividhapaññāpariggaho, satisampajaññānuṭṭhānaṃ, saddhāpaññāsamāyogo, sammāvīriyasamathānuyojanaṃ, samathavipassanānipphatti ca dassitā honti.
不知、不见,就是无明的成立;为爱所缠者的恐慌与挣扎,就是贪爱的成立;由这两者,也就成立了两盖与两结,说明无始轮回的流转不会中断,说明执取前际、连接后际,按过去与现在的时间来分别其因,说明无明与贪爱以彼此不超越的方式互相资助,也显示了慧解脱与心解脱的对立面。而“那也以触为缘”这句话,通过说明执取常见等的安立都依赖于缘,就显示了:否定诸法的常住性,确立无常性,从胜义上否定作者等,说明如是法性等,揭示空性,以及阐明定法的缘之相状。巴利
‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti avijjāsiddhi, ‘‘taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphanditanti taṇhāsiddhi, tadubhayena ca nīvaraṇasaṃyojanadvayasiddhi, anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭānucchedo, pubbantāharaṇaaparantapaṭisandhānāni, atītapaccuppannakālavasena hetuvibhāgo, avijjātaṇhānaṃ aññamaññānativattanaṭṭhena aññamaññūpakāritā, paññāvimutticetovimuttīnaṃ paṭipakkhaniddeso ca dassitā honti. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti sassatādipaññāpanassa paccayādhīnavuttitākathanena dhammānaṃ niccatāpaṭisedho, aniccatāpatiṭṭhāpanaṃ, paramatthato kārakādipaṭikkhepo, evaṃdhammatādiniddeso, suññatāpakāsanaṃ, samattaniyāmapaccayalakkhaṇavibhāvanañca dassitāni honti.
从“已断有之连结者”等语开始,显示了世尊断德圆满、明与胜解、自在力、三学圆满、两种涅槃界的区分、四依处的圆满,以及不被有、生趣等所摄。而就整段经文来说,则应理解如下这些要点:世尊在可意与不可意境中保持平等不动,并令他人也安住于此;解说了作为一切善法根本的两种法;教导了三学;成立了自苦行等四种人;分别了黑黑报等四种业;解说了四无量心的所缘;如实通达集等五法;阐明了六和敬法;确立了十种能作庇护的法——诸如此类,都应当确定。巴利
‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko’’tiādinā bhagavato pahānasampatti, vijjādhimutti, vasībhāvo, sikkhattayanipphatti, nibbānadhātudvayavibhāgo, caturadhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, bhavayoniādīsu apariyāpannatā ca dassitā honti. Sakalena pana suttapadena iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu bhagavato tādibhāvo, tattha ca paresaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṃ, kusaladhammānaṃ ādibhūtadhammadvayassa niddeso, sikkhattayūpadeso, attantapādipuggalacatukkasiddhi, kaṇhākaṇhavipākādikammacatukkavibhāgo, caturappamaññāvisayaniddeso, samudayādipañcakassa yathābhūtāvabodho, chasāraṇīyadhammavibhāvanā , dasanāthakaradhammapatiṭṭhāpanti evamādayo niddhāretabbā.
十六种引导法的释义巴利
Soḷasahāravaṇṇanā
教示引导的释义巴利
Desanāhāravaṇṇanā
在这里,通过“我”“世间”这种邪见作为立足处,以及通过受、触、处等门径所执取的五取蕴中,除去渴爱之外的五取蕴就是苦谛。渴爱是集谛。不过,在经文中,渴爱正是通过“渴爱”这一执取方式,用“为渴爱所缠者”这样的话,以及通过“缘受有渴爱”这种对集的自相的执取,还有通过对“有之引导”的执取,已经被直接把握了。这是经教的方法。若依阿毗达摩的方法,则通过厌恶、悦乐等语,热忱等词句,败坏心的话语,显示一切邪见的词句,对善与不善的执取,对有的执取,对忧愁等的执取,以及在各处对集的执取——简而言之,通过阐明一切世间善、不善法的词句,所执取的业与烦恼就是集谛。这两者的不转起就是灭谛。对于这个灭谛,应当知道在经文中是通过各处对感受的灭尽、出离等同义词,通过各别涅槃的说法,以及通过“无取解脱”的说法来把握的。了知灭的道路就是道谛。对于道谛,也应当知道在经文中是通过各处“对受的集等如实了知”的指示,通过“对六触处的集等如实了知”的表述方式,以及通过“断除有之引导”的表述方式来把握的。其中,以集来说明乐味,以苦来说明过患,以道与灭来说明出离——应当这样依照四谛的道理,以及依照经文中(《导论》9)以自相直接出现的乐味、过患、出离,来理解这里的乐味等。所化众生无边等、堕罪等的获得等,如前面所说的分判,其利益就是果。对厌恶等的不应作,厌恶等之果不转起于他相续,在毁誉中如实承认并解明——像这样,为了达到各各利益的方便就是方法。以对厌恶等的造作的遮止等为教示,应当知道这是法王的教令——这就是说法之引导。巴利
Tattha ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca diṭṭhiyā adhiṭṭhānabhāvena, vedanāphassāyatanādimukhena ca gahitesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu taṇhāvajjā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ. Taṇhā samudayasaccaṃ. Sā pana paritassanāggahaṇena ‘‘taṇhāgatāna’’nti, ‘‘vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti ca sarūpeneva samudayaggahaṇena, bhavanettiggahaṇena ca pāḷiyaṃ gahitāva. Ayaṃ tāva suttantanayo. Abhidhammanayena pana āghātānandādivacanehi, ātappādipadehi, cittappadosavacanena, sabbadiṭṭhidīpakapadehi, kusalākusalaggahaṇena, bhavaggahaṇena, sokādiggahaṇena, tattha tattha samudayaggahaṇena cāti saṅkhepato sabbalokiyakusalākusaladhammavibhāvanapadehi gahitā kammakilesā samudayasaccaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ. Tassa tattha tattha vedanānaṃ atthaṅgamanissaraṇapariyāyehi, paccattaṃ nibbutivacanena, anupādāvimuttivacanena ca pāḷiyaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccaṃ. Tassāpi tattha tattha vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanāpadesena, channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtapajānanapariyāyena, bhavanettiyā ucchedapariyāyena ca gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇanti evaṃ catusaccavasena, yāni pāḷiyaṃ (netti. 9) sarūpeneva āgatāni assādādīnavanissaraṇāni, tesañca vasena idha assādādayo veditabbā. Vineyyānantādibhāvāpattiādikaṃ yathāvuttavibhāgaṃ payojanameva phalaṃ. Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatā, āghātādiphalassa ca anaññasantānabhāvitā, nindāpasaṃsāsu yathāsabhāvapaṭijānananibbeṭhanāti evaṃ taṃtaṃpayojanādhigamahetu upāyo. Āghātādīnaṃ karaṇapaṭisedhanādiapadesena dhammarājassa āṇatti veditabbāti ayaṃ desanāhāro.
抉择引导的释义巴利
Vicayahāravaṇṇanā
即使没有虚构设定,仅凭世间言说和随俗表达,也会说“我的”;因为没有固定规则,为了表明分别取舍,才用了“或者”这个词。因为具足功德,也为了让他们面对教法,所以称呼“比丘们”。因为是不同于自己的存在、是站在对立面的存在,所以说“他人”;因为是称赞的反面、是不该被赞扬的,所以说“诋毁”。因为要明确点出、要详细说明,所以说“会说”;因为是承载法的状态、与非法相反,所以说“对法”;因为与见和戒紧密结合在一起、能聚集烦恼,所以说“对僧团”。为了指示前面所说的内容、为了引出言辞,所以说“对此”;因为是面对面、是众多人在一起,所以说“你们”。因为会伤害心、会冲击所缘,所以说“嗔怒”;因为对所缘退缩、表现出不满意的样子,所以说“不悦”;因为能思虑所缘、又作为依托,所以说“心的”;因为能成办利益、又随顺“成办无利益”的说法,所以说“不欢喜”;因为不应成为造作的理由、也不是安住在导师教法中的人所能做的,所以说“不应做”。按照这个方法,应当对每一个词都作出判定。像这样,从逐词审察的角度来说,这种审察的展开方式,因为害怕过于繁琐,而且智者能够跟随注释书以及它对隐晦含义的解释来明了这个道理,所以我们没有详细展开。巴利
Kappanābhāvepi vohāravasena, anuvādavasena ca ‘‘mama’’nti vuttaṃ, niyamābhāvato vikappanatthaṃ vāggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, guṇasamaṅgitāya, abhimukhīkaraṇāya ca ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti āmantanaṃ. Aññabhāvato, paṭiviruddhabhāvato ca ‘‘pare’’ti vuttaṃ, vaṇṇapaṭipakkhato, avaṇṇanīyato ca ‘‘avaṇṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Byattivasena, vitthāravasena ca ‘‘bhāseyyu’’nti vuttaṃ, dhāraṇabhāvato, adhammapaṭipakkhato ca ‘‘dhammassā’’ti vuttaṃ, diṭṭhisīlehi saṃhatabhāvato, kilesānaṃ saṅghātakaraṇato ca ‘‘saṅghassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttapaṭiniddesato, vacanupanyāsanato ca ‘‘tatrā’’ti vuttaṃ, sammukhabhāvato, puthubhāvato ca ‘‘tumhehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Cittassa hananato, ārammaṇābhighātato ca ‘‘āghāto’’ti vuttaṃ, ārammaṇe saṅkocavuttiyā, atuṭṭhākāratāya ca ‘‘appaccayo’’ti vuttaṃ, ārammaṇacintanato, nissayato ca ‘‘cetaso’’ti vuttaṃ, atthāsādhanato, anu anu ‘‘anatthasādhanato’’ ca ‘‘anabhiraddhī’’ti vuttaṃ, kāraṇānarahattā, satthusāsane ṭhitehi kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā ca ‘‘na karaṇīyā’’ti vuttanti. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu vinicchayo kātabbo. Iti anupadavicayato vicayo hāro ativitthārabhayena, sakkā ca aṭṭhakathaṃ tassā līnatthavaṇṇanañca anugantvā ayamattho viññunā vibhāvetunti na vitthārayimha.
理由之引导的解说巴利
Yuttihāravaṇṇanā
以一切方式、对一切都完全不生起嗔害等,能导向如如不动的状态,这是合理的,因为在可喜和不可喜的境界中,都能平等地现起。如果在某个心相续中生起了嗔害等,那么以此为因的障碍就会阻碍那个人自身获得成就,这是合理的。为什么?因为不会转移到其他心相续去。嗔害等压倒心而生起时,会让人连善说等都无法辨别,这是合理的,因为心怀嗔恨和贪欲的人就像处在黑暗之中。远离杀生等恶行,能导向一切众生都欢喜和赞叹的状态,这是合理的。因为戒行圆满时,广大的名声会远播。对具备甚深等殊胜功德的如来进行赞叹,即使只是部分地赞叹,也能导向把握一切知等全部功德,这是合理的,因为这些功德是不共的。被不如理作意所滋养的“获得之因”等推论,会导向常见等固执,这是合理的,因为虚妄分别的网没有被拆除。由于不觉知感受的过患,对感受的渴爱就会增长,这是合理的,因为随观乐味的缘故。当对感受有贪染时,在其中就会生起我执和我所执,常见等执著也会随之翻腾,这是合理的,因为原因就在眼前。以渴爱为缘而有取,对于那些安立常见等说法的人,或者正在感受与那相应之受的人,触就是因,这是合理的,因为没有根、境、识三者的和合,那就不存在。六触处的循环不断绝,这是合理的,因为在那里无明和渴爱尚未断除。了知六触处的集起等,能超越一切见趣的想而安住,这是合理的,因为已通达四圣谛。正是这六十二种见,把一切恶见都网罗在内,这是合理的,因为无作论等和自在天论等都包含在其中。就是这样加以赞叹。如来的身体已断除了再有的绳索,这是合理的,因为世尊以愿行的圆满,心安住于四念处,如实修习了七觉支。身体坏灭之后,不能见到般涅槃,这是合理的,因为在无余涅槃中,色等任何残余都不存在。这就是理由之网。巴利
Sabbena sabbaṃ āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ tādibhāvāya saṃvattatīti yujjati iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu samappavattisabbhāvato. Yasmiṃ santāne āghātādayo uppannā, tannimittako antarāyo tasseva sampattivibandhāya saṃvattatīti yujjati. Kasmā? Santānantaresu asaṅkamanato. Cittaṃ abhibhavitvā uppannā āghātādayo subhāsitādisallakkhaṇepi asamatthatāya saṃvattantīti yujjati sakodhalobhānaṃ andhatamasabbhāvato. Pāṇātipātādidussīlyato veramaṇi sabbasattānaṃ pāmojjapāsaṃsabhāvāya saṃvattatīti yujjati. Sīlasampattiyā hi mahato kittisaddassa abbhuggamo hotīti. Gambhīratādivisesayuttena guṇena tathāgatassa vaṇṇanā ekadesabhūtāpi sakalasabbaññuguṇaggahaṇāya saṃvattatīti yujjati anaññasādhāraṇattā. Tajjāayonisomanasikāraparikkhatāni adhigamatakkanāni sassatavādādiabhinivesāya saṃvattantīti yujjati kappanājālassa asamugghāṭitattā. Vedanādīnavānavabodhena vedanāya taṇhā pavaḍḍhatīti yujjati assādānupassanāsabbhāvato. Sati ca vedayitarāge tattha attattaniyagāho, sassatādigāho ca vipariphandatīti yujjati kāraṇassa sannihitattā. Taṇhāpaccayā hi upādānaṃ sassatādivāde paññapentānaṃ , tadanucchavikaṃ vā vedanaṃ vedayantānaṃ phasso hetūti yujjati visayindriyaviññāṇasaṅgatiyā vinā tadabhāvato. Chaphassāyatananimittavaṭṭassa anupacchedoti yujjati tattha avijjātaṇhānaṃ appahīnattā. Channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādipajānanā sabbadiṭṭhigatikasaññaṃ aticca tiṭṭhatīti yujjati catusaccapaṭivedhabhāvato. Imāheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīhi sabbadiṭṭhigatānaṃ antojālīkatabhāvoti yujjati akiriyavādādīnaṃ issaravādādīnañca tadantogadhattā. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Ucchinnabhavanettiko tathāgatassa kāyoti yujjati, yasmā bhagavā abhinīhārasampattiyā catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu patiṭṭhitacitto sattabojjhaṅgeyeva yathābhūtaṃ bhāvesi. Kāyassa bhedā parinibbutaṃ na dakkhantīti yujjati anupādisesanibbānappattiyaṃ rūpādīsu kassacipi anavasesatoti ayaṃ yuttihāro.
近因处门类的解释巴利
Padaṭṭhānahāravaṇṇanā
应受呵责的人被呵责,以及呵责时相应出现的过失——比如言语不可信受等——这些是呵责的立足处。应受称赞的人被称赞,以及称赞时相应出现的圆满——比如言语值得信受等——这些是称赞的立足处。同样地,瞋恨等是地狱等痛苦的立足处。不造作瞋恨等,是生天成就等一切成就的立足处。远离杀生等,是圣戒蕴的立足处。圣戒蕴是圣定蕴的立足处。圣定蕴是圣慧蕴的立足处。世尊与甚深等殊胜功德相应的证悟方式之智,是教说之智的立足处。教说之智是所化众生从整个轮回之苦中出离的立足处。一切见都是见取,它按各自情况,也是九种有的立足处。有是生的立足处,生是老死以及忧愁等的立足处。对受的集起等如实了知受,是对四圣谛的随觉与通达。其中,随觉是通达的立足处,通达是四种沙门果的立足处。在“不知者、不见者”这句中,执取了无明,在这里,无明是诸行的立足处,应当照此推导,直到受是渴爱的立足处。在“为渴爱所缠者的恐惧与挣扎”这句中,渴爱是取的立足处。在“那也以触为缘”这句中,安立常见等观点,是他人邪执的立足处;邪执是背离听闻正法、亲近善士、如理作意及法随法行等的立足处,也是听闻不正法等的立足处。在“除了触……”等说法中,触是受的立足处,六触处是触的立足处,也是整个轮回之苦的立足处。对六触处的集起等如实了知,是厌离的立足处,厌离是离贪的立足处,应当照此推导,直到无取般涅槃。世尊断除有的引导,是一切知智的立足处。同样地,也是无取般涅槃的立足处。这就是立足处门。巴利
Avaṇṇārahaavaṇṇānurūpasampattānādeyyavacanatādivipattīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vaṇṇārahavaṇṇānurūsampattasaddheyyavacanatādisampattīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā āghātādayo nirayādidukkhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ saggasampattiādisabbasampattīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirati ariyassa sīlakkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Ariyo sīlakkhandho ariyassa samādhikkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Ariyo samādhikkhandho ariyassa paññākkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Gambhīratādivisesayuttaṃ bhagavato paṭivedhappakārañāṇaṃ desanāñāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Desanāñāṇaṃ vineyyānaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbāpi diṭṭhi diṭṭhupādānti sā yathārahaṃ navavidhassāpi bhavassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Bhavo jātiyā, jāti jarāmaraṇassa, sokādīnañca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ anubodhapaṭivedho. Tattha anubodho paṭivedhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, paṭivedho catubbidhassa sāmaññaphalassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti avijjāgahaṇaṃ, tattha avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ padaṭṭhānti yāva vedanā taṇhāya padaṭṭhānti netabbaṃ. ‘‘Taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti ettha taṇhā upādānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ettha sassatādipaññāpanaṃ paresaṃ micchābhinivesassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, micchābhiniveso saddhammassavanasappurisūpassayayonisomanasikāradhammānudhammapaṭipattīhi vimukhatāya, asaddhammassavanādīnañca padaṭṭhānaṃ, ‘‘aññatra phassā’’tiādīsu phasso vedanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, cha phassāyatanāni phassassa, sakalavaṭṭadukkhassa ca padaṭṭhānaṃ, channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtappajānanaṃ nibbidāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, nibbidā virāgassāti yāva anupādāparinibbānaṃ netabbaṃ. Bhagavato bhavanettisamucchedo sabbaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā anupādāparinibbānassāti ayaṃ padaṭṭhānahāro.
相的解释巴利
Lakkhaṇahāravaṇṇanā
用“瞋恨”等词来统摄,是因为忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、诤、轻蔑等都属于瞋心生起的范围,具有同一特征。用“喜悦”等词来统摄,是因为贪欲、不正之贪、慢、过慢、骄、放逸等都属于贪心生起的范围,具有共同特征。同样,用“瞋恨”一词来统摄其余的身系与盖,是因为它们与身系、盖具有同一特征。用“喜悦”一词来统摄触等,是因为它们与行蕴具有同一特征。用“戒”一词来统摄增上心学与增上慧学,是因为它们与学具有同一特征。不过在这里,应当把戒理解为根律仪等。用“见”一词来统摄其余的取,是因为它们与取具有同一特征。在“受”这一表述中,用受来统摄其余的取蕴,是因为它们与蕴具有同一特征。同样,由于受属于法处和法界,所以对可作观照的一切处与界也加以统摄,因为它们与处、界具有同一特征。在“不知、不见”这一表述中,用无明来统摄因、漏、暴流、轭、盖等,是因为无明与因等具有同一特征;同样,在“为爱所缠者的恐惧与挣扎”这一表述中,也是用爱来统摄。在“那也是触缘”这一表述中,用触来统摄想、行、识,是因为它们作为颠倒的原因,并且与蕴具有同一特征。用六触处来统摄蕴、根、界等,是因为它们是触生起的因,并且与观照的自性具有同一特征。用“有之引导”来统摄无明等一切杂染法,是因为它们作为轮回之因,具有同一特征。这就是“相门”的整理方式。巴利
Āghātādiggahaṇena kodhupanāhamakkhapalāsaissāmacchariyasārambhaparavambhanādīnaṃ saṅgaho paṭighacittuppādapariyāpannatāya ekalakkhaṇattā. Ānandādiggahaṇena abhijjhāvisamalobhamānātimānamadappamādādīnaṃ saṅgaho lobhacittuppādapariyāpannatāya samānalakkhaṇattā. Tathā āghātaggahaṇena avasiṭṭhaganthanīvaraṇānaṃ saṅgaho kāyaganthanīvaraṇalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Ānandaggahaṇena phassādīnaṃ saṅgaho saṅkhārakkhandhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Sīlaggahaṇena adhicittaadhipaññāsikkhānampi saṅgaho sikkhālakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Idha pana sīlasseva indriyasaṃvarādikassa daṭṭhabbaṃ. Diṭṭhiggahaṇena avasiṭṭhaupādānānampi saṅgaho upādānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Vedanāna’’nti ettha vedanāggahaṇena avasiṭṭhaupādānakkhandhānampi saṅgaho khandhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā vedanāya dhammāyatanadhammadhātupariyāpannattā sammasanūpagānaṃ sabbesaṃ āyatanānaṃ dhātūnañca saṅgaho āyatanalakkhaṇena, dhātulakkhaṇena ca ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti ettha avijjāggahaṇena hetuāsavoghayoganīvaraṇādisaṅgaho hetādilakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā avijjāya, tathā ‘‘taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti ettha taṇhāggahaṇenāpi. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ettha phassaggahaṇena saññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇānaṃ saṅgaho vipallāsahetubhāvena, khandhalakkhaṇena ca ekalakkhaṇattā. Chaphassāyatanaggahaṇena khandhindriyadhātādīnaṃ saṅgaho phassuppattinimittatāya, sammasanasabhāvena ca ekalakkhaṇattā. Bhavanettiggahaṇena avijjādīnampi saṃkilesadhammānaṃ saṅgaho vaṭṭahetubhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti ayaṃ lakkhaṇahāro.
四阵列的解释巴利
Catubyūhahāravaṇṇanā
被毁谤和称赞搅得心绪不宁、不肯远离邪命、固执于常见等错误见解、在戒等法蕴上站不稳脚跟、背离了正等觉者功德滋味的有情,就是这段开示的因缘。世尊在这里的用意是:他们怎样才能摆脱上面说的那些过失,通过正确的修行来利益自己和他人呢?词源解释就是词语的解析。关于“eva”等因缘词和“mama”等经文词语,按照注疏很容易理解,因为怕太冗长,我们就没有展开。连接有六种:词连接、词义连接、阐明连接、经连接、开示连接。其中,一个词和另一个词的关联,是词连接。同样,一个词义和另一个词义的关联,是词义连接。对于接续方式不同的经文,各个接续之间的关联,以及同一接续中前后部分的关联,是阐明连接。它在注疏里按提问连接、意趣连接、如义连接分为三种,这三种连接在注疏中其实都已经讨论过了。而经连接,我们前面已经以安立的方式展示过了。一段开示和另一段开示相衔接,就是开示连接。应当这样理解:“比丘们,不论他人称赞我……也不应心生不悦”这段开示,和“比丘们,即使盗贼、凶手用双柄锯子把你们的肢体一节一节割断,那时若有人心生嗔恨,他就不是我的教法践行者”这段开示相衔接。“那恰恰会成为你们的障碍”和“婆罗门青年啊,众生以业为所有……将成为业的继承者”这段开示相衔接。“你们……应当了知”和“愤怒的人……能忍的人”这段开示相衔接。巴利
Nindāpasaṃsāhi sammākampitacetasā micchājīvato anoratā sassatādimicchābhinivesino sīlādidhammakkhandhesu appatiṭṭhitatāya sammāsambuddhaguṇarasassādavimukhā veneyyā imissā desanāya nidānaṃ. Te yathāvuttadosavinimuttā kathaṃ nu kho sammāpaṭipattiyā ubhayahitaparā bhaveyyunti ayamettha bhagavato adhippāyo. Padanibbacanaṃ nirutti. Taṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādinidānapadānaṃ, ‘‘mama’’ntiādipāḷipadānañca aṭṭhakathāvasena suviññeyyattā ativitthārabhayena na vitthārayimha. Padapadatthaniddesanikkhepasuttadesanāsandhivasena chabbidhā sandhi. Tattha padassa padantarena sambandho padasandhi. Tathā padatthassa padatthantarena sambandho padatthasandhi. Nānānusandhikassa suttassa taṃtaṃanusandhīhi sambandho, ekānusandhikassa ca pubbāparasambandho niddesasandhi, yā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pucchānusandhiajjhāsayānusandhiyathānusandhivasena tividhā vibhattā, tā panetā tissopi sandhiyo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vicāritā eva. Suttasandhi ca paṭhamaṃ nikkhepavasena amhehi pubbe dassitāyeva. Ekissā desanāya desanāntarena saddhiṃ saṃsandanaṃ desanāsandhi, sā evaṃ veditabbā – ‘‘mamaṃ vā bhikkhave…pe… na cetaso anabhiraddhi karaṇīyā’’ti ayaṃ desanā ‘‘ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi bhikkhave kakacena corā ocarakā aṅgamaṅgāni okkanteyyuṃ, tatrapi yo mano padūseyya, na me so tena sāsanakaro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.232) imāya desanāya saddhiṃ saṃsandati. ‘‘Tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyo’’ti ‘‘kammassakā māṇava sattā…pe… dāyādā bhavissantī’’ti (a. ni. 10.216) imāya desanāya saṃsandati. ‘‘Api tumhe…pe… ājāneyyāthā’’ti ‘‘kuddho atthaṃ…pe… sahate nara’’nti (a. ni. 7.64; mahāni. 5, 156, 195) imāya desanāya saṃsandati.
比丘们,别人称赞我……心里也不该因此得意忘形。这段开示和“比丘们,连法都应舍弃,更何况非法”以及“比丘们,我为你们说筏喻之法,是为了渡过,不是为了抓取”这些教导相呼应。“如果你们……因此得意忘形,那反而会成为你们的障碍”,这和“贪婪的人……能忍的人”以及“被欲望蒙蔽、被网覆盖、被渴爱之衣遮蔽”这些教导相呼应。巴利
‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave pare vaṇṇaṃ…pe… na cetaso ubbillāvitattaṃ karaṇīya’’nti ‘‘dhammāpi vo bhikkhave pahātabbā, pageva adhammā (ma. ni. 1.240). Kullūpamaṃ vo bhikkhave dhammaṃ desessāmi, nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.240) imāya desanāya saṃsandati. ‘‘Tatra ce tumhehi…pe… ubbilāvitā, tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyo’’ti ‘‘luddhoatthaṃ…pe… sahate nara’’nti (itivu. 88; mahāni. 5.156, 195; cūḷani. 128) ‘‘kāmandhā jālasañchannā, taṇhāchadanachāditā’’ti (udā. 64; netti. 27, 90; peṭako. 14) imāhi desanāhi saṃsandati.
“只是微少……只是戒而已”,这与“他成就并安住于初禅。婆罗门,这种祭祀比之前的祭祀更少伤害、更少麻烦,果报更大、利益更殊胜”等开示(《长部》1.353)相呼应。因为这里说初禅比起戒来有更大的果报和利益,就表明从禅那的角度看,戒的功德是微小的。巴利
‘‘Appamattakaṃ…pe… sīlamattaka’’nti ‘‘paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ayaṃ kho brāhmaṇa yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṃsataro cā’’tiādikāya (dī. ni. 1.353) desanāya saṃsandati, paṭhamajjhānassa sīlato mahapphalamahānisaṃsatarabhāvavacanena jhānato sīlassa appabhāvadīpanato.
“舍弃杀生”等开示,和“沙门乔达摩确实具戒……具足善戒”等开示(《长部》1.304)是相呼应的。巴利
‘‘Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādi ‘‘samaṇo khalu bho gotamo sīlavā…pe… kusalasīlena samannāgato’’tiādikāhi (dī. ni. 1.304) desanāhi saṃsandati.
“诸法甚深”等语,与“我所证悟的此法甚深”等经文(《长部》2.67;《中部》1.281、2.337;《相应部》1.172;《大品》7、8)相吻合。因为通过证悟具有甚深等殊胜性质的法,就能了知智具有甚深等性质。巴利
‘‘Aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’tiādi ‘‘adhigato kho myāyaṃ dhammo gambhīro’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 7, 8) pāḷiyā saṃsandati. Gambhīratādivisesayuttadhammapaṭivedhena hi ñāṇassa gambhīrādibhāvo viññāyatīti.
“比丘们,有一些沙门婆罗门”等语,与“比丘们,有一些沙门婆罗门是前际论者……他们宣称:‘我与世间是常,唯此为真,其余皆虚妄。’有些宣称是无常,有些宣称亦常亦无常,有些宣称非常非无常;有些宣称有边,有些宣称无边,有些宣称亦有边亦无边,有些宣称非有边非无边——他们宣称:‘我与世间唯此为真,其余皆虚妄。’”等这样的教说(《中部》3.27)相吻合。巴利
‘‘Santi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’tiādi ‘‘santi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā…pe… abhivadanti, sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ, moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadanti, asassato, sassato ca asassato ca, neva sassato ca nāsassato ca, antavā, anantavā, antavā ca anantavā ca, nevantavā nānantavā ca attā ca loko ca idameva saccaṃ, moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.27) desanāhi saṃsandati.
“比丘们,有些沙门婆罗门是后际论者”等语,与“比丘们,有些沙门婆罗门是后际论者……他们宣称:‘我死后有想、无病。’有些宣称死后无想,有些宣称死后非有想非无想。有些则宣说有情的断灭、毁灭、不存在。还有些宣称现法涅槃”等经文(《中部》3.21)相呼应。“诸受……如来”等语,则与“这确实是有为的、粗重的,但诸行的灭确实存在,如来知见此理,成为洞见其出离者,因而超越了它”等经文(《中部》3.28)相呼应。巴利
‘‘Santi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā’’tiādi ‘‘santi bhikkhave eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā…pe… abhivadanti, saññī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā. Ittheke abhivadanti asaññī, nevasaññīnāsaññī ca attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā. Ittheke abhivadanti sato vā pana sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapenti, diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ vā paneke abhivadantī’’tiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.21) desanāhi saṃsandati. ‘‘Vedanānaṃ…pe… tathāgato’’ti ‘‘tayidaṃ saṅkhataṃ oḷārikaṃ, atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodho, atthetanti iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto’’tiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.28) desanāhi saṃsandati.
“那对他们也只是徒劳的挣扎而已”这句话,和下面这段开示是相应的:那些尊敬的修行者们,不靠欲望、不靠喜好、不靠传闻、不靠对事相的思惟考量、不靠对见解的审察和随顺,就能生起自己内心清净、光洁的智——这是不可能的。比丘们,如果自己内心清净、光洁的智还不存在,那么那些沙门婆罗门尊敬的修行者们即使把智的一分净化了,那对他们来说,也被说成是执取。巴利
‘‘Tadapi tesaṃ…pe… vipphanditamevā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ bhavataṃ aññatreva chandāya aññatra ruciyā aññatra anussavā aññatra ākāraparivitakkā aññatra diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyā paccattaṃyeva ñāṇaṃ bhavissati parisuddhaṃ pariyodātanti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Paccattaṃ kho pana bhikkhave ñāṇe asati parisuddhe pariyodāte yadapi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā tattha ñāṇabhāgamattameva pariyodāpenti, tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ upādānamakkhāyatī’’tiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.29) desanāhi saṃsandati.
“那也是以触为缘”这句话,和“缘于眼与诸色而生起眼识,这三者的和合就是触,以触为缘而有受,以受为缘而有渴爱,以渴爱为缘而有取”,以及“贤友,这些法以欲为根,以作意为起源,以触为和合,以受为会归”等开示相契合。巴利
‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti idañca ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādāna’’nti, (saṃ. ni. 2.44) ‘‘chandamūlakā ime āvuso dhammā manasikārasamuṭṭhānā phassasamodhānā vedanāsamosaraṇā’’ti (a. ni. 8.83) ca ādikāhi desanāhi saṃsandati.
“比丘们,当比丘从六触处”这段教导,与下面这些开示是相应的:“阿难,当比丘不把受看作是我,也不把想、行、识看作是我,他这样不执取时,就不执取世间任何事物;不执取就不恐惧;不恐惧,他就自己般涅槃。”巴利
‘‘Yato kho bhikkhave bhikkhu channaṃ phassāyatanāna’’ntiādi ‘‘yato kho ānanda bhikkhu neva vedanaṃ attānaṃ samanupassati, na saññaṃ, na saṅkhāre, na viññāṇaṃ attānaṃ samanupassati, so evaṃ asamanupassanto na kiñci loke upādiyati, anupādiyaṃ na paritassati, aparitassaṃ paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyatī’’tiādikāhi desanāhi saṃsandati.
“他们全都被这六十二种事网住了”这类说法,和“比丘们,凡是任何……宣称的人,他们全都只是在宣称这五种蕴,或者其中某一种”等教导(《中部》3.26)是一致的。“身坏命终……天与人”——巴利
‘‘Sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi antojālīkatā’’tiādi ‘‘ye hi keci bhikkhave…pe… abhivadanti, sabbe te imāneva pañca kāyāni abhivadanti etesaṃ vā aññatara’’ntiādikāhi (ma. ni. 3.26) desanāhi saṃsandati. ‘‘Kāyassa bhedā…pe… devamanussā’’ti –
就像火焰被风的力量吹散,世尊对优波西婆说:
他达到了目标,不再落入名称的计数。
牟尼这样从名身中解脱出来,
他到达了意义的尽头,不再落入名称概念的计数之中。巴利
‘‘Accī yathā vātavegena khittā, (upasivāti bhagavā) Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkhaṃ; Evaṃ munī nāmakāyā vimutto, Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkha’’nti. (su. ni. 1080; cūḷani. 43);
与开头的那些开示相呼应,这就是四阵列理趣。巴利
Ādikāhi desanāhi saṃsandatīti ayaṃ cātubyūho hāro.
转起模式的注释巴利
Āvattahāravaṇṇanā
用“不造作瞋恨等”这句话来说明,就是讲忍辱和柔和这两种修行。其中,忍辱统摄了信、慧、他人加害、与苦共处这些内容;柔和统摄了戒。由于提到了信等,信根等一切菩提分法都被包含进来。由于提到了戒,无懊悔等一切戒的功德法都被包含进来。用“远离杀生等”这句话来说明,就是不放逸而住;由此,整个教法的梵行都被包含进来。提到具备甚深等殊胜功德之法,是对大菩提的称扬。因为无碍智是漏尽智的基础,漏尽智的基础就是无碍智,这就是大菩提;由此,十力等一切佛陀功德都被包含进来。提到常见等邪见,就统摄了渴爱与无明;由这些,无始的轮回流转被包含进来。如实了知受的集起等,是世尊遍知三种清净的体现;由此,以慧波罗蜜为首的一切波罗蜜都被包含进来。“不知、不见”这句话,是通过提到无明来统摄不如理作意;由此,以不如理作意为根源的诸法都被包含进来。“为爱所困者的焦虑与挣扎”这句话,通过提到渴爱,使九种以渴爱为根的诸法被包含进来;“那也是以触为缘”等语句,是显示常见等施设是依赖因缘而起的,由此,无常等三相都被包含进来。如实了知六触处,是对解脱成就的说明;由此,七种清净都被包含进来。“如来的身体已断除有爱的牵引线”这句话,是讲渴爱的舍断;由此,世尊对一切烦恼的舍断都被包含进来。以上就是“摄”这一模式。巴利
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatāvacanena khantisoraccānuṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha khantiyā saddhāpaññāparāpakāradukkhasahagatānaṃ saṅgaho, soraccena sīlassa. Saddhādiggahaṇena ca saddhindriyādisakalabodhipakkhiyadhammā āvattanti. Sīlaggahaṇena avippaṭisārādayo sabbepi sīlānisaṃsadhammā āvattanti. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanena appamādavihāro, tena sakalaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ āvattati. Gambhīratādivisesayuttadhammaggahaṇena mahābodhipakittanaṃ. Anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ mahābodhi, tena dasabalādayo sabbe buddhaguṇā āvattanti. Sassatādidiṭṭhiggahaṇena taṇhāvijjāya saṅgaho, tāhi anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭaṃ āvattati. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanena bhagavato pariññāttayavisuddhi, tāya paññāpāramimukhena sabbapāramiyo āvattanti. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti avijjāggahaṇena ayonisomanasikārapariggaho, tena ca ayonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā āvattanti. ‘‘Taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti taṇhāggahaṇena nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā āvattanti, ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā’’tiādi sassatādipaññāpanassa paccayādhīnavuttidassanaṃ, tena aniccatādilakkhaṇattayaṃ āvattati. Channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānanena vimuttisampadāniddeso, tena sattapi visuddhiyo āvattanti. ‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko tathāgatassa kāyo’’ti taṇhāpahānaṃ, tena bhagavato sakalasaṃkilesappahānaṃ āvattatīti ayaṃ āvatto hāro.
分别模式的解说巴利
Vibhattihāravaṇṇanā
嗔恨、喜贪等属于不善法,它们的近因是不如理作意等。而那些能令嗔恨、喜贪等不造作、不现起的法,就是无嗔等善法,它们的近因是如理作意等。在这些法当中,嗔恨等只属于欲界,无嗔等则通于四地。同样,远离杀生等可以是善的或无记的,它的近因是惭、愧等法。其中,善的远离可能属于欲界,也可能属于出世间;无记的则只属于出世间。“诸比丘,还有其它甚深之法”所说的法,可能是善的,也可能是无记的。其中,善法的近因是导向出起的观;无记法的近因是道法、观或转向。在这些法当中,善法是出世间的,无记法则可能属于欲界,也可能属于出世间。所有的邪见都只是不善法,只属于欲界;它们共同的近因,是在邪见执取中生起的不如理作意。若再进一步分别:由于未能破除相续与密集的假相,对“单一性”之理产生错误执取,即那种伴随追忆过去生的推论,就是常见(执著有恒常自我)的近因。由于未能把握因果相续的关系,对“差异性”之理产生错误执取,即那种伴随着相应专注的执取,就是断见(执著死后断灭)的近因。其余各种邪见也应依照各自对应的情况来说明。“诸受”这里,受可能是善的,也可能是无记的;可能属于欲界,也可能属于色界,也可能属于无色界;触是它们的近因。对受的集起等如实知见的道智,无取著的解脱是它的果;对这些,应按照“还有其它甚深之法”那里所说的方法,进行法等的分类。“不知者、不见者”等句中,无明和爱是不善法,只属于欲界;其中,无明的近因是诸漏,或者就是不如理作意;爱的近因,是在结缚法中观见味著。“那也以触为缘”这里,对于触,应像对受那样了知法等的分类。依照这一方法,对于触、处等,也应随其相应进行法等的分类。这就是分别的方法。巴利
Āghātānandādayo akusalā dhammā, tesaṃ ayonisomanasikārādi padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yehi pana dhammehi āghātānandādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ appavatti, te abyāpādādayo kusalā dhammā, tesaṃ yonisomanasikārādi padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu āghātādayo kāmāvacarāva, abyāpādādayo catubhūmakā. Tathā pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirati kusalā vā abyākatā vā, tassā hirottappādayo dhammā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha kusalā siyā kāmāvacarā, siyā lokuttarā, abyākatā lokuttarāva. ‘‘Atthi bhikkhave aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’ti vuttadhammā siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā, tattha kusalānaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Abyākatānaṃ maggadhammā, vipassanā, āvajjanā vā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu kusalā lokuttarā, abyākatā siyā kāmāvacarā, siyā lokuttarā, sabbāpi diṭṭhiyo akusalāva kāmāvacarāva, tāsaṃ avisesena micchābhinivese ayonisomanasikāro padaṭṭhānaṃ. Visesato pana santatighanavinibbhogābhāvato ekattanayassa micchāgāho atītajātianussaraṇatakkasahito sassatadiṭṭhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Hetuphalabhāvena sambandhabhāvassa aggahaṇato nānattanayassa micchāgāho tajjāsamannāhārasahito ucchedadiṭṭhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ sesadiṭṭhīnampi yathāsambhavaṃ vattabbaṃ. ‘‘Vedanāna’’nti ettha vedanā siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā, siyā kāmāvacarā, siyā rūpāvacarā, siyā arūpāvacarā, phasso tāsaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanaṃ maggañāṇaṃ, anupādāvimutti phalaṃ , tesaṃ ‘‘aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’ti ettha vuttanayena dhammādivibhāgo netabbo. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’ntiādīsu avijjā taṇhā akusalā kāmāvacarā, tāsu avijjāya āsavā, ayonisomanasikāro eva vā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṇhāya saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādadassanaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ettha phassassa vedanāya viya dhammādivibhāgo veditabbo. Iminā nayena phassāyatanādīnampi yathārahaṃ dhammādivibhāgo netabboti ayaṃ vibhattihāro.
关于“旋转理趣”的解说巴利
Parivattahāravaṇṇanā
不造作嗔恨等,通过修习忍辱与柔和,并依靠思择修习的力量成就,能带来利益自他的修行。然而,嗔恨等一旦持续现行,就会导致容貌丑陋、睡眠痛苦、财产损失、名声败坏,以及难以被他人亲近,最终在地狱等处招来大苦。远离杀生等恶行,会依次带来无悔等善果。而杀生等恶行,则会依次带来追悔等不善果。与甚深等特质相应的智慧,能随所应地为可度化者带来明与神通等殊胜功德,因为它能如实了知一切所知之法。反之,缺乏甚深等特质的智慧,则因为对所知之法有障碍,不会带来如上所说的殊胜功德。所有这些邪见,随其所应,或执常见或执断见,落入两个极端,其本质不能超越有身之岸,因为它们不具有出离的性质。而正见及其资具,因为具有出离的性质,成为中道,能超越有身之岸,到达彼岸。如实了知受的集起等,因为本身就是道,能带来无执取的解脱。不能如实通达受的集起等,则会形成轮回牢狱的封闭,因为它成为诸行的条件。愚痴遮蔽了感受的真实本质,就会带来对感受的欢喜。而如实了知,则会带来对它的厌离与离欲。在错误的执取中,与不如理作意相应的渴爱,会展开种种见网。如上所说渴爱的断除,即初道,能收摄那见网。对于常见等主张的安立,触是它的条件,因为没有触就没有那些主张。被见缚所缚的人,由于触处等没有灭尽,触等也就不灭,轮回之苦便不会止息。如实通达触处等,能超越一切见;不通达触处等,则不能超越那见丛。有之渴爱的断除,能导致未来不再生起自体;有之渴爱未断除,未来的有之相续就会继续转起。以上就是“转”这一范畴。巴利
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ khantisoraccāni anubrūhetvā paṭisaṅkhānabhāvanābalasiddhiyā ubhayahitapaṭipattiṃ āvahati. Āghātādayo pana pavattiyamānā dubbaṇṇataṃ dukkhaseyyaṃ bhogahāniṃ akittiṃ parehi durupasaṅkamanatañca nipphādentā nirayādīsu mahādukkhaṃ āvahanti. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirati avippaṭisārādikalyāṇaṃ paramparaṃ āvahati. Pāṇātipātādi pana vippaṭisārādiakalyāṇaṃ paramparaṃ, gambhīratādivisesayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ vineyyānaṃ yathārahaṃ vijjābhiññādiguṇavisesaṃ āvahati sabbañeyyaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodhato. Tathā gambhīratādivisesarahitaṃ pana ñāṇaṃ ñeyyesu sāvaraṇato yathāvuttaguṇavisesaṃ nāvahati. Sabbāpi cetā diṭṭhiyo yathārahaṃ sassatucchedabhāvato antadvayabhūtā sakkāyatīraṃ nātivattanti aniyyānikasabhāvattā. Niyyānikasabhāvattā pana sammādiṭṭhi saparikkhārā majjhimapaṭipadābhūtā atikkamma sakkāyatīraṃ pāraṃ āgacchati. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiyathābhūtavedanaṃ anupādāvimuttiṃ āvahati maggabhāvato. Vedanānaṃ samudayādiasampaṭivedho saṃsāracārakāvarodhaṃ āvahati saṅkhārānaṃ paccayabhāvato. Vedayitasabhāvapaṭicchādako sammoho tadabhinandanaṃ āvahati . Yathābhūtāvabodho pana tattha nibbedaṃ virāgañca āvahati. Micchābhinivese ayonisomanasikārasahitā taṇhā anekavihitaṃ diṭṭhijālaṃ pasāreti. Yathāvuttataṇhāsamucchedo paṭhamamaggo taṃ diṭṭhijālaṃ saṅkoceti. Sassatavādādipaññāpanassa phasso paccayo hoti asati phasse tadabhāvato. Diṭṭhibandhanabandhānaṃ phassāyatanādīnaṃ anirodhena phassādianirodho saṃsāradukkhassa anivattiyeva, yāthāvato phassāyatanādipariññā sabbadiṭṭhidassanāni ativattati, phassāyatanādiapariññā taṃdiṭṭhigahanaṃ nātivattati, bhavanettisamucchedo āyatiṃ attabhāvassa anibbattiyā saṃvattati, asamucchinnāya bhavanettiyā anāgate bhavappabandho parivattatiyevāti ayaṃ parivatto hāro.
同义语门类的解释巴利
Vevacanahāravaṇṇanā
“我的、属于我的、为我所有的”,这是同义的说法。“比丘们、沙门、苦行者”,这是同义的说法。“其他人、别的、对立的”,这是同义的说法。“毁谤、恶名、讥嫌”,这是同义的说法。“会说、会谈、会做”,这是同义的说法。“法与律、大师的教导”,这是同义的说法。“僧伽的、大众的、群体的”,这是同义的说法。“在那里、在那些之中、在那些人当中”,这是同义的说法。“由你们、对你们、诸位尊者”,这是同义的说法。“嗔恨、嗔怒、害心”,这是同义的说法。“不满、忧恼、心所之苦”,这是同义的说法。“心不喜悦、心的嗔害、心的恼怒”,这是同义的说法。“不应做、不应令生起、不应令现行”,这是同义的说法。像这样,按照这个方式,在一切语句中都应当说明同义的说法。这就是同义语理趣。巴利
‘‘Mama mayhaṃ me’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhave samaṇā tapassino’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Pare aññe paṭiviruddhā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Avaṇṇaṃ akittiṃ ninda’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhāseyyuṃ bhaṇeyyuṃ kareyyu’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Dhammassa vinayassa satthusāsanassā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghassa samūhassa gaṇassā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Tatra tattha tesū’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Tumhehi vo bhavantehī’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Āghāto doso byāpādo’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Appaccayo domanassaṃ cetasikadukkha’’nti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Cetaso anabhiraddhi cittassa byāpatti manopadoso’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Na karaṇīyā na uppādetabbā na pavattetabbā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Iti iminā nayena sabbapadesu vevacanaṃ vattabbanti ayaṃ vevacano hāro.
施设分别的解说巴利
Paññattihāravaṇṇanā
嗔恨按事由分为十种或十九种。不满按近伺察分为六种。喜悦等按方式分为九种。喜从总体上按小喜等差别分为五种。悦按近伺察分为六种。戒按禁止与行持等分为多种。与甚深性等殊胜相应的智,按心的生起分为四种或十二种,又按所缘境的差别分为多种。邪见按常见等分为六十二种分类,再按其中所含的细分分为多种。受分为六种、一百零八种及多种。受的集分为五种,灭也同样。味分为两种。过患分为三种。出离分为一种和四种……(中略)……无取解脱分为两种。巴利
Āghāto vatthuvasena dasavidhena ekūnavīsatividhena vā paññatto. Appaccayo upavicāravasena chadhā paññatto. Ānandopītiādivasena navadhā paññatto. Pīti sāmaññato khuddikādivasena pañcadhā paññattā. Somanassaṃ upavicāravasena chadhā paññattaṃ. Sīlaṃ vārittacārittādivasena anekadhā paññattaṃ. Gambhīratādivisesayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ cittuppādavasena catudhā, dvādasavidhena vā, visayabhedato anekadhā ca paññattaṃ. Diṭṭhisassatādivasena dvāsaṭṭhiyā bhedehi, tadantogadhavibhāgena anekadhā ca paññattā. Vedanā chadhā aṭṭhasatadhā anekadhā ca paññattā. Tassā samudayo pañcadhā paññatto, tathā atthaṅgamo. Assādo duvidhena paññatto. Ādīnavo tividhena paññatto. Nissaraṇaṃ ekadhā catudhā ca paññattaṃ…pe… anupādāvimutti duvidhena paññattā.
“对不知、不见的人”所说的无明,按所缘的不同,分为四种和八种。“被渴爱所驱使的人”等所说的渴爱,分为六种、一百零八种以及许多种。触按所依分为六种。取分为四种。有分为两种以及许多种。生按同义词的角度分为六种。老同样分为七种。死分为八种和九种。忧分为五种。悲分为六种。苦分为四种,忧受也分为四种。恼分为四种。“生起”是对生起的施设,“如实了知”是对苦的遍知施设、对集的断除施设、对灭的证悟施设、对道的修习施设。巴利
‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti vuttā avijjā visayabhedena catudhā aṭṭhadhā ca paññattā. ‘‘Taṇhāgatāna’’ntiādinā vuttā taṇhā chadhā aṭṭhasatadhā anekadhā ca paññattā. Phasso nissayavasena chadhā paññatto. Upādānaṃ catudhā paññattaṃ. Bhavo dvidhā anekadhā ca paññatto. Jāti vevacanavasena chadhā paññattā. Tathā jarā sattadhā paññattā. Maraṇaṃ aṭṭhadhā navadhā ca paññattaṃ. Soko pañcadhā paññatto. Paridevo chadhā paññatto. Dukkhaṃ catudhā paññattaṃ, tathā domanassaṃ. Upāyāso catudhā paññatto. ‘‘Samudayo hotī’’ti pabhavapaññatti, ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti dukkhassa pariññāpaññatti, samudayassa pahānapaññatti, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāpaññatti, maggassa bhāvanāpaññatti.
“落入网中者”这一类说法,是统摄一切见的施设。“已断有爱之根者”这一类说法,是般涅槃的两种施设。如此,对于嗔等不善法和善法等诸法,按照“从它们生起而施设”等方式,同样地,以“嗔”是瞋恚的同义语施设、“不满”是忧的同义语施设等理路,应当分析施设的差别。这就是施设的理趣。巴利
‘‘Antojālīkatā’’tiādi sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ saṅgahapaññatti. ‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko’’tiādi duvidhena parinibbānapaññatti. Evaṃ āghātādīnaṃ akusalakusalādidhammānaṃ yathāpabhavapaññattiādivasena, tathā ‘‘āghāto’’ti byāpādassa vevacanapaññatti, ‘‘appaccayo’’ti domanassassa vevacanapaññattītiādinā nayena paññattibhedo vibhajitabboti ayaṃ paññattihāro.
入门的详释巴利
Otaraṇahāravaṇṇanā
通过“嗔”的执取,收摄于行蕴;同样,通过“不喜悦”的执取,也收摄于行蕴。通过“无因”的执取,则收摄于受蕴。这是从蕴的门径进入。
同样,通过执取“嗔”等法,也就摄入了法处、法界、苦谛或集谛。这是从处、界、谛的门径进入。
再者,与嗔等俱生的无明,以因缘、俱生缘、相互缘、依止缘、相应缘、有缘、无有缘为缘;不是俱生的那些,则以无间缘、等无间缘、无间依止缘、亲依止缘、有缘、无有缘、习行缘为缘;中间有间隔的,仅以亲依止缘为缘。对于渴爱、取等,以及触等法,无论俱生或不俱生,都应按照相应情况说明它们作为缘的状态。其中,有些以增上缘的力量,有些以业缘的力量,有些以食缘的力量,有些以根缘的力量,有些以禅那缘的力量,有些以道缘的力量而成为缘。这些差别也应当了知。这是从缘起的门径进入。
至于喜悦等法,也应当以同样的方式,从蕴等门径说明进入。巴利
Āghātaggahaṇena saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgaho, tathā anabhiraddhigahaṇena. Appaccayaggahaṇena vedanākkhandhasaṅgahoti idaṃ khandhamukhena otaraṇaṃ. Tathā āghātādiggahaṇena dhammāyatanaṃ dhammadhātu dukkhasaccaṃ samudayasaccaṃ vā gahitanti idaṃ āyatanamukhena dhātumukhena saccamukhena ca otaraṇaṃ. Tathā āghātādīnaṃ sahajātā avijjā hetusahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo hoti, asahajātā pana anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi paccayo hoti, anantarā upanissayavaseneva paccayo hoti . Taṇhāupādānādīnaṃ, phassādīnampi tesaṃ sahajātānaṃ asahajātānañca yathārahaṃ paccayabhāvo vattabbo. Koci panettha adhipativasena, koci kammavasena, koci āhāravasena, koci indriyavasena, koci jhānavasena, koci maggavasenapi paccayo hotīti. Ayampi viseso veditabboti idaṃ paṭiccasamuppādamukhena otaraṇaṃ. Ānandādīnampi imināva nayena khandhādimukhena otaraṇaṃ vibhāvetabbaṃ.
同样地,戒就是对杀生等的远离思,以及无瞋等心所法;杀生等本身就是思。这些法,以及帮助它们生起的惭愧等法,都归入行蕴、法处等。应当依照前面说过的方式,通过蕴等门径来说明这种归入。对智、见、受、无明、渴爱等的把握,也是同样的方法。对出离、无取、解脱的把握,还要依无为界,通过界的门径来说明归入。同样,通过“诸受……无取解脱”这段经文,世尊的戒等五法蕴,以及念住等菩提分法,都已被阐明,所以也应当知道从那个门径的归入。“那也以触为缘”这句,通过说明见和施设是依缘而起的,就以无常的门径归入;同样,以法性如此,就以缘起的门径归入;因为无常的就是苦、无我,所以也以无愿的门径和空的门径归入。其余的文句也是同样的道理。这就是入理趣。巴利
Tathā sīlaṃ pāṇātipātādīhi viraticetanā, abyāpādādicetasikadhammā ca, pāṇātipātādayo cetanāva, tesaṃ tadupakārakadhammānañca lajjādayādīnaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhadhammāyatanādisaṅgaho, purimanayeneva khandhādimukhena ca otaraṇaṃ vibhāvetabbaṃ. Esa nayo ñāṇadiṭṭhivedanāavijjātaṇhādiggahaṇesu. Nissaraṇaanupādāvimuttigahaṇesu asaṅkhatadhātuvasenapi dhātumukhena otaraṇaṃ vibhāvetabbaṃ. Tathā ‘‘vedanānaṃ…pe… anupādāvimutto’’ti etena bhagavato sīlādayo pañca dhammakkhandhā, satipaṭṭhānādayo ca bodhipakkhiyadhammā pakāsitā hontīti taṃ mukhenapi otaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti diṭṭhipaññāpanassa paccayādhīnavuttitādīpanena aniccatāmukhena otaraṇaṃ, tathā evaṃdhammatāya paṭiccasamuppādamukhena otaraṇaṃ, aniccassa dukkhānattabhāvato appaṇihitamukhena suññatāmukhena ca otaraṇaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayoti ayaṃ otaraṇo hāro.
清净处理的解释巴利
Sodhanahāravaṇṇanā
“或对我……中略……说”这一开头,是起始。 “对法……中略……对僧伽……中略……说”这一句,是文句清净,不是起始清净。 “在那里,你们……中略……应当做”这一句,既是文句清净,也是起始清净。 第二方式等也是如此。 同样,“然而,这少许”等是起始。 “什么是”等是提问。 “舍弃杀生”等是文句清净,不是起始清净,也不是提问清净。 “这确实”等既是提问清净,也是文句清净,也是起始清净。巴利
‘‘Mamaṃ vā…pe… bhāseyyu’’nti ārambho. ‘‘Dhammassa…pe… saṅghassa…pe… bhāseyyu’’nti padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi. ‘‘Tatra tumhehi…pe… karaṇīyā’’ti padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi ca. Dutiyanayādīsupi eseva nayo . Tathā ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādi ārambho. ‘‘Katama’’ntiādi pucchā. ‘‘Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādi padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi, no ca pucchāsuddhi. ‘‘Idaṃ kho’’tiādi pucchāsuddhi ceva padasuddhi ca ārambhasuddhi ca.
同样地,“诸比丘,有”等是开头。“哪些是那些”等是提问。“诸比丘,存在”等是开头。“什么”等既是开头也是提问。“如已定”等是句子清净,不是开头清净,也不是提问清净。“这些即是”等既是句子清净,也是提问清净,也是开头清净。按这个方式,应当处处了解开头等。这就是清净的纲目。巴利
Tathā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādi ārambho. ‘‘Katame ca te’’tiādi pucchā. ‘‘Santi bhikkhave’’tiādi ārambho. ‘‘Ki’’ntiādi ārambha pucchā. ‘‘Yathāsamāhite’’tiādi padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi no ca pucchāsuddhi. ‘‘Ime kho te’’tiādi padasuddhi ceva pucchāsuddhi ca ārambhasuddhi ca. Iminā nayena sabbattha ārambhādayo veditabbāti. Ayaṃ sodhano hāro.
安立门的注释巴利
Adhiṭṭhānahāravaṇṇanā
“诋毁”是从总体上安立的,不作区分,而具体说成“或对我、或对法、或对僧伽”。在清净分(白分)中也是同样的方式。巴利
‘‘Avaṇṇa’’nti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ taṃ, avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘mamaṃ vā dhammassa vā saṅghassa vā’’ti. Sukkapakkhepi eseva nayo.
同样,先说通称的“戒”作为确立,不加以区分,再用具体说法说“远离杀生”等。巴利
Tathā ‘‘sīla’’nti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādi.
先说“其他诸法”这类总括的说法,这是先立一个总纲;不把它分开来讲,接着就用具体分别的说法说“比丘们,如来对此了知”等等。巴利
‘‘Aññeva dhammā’’tiādi sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘tayidaṃ bhikkhave tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādi.
同样地,“前际论者”等是先按笼统的说法来安立,不加以区分,接着就用具体的说法“常住论者”等来说明。按照这个方式,在一切地方都应该确定笼统说法和具体说法的关系。这就是安立纲领。巴利
Tathā ‘‘pubbantakappikā’’tiādi sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ avikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘sassatavādā’’tiādi. Iminā nayena sabbattha sāmaññaviseso niddhāretabboti ayaṃ adhiṭṭhāno hāro.
资助资粮的注释巴利
Parikkhārahāravaṇṇanā
对“他对我做了无益之事”等十九种结怨事来说,它们是因。对阿难等人来说,对所缘的强烈贪著是因。对戒来说,惭、愧、少欲等是因。以“甚深”等语所说的法,一切波罗蜜都是它的因,尤其是般若波罗蜜。对邪见来说,亲近恶人、听闻非正法,以及由邪执而产生的非理作意,这些是共同的因;分别来说,对常见论者等而言,忆念过去生等则是因。对诸受来说,无明、渴爱、业和触是因。对无取解脱来说,圣道是因。对施设来说,非理作意是因。对渴爱来说,在会被结缚的法上随观乐味是因。对触来说,六处是因;对六处来说,名色是因。对有爱的断除来说,清净的修习是因。这就是资助纲领。巴利
Āghātādīnaṃ ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādīni (dha. sa. 1237; vibha. 909) ca ekūnavīsati āghātavatthūni hetu. Ānandādīnaṃ ārammaṇe abhisineho hetu. Sīlassa hiriottappaṃ appicchatādayo ca hetu. ‘‘Gambhīrā’’tiādinā vuttadhammassa sabbāpi pāramiyo hetu, visesena paññāpāramī. Diṭṭhīnaṃ asappurisūpassayo, asaddhammassavanaṃ, micchābhinivesena ayonisomanasikāro ca avisesena hetu, visesena pana sassatavādādīnaṃ atītajātianussaraṇādi hetu. Vedanānaṃ avijjātaṇhākammāni phasso ca hetu. Anupādāvimuttiyā ariyamaggo hetu. Paññāpanassa ayonisomanasikāro hetu. Taṇhāya saṃyojaniyesu assādānupassanā hetu. Phassassa chaḷāyatanāni, chaḷāyatanassa nāmarūpaṃ hetu. Bhavanettisamucchedassa visuddhibhāvanā hetūti ayaṃ parikkhāro hāro.
归因方式的注释巴利
Samāropanahāravaṇṇanā
通过“不应作瞋恚等”这一说法,显示了忍辱的圆满。通过“这确实只是微小事”等语,显示了调柔的圆满;通过“诸比丘,有……”等语,显示了智的圆满;通过“不执取而各自证知寂灭”以及“对诸受……如实了知后无取解脱”等语,显示了与定圆满相伴的明与解脱自在的圆满。其中,忍辱圆满因为思择力而成就,是调柔圆满的近因。而调柔圆满在意义上就是戒,同样,宣说远离杀生等,是为了显示戒的同义异名分类。在这里,戒是定的近因,定是慧的近因。其中,通过戒成就违犯的断除和恶行杂染的断除;通过定成就缠缚的断除、镇伏的断除和渴爱杂染的断除;通过慧成就邪见杂染的断除、正断的断除和随眠的断除。因此,通过戒、定、慧这三法蕴,圆满止观的修习,成就三种断除——这就是归因的方式。巴利
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatāvacanena khantisampadā dassitā hoti. ‘‘Appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādinā soraccasampadā, ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā ñāṇasampadā, ‘‘aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā’’ti, ‘‘vedanānaṃ…pe… yathābhūtaṃ viditvā anupādāvimutto’’ti etehi samādhisampadāya saddhiṃ vijjāvimuttivasībhāvasampadā dassitā hoti. Tattha khantisampadā paṭisaṅkhānabalasiddhito soraccasampadāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Soraccasampadā pana atthato sīlameva, tathā pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanaṃ sīlassa pariyāyavibhāgadassanatthaṃ. Tattha sīlaṃ samādhissa padaṭṭhānaṃ, samādhi paññāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu sīlena vītikkamappahānaṃ duccaritasaṃkilesappahānañca sijjhati, samādhinā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, taṇhāsaṃkilesappahānañca sijjhati. Paññāya diṭṭhisaṃkilesappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, anusayappahānañca sijjhatīti sīlādīhi tīhi dhammakkhandhehi samathavipassanābhāvanāpāripūrī, pahānattayasiddhi cāti ayaṃ samāropano hāro.
五种方式的注释巴利
Pañcavidhanayavaṇṇanā
欢喜转起方式的注释巴利
Nandiyāvaṭṭanayavaṇṇanā
通过宣说“不应对……生瞋恨”等,就显示出渴爱与无明的收摄。因为,当对“我”和“我所”的事物怀有爱着、并且忘失正念时,就会以“他对我做了不利的事”等方式生起瞋恨。同样,通过“远离杀生”等说法,以及“各自证知寂灭、无取着而解脱、对六触处……如实了知”等说法,就显示出渴爱与无明的彻底断除。然而,对于那些通过“前际论者”等词句和“不知、不见”等词句而以其自相显示出来的渴爱与无明来说,色法和无色法是它们的依处;止和观依次是它们的对治;心解脱和慧解脱是它们的果。其中,渴爱或渴爱与无明是集谛;作为它们依处的色法和无色法是苦谛;它们的止息是灭谛;了知灭的止与观是道谛——应当这样了知四谛的联结。在这里,通过“渴爱”一词,应当统摄一切不善分,包括谄、诳、慢、过慢、放逸、恶欲、恶友、无惭、无愧等。同样,通过“无明”一词,应当统摄一切不善分,包括颠倒作意、忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、暴恶、恶口、有见、无有见等。与上述相反,通过无谄、无诳、不颠倒作意等,以及属于止分的信根等和属于观分的无常想等,应当统摄一切善分。这就是“欢喜转起方式”的基础。巴利
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇavacanena taṇhāvijjāsaṅkoco dassito hoti. Sati hi attattaniyavatthūsu sinehe sammose ca ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1237, vibha. 909) āghāto jāyatīti, tathā ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādivacanehi , ‘‘paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā, anupādāvimutto, channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ…pe… yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādīhi vacanehi ca taṇhāvijjānaṃ accantappahānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tāsaṃ pana pubbantakappikādipadehi ‘‘ajānataṃ apassata’’ntiādipadehi ca sarūpato dassitānaṃ taṇhāvijjānaṃ rūpadhammā arūpadhammā ca adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathākkamaṃ samatho ca vipassanā ca paṭipakkho. Tesaṃ cetovimutti paññāvimutti ca phalaṃ. Tattha taṇhā, taṇhāvijjā vā samudayasaccaṃ, tadadhiṭṭhānabhūtā rūpārūpadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, tesaṃ appavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā samathavipassanā maggasaccanti evaṃ catusaccayojanā veditabbā. Taṇhāggahaṇena cettha māyāsāṭheyyamānātimānamadappamādapāpicchatāpāpamittatāahirikānottappādivasena sabbo akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā avijjāggahaṇena viparītamanasikārakodhupanāhamakkhapalāsaissāmacchariyasārambhadovacassatā- bhavadiṭṭhivibhavadiṭṭhādivasena akusalapakkho netabbo. Vuttavipariyāyena amāyāasāṭheyyādiaviparītamanasikārādivasena, tathā samathapakkhiyānaṃ saddhindriyādīnaṃ, vipassanāpakkhiyānañca aniccasaññādīnaṃ vasena kusalapakkho netabboti. Ayaṃ nandiyāvaṭṭassa nayassa bhūmi.
三洞方式的注释。巴利
Tipukkhalanayavaṇṇanā
通过说“不应对嗔怒等作反应”,就成立无嗔;同样,通过说“应远离杀生、粗恶语”,也成立无嗔。通过说“不应对欢喜等作反应”,就成立无贪;同样,通过说“应远离非梵行”,也成立无贪。而通过说“应远离不与取等”,则两者同时成立。通过“诸比丘,如来对此了知……”等说法,就成立无痴。这样一来,以三不善根为摄,从它们的对立面,以及通过说“不应对嗔怒等作反应”,三善根就自然成立了。在这里,依三不善根,应以三种恶行、杂染、垢秽、不平等、不善想、不善思惟、非正法等角度,展开整个不善方面。同样,依三善根,应以三种善行、清净、平等、善想、善思惟、慧、正法、定、解脱门、解脱等角度,阐明整个善方面。在这里也应了知四谛的联结。如何了知?贪,或一切善与不善根,是集谛;由它们所生、作为它们依处与行境的取蕴,是苦谛……应依这种方式了知四谛的联结。这就是“三聚理趣”的范围。巴利
Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇavacanena adosasiddhi, tathā pāṇātipātapharusavācāhi paṭivirativacanena. Ānandādīnaṃ akaraṇavacanena alobhasiddhi, tathā abrahmacariyato paṭivirativacanena. Adinnādānādīhi pana paṭivirativacanena ubhayasiddhi. ‘‘Tayidaṃ bhikkhave tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādinā amohasiddhi. Iti tīhi akusalamūlehi gahitehi tappaṭipakkhato, āghātādiakaraṇavacanena ca tīṇi kusalamūlāni siddhāniyeva honti. Tattha tīhi akusalamūlehi tividhaduccaritasaṃkilesamalavisamākusalasaññāvitakkāsaddhammādivasena sabbo akusalapakkho vitthāretabbo. Tathā tīhi kusalamūlehi tividhasucaritavodānasamakusalasaññāvitakkapaññāsaddhammasamādhi- vimokkhamukhavimokkhādivasena sabbo kusalapakkho vibhāvetabbo. Etthāpi ca saccayojanā veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Lobho sabbāni vā kusalākusalamūlāni samudayasaccaṃ, tehi pana nibbattā tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānagocarabhūtā upādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccantiādinā nayena saccayojanā veditabbāti ayaṃ tipukkhalassa nayassa bhūmi.
狮子游戏方式的注释巴利
Sīhavikkīḷitanayavavaṇṇanā
通过说“不应对嗔怒与欢喜等(生起)”这句话,成就了念。因为念确实能在有罪与无罪的事物中,观察过患与利益之后,舍弃有罪的,受持无罪的而运作。同样,通过说“远离邪命”这句话,成就了精进。因为精进能驱除欲寻、嗔寻和害寻,而精进所成就的就是活命清净戒。通过说“远离杀生等”这句话,成就了念。因为念确实能在有罪与无罪的事物中,观察过患与利益之后,舍弃有罪的,受持无罪的而运作。正因如此,这个念也被说为“现起为面向所缘的状态”。通过“诸比丘,如来如实了知此……”等语句,成就了定与慧。因为慧能如实通达,而入定者能如实了知。同样,通过“常、恒”等语句,在无常中生起“常”的颠倒;通过“无病、死后、纯粹快乐的我、于现法证得涅槃”等语句,在苦中生起“乐”的颠倒;通过“具足五种欲乐”等语句,在不净中生起“净”的颠倒;又通过一切显示邪见的语句,在无我中生起“我”的颠倒。如此,在这里四种颠倒就成立了,从它们的对立面来说,四念处也就成立了。在这里,应当用四种根性来说明四种人。巴利
Āghātānandanādīnaṃ akaraṇavacanena satisiddhi. Satiyā hi sāvajjānavajje, tattha ca ādīnavānisaṃse sallakkhetvā sāvajjaṃ pahāya anavajjaṃ samādāya vattatīti. Tathā micchājīvā paṭivirativacanena vīriyasiddhi. Vīriyena hi kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāvitakke vinodeti, vīriyasādhanañca ājīvapārisuddhisīlanti. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanena satisiddhi. Satiyā hi sāvajjānavajje, tattha ca ādīnavānisaṃse sallakkhetvā sāvajjaṃ pahāya anavajjaṃ samādāya vattati. Tathā hi sā ‘‘visayābhimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti ca vuccati. ‘‘Tayidaṃ bhikkhave tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādinā samādhipaññāsiddhi. Paññāya hi yathābhūtāvabodho, samāhito ca yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti. Tathā ‘‘nicco dhuvo’’tiādinā anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāso, ‘‘arogo paraṃ maraṇā, ekantasukhī attā diṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto’’ti ca evamādīhi asukhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallāso, ‘‘pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito’’tiādinā asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāso, sabbeheva ca diṭṭhidīpakapadehi anattani ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsoti evamettha cattāro vipallāsā siddhā honti, tesaṃ paṭipakkhato cattāri satipaṭṭhānāni siddhāneva honti. Tattha catūhi indriyehi cattāro puggalā niddisitabbā.
怎么讲呢?爱行的人有两种:钝根的和利根的;见行的人也是这样。其中,第一种人对不净的东西怀着“这是净”的颠倒见解,靠念的力量如实观察身体的本来性质之后,就进入正性决定。第二种人对苦的东西怀着“这是乐”的颠倒见解,靠“已经生起的欲寻,他不能容忍”等经文里所说的、名为精进防护的精进力,把这个颠倒摧毁掉。第三种人对无常的东西怀着“这是常”的、不如实的执取,靠止的力量,由于心得定,如实通达诸行的刹那性。第四种人对仅仅由触等法聚合而成、本来无我的东西,错误地执著为“我”,靠四种空作意,把这个邪执彻底粉碎。在这里,通过这四种颠倒,可以把由四漏、四暴流、四轭、四身系、四趣、四渴爱、四取、七识住、不遍知等所摄的一切不善分都归纳进去。同样,通过四念处,也可以把由四种禅那、四种住、四种增上、能引乐的法、四无量、四正勤、四神足等所摄的一切清净分都归纳进去。这就是狮子游戏这一理趣的范围。在这里也应当知道:以净想、乐想,或者以四种颠倒,作为集谛;以作为它们所依和所缘的五取蕴,作为苦谛——如此等等,用四谛来配属。巴利
Kathaṃ? Duvidho hi taṇhācarito mudindriyo ca tikkhindriyo cāti, tathā diṭṭhicarito. Tesu paṭhamo asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti vipallattadiṭṭhi satibalena yathābhūtaṃ kāyasabhāvaṃ sallakkhetvā sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Dutiyo asukhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallattadiṭṭhi ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.14; 6.58) vuttena vīriyasaṃvarasaṅkhātena vīriyabalena taṃ vipallāsaṃ vidhamati. Tatiyo anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti ayāthāvagāhī samathabalena samāhitabhāvato saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikabhāvaṃ yathābhūtaṃ paṭivijjhati. Catuttho santatisamūhakiccārammaṇaghanavicittattā phassādidhammapuñjamatte anattani ‘‘attā’’ti micchābhinivesī catukoṭikasuññatāmanasikārena taṃ micchābhinivesaṃ viddhaṃseti. Catūhi cettha vipallāsehi caturāsavoghayogakāyaganthaagatitaṇhuppādupādānasattaviññāṇaṭṭhitiapariññādivasena sabbo akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā catūhi satipaṭṭhānehi catubbidhajhānavihārādhiṭṭhānasukhabhāgiyadhammaappamaññāsammappadhānaiddhipādādivasena sabbo vodānapakkho netabboti ayaṃ sīhavikkīḷitassa nayassa bhūmi. Idhāpi subhasaññāsukhasaññāhi, catūhipi vā vipallāsehi samudayasaccaṃ , tesaṃ adhiṭṭhānārammaṇabhūtā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccantiādinā saccayojanā veditabbā.
方位观察与钩——两种理趣的解释巴利
Disālocanaaṅkusanayadvayavaṇṇanā
这样一来,当三种义理方式成立时,两种言说方式也就同样成立了。确实,对作为义理方式之所在的诸法进行观察,就是“方位观察”;把它们归纳到一起,就是“钩”——被指派运用这五种方式。巴利
Iti tiṇṇaṃ atthanayānaṃ siddhiyā vohāranayadvayampi siddhameva hoti. Tathā hi atthanayadisābhūtadhammānaṃ samālocanaṃ disālocanaṃ, tesaṃ samānayanaṃ aṅkusoti niyuttā pañca nayā.
《教法发趣论》的注释巴利
Sāsanapaṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
这部经在十六种经发趣中,属于“杂染随眠的无学分”,或者也可以说只是“杂染通达的无学分”。但在二十八种经发趣中,应当知道它涉及:世间与出世间、以有情与法为所依、智、所知、见、修习、自说与他说、应解释与不应解释、善与不善、允许与不允许。巴利
Idaṃ suttaṃ soḷasavidhe suttantapaṭṭhāne saṃkilesavāsanāsekkhabhāgiyaṃ, saṃkilesanibbedhāsekkhabhāgiyameva vā. Aṭṭhavīsatividhe pana suttantapaṭṭhāne lokiyalokuttaraṃ sattadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇañeyyadassanabhāvanaṃ sakavacanaparavacanaṃ vissajjanīyāvissajjanīyaṃ kusalākusalaṃ anuññātapaṭikkhittañcāti veditabbaṃ.